 Hey guys, ChrisFix here and today I'm going to show you how to change the oil in your car or truck. This video is specifically geared to beginners who have never done an oil change. So this is going to be an in-depth video and after watching it you'll be able to change your own oil. Many inexpensive oil change shops will use cheap oil and really cheap filters. So by doing an oil change yourself you could use good motor oil, a good filter, and know the job is getting done right. Plus you get to save some money and it's fun to work on your own car. If you've ever done oil changes before and want to share your tips, leave a comment. Now let's take a look at the tools you need to change your oil. So here's everything you're going to need to change your oil. You can see we're just using common hand tools. We have a socket set that has a ratchet and some sockets. Gloves so you don't get the oil on your skin because oil is not good for you. Paper towels to clean up. We have our oil and filter and I'll explain in a second how to find the correct oil and the correct filter for your car. We have an oil filter wrench, you might need it or you might not but it's worth to have just in case. We have an oil catch pan so you can recycle your old oil and a funnel so you can fill up your engine with new oil. I'm also including a breaker bar just in case your drain bolt is hard to get off. This will make it really easy. In addition to tools to change the oil, you're also going to need something to jack your vehicle up. In this case we have ramps or you could use jack and jack stands and then a piece of wood to block off the rear tires and I'll show you everything. There's also another method you could use where you don need any of this You could just drive your vehicle up onto the curb to get enough access to safely get underneath and drain the oil So you can use whatever method works for you I just want to note also that any tools that I using here including the jacks jack stands ramps and even the oil check the description. I'll link everything. So if you don't have something, you could easily find it and you could easily see what I used. And as always, if you have any questions throughout this process, leave a comment below and I answer every question and comment. So by the end of this video, you'll be an oil change expert. So let's go take a trip to the store and let me show you how to find out what oil your car takes. To figure out what oil your car takes, you can look in the owner's manual. So just go grab your owner's manual. We're going to flip to the back here. You can look under oil and capacities. You can see it tells you how much oil you're going to need. So we're going to need 4 1⁄4 quarts. And then you want to check the viscosity of the oil that you need. and we're going to need 4 1⁄4 quarts of 0W-20. So let's go to the store and we'll check that out right now. Alright, we're in the store and we need to find a synthetic 0W-20 oil. There's a ton of oil to choose from. Here is 0W-20. You can see, here's where the viscosities are listed. 0W-20 is right here. Here's 10W-30. So make sure you get the correct viscosity. Here's the 0W-20 we need. We want a full synthetic. We need at least 4 quarts and this container has 5, so that's plenty. If you have an older car, you might not need synthetic, but I personally like running synthetic oil even in my older cars. There are a lot of myths out there on switching to synthetic, and just to be clear, I don't think there's a lot of myths out there on switching to synthetic. I think it's a good idea to switch to synthetic oil. I think it's a good idea to switch to synthetic oil.

 so that you know you could switch to synthetic and you could switch back to conventional at any time. Conventional is cheaper, but on most new cars, you need to run synthetic. Plus, synthetic oil lasts longer. Speaking of how long oil lasts, change your oil at the recommended mileage that's listed in the owner's manual. Many cars have an oil life monitor that'll tell you when you need to change your oil, so just go by that. If you can't find any information on when you need to change your oil, I change the oil in my cars at around 5,000 miles. My van has over 300,000 miles, and we've had that car since new, and she's still running great. Okay, so we have our oil. Now let's go find the filter. There are tons of oil filters, but which one do you pick? Well, just look in the book here, and we're doing the oil change on a 2014 Nissan Sentra. Personally, I like using pyrolator filters, but any quality filter will do. We need an L14612. Okay, L14612, L14612, right here. Good. So there we go. We got the oil and the filter. I'm going to go check out real quick, and let's go change the oil. All right, so now that we got our correct viscosity oil, 0W20, and we have the correct oil filter, let's get underneath this car. And I'm going to show you how to jack the car up first, and then I'm going to use the because that what I prefer So an oil change has three basic parts One you got to drain the oil Two you have to change the oil filter And three you have to fill it with the correct new oil Let go step by step so you know exactly what you need to do The first step is to drain the oil. And to get to the oil drain plug, we have to go underneath the vehicle. So we're going to have to lift the vehicle up. To jack the car up, if you're not completely sure how to do it, you could check the owner's manual. It tells you exactly how to jack the car up to change a spare tire. But I'm going to show you right here what you need to do. And you want to make sure before where you jack the vehicle up, you block off the rear tire so the car doesn't roll. The other thing you want to do is if you have an automatic, make sure it's in park. If you have a manual, put it in first gear and also pull the emergency brake which will prevent the car from rolling. So get your jack and place it underneath the vehicle right where your jacking points are. In this case, the jacking points have these little indents in them. That area of the frame is meant to support the vehicle and then you can jack the car up. Once the car is jacked up you can get your jack stands and place it under the car right where there's a big piece of metal on the frame and then you're going to lower the car down onto the jack stands and then you have plenty of room to get to the oil pan. So we'll just let the car down slowly and you can see the jack stand is the only thing holding it up and once your car is safely supported on the jack stands I always like I like to put the jack right back on the frame just for extra support. So if for some reason the jack stand slips or something or malfunctions, you have backup with the jack.

 Never be too safe. So that's how you jack your car up to do an oil change. I want to show you the method that I prefer. It's a lot easier, a lot safer, and that's using ramps. Make sure you always use jack stands and not just the jack. You don't want to just rely on the jack to protect you from the car falling on you. Like you saw, I like to use both. Double the protection. Now using ramps is my favorite method. It's the easiest, it's the safest, and it also raises the vehicle pretty high. All you have to do is park the vehicle in a spot where you can slide two ramps right under the wheels and then you just drive the car up the ramps. It's that simple. Make sure that you pull the emergency brake again and we're blocking off the rear tires again. And I think you can get why I like the ramps so much. Before you go under the car, even when you have the car jacked up, what you want to do is you want to just shake the car with your hand. The car should not move anywhere. You're just shaking it back and forth as hard as you can and it should be stable and this thing is stable. Once you know that the vehicle is safe to go under, you can see why I like using the ramps. Look at all this room that we have now. Alright so now let's go under the car and find the oil drain plug. So you can see my feet over there. This is the front of the car right here. And then we're looking up here. And if we look here you can see there's a bunch of stuff and you might be confused, oh where's the bolt that I need to undo? Where's the oil drain bolt? Well what you want to do is you want to locate the drain pan The drain pan is this right here It usually black and has a bolt coming out You can see the bolt right back here That your oil drain pan Now there's other things that look like it, but this should be pretty easy to find because you're looking for that bolt and you're looking for the black pan. But you could also see right here is another drain pan. But this drain pan here doesn't have any bolts to let fluid out. This is the transmission drain pan. So really simple to find the oil drain pan. And then actually you can see right behind the drain pan you want to locate your oil filter. In this case, oil drain pan here, oil filter is right behind it and it's up and down nice and easy to get to which is really good. In some vehicles, the oil filter is actually on top of the engine. For example, in this Toyota Tacoma you can see here. In this case though, it's underneath, it's pretty easy to get to. This is really easy to get to also. You can see the drain plug right there. Let's go get it off. Now before we remove the drain plug, get your oil collection pan, slide it under. Now we have a sideways view, you can see our filters right here, our oil drain pan is right here and our oil drain plug is right there. We have our oil catch can right here, it's kind of aimed behind a little bit because the oil is going to come out that way. In this case we're using a 14mm socket on our ratchet and to loosen you want to go this way counterclockwise righty-tighty lefty-loosey. So this might be a problem some of you might encounter where you're using your normal size ratchet it's hard to get

 That drain plug out. Well don't be discouraged. There's an easy trick to use. And that trick is to use one of these long breaker bars. You can see here how much longer it is than my ratchet. And this is going to give you so much leverage that it's going to be really easy to get off. If you don't have a long breaker bar like this, you can get your ratchet and slip a pipe over the end to make it longer. Watch how easy this is going to be now. Boom, it's loosened. That's all it took. all it took. So now we can loosen this the rest of the way. Once it gets really loose, make sure your drain pan is ready to go. And you can loosen this by hand. Now you can wait for all the oil to drain out. Now I should mention, some people say you should change your oil after you run the car for like 10 minutes so the oil is warm and it flows easier. In reality, it doesn't matter. If you want to change your oil with the car sitting there, you just jack it up and the car is cold, all that oil is going to be in the oil pan. You're not going to risk burning yourself, and sometimes it just makes the job easier. Now if you're going to put your car up on the ramps, then you're starting your car anyway. Just make sure if you run your engine, you let it sit for like five to 10 minutes. Let it cool off a little bit so you don't burn yourself, and also so all the oil collects in the drain pan. On some oil drain plugs, there's a gasket to help seal the plug, and you can see here there's a copper crush gasket. These gaskets are generally one use so take off the old gasket and replace it with a new one Some people reuse these gaskets one or two times and never have a problem with leaks and I one of those people but in general I suggest you replace the gasket. Alright, the oil is completely drained. There are a few drops coming out, so let's screw in the drain plug and move on to the next step. Just screw it in by hand and it should tighten right up. I like to wipe away any extra oil before I tighten it down all the way so your drain pan stays clean and so you know if there's any oil leaking from the drain plug down the road. Now we want to tighten up our drain plug and to do that we want to go clockwise. So we're going to switch this so now we're going to tighten this clockwise and notice I'm using our ratchet and not our breaker bar. You want to use the small ratchet to tighten this. You're only tightening it so it's snug you don't want to over tighten it. You over tighten it you'll strip the drain plug and you'll cause way more problems. You have a washer on there. All you need to do is tighten it down to 20 foot pounds of torque, which is nothing. So use the small ratchet. Tighten it, and once it's snug, give it a little extra turn. And that's it. So we just finished step one, removing all the old oil. Now step two is changing the old oil filter. Okay, so we should be be able to get this off by hand. Nope, too tight. So if your oil filter is tight and it won't come off, we have four different style tools that you can use to get your oil filter off. This one's my favorite because it works for all different sizes.

 There we go. Just put that right in there. Alright so with our old filter out we want to grab our new filter. And I like to pre-oil my filter. It prevents the car from running dry when you first start it up. So if you just put this filter in now and screw it in, there's no oil in here. So the oil has to fill this and then go to all the engine parts. But if we fill this first with our brand new oil, then we don't have to worry about the engine running dry and this is just going to give you a longer lasting engine. I should also mention that not every car you're going to be able to pre-fill these because some cars it's upside down or some cars it's in sideways. We just want to carefully fill this filter to the top just like that. Now what you want to do is you want to get oil around this gasket. You can see a little bit of oil got on the gasket just by chance but you want to make Make sure you have a clean finger. Just get a little bit of oil and just put it right around this gasket. And what that's going to do is it's going to make it easier to come off next time you do this and it's also going to prevent leaks. And that's all you need to do. Now let's go install it. So there's the drain pin. We go up and you look here and that's what the oil filter adapter looks like. And if we look there you can see the oil filter screws right onto that middle stud there. So it screws in right there. And you just try to make it flush as you turn it. So if it's flat as you turn it, it's going to be a little bit more stable.

 should grab and you'll know when it grabs you'll feel it. Don't force it, it should go on really easily. You can see there, it's on. So now I just tighten it by hand. Don't use any tools to tighten these, just tighten it by hand. If your hands are slippery because it's oily, you grab a towel, clean it off and then turn it more by hand with the towel. Good. So step one is done. Step two, changing the oil filter is done. Now let's get the car on the ground and do step three which is adding new oil. So we're going to add the oil to the engine while we're on the ramps just so that we make sure that we don't start the engine with no oil in it. And when you're looking for where you add your oil, it's usually at the top of the engine. Here's where you check your oil. You can see it says engine oil on here. And that's not where you fill it. Where you fill it is right up here. It has the oil sign. It's upside down but it has the oil sign on here. And this is all dirty so you don't want to just take this cap off you want to clean the area first because you don't want that junk falling into the engine so just get your paper towel get in here and clean it good now that that's clean we can take this cap off and we'll place our funnel right in here so we could fill the engine up with brand new oil so on the side of our bottle we have a scale here that tells you how many quarts or liters you have and you want to do this on a level surface but you can see we pretty much full right now and we need to add four quarts It was four and a quarter quarts with the filter but we added the oil to the filter so it really just four quarts So we want to have a quart left which is right down here. I always have a towel ready just in case. I hate spilling oil on engine parts. Just a little top tip. If you pour it sideways like this, you actually have a little more control, surprisingly. And usually the oil doesn't come out in blobs. It comes out nice and smooth instead. So if we look here we have about a half a quart we need to add. And it looks like we're at about one quart so I'm going to stop there. Close that up. So we just finished the last step which is add oil. We have one more step to do and And that is to get the car off the jack stands, or in this case the ramp, on level ground and check the oil. Since we added oil, we can start the car. And you just want to make sure that there's no oil lights on. And you can see the oil light isn't on, so that means the engine's getting oil. Now we can back the car down. And now that we have the car back down on level ground, let's go check the oil. So shut the engine off. You want to let the engine sit for about 5 minutes so all the oil drops back down since we did start the engine.

 After you let it sit for five minutes, get a towel, pull your dipstick out and clean it off. Put it back in. Make sure it's pushed down all the way. And then pull the dipstick back out. Okay, if we look at the dipstick, what you're looking for is the oil. You can see the oil's over here. There's low and there's high. So that dot right there means that the oil is low and you need to fill it up. That dot right there means the oil is high and it means that you have it completely full. Anywhere in between is good. I prefer trying to get it to the high. Now sometimes it's hard to see how much oil is on here, especially this brand new oil and especially this synthetic oil. So if you flip this over, you actually get a better look and you can see the oil goes right there. So we're right on the high, which is perfect. So we don't have to add oil or anything. If yours is too low, add a little bit of oil and check the level again. If you end up adding a little bit too much oil, that's not a big deal. If you add over a quart of extra oil, then you have a problem and you probably have to remove some of it, because that could actually cause engine problems. And that is the complete guide to changing oil in your car or truck. Hopefully after this video you have no questions, but if you do have questions, just comment below. answer.

CAR REPAIR RECEIPT  
Company Name: abc repair                    Date: August 2, 2024  
Street Address: washington               Receipt #: _______________  
City, State, Zip: __________________________      
Phone: 11221122     
Fax: __________________________      
Email: __________________________      
Website: __________________________      
  
Customer Information  
Name: ________________________                            City : __________________________            
Phone: ________________________    Year, Make, Model: __________________________  
   
Services Rendered  Price  Parts  Qty./Price  Total  
front doors  4000    2  8000  
bumpers  1000    2  2000  
bonnet  2000    1  2000  
body repairs  5000    1  5000  
          
Amount Paid: ____________  
    Subtotal    
Total  15000  
Name(s) of Service Person(s): ___________________________________________________  
____________________________________________________________________________  
Printed Name: __________________________       Page 1 of 1

Company Name: abc repair                    Date:  August  1, 2024  
  
general service  2000    1    
oil change  500    1    
brake pads  1000    2    
catalytic   1000    1    
          
    Subtotal    
Total  5500  
Printed Name: __________________________

Company Name: abc repair                    Date: 01/08/20 24 
  
tire change  2000    4    
          
    Subtotal    
Total  8000  

Company Name: abc repair                    Date: 2024/08/06  
  
car tuning  5000        
          
    Subtotal    
Total  5000  

Company Name: abc repair                    Date: 2024 -08-06 
Street Address: washington                Receipt #: _______________  
City, State, Zip:  __________________________      
Phone: 11221122      
  
car wash  200        
polish  300        
          
    Subtotal    
Total  500  
Printed Name: __________________________  Page 1 of 1

1
2
3
456789
9
10
COROLLA_UPictorial index Search by illustration
For safety 
and securityMake sure to read through them
(Main topics: Child seat, theft deterrent system)
Vehicle status information and 
indicatorsReading driving-related information
(Main topics: Meters, multi-information display)
Before drivingOpening and closing the doors and windows, 
adjustment before driving
(Main topics: Keys, doors, seats)
DrivingOperations and advice which are necessary for driving
(Main topics: Starting engine, refueling)
Entune audioOperating the Entune Audio
(Main topics: Audio/visual, phone, Toyota Entune)
Interior featuresUsage of the interior features
(Main topics: Air conditioner, storage features)
Maintenance 
and careCaring for your vehicle and maintenance 
procedures
(Main topics: Interior and exterior, light bulbs)
When trouble 
arisesWhat to do in case of malfunction and emergency
(Main topics: Battery discharge, flat tire)
Vehicle specifications Vehicle specifications, customizable features
(Main topics: Fuel, oil, tire inflation pressure)
For ownersReporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat 
belt and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners
IndexSearch by symptom
Search alphabetically
https://www.MyCarManual.com

2
COROLLA_UTABLE OF CONTENTS
For your information ........................ 6
Reading this manual...................... 10
How to search................................ 11
Pictorial index ................................ 12
1-1. For safe use
Before driving........................ 22
For safe driving ..................... 23
Seat belts .............................. 25
SRS airbags.......................... 29
Front passenger occupant clas-
sification system.................. 39
Exhaust gas precautions....... 44
1-2. Child safety
Riding with children............... 45
Child restraint systems.......... 46
1-3. Emergency assistance
Safety Connect ..................... 61
1-4. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system ... 67
Alarm..................................... 69
2-1. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators
............................................ 72
Gauges and meters (4.2-inch 
display)................................ 77
Gauges and meters (7-inch dis-
play) .................................... 81
Multi-information display ....... 86
Fuel consumption information
............................................ 923-1. Key information
Keys ...................................... 96
3-2. Opening, closing and locking 
the doors
Doors ................................. 103
Trunk.................................. 108
Smart key system .............. 111
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats ......................... 118
Rear seats.......................... 119
Head restraints................... 121
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel 
and mirrorsSteering wheel ................... 123
Inside rear view mirror ....... 124
Outside rear view mirrors... 125
3-5. Opening and closing the win-
dowsPower windows .................. 127
Moon roof........................... 130
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle.............. 134
Cargo and luggage ............ 142
Vehicle load limits .............. 145
Trailer towing...................... 145
Dinghy towing .................... 146
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles 
without a smart key system)
......................................... 147
with a smart key system) . 148
Continuously variable transmis-
sion (vehic les without paddle 
shift switches)
.................. 1531For safety and security
2Vehicle status information 
and indicators3Before driving
4Driving

3 TABLE OF CONTENTS
COROLLA_U1
2
3
456789
10Continuously variable transmis-
sion (vehicles with paddle shift 
switches).......................... 155
Manual transmission .......... 160
Turn signal lever................. 162
Parking brake..................... 163
Electric parking brake......... 164
Brake Hold ......................... 167
4-3. Operating the lights and wip-
ers
Headlight switch................. 170
Automatic High Beam ........ 173
Windshield wipers and washer
......................................... 176
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap .. 178
4-5. Using the driving support sys-
temsToyota Safety Sense 2.0 .... 180
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
......................................... 187
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)... 195
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with 
steering control) ............... 205
Dynamic radar cruise control 
with full-speed range........ 213
Dynamic radar cruise control
......................................... 223
RSA (Road Sign Assist) ..... 233
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)... 236
Rear view monitor system.. 241
Driving mode select switch
......................................... 249
Driving assist systems........ 250
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips............... 255
5-1. Basic function
Buttons overview................ 261Menu screen ...................... 263
Status icon ......................... 264
“Setup” screen ................... 266
5-2. Basic information before oper-
ationInitial screen....................... 267
Touch screen...................... 268
Home screen...................... 270
Entering letters and num-
bers/list screen operation
......................................... 271
Screen adjustment ............. 274
Linking multi-information display 
and the system ................ 275
5-3. Connectivity settings
Registering/Connecting a Blue-
tooth
® device ................... 276
Setting Bluetooth® details .. 280
Wi-Fi® Hotspot ................... 287
Apple CarPlay .................... 292
5-4. Other settings
General settings................. 296
Voice settings..................... 299
Vehicle settings .................. 300
5-5. Using the audio/visual system
Quick reference.................. 302
Some basics ...................... 303
5-6. Radio operation
AM/FM radio ...................... 307
Internet radio...................... 309
5-7. Media operation
USB memory...................... 311
iPod/iPhone........................ 313
Bluetooth® audio................ 316
AUX.................................... 319
5-8. Audio/visual remote controls 
Steering switches............... 321
5-9. Audio settings
Setup.................................. 3235Entune audio

4 TABLE OF CONTENTS
COROLLA_U5-10.Tips for operating the 
audio/visual system 
Operating information......... 324
5-11. Voice command system oper-
ation Voice command system ..... 336
Command list ..................... 339
5-12.Mobile Assistant operation 
Mobile Assistant ................. 343
5-13.Phone operation (Hands-free 
system for cellular phones) Quick reference.................. 345
Some basics ...................... 346
Placing a call using the Blue-
tooth
® hands-free system
......................................... 350
Receiving a call using the Blue-
tooth® hands-free system
......................................... 353
Talking on the Bluetooth® 
hands-free system ........... 354
Bluetooth® phone message 
function ............................ 356
5-14.Phone settings
Setup.................................. 360
5-15.What to do if... (Bluetooth®)
Troubleshooting ................. 369
5-16.Toyota Entune overview
Toyota Entune .................... 373
Type A: Function achieved by 
using a smart phone or DCM
......................................... 374
Type B: Function achieved by 
using DCM and the system
......................................... 377
Type C: Function achieved by 
using DCM ....................... 378
5-17.Toyota Entune operation 
Toyota Entune App Suite Con-
nect .................................. 3795-18.Toyota Entune App Suite Con-
nect settingsSetup.................................. 383
6-1. Using the air conditioning 
system and defoggerManual air conditioning system
......................................... 386
Automatic air conditioning sys-
tem................................... 391
Heated steering wheel/seat 
heaters............................. 396
6-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ................. 398
6-3. Using the storage features
List of storage features ...... 400
Trunk features.................... 403
6-4. Other interior features
Other interior features ........ 404
Garage door opener........... 414
7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the 
vehicle exterior................. 422
vehicle interior.................. 424
7-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
......................................... 427
General maintenance......... 428
Emission inspection and mainte-
nance (I/M) programs ...... 431
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precau-
tions ................................. 432
Hood .................................. 434
Positioning a floor jack ....... 4356Interior features
7Maintenance and care

5 TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
3
456789
10Engine compartment.......... 436
Tires ................................... 444
Tire inflation pressure......... 453
Wheels ............................... 455
Air conditioning filter........... 457
Wireless remote control/elec-
tronic key battery.............. 458
Checking and replacing fuses
......................................... 461
Light bulbs.......................... 464
8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ........... 472
If your vehicle has to be stopped 
in an emergency .............. 472
If the vehicle is trapped in rising 
water ................................ 474
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be towed
......................................... 475
If you think something is wrong
......................................... 479
Fuel pump shut off system
......................................... 480
If a warning light turns on or a 
warning buzzer sounds.... 481
If a warning message is dis-
played .............................. 490
If you have a flat tire (vehicles 
without spare tire) ............ 493
with a spare tire) .............. 503
If the engine will not start ... 511
If you lose your keys .......... 513
If the electronic key does not 
operate properly............... 513
If the vehicle battery is dis-
charged............................ 515
If your vehicle overheats .... 519If the vehicle becomes stuck
......................................... 521
9-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, 
etc.).................................. 524
Fuel information ................. 535
Tire information .................. 537
9-2. Customization
Customizable features ....... 548
9-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ................ 556
10-1.For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. 
owners ............................. 558
Seat belt instructions for Cana-
dian owners (in French) ... 558
SRS airbag instructions for 
Canadian owners (in French)
......................................... 560
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
......................................... 568
Alphabetical Index.............. 5718When trouble arises9Vehicle specifications
10For owners
Index

6
COROLLA_UPlease note that this manual 
applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equip-ment not installed on your vehi-cle.
All specifications provided in this 
manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, 
the vehicle shown in the illustra-
tions may differ from your vehi-cle in terms of equipment.
Approximately five hours after 
the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a mal-function.A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their per-formance, repair, or replace-ment, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modi-
fied with non-genuine Toyota products. Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regu-lations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
The installation of a mobile 
two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as:
Multiport fuel injection sys-
tem/sequential multiport fuel injection system
Toyota Safety Sense 2.0For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Noise from under vehicle 
after turning off the engineAccessories, spare parts 
and modification of your 
Toyota
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

7
COROLLA_UAnti-lock brake system
SRS airbag system
Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Toy-
ota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
The vehicle is equipped with 
sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as:
The recorded data varies 
according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is equipped.
These computers do not record 
conversations or sounds, and 
only record images outside of 
the vehicle in certain situations.• Engine speed/Electric motor 
speed (traction motor speed)
• Accelerator status• Brake status• Vehicle speed• Operation status of the driving 
assist systems, such as the ABS and pre-collision system
• Images from the front camera 
(available only when certain safety systems are activated, which varies depending on the vehicle specifications).
Data Transmission
Your vehicle may transmit the data 
recorded in these computers to Toyota without notification to you.
Data usage
Toyota may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose mal-functions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Toyota will not disclose the 
recorded data to a third party 
except:
• With the consen t of the vehicle 
owner or with the consent of the 
lessee if the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request 
by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the 
data is not tied to a specific vehi-
cle or vehicle owner
Recorded image information 
can be erased by your Toyota 
dealer.
The image recording function can 
be disabled. However, if the func-tion is disabled, data from when the pre-collision system operates will not be available.
To learn more about the vehi-
cle data collected, used and shared by Toyota, please visitwww.toyota.com/privacyvts/
.
If your Toyota has Safety Con-nect and if you have subscribed to those services, please refer to the Safety Connect Telematics Vehicle data recording
Usage of data collected 
through Safety Connect 
(U.S. mainland only)

8
COROLLA_USubscription Service Agreement 
for information on data collected and its usage.
To learn more about the vehicle 
data collected, used and shared by Toyota, please visitwww.toyota.com/privacyvts/
.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 sec-onds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is 
designed to record such data as:• How various systems in your 
vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and 
passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver 
was depressing the accelera-tor and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was trav-
eling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the cir-cumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded 
by your vehicle only if a nontriv-ial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. How-ever, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of per-sonally identifying data rou-tinely acquired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufac-turer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the spe-cial equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Disclosure of the EDR data
Toyota will not disclose the data 
recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s 
owner (or the lessee for a leased 
vehicle) is obtained
However, if necessary, Toyota may:• Use the data for research on Event data recorder

9
COROLLA_Uvehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party 
for research purposes without 
disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
The SRS airbag and seat belt 
pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain explosive chemi-cals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the sys-tems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified ser-vice shop or by your Toyota dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Special handling may apply, See 
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components 
that may contain perchlorate. These components may include the airbags, seat belt preten-sioners, wireless remote control batteries, and the batteries in the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters.Scrapping of your Toyota
Perchlorate MaterialWARNING
■General precautions while 
driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that 
have impaired your  ability to oper-
ate your vehicle. Alcohol and cer-
tain drugs delay reaction time, 
impair judgment and reduce coor-
dination, which c ould lead to an 
accident that could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive 
defensively. Anticipate mistakes 
that other drivers or pedestrians 
might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give 
your full attentio n to driving. Any-
thing that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can 
result in a collision with resulting 
death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.
■General precaution regarding 
children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow 
children to have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the 
vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger 
that children ma y injure them-
selves by playing with the win-
dows, the moon roof, or other 
features of the vehicle. In addi-
tion, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehi-
cle can be fatal to children.

10
COROLLA_UReading this manual
Explains symbols used in 
this manual.
Symbols in this manual
Symbols Meanings
WARNING:
Explains something 
that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious injury to peo-ple.
NOTICE:
that, if not obeyed, could cause dam-age to or a malfunc-tion in the vehicle or its equipment.
Indicates operating or working proce-dures. Follow the steps in numerical order.
Symbols in illustrationsSymbols Meanings
Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices.
Indicates the out-come of an operation (e.g. a lid opens).
Indicates the compo-nent or position being explained.
Means Do not , Do 
not do this , or Do 
not let this happen .

11
COROLLA_U■Searching by name
Alphabetical index: P.571
■Searching by installation 
position
Pictorial index:  P.12
■Searching by symptom or sound
What to do if... (Troubleshoot-ing):  P.568■Searching by title
Table of contents: P.2How to search

12 Pictorial index
Pictorial index
■Exterior
Doors.......................................................... ......................... P.103
Locking/unlocking .............................................. .................. P.103
Opening/closing the side windows............................... ........ P.127
Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key*1................ P.513
Warning messages ............................................... ............... P.107
Trunk ................................................................................... P.108
Opening from inside............................................ ................. P.109
Opening from outside........................................... ................ P.109
Warning messages ............................................... ................P.111
Outside rear view mirrors ................................................. P.125Adjusting the mirror angle ..................................... ............... P.125
Folding the mirrors ............................................ ................... P.126
Defogging the mirrors
*2................................................ P.388, 392
Windshield wipers.............................................. ................ P.176
Precautions for winter seas on.............................................. P.255
To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)*2.................. P.395

13 Pictorial index
COROLLA_UFuel filler door ............................................... ..................... P.178
Refueling method............................................... .................. P.179
Fuel type/fuel tan k capacity ................................... .............. P.526
Tires.......................................................... ........................... P.444
Tire size/inflation pressure ................................... ................ P.531
Winter tires/tire chains ....................................... .................. P.255
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system*2............... P.444
Coping with flat tires......................................... ............ P.493, 503
Hood........................................................... ......................... P.434
Opening ............................................................................... P.434
Engine oil ..................................................... ........................ P.526
Coping with overheating ...................................................... P.519
Headlights/daytime running lights .............................. ..... P.170
Turn signal lights/parking lights.............................. ......... P.170
Parking lights*2............................................................... .... P.170
Front side marker lights ....................................... ............. P.170
LED accent lights*2............................................................ P.1 70
Stop lights/tail lights/rear side marker lights/turn signal lig hts
P.170
License plate lights........................................... ................. P.170
Tail lights*2............................................................... ........... P.170
Back-up lights
Shifting the shift position  to R .............................. P .153, 155, 160
*1:Vehicles with a smart key system
*2:If equippedLight bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P.464, Watts: P.533)

14 Pictorial index
COROLLA_U■Instrument panel
Engine switch............................................................. P.147, 148
Starting the engine/changing the positions*1....................... P.147
Starting the engine/changing the modes*2........................... P.148
Emergency stop of the engin e ............................................. P.472
When the engine will not start................................. ............. P.511
Warning messages ............................................... ............... P.490
Shift lever.................................................... ........ P.153, 155, 160
Changing the shift position................................... P .153, 155, 160
Precautions for towing .. ....................................... ................ P.475
When the shift lever does not move*3.................................. P.154
Meters ............................................................................. P.77, 81
Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light . P.77, 8 1
Warning lights/indicator lights ................................ ................ P.72
When a warning light turns on .................................. ........... P.481
Multi-information display . ..................................... .............. P.86
Display ........................................................ ........................... P.86

15 Pictorial index
COROLLA_UWhen a warning message is displayed............................ .... P.490
Parking brake*4............................................................... .... P.163
Applying/releasing............................................. ................... P.163
Precautions for winter seas on.............................................. P.256
Warning light/message..... ..................................... ....... P.163, 481
Turn signal lever.............................................. ................... P.162
Headlight switch ............................................... ................. P.170
Headlights/parking lights/tail lig hts/side marker lights/daytim e run-
ning lights/LED accent lights*4............................................. P.170
Windshield wiper and washer switch............................. .. P.176
Usage................................................................................... P.176
Adding washer fluid.............................................................. P.443
Emergency flasher switch....................................... .......... P.472
Hood lock release lever........................................ ............. P.434
Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever................ P.123
Air conditioning system ............................. ........... .... P.386, 391
Usage.......................................................... ................. P.386, 391
Rear window defogger ........................................... ...... P.388, 392
Entune Audio*4............................................................... .... P.261
Entune Audio Plus*4, 5
Entune Premium Audio*4, 5
*1:Vehicles without a smart key system
*2:Vehicles with a smart key system
*3:Vehicles with a continuous ly variable transmission
*4:If equipped
*5:Refer to “NAVIGATI ON AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”.

16 Pictorial index
COROLLA_U■Switches
Instrument panel light cont rol dial ............................ ... P.79, 84
Automatic High Beam switch ..................................... ...... P.173
Heated steering wheel switch*.......................................... P.397
Windshield wiper de-icer switch*..................................... P.395
Outside rear view mirror s witch ................................ ....... P.125
Door lock switches ............................................................ P.106
Power window switches....... ................................... .......... P.127
Window lock switch............................................. .............. P.129
*: If equipped

17 Pictorial index
COROLLA_UMeter control switches .. ....................................... ............... P.87
Paddle shift switches*1...................................................... P.157
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch........................... P. 219, 228
Cruise control switches
Dynamic radar cruise cont rol with full-speed range*1.......... P.213
Dynamic radar cruise control*1............................................. P.223
Audio remote control switches*2...................................... P.321
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch*1................................... P.195
LDA (Lane Departure Alert wi th steering c ontrol) switch*1P.205
Phone switch*2............................................................... .... P.348
Talk switch*2............................................................... ........ P.336
*1:If equipped
*2:Vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio, refer  to 
“NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Seat heater switches*........................................................ P.397
Wireless cha rger switch*................................................... P.405
Brake hold switch*............................................................. P. 167
Parking brake switch*........................................................ P.164
VSC OFF switch ................................................. ................ P.251

18 Pictorial index
COROLLA_USport mode switch*............................................................ P.2 49
“iMT” (Intelligent Manu al Transmission) switch*............ P.161

19 Pictorial index
COROLLA_U■Interior
SRS airbags.................................................... ...................... P.29
Floor mats..................................................... ........................ P.22
Front seats.................................................... ...................... P.118
Head restraints................................................ ................... P.121
Seat belts ..................................................... ......................... P.25
Console box ....................................................................... P.402
Inside lock buttons ............................................ ................ P.107
Cup holders .................................................... .................... P.401
Rear seats..................................................... ...................... P.119
Rear seat heater switches*................................................ P.397

20 Pictorial index
COROLLA_U■Ceiling
Inside rear view mirror ........................................ .............. P.124
Sun visors..................................................... ...................... P.412
Vanity mirrors................................................. .................... P.412
Vanity lights*............................................................... ........ P.412
Interior lights/personal lights ................................ ........... P.398
Moon roof switches*.......................................................... P.130
“SOS” button*............................................................... ........ P.61
Assist grips ................................................... ..................... P.413

21
1For safety and securityFor safety and security
.1-1. For safe use
Before driving................. 22
For safe driving .............. 23
Seat belts ....................... 25
SRS airbags................... 29
Front passenger occupant 
classification system .... 39
Exhaust gas precautions
..................................... 44
Riding with children........ 45
Child restraint systems... 46
Safety Connect .............. 61
Engine immobilizer system
..................................... 67
Alarm.............................. 69

22 1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_U1-1.For safe use
Use only floor mats designed 
specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix  them securely 
in place onto the carpet.
1Insert the retaining hooks 
(clips) into the floor mat eye-lets.
2Turn the upper knob of each 
retaining hook (clip) to secure 
the floor mats in place.
Always align the  marks .The shape of the retaining hooks 
(clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.Before driving
Observe the following 
before starting off in the vehicle to ensure safety of driving.
Floor matWARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may cause the 
driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with t he pedals while 
driving. An unexpectedly high 
speed may result or it may 
become difficult to  stop the vehi-
cle. This could lead to an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious 
injury.
■When installing the driver’s 
floor mat 
●Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different 
model year vehicles, even if 
they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
●Only use floor mats designed 
for the driver’s seat.
●Always install the floor mat 
securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
●Do not use two or more floor 
mats on top of each other.
●Do not place the floor mat bot-tom-side up or upside-down.

23 1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_U1For safety and security
Adjust the angle of the seat-
back so that you are sitting straight up and so that you do not have to lean forward to steer. (P.118)
Adjust the seat so that you can depress the pedals fully and so that your arms bend slightly at the elbow when gripping the steering wheel. (P.118)
Lock the head restraint in 
place with the center of the 
head restraint closest to the top of your ears. ( P.121)
Wear the seat belt correctly. (P.25)WARNING
■Before driving
●Check that the floor mat is 
securely fixed in the correct 
place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be espe-
cially careful to perform this 
check after cleaning the floor.
●With the engine stopped and 
the shift lever in P (continuously 
variable transmission) or N (manual transmission), fully 
depress each pedal to the floor 
to make sure it does not inter-fere with the floor mat.For safe driving
For safe driving, adjust the 
seat and mirror to an appro-priate position before driv-ing.
Correct driving posture

24 1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_UMake sure that all occupants are 
wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. ( P.25)
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. ( P.46)
Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and outside rear view mirrors properly. ( P.124, 125)WARNING
■For safe driving
tions.
Failure to do so m ay result in 
death or serious injury.
●Do not adjust the position of the 
driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the 
seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, 
and reduce the effectiveness of 
the seat belt and  head restraint.
●Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed u nder the front 
seats may become jammed in 
the seat tracks and stop the 
seat from locking in place. This 
may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may 
also be damaged.
●Always observe the legal speed 
limit when driving on public roads.
●When driving over long dis-
tances, take regular breaks 
before you start to feel tired.Also, if you feel tired or sleepy 
while driving, do not force your-
self to continue driving and take a break immediately.
●Take care when adjusting the 
seat position to ensure that 
other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.
●When adjusting the seat posi-
tion, do not put your hands 
under the seat or near the mov-ing parts to avoid injury. Fingers 
or hands may become jammed 
in the seat mechanism.Correct use of the seat 
belts
Adjusting the mirrors

25 1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_U1For safety and securitySeat belts
Make sure that all occu-
pants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. 
WARNING
Observe the following precautions 
to reduce the risk of injury in the 
event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death 
or serious injury.
■Wearing a seat belt
●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
●Always wear a seat belt prop-erly.
●Each seat belt should be used 
by one person only. Do not use 
a seat belt for more than one person at once, including chil-
dren.
●Toyota recommends that chil-
dren be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt 
and/or an appropriate child 
restraint system.
●To achieve a p roper seating 
position, do not recline the seat 
more than necessary. The seat 
belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight 
and well back in the seats.
●Do not wear the shoulder belt 
under your arm.
●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.■Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear 
the seat belt in the proper way. 
(P.26)
Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as 
possible over the hips in the same 
manner as other occupants, 
extending the shoulder belt com-pletely over the shoulder and 
avoiding belt contact with the 
rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn prop-
erly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could 
suffer death or se rious injury as a 
result of sudden braking or a colli-
sion.
■People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. 
(P.26)
■When children are in the vehi-
cle
P.55
■Seat belt damage and wear
●Do not damage the seat belts 
by allowing the belt, plate, or 
buckle to be jammed in the door.

26 1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_UExtend the shoulder belt so 
that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.
Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.
Do not twist the seat belt.
■Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were 
principally designed for persons of 
adult size. 
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to 
properly wear the vehicle’s seat 
belt. ( P.46)
●When the child becomes large enough to properl y wear the vehi-
cle’s seat belt, follow the instruc-
tions regarding seat belt usage. 
(P.25)
■Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt 
extender is available from your Toy-
ota dealer free of charge.WARNING
●Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not 
use a damaged seat belt until it 
is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant 
from death or se rious injury.
●Ensure that the belt and plate 
are locked and the belt is not twisted.If the seat belt does not function 
correctly, immediately contact 
your Toyota dealer.
●Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehi-
cle has been involved in a seri-
ous accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
●Do not attempt to install, 
remove, modify, disassemble or 
dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried 
out by your Toyota dealer. Inap-
propriate handling may lead to incorrect operation.
Correct use of the seat 
belts
WARNING
■Using a seat belt extender
●Do not wear the seat belt 
extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.

27 1-1. For safe use
1To fasten the seat belt, push 
the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard. 
2To release the seat belt, 
press the release button .■Emergency locking retractor 
(ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may 
also lock if you lean forward too 
quickly. A slow, easy motion will 
allow the belt to extend so that you 
can move around fully. 
■Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then 
retracted even slightly, the belt is 
locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to 
hold the child restraint system 
(CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the 
belt out once more. ( P.46)
■Rear seat belt
Use the seat belt after passing it through the guide if the seat belt 
comes free fro m the guide.
1Push the seat belt shoulder WARNING
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the 
belt will not securely hold the 
child restraint system, increas-ing the risk of death or serious 
injury in the event of an acci-dent.
●The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, 
or at a different seating position 
other than the one originally intended.
NOTICE
■When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release but-
ton on the extender, not on the 
seat belt.This helps prevent damage to the 
vehicle interior and the extender 
itself.
Fastening and releasing 
the seat belt
Adjusting the seat belt 
shoulder anchor height 
(front seats)

28 1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_Uanchor down while pressing 
the release button .
2Push the seat belt shoulder 
anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up and 
down as needed until you hear a click.
The pretensioners help the seat 
belts to quickly restrain the occupants by retracting the seat belts when the vehicle is sub-jected to certain types of severe frontal or side collision or a vehi-cle rollover.
The pretensioners do not activate 
in the event of a  minor frontal impact, a minor s ide impact or a 
rear impact.
■Replacing the belt after the pre-
tensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the  pretensioner will acti-
vate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subse-
quent collisions.
WARNING
■Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the cen-
ter of your shoulder. The belt 
should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoul-
der. Failure to do so could reduce 
the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or seri-
ous injuries in the event of a sud-
den stop, sudden swerve or accident.
Seat belt pretensioners 
(front seats)WARNING
■Seat belt pretensioners
●Do not place anything, such as 
a cushion, on the front passen-
ger’s seat. Doing so will 
disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sen-
sor from detecting the passen-
ger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner 
for the front passenger’s seat 
may not activate in the event of a collision.
●If the pretensioner has acti-
vated, the SRS warning light will 
come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and 
must be replaced at your Toyota 
dealer.

29 1-1. For safe use
■Location of the SRS airbags
SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from 
impact with interior components
SRS knee airbag
Can help provide dr iver protection
SRS seat cushion airbag
Can help restrain the front passenger
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS front side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupantsSRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to cer-
tain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
SRS airbag system

30 1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_USRS curtain shield airbags
• Can help protect primarily the h ead of occupants in the outer seats
• Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehi cle in the 
event of vehicle rollover
■SRS airbag system components
Seat cushion airbag
Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sen-
sors)
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lightsFront passenger airbagCurtain shield airbagsSide impact sensors (front doors)Side airbagsSeat belt pretensioners and force limiters
Side impact sensors (rear)
Side impact sensors (front)Driver airbagDriver’s seat bel t buckle switch
Driver’s seat position sensorDriver’s knee airbagSRS warning lightFront impact sensors

31 1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_U1For safety and securityAirbag sensor assembly
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed 
based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) cont rols airbag deployment based o n 
information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This in formation includes crash sever-
ity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical  
reaction in the inflators quickly  fills the airbags with non-to xic gas to 
help restrain the motion of the occupants.
■If the SRS airbags deploy 
(inflate)
●Slight abrasions, burns, bruising 
etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by 
hot gases.
●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
●Parts of the airbag module (steer-ing wheel hub, airbag cover and 
inflator) as well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, 
and roof side rails, may be hot for several minutes. T he airbag itself 
may also be hot.
●The windshield may crack.
●The brakes and st op lights will be 
controlled automatically. ( P.251)
●The interior lights will turn on auto-matically. ( P.399)
●The emergency flashers will be turned on automatically. ( P.472)
●Fuel supply to the engine will be stopped. ( P.480)
●For Safety Connect subscribers, if any of the followin g situations 
occur, the system is designed to 
send an emergency call to the 
response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without 
needing to push the “SOS” button) 
and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain 
the level of emergency and assis-
tance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the 
agent automatically treats the call 
as an emergency and helps to dis-patch the necessary emergency 
services. ( P.61)
• An SRS airbag is deployed.
• A seat belt pretensioner is acti-
vated.
• The vehicle is involved in a severe 
rear-end collision.
■SRS airbag deployment condi-
tions (SRS front airbags)
●The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that 
exceeds the set  threshold level 
(the level of forc e corresponding 
to an approximately 12 - 18 mph 
[20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with 
a fixed wall that does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the follow-
ing situations:
• If the vehicle strikes an object, 
such as a parked vehicle or sign 
pole, which can move or deform 
on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an 
underride collision, such as a colli-sion in which the front of the vehi-cle “underrides”, or goes under, 
the bed of a truck
●Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt 
pretensioners will activate.
●The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front 
passenger seat. However, the 

32 1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_USRS front airbags  for the front 
passenger may de ploy if luggage 
is put in the seat, even if the seat 
is unoccupied.
●The SRS seat cushion airbag on the front passen ger seat will not 
operate if the occupant is not 
wearing a seat belt.
tions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
●The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy i n the event of 
an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force 
produced by an approximately 
3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a 
direction perpendicular to the 
vehicle orientation at an approxi-mate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 
30 km/h]).
●Both SRS curtain shield airbags may deploy in the event of a 
severe side collision.
●Both SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle 
rollover.
●Both SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a 
severe frontal collision.
■Conditions under which the 
SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other t han a collision 
The SRS front airbags and SRS side and curtain shield airbags may 
also deploy if a serious impact 
occurs to the underside of your vehi-cle. Some examples are shown in 
the illustration.
●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement 
or hard surface
●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
●Landing hard or fallingThe SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations 
shown in the illustration.
●The angle of vehicle tip-up is mar-ginal.
●The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS 
front airbags)
The SRS front airbags do not gener-ally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or r ear collision, if it rolls 
over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal  collision. But, 
whenever a collis ion of any type 
causes sufficient forward decelera-tion of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
●Collision from the side
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover

33 1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_U1For safety and security■Types of collisions that may not 
deploy the SRS  airbags (SRS 
side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield air-
bags may not activate if the vehicle 
is subjected to a c ollision from the 
side at certain angl es, or a collision 
to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
●Collision from the s ide to the vehi-
cle body other than the passenger compartment
●Collision from the s ide at an angle
The SRS side airbags do not gener-ally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear c ollision, if it rolls 
over, or if it i s involved in a 
low-speed side collision.
●Collision from  the front
●Collision from  the rear
The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear  collision, if it 
pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed fron tal collision.
●Pitching end over end■When to contact your Toyota dealer
In the following ca ses, the vehicle 
will require inspecti on and/or repair. 
Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. 
●Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
●The front of the vehicle is dam-aged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was 
not severe enough to cause the 
SRS front airbags to inflate.
●A portion of a door or its surround-ing area is damaged, deformed or has had a hole made in it, or the 
vehicle was involved in an acci-
dent that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side and curtain 
shield airbags to inflate.
●The pad section of the steering 
wheel, dashboard near the front 
passenger airbag or lower portion 
of the instrument panel is 

34 1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_Uscratched, cracked, or otherwise 
damaged.
●The seat cushion surface is scratched, cracked, or otherwise 
damaged.
●The surface of the seats with the SRS side airbag is scratched, 
cracked, or otherwise damaged.
●The portion of the f ront pillars, rear 
pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the SRS cur-
tain shield airbags inside is 
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.WARNING
■SRS airbag precautions
regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●The driver and all passengers in 
the vehicle must wear their seat 
belts properly.The SRS airbags are supple-mental devices to be used with 
the seat belts.
●The SRS driver airbag deploys 
with considerable force, and can cause death or serious 
injury especially if the driver is 
very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration (NHTSA) 
advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 
10 in. (250 mm) from your driver 
airbag provides you with a margin of safety. This distance is mea-
sured from the center of the steer-
ing wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) 
away now, you can change your 
driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to  the rear as 
far as you can while still reach-
ing the pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the 
seat.Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 
10 in. (250 mm) distance, even 
with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the 
back of the seat somewhat. If 
reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, 
raise yourself by using a firm, 
non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that 
feature.

35 1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_U1For safety and securityWARNING
• If your steering wheel is adjust-
able, tilt it downward. This 
points the airbag toward your 
chest instead of your head and 
neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, 
while still maintain ing control of 
the foot pedals, steering wheel, 
and your view of the instrument panel controls.
●If the seat belt extender has 
been connected to the front 
seat belt buckles but the seat belt extender has not also been 
fastened to the latch plate of the 
seat belt, the SRS front airbags will judge that th e driver and 
front passenger are wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not bee n connected. In 
this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or 
serious injury i n the event of a 
collision. Be sure to wear the 
seat belt with the seat belt 
extender.
●The SRS front passenger air-bag also deploys with consider-
able force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the 
front passenger is  very close to 
the airbag. The front passenger 
seat should be as far from the 
airbag as possible with the seat-
back adjusted, so  the front pas-
senger sits upright.●Improperly seated and/or 
restrained infants and children 
can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant 
or child who is too small to use 
a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint 
system. Toyota strongly recom-
mends that all infants and chil-dren be placed in the rear seats 
of the vehicle and properly 
restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children 
than the front passenger seat. 
(
P.46)
●Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dash-
board.
●Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger 
airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.
●Do not allow the front seat occu-pants to hold items on their 
knees.

36 1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_UWARNING
●Do not lean against the door, 
the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.
●Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands 
outside the vehicle.
●Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas 
such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad and lower portion of 
the instrument panel.
These items can become pro-jectiles when the  SRS driver, 
front passenger and knee air-bags deploy.●Do not attach anything to areas 
such as a door, windshield, side 
windows, front or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip. (Except 
for the speed limit label 
P.494)
●Vehicles without a smart key 
system: Do not attach any heavy, sharp or hard objects 
such as keys and accessories 
to the key. The objects may restrict the SRS knee airbag 
inflation or be thrust into the 
driver’s seat area by the force of the deploying airbag, thus caus-
ing a danger.
●Do not hang hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. 
All of these items could become 
projectiles and may cause 
death or serious injury, should 
the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.
●If a vinyl cover is put on the area 
where the SRS driver’s knee 
airbag will deploy , be sure to 
remove it.

37 1-1. For safe use
●Do not use seat accessories 
which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags and SRS seat 
cushion airbag inflate as they 
may interfere with inflation of the SRS airbags. Such acces-
sories may prevent the side air-
bags and seat cushion airbag from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side 
airbags and seat cushion airbag 
to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not strike or apply significant 
levels of force to the area of the 
SRS airbag components or the front doors.
Doing so can cause the SRS 
airbags to malfunction.
●Do not touch any  of the compo-
nent parts immediately after the 
SRS airbags have deployed 
(inflated) as they may be hot.
●If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have 
deployed, open a door or win-
dow to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to 
do so. Wash off any residue as 
soon as possible to prevent skin irritation. 
●If the areas where the SRS air-
bags are stored, such as the 
steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar ga rnishes, are 
damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota dealer.●Do not place anything, such as 
ger’s seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger’s 
weight, which prevents the sen-
sor from detecting the passen-ger’s weight properly. As a 
result, the SRS front airbags for 
the front passenger may not deploy in the event of a colli-
sion.
■Modification and disposal of 
SRS airbag system compo-nents
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modi-
fications without consulting your 
Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy 
(inflate) accidentally, causing 
●Installation, re moval, disassem-
bly and repair of the SRS air-
bags
●Repairs, modifications, removal 
or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dash-
board, seats or seat upholstery, 
front, side and rear pillars, roof side rails, front door panels, 
front door trims or front door 
speakers
●Modifications to the front door panel (such as making a hole in 
it)
●Repairs or modifications of the 
front fender, fro nt bumper, or 
side of the occupant compart-
ment
●Installation of a grille guard (bull 
bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows, winches or roof luggage carrier
●Modifications to the vehicle’s 
suspension system

38 1-1. For safe use
●Installation of electronic devices 
such as mobile two-way radios and CD players
●Modifications to your vehicle for 
a person with a physical disabil-
ity

39 1-1. For safe use
SRS warning light
Front passenger seat belt reminder light “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light “AIR BAG ON” indicator lightFront passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant 
classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the front  
passenger airbag and seat cushion airbag.
System components
WARNING
■Front passenger occupant 
classification system precau-tions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger 
occupant classification system.
●Wear the seat belt properly.●Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt latch plate has not been left inserted into the 
buckle before someone sits in 
the front passenger seat.

40 1-1. For safe use
●Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” 
indicator light is not illuminated 
when using the seat belt 
extender for the front passenger 
seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indi-cator light is illuminated, discon-
nect the extender tongue from 
the seat belt buckle, and recon-nect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after 
making sure the “AIR BAG ON” 
indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender 
while the “AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front pas-
senger may not activate, which 
could cause death or serious injury in the ev ent of a collision.
●Do not apply a heavy load to the 
front passenger seat or equip-
ment (e.g. seatback pocket).
●Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your 
hands or feet on the front pas-
senger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
●Do not let a rea r passenger lift 
the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seat-back with their legs.
●Do not put objec ts under the 
front passenger seat.●Do not recline t he front passen-
ger seatback so far that it touches the rear seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator light to be  illuminated, 
which indicates that the SRS 
airbags for the front passenger 
will not activate in the event of a 
severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the 
seatback to a pos ition where it 
does not touch the rear seat. 
Keep the front passenger seat-
back as upright as possible 
when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback exces-
sively may lessen the effective-
ness of the seat belt system.
●If an adult sits i n the front pas-
senger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” 
indicator light i s illuminated. If 
the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is 
illuminated, ask the passenger 
to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. 
If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator 
still remains illumi nated, either 
ask the passenger to move to 
the rear seat, or if that is not 
possible, move  the front pas-
senger seat fully rearward.
●When it is unavoidable to install 
a forward-facing c hild restraint 
system on the front passenger 
seat, install the child restraint 
seat in the proper order. (P.48)
●Do not modify or remove the 
front seats.
●Do not kick the  front passenger 
seat or subject it to severe 
impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light m ay come on to 
indicate a malfu nction of the 
front passenger occupant clas-sification system. In this case, 
contact your Toyota dealer 
immediately.

41 1-1. For safe use
■Adult*1
■Child*4WARNING
●Child restraint systems installed 
on the rear seat should not con-tact the front seatbacks.
●Do not use a seat accessory, 
such as a cushion and seat 
cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.
●Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
Condition and operation in th e front passenger occupant 
classification system
Indicator/warning 
light“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG 
OFF” indicator lights“AIR BAG ON”
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt 
reminder lightOff*2 or flashing*3
DevicesFront passenger airbag Activated
Front passenger seat cushion air-
bagActivated*2 or 
deactivated*3
OFF” indicator lights“AIR BAG OFF” or 
“AIR BAG ON”*4
DevicesFront passenger airbagDeactivated or 
activated*4
bagDeactivated or 
activated*4, 2

42 1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_U■Child restraint system with infant*5
■Unoccupied
■There is a malfunction in the system
*1:The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a s maller 
adult sits in the front passenger  seat, the system may not reco gnize 
him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2:In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.
*3:In the event the front passenge r does not wear a seat belt.
*4:For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or chi ld in convert-Indicator/warning 
OFF” indicator lights“AIR BAG OFF”*6
DevicesFront passenger airbag
DeactivatedFront passenger seat cushion air-
bag
OFF” indicator lights“AIR BAG OFF”
OffFront passenger’s seat belt 
reminder light
bag
OnFront passenger’s seat belt 
bag

43 1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_U1For safety and securityible seat, the system  may not recognize him/her as a child. Fac tors 
which may affect this can be the physique or posture.
*5:Never install a rear-facing ch ild restraint syst em on the fron t passenger 
seat. A forward-facing  child restraint system should only be in stalled on 
the front passenger sea t when it is unavoidable. ( P.46)
*6:In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this m anual on how 
to install the child restr aint system properly. ( P.46)

44 1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_UExhaust gas precau-
tions
Harmful substance to the 
human body is included in exhaust gases if inhaled.
WARNING
Exhaust gases include harmful 
carbon monoxide (CO), which is 
colorless and odorless. Observe 
the following precautions.Failure to do so may cause 
exhaust gases enter the vehicle 
and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or 
may lead to death  or a serious 
health hazard.
■Important points while driving
●Keep the trunk lid closed.
●If you smell exhaust gases in 
the vehicle even when the trunk lid is closed, open the windows 
and have the vehicle inspected 
at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
■When parking
●If the vehicle is in a poorly venti-lated area or a closed area, 
such as a garage, stop the engine.
●Do not leave the vehicle with the engine on for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be 
avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that 
exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
●Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, 
or where it is snowing. If snow-
banks build up around the vehi-cle while the engine is running, 
exhaust gases may collect and 
enter the vehicle.■Exhaust pipe
The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a 
hole or crack caused by corro-
sion, damage to a joint or abnor-mal exhaust noise, be sure to 
have the vehicle inspected and 
repaired by your Toyota dealer. 

45 1-2. Child safety
COROLLA_U1For safety and security1-2.Child safety
Riding with children
Observe the following pre-
cautions when children are in the vehicle.Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
It is recommended that chil-dren sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch, etc.
Use the rear door child-pro-tector lock or the window lock switch to avoid children opening the door while driv-ing or operating the power window accidentally. (P.107, 129)
Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, trunk, seats, etc.WARNING
cle
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.
vehicle or shift the vehicle into 
neutral. There is also a danger 
selves by playing with the win-dows, the moon roof (if equipped) 
or other features of the vehicle. In 
addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures 
inside the vehicle can be fatal to 
children.

46 1-2. Child safety
COROLLA_UPoints to remember: P.46
Child restraint system: P.48
When using a child restraint sys-
tem: P.49
Child restraint system installa-
tion method• Fixed with a seat belt: P.51• Fixed with a child restraint 
LATCH anchor: P.56
• Using an anchor bracket (for 
top tether strap): P.58The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. as well as Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.
Prioritize and observe the 
warnings, as well as the laws and regulations for child restraint systems.
Use a child restraint system until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
Choose a child restraint sys-tem that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child. Child restraint sys-
tems
Before installing a child 
restraint system in the vehi-cle, there are precautions that need to be observed, different types of child restraint systems, as well as installation methods, etc., written in this manual.
Use a child restraint system when riding with a small child that cannot properly use a seat belt. For the child’s safety, install the child restraint system to a rear seat. Be sure to follow the installa-tion method that is in the oper-ation manual enclosed with the restraint system.
Table of contentsPoints to remember
WARNING
■When a child is riding
tions. 
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●For effective protection in auto-
mobile accidents and sudden 
stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or 
child restraint system which is 
correctly installe d. For installa-
tion details, refer to the opera-
tion manual enclosed with the 
child restraint system. General installation instruction is pro-
vided in this manual.

47 1-2. Child safety
●Toyota strongly urges the use of 
a proper child restraint system that conforms to the weight and 
size of the child, installed on the 
rear seat. According to accident 
statistics, the child is safer when 
properly restrained in the rear 
seat than in the front seat.
●Holding a child in your or some-one else’s arms is not a substi-tute for a child restraint system. 
In an accident, the child can be 
crushed against the windshield or between the holder and the 
interior of the vehicle.
■Handling the child restraint system
If the child restrai nt system is not 
properly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seri-
ously injured or e ven killed in the 
event of sudden braking, sudden 
swerving, or an accident.
●If the vehicle were to receive a 
strong impact from an accident, 
etc., it is possib le that the child 
restraint system has damage 
that is not readily visible. In 
such cases, do not reuse the restraint system.
●Make sure you have complied 
with all installation instructions 
provided with the child restraint system manufacturer and that 
the system is properly secured.
●Keep the child restraint system 
properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not 
store the child restraint system 
unsecured in the passenger compartment.
●If it is necessary to detach the 
child restraint system, remove it 
from the vehicle or store it securely in the trunk.

48 1-2. Child safety
COROLLA_U■Types of child restraint system installation methods
Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restr aint 
system about the installation of the child restraint system.Child restraint system
Installation method Page
Seat belt attachment P.51

49 1-2. Child safety
■When installing a child 
restraint system to a front passenger seat
For the safety of a child, install a child restraint system to a rear seat. When installing a child restraint system to a front pas-senger seat is unavoidable, adjust the seat as follows and install the child restraint system:
Move the front seat fully rear-Child restraint LATCH 
anchors attachmentP.56
Anchor brackets (for 
top tether strap) attach-
mentSeats with an adjustable type head 
restraint:
Seats with an integrated type head 
restraint:P.58Installation method Page
When using a child 
restraint system

50 1-2. Child safety
COROLLA_Uward.
If the passenger seat height 
can be adjusted, Adjust the seat height to the upper most position.
Adjust the seatback angle to the most upright position.
If there is a gap between the child 
seat and the seatback, adjust the seatback angle until good contact is achieved.
If the head restraint interferes 
with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint.
Otherwise, put the head restraint in 
the upper most position.
WARNING
■When using a child restraint 
system
Observe the following precau-tions.
death or serious injury.●Never install a re ar-facing child 
restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illu-
minated. In the event of an acci-
dent, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger 
airbag can cause death or seri-
ous injury to the  child if the 
rear-facing child restraint sys-
tem is installed on the front pas-
senger seat.
●A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the 
front passenger seat only when 
it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a 
top tether strap should not be 
used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap 
anchor for the front passenger 
seat.
it is unavoidable. When install-ing a forward-facing child 
restraint system on the front 
passenger seat, adjust the seat-back angle to the  most upright 
position, move t he seat to the 
rearmost position, and raise the seat to the upper most position, 
even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator light is illuminated. If the head restraint interferes with the 
child restraint system installa-
tion and the head  restraint can 
be removed, remove the head 
restraint.

51 1-2. Child safety
A child restraint system for a 
small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
■Installing child restraint system using a seat belt (child restraint lock func-tion belt)
Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.WARNING
●Do not allow the child to lean 
his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or 
the area of the seat, front or rear 
pillars, or roof side rails from 
which the SRS side airbags or 
SRS curtain shield airbags 
deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint sys-tem. It is dangerous if the SRS 
side and curtain shield airbags 
inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to 
the child.
●When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the 
shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child’s 
shoulder. The belt should be 
kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the 
child’s shoulder.
●Use child restraint system suit-
able to the age and size of the child and install it to the rear 
seat.●If the driver’s seat interferes 
with the child restraint system 
and prevents it from being attached correct ly, attach the 
child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat.
●Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.
Child restraint system 
fixed with a seat belt

52 1-2. Child safety
COROLLA_U■Rear-facing  Infant 
seat/convertible seat
1Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.
2Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
3Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.4While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoul-der belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has 
retracted to a poi nt where there is 
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to 
check that it cannot be extended.
5After installing the child 
restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. ( P.55)
■Forward-facing  Convert-
ible seat
1If installing the child restraint system to the front passen-ger seat is unavoidable, refer to P.49 for the front passen-ger seat adjustment.
2If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint sys-tem, and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint.Otherwise, put the head 

53 1-2. Child safety
COROLLA_U1For safety and securityrestraint in the upper most 
position. ( P.121)
3Place the child restraint sys-tem on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.
4Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
5Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.
6While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.
7If the child restraint has a top 
tether strap, follow the child restraint manufacturer’s operation manual regarding the installation, using the top tether strap to latch onto the top tether strap anchor. (P.58)
8After installing the child restraint system, rock it back 

54 1-2. Child safety
COROLLA_Uand forth to ensure that it is 
installed securely. ( P.55)
■Booster seat
2High back type: If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system, and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint.Otherwise, put the head restraint in the upper most position. ( P.121)
Booster typeHigh back type
4Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint sys-tem according to the manu-facturer’s instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
Check that the sh oulder belt is cor-
rectly positioned over the child’s 
shoulder and that the lap belt is as 
low as possible. ( P.25)
■Removing a child restraint 
system installed with a seat belt
Press the buckle release button 
and fully retract the seat belt.
When releasing the buckle, the 
child restraint system may spring up due to the rebo und of the seat 
cushion. Release the buckle while holding down the child restraint 

55 1-2. Child safety
COROLLA_U1For safety and securitysystem.
Since the seat belt automatically 
reels itself, slowly return it to the stowing position.
WARNING
Observe the following precau-tions. 
●Do not allow children to play 
with the seat belt. If the seat belt 
becomes twisted around a 
child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries 
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors 
should be used to cut the belt.
are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
●Shake the child restraint system 
left and right, and forward and 
backward to ensure that it has 
been securely installed.
●After securing a child restraint 
system, never adjust the seat.●When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the 
shoulder belt is positioned across the center  of the child’s 
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the 
●Follow all installation instruc-
tions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
●When securing some types of 
child restraint systems in rear 
seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in 
positions next to the child 
restraint without  interfering with 
it or affecting seat belt effective-
ness. Be sure your seat belt fits 
snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does 
not, or if it interferes with the 
child restraint, move to a differ-ent position. Fa ilure to do so 
may result in death or serious injury.
■When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully 
extend the shoulder belt. ALR 
mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or 
discomfort to the child. ( P.27)
■Do not use a  seat belt 
extender
If a seat belt extender is used 
when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not 
securely hold the child restraint 
system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of 
sudden braking, sudden swerv-
ing or an accident.

56 1-2. Child safety
COROLLA_U■Child restraint LATCH 
anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for the outboard rear seat. (Marks displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)
■When installing in the rear outboard seats
Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.
1If the head restraint interferes 
with your child restraint sys-tem, and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint.Otherwise, put the head restraint in the upper most position. ( P.121)
With flexible lower attach-ments
2Remove the anchor covers, and install the child restraint system to the seat.The bars are installed behind the 
anchor covers.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint sys-
tem indicates  the presence of a 
lower connector system.
Canada only
With rigid lower attachments
2Remove the anchor covers, 
and install the child restraint system to the seat.
The bars are installed behind the 
tem indicates  the presence of a Child restraint system 
fixed with a child restraint 
LATCH anchor

57 1-2. Child safety
COROLLA_U1For safety and securitylower connec tor system.
3If the child restraint has a top 
4After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. ( P.55)
■When installing in the rear center seat
There are no LATCH anchors behind the rear center seat. However, the inboard LATCH anchors of the outboard seats, which are 15.6 in. (396 mm) apart, can be used if the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions permit use of those anchors with the anchor spacing stated.Child restraint systems with rigid lower attachments cannot be installed in the center seat. This type of child restraint system can only be installed in the out-board seat.
■Laws and regulations pertain-
ing to anchors
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. 
Child restraint systems conforming 
to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 speci-
fications can be used. 
This vehicle is designed to conform 
to SAE J1819.
WARNING
■When installing a child restraint system
Failure to do so may result in 
●When using the LATCH anchors, be sure  that there are 
no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child 
●Never attach two c hild restraint 
system attachments to the same anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not be strong 
enough to hold two child 
restraint system attachments and may break. If the LATCH 
anchors are already in use, use 
the seat belt to install a child restraint system  in the center 
seat.

58 1-2. Child safety
COROLLA_U■Anchor brackets (for top 
tether strap)
Anchor brackets are provided for each rear seat.
Use anchor brackets when fix-
ing the top tether strap.
Seats with an adjustable type head restraint
Anchor brackets
Top tether strapSeats with an integrated type 
head restraint
Top tether strap
■Fixing the top tether strap 
to the anchor bracket
Rear outboard seats
1Adjust the head restraint to the upmost position.
If the head restraint interferes with 
your child restraint system, and the 
head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint.
the upper most position. ( P.121)
2Open the anchor bracket 
cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is 
securely latched.  ( P.55)
When installing the child restraint system with the head restraint being raised, be sure to have the 
top strap pass underneath the head 
restraint.WARNING
●When securing some types of child restraint s ystems in rear 
seats, it may not be possible to 
properly use the seat belts in 
positions next to the child restraint without interfering with 
ness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does 
child restraint, move to a differ-
ent position. Failure to do so 
may result in death or serious 
injury.
●If the seat is adjusted, reconfirm the security of the child restraint 
system.
Using an anchor bracket 
(for top tether strap)

59 1-2. Child safety
COROLLA_U1For safety and securitySeats with an adjustable type 
Hook
Seats with an integrated type 
Hook
Rear center seat
Latch the hook onto the anchor 
bracket and tighten the top tether strap.
securely latched.  ( P.55)Hook
WARNING
●Firmly attach the top tether strap and make sure that the 
belt is not twisted.
●Do not attach the top tether 
strap to anything other than the anchor bracket.
system, never adjust the seat.

60 1-2. Child safety
●Outboard rear seats: When 
installing the ch ild restraint sys-
tem with the head restraint 
being raised, after the head 
restraint has been raised and 
then the anchor bracket has 
been fixed, do not lower the 
head restraint.
NOTICE
■Anchor brackets (for top 
When not in use, make certain to close the lid. If it remains open, 
the lid may be damaged.

61 1-3. Emergency assistance
COROLLA_U1For safety and security1-3.Emergency assistance
Microphone
LED light indicators“SOS” buttonSafety Connect*
Safety Connect is a sub-
scription-based telematics service that uses Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Con-nect is supported by Toy-ota’s designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hard-ware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the Telematics Subscription Service Agree-ment and its Terms and Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at Toyota.com in the United States, Toy-otapr.com in Puerto Rico and Toyota.ca in Canada. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Conditions.System components

62 1-3. Emergency assistance
COROLLA_U■Certification

63 1-3. Emergency assistance
COROLLA_U1For safety and securitySubscribers have the following 
Safety Connect services avail-able:
Automatic Collision Notifica-
tion
*
Helps drivers re ceive necessary 
response from emergency service 
providers. ( P.64 )
*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (
P.64 )
Emergency Assistance Button 
(“SOS”)
Connects drivers to response-cen-
ter support. ( P.65 )
Enhanced Roadside Assis-
tance
Provides drivers various on-road 
assistance. ( P.65 )
After you have signed the 
Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving ser-vices. A variety of subscription terms are available for purchase. Con-tact your Toyota dealer, call the following appropriate Safety Connect response center or push the “SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription details. • The United States
1-855-405-6500
• Canada
1-888-869-6828
• Puerto Rico
1-877-855-8377
■Safety Connect Services Infor-
mation
●Phone calls using the vehicle’s 
Bluetooth® technology will not be 
possible during Safety Connect.
●Safety Connect is available begin-
ning Fall 2009 on select Toyota models (in the contiguous United 
States only). Contact with the 
Safety Connect response center is dependent upon  the telematics 
device being in operative condi-tion, cellular connection availabil-ity, and GPS satellite signal 
reception, which can limit the abil-
ity to reach the response center or receive emergency service sup-
port. Enrollment and Telematics 
Subscription Service Agreement are required. A variety of subscrip-
tion terms are available; charges 
vary by subscription term selected and location.
●Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen 
Vehicle Location are available in 
the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska , Puerto Rico 
and Canada, and Enhanced Roadside Assist ance are avail-
able in the United  States, Puerto 
Rico and Canada.
●Automatic Collision Notification, 
Emergency Assistance, Stolen 
Vehicle and Enhanced Road Assistance are not available in the 
U.S. Virgin Islands.
For vehicles first sold in the U.S. Virgin Islands, no Safety Connect 
services will function in or outside 
the U.S. Virgin Islands.Services
Subscription

64 1-3. Emergency assistance
COROLLA_U●Safety Connect ser vices are not 
subject to section 255 of the Tele-
communications Act and the 
device is not TTY compatible.
■Languages
The Safety Connect response cen-ter will offer support in multiple lan-guages.
The Safety Con nect system will 
offer voice prompts in English, 
Spanish, and French. Please indi-
cate your language of choice when 
enrolling.
■When contacting the response center
You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is 
busy.
When the engine switch is 
turned to ON, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service is active.The following indicator light pat-terns indicate specific system usage conditions:
Green indicator light on = 
Active service
Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in pro-cess
Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction (contact your Toy-ota dealer)
No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active
■Automatic Collision Notifi-cation
In case of either airbag deploy-ment or severe rear-end colli-sion, the system is designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occu-pants are unable to communi-cate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emer-gency services provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to the location.
■Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-855- 405-6500 in the United States, 1-877-855-8377 in Puerto Rico or 1- 888-869-6828 in Canada, and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service. In addition to assisting law Safety Connect LED light 
IndicatorsSafety Connect services

65 1-3. Emergency assistance
COROLLA_U1For safety and securityenforcement with recovery of a 
stolen vehicle, Safety-Con-nect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circum-stances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Toyota.com in the United States, Toyotapr.com in Puerto Rico and Toyota.ca in Canada. 
■Emergency Assistance But-ton (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to reach the Safety Connect response center. The answer-ing agent will determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” 
button, tell the response-center agent that you are not experiencing an emergency.
■Enhanced Roadside Assis-
tance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included warranty-based Toyota roadside service.
Subscribers can press the 
“SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Enhanced Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at Toyota.com in the United States, Toyotapr.com in Puerto Rico and Toyota.ca in Canada.
Important! Read this informa-
tion before using Safety Con-nect.
■Exposure to radio fre-quency signals
The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal 
Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.
ANSI (American National 
Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986]
ICNIRP (International Com-mission on Non-Ionizing Radi-Safety information for 
Safety Connect

66 1-3. Emergency assistance
COROLLA_Uation Protection) [1996]
Those standards were based on 
comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant sci-entific literature. Over 120 scien-tists, engineers, and physicians from universities, and govern-ment health agencies and industries reviewed the avail-able body of research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect 
complies with the FCC guide-lines in addition to those stan-dards.

67 1-4. Theft deterrent system
COROLLA_U1For safety and security1-4.Theft deterrent system
Vehicles without a smart key 
system
The indicator light flashes after the key has been removed from the engine switch to indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing 
after the registered key has been inserted into the engine switch to indicate that the sys-tem has been canceled.
Vehicles with a smart key sys-tem
The indicator light flashes after the engine switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating.
after the engine switch has been turned to ACC or ON to indicate that the system has been can-celed.
■System maintenance
The vehicle has a mainte-
nance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■Conditions that may cause the 
system to malfunction
●If the grip portion  of the key is in 
contact with a metallic object
●If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security sys-
tem (key with a built-in transpon-der chip) of another vehicleEngine immobilizer 
system
The vehicle’s keys have 
built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s on-board computer. 
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.
Operating the system

68 1-4. Theft deterrent system
COROLLA_U■Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
Except for vehicles sold in Canada
For vehicles sold in Canada

69 1-4. Theft deterrent system
COROLLA_U1For safety and security*: If equipped
■Items to check before lock-
ing the vehicle
To prevent unexpected trigger-ing of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following:
Nobody is in the vehicle.
The windows and moon roof 
(if equipped) are closed before the alarm is set.
No valuables or other per-sonal items are left in the vehicle.
■Setting
Close the doors, trunk and NOTICE
■To ensure the system oper-
ates correctly
Do not modify or remove the sys-tem. If modified or removed, the 
proper operation of the system 
cannot be guaranteed.Alarm*
The alarm uses light and 
sound to give an alert when an intrusion is detected. The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set:
A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function (if equipped), wireless remote control, mechanical key (if equipped) or key (if equipped). (The doors will lock again automatically.)
The hood is opened.
Setting/canceling/stop-
ping the alarm system

70 1-4. Theft deterrent system
COROLLA_Uhood, and lock all the doors. 
The system will set automati-cally after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from 
being on to flashing when the sys-tem is set.
■Canceling or stopping
Do one of the following to deac-
tivate or stop the alarms:
Unlock the doors.
Turn the engine switch to 
ACC or ON, or start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)
nance-free type alarm system.
■Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations: 
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
●A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the trunk or hood, or unlocks the vehicle using a door 
lock switch or inside lock button.●The battery is recharged or 
replaced when the vehicle is 
locked. ( P.518)
■Alarm-operated door lock
In the following cases, depending 
on the situation, the door may auto-
matically lock to prevent improper 
entry into the vehicle:
●When a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door and the alarm is activated.
●While the alarm i s activated, a 
person remaining in the vehicle 
unlocks the door.
●When recharging or replacing the battery
NOTICE
Do not modify or remove the sys-tem. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system 
cannot be guaranteed.

71
COROLLA_U2
2Vehicle status information and indicatorsVehicle status information
and indicators
.2-1. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indica-
tors ............................... 72
Gauges and meters 
(4.2-inch display).......... 77
Gauges and meters (7-inch 
display)......................... 81
Multi-information display
..................................... 86
Fuel consumption informa-
tion ............................... 92

72 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_U2-1.Instrument cluster
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations dis play all 
warning lights and indicators illuminated.
4.2-inch display
7-inch display (when analog speedometer is displayed)Warning lights and indicators
The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster, 
center panel and outside rear view mirrors inform the driver of  
the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
Warning lights and indicators  displayed on the instru-
ment cluster

73 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_U2Vehicle status information and indicators7-inch display (when digital speedometer is displayed)
Warning lights inform the driver 
of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle’s systems.Warning lights
(U.S.A.)Brake system warning 
light*1 (P.481)
(Red)
(Canada)Brake system warning 
(Yellow)Brake system warning 
High coolant temperature 
warning light*2 (P.481)
Charging system warning 
light*1 (P.482)
Low engine oil pressure warning light
*2 (P.482)
(U.S.A.)Malfunction indicator lamp
*1 (P.482)
(Canada)Malfunction indicator lamp
SRS warning light*1 
(P.482)
(U.S.A.)ABS warning light*1 
(P.483)
(Canada)ABS warning light*1 
(P.483)
Brake Override System 
warning light/Drive-Start 
Control warning light*2 
(P.483)
(Red)Electric power steering 
system warning light*1 
(P.484)
(Yellow)Electric power steering 
(P.484)
Low fuel level warning 
light (P.484)
Driver’s and front passen-ger’s seat belt reminder light (P.484)

74 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_U*1:These lights come on when the 
engine switch is turned to ON to 
indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or turn 
off. Have the vehicle inspected 
by your Toyota dealer.
*2:This light illuminates on the 
multi-information display.The indicators inform the driver 
of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.Rear passengers’ 
seat belt reminder lights (P.485)
Tire pressure warning 
light
*1 (if equipped) 
(P.485)
(Orange)LTA indicator (if equipped) 
(P.485)
LDA indicator (if equipped) (P.485)
(Flashes 
or illumi-
nates)PCS warning light*1 
(P.486)
Slip indicator*1 (P.486)
(Flashes)
(U.S.A.)Parking brake indicator (P.486)
(Flashes)
(Canada)Parking brake indicator 
(P.486)
(Flashes)Brake hold operated indi-
cator*1 (if equipped) 
(P.487)
(Orange)iMT indicator*1 (if 
equipped) (P.487)
WARNING
■If a safety system warning 
light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when you start the 
engine, this cou ld mean that 
these systems are not available to 
help protect you in an accident, 
which could result in death or seri-
ous injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.
Indicators
Turn signal indicator 
(P.162)
(U.S.A.)Headlight indicator (P.170)
(Canada)Tail light indicator (P.170)
Headlight high beam indi-cator ( P.172)
Automatic High Beam indicator ( P.173)
PCS warning light
*1, 2 
(P.189)
Cruise control indicator (P.213, 223)
Dynamic radar cruise con-trol indicator ( P.213, 
223)
Cruise control “SET” indi-
cator ( P.213, 223)

75 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_U2Vehicle status information and indicators*1:These lights come on when the 
indicate that a system check is 
being performed.  They will turn 
off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*2:This light comes on when the 
system is turned off.
*3:Depending on the operating con-
dition, the color and illuminat-ing/flashing stat e of the light 
change.
*4:In order to confirm operation, the 
BSM outside rear view mirror indicators illumina te in the follow-
• When the engine switch is 
turned to ON, the BSM func-
tion is enabled on  of the 
multi-information display.
• When the BSM function is 
enabled on  of the 
multi-information display, the 
engine switch is turned to ON.
If the system is functioning cor-
rectly, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators will turn off after a few seconds.*3LTA indicator (if equipped) (P.200)
LDA indicator (if equipped) ( P.209)
BSM outside rear view 
mirror indicators
*4, 5 (if 
equipped) ( P.236)
BSM indicator (if 
(Flashes)Slip indicator*1 (P.251)
VSC OFF indicator*1, 2 
(P.252)
Smart key system indica-
tor*6 (if equipped) 
(P.148)
(U.S.A.)Parking brake indicator 
(P.163, 164)
(Canada)Parking brake indicator (P.163, 164)
Brake hold standby indi-
cator
(P.167)
Brake hold operated indi-
(P.167)
Auto EPB OFF indicator*1, 
2 (if equipped) ( P.164)
Eco Driving Indicator 
Light*1 (if equipped) 
(P.88)
Low outside temperature 
indicator*7 (P.77, 81)
Security indicator ( P.67, 
69)
“AIR BAG ON/OFF” indicator
*1, 8 (P.39)
Sport mode indicator (if 
equipped) (P.249)
(Green)iMT indicator (if equipped) 
(P.161)

76 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_UIf the BSM outside rear view mirror 
indicators do not illuminate or do not turn off, there may be a mal-function in the system.
If this occurs, have the vehicle 
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*5:This light illumi nates on the out-
side rear view mirrors.
*6:This light illuminates on the 
*7:When the outside temperature is 
approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, this indicator will flash for approximately 10 seconds, then stay on.
*8:This light illumi nates on the cen-
ter panel.

77 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_U2Vehicle status information and indicators■Locations of gauges and meters
The units of measure may differ depending on the intended desti nation of 
the vehicle.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
Speedometer
Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40 °C) to 122°F 
(50°C)
Clock (P.79)
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data ( P.86)
Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs ( P.490)
Odometer and trip meter display ( P.78)
Shift position indicator ( P.153)
Display change button ( P.78)
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fu el remaining in the tank
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine c oolant temperatureGauges and meters (4.2-inch display)
Meter display

78 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_U■Outside temperature display
●In the following si tuations, the cor-
rect outside tempe rature may not 
be displayed, or the display may 
take longer than normal to change:
• When stopped, or driving at low 
speeds (less than 16 mph [25 km/h])
• When the outside temperature 
has changed su ddenly (at the 
entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, 
etc.)
●When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning. 
Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
■Liquid crystal display
P.87
■Changing the display
Press the display change button 
until the desired item is dis-played.
■Display items
Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehi-
cle has been driven.
Trip meter A/Trip meter B
Displays the distance the vehicle 
has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display WARNING
■The information display at 
low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before u sing the liquid 
crystal informat ion display. At 
extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may 
respond slowly, and display 
changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag 
between the driver’s shifting and 
the new gear number appearing 
on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift 
again, causing rapid and exces-
sive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or 
injury.NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the 
engine and its components
●Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maxi-
mum engine speed.
●The engine may be overheating 
if the engine coolant tempera-ture gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately 
stop the vehicle in a safe place, 
and check the engine after it has cooled completely. 
(P.519)
Odometer and trip meter 
display

79 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_U2Vehicle status information and indicatorsdifferent distances independently.
To reset, display the desired trip 
meter and press and hold the dis-play change button.
The brightness of the instrument 
panel lights can be adjusted.
1Brighter
2Darker
■Instrument panel light bright-
ness adjustment
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted sepa-rately for when the  tail lights are on 
and off.
■Clock adjustment
The clocks on the following can 
be adjusted on the audio system screen.
Multi-information display
Audio system screen■Setting the clock to be 
adjusted automatically by GPS (Entune Audio [for U.S.A.]/Entune Audio Plus)
1Press the “MENU” button.
2Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
3Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
4Select “Clock”.
5Select “Auto Adjust by GPS” to set to on.
■Adjusting the clock manu-ally
Entune Audio (except for U.S.A.)
5Adjust the displayed time.
Hour: Select “-” or “+” of “Hours” to adjust the hour.
Minute: Select “-” or “+” of “Minutes” to adjust the min-ute.
“:00”: Select to set the clock to the beginning of the nearest hour.
e.g.
1:00 to 1:29  1:00
1:30 to 1:59  2:00Changing the instrument 
panel light brightness
Adjusting the clock

80 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_UEntune Audio (for 
U.S.A.)/Entune Audio Plus
5Select “Auto Adjust by GPS” to set to off.
6Adjust the displayed time.
e.g.
1:30 to 1:59  2:00
■Setting the time zone 
(Entune Audio [for U.S.A.]/Entune Audio Plus)
5Select “Time Zone”.
Select the desired time zone.■Setting daylight saving time (Entune Audio [for U.S.A.]/Entune Audio Plus)
5Select “Daylight Saving Time” then on/off.
■Changing the clock between 12-hour/24-hour format
5Select “24-Hour Time For-mat” and then on/off.
When set to off, the clock is dis-
played in 12 hour time format.
■Clock settings screen (Entune 
Audio [for U.S.A.]/Entune Audio 
Plus)
If “Clock : 00” is displayed when  
is selected on the multi-information 
display, the system may be malfunc-tioning. Have the vehicle inspected 

81 2-1. Instrument cluster
Analog speedometer
Sub speedometerClock (P.84)
Fuel gauge
Displays the engine c oolant temperature
Display change button ( P.83)
Odometer and trip meter display ( P.83)
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40 °C) to 122°F Gauges and meters (7-inch display)

82 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_U(50°C)
Digital speedometer
Clock (P.84)
Fuel gauge
(50°C)
■Outside temperature display●In the following sit uations, the cor-
rect outside temperature may not 

83 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_U2Vehicle status information and indicatorsbe displayed, or the display may 
take longer than normal to 
change:
etc.)
●When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota 
dealer.
P.87
■Customization
The gauges and met ers can be cus-
tomized in  of the multi-informa-
tion display. ( P.90)
Odometer
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could 
cause the driver to downshift 
again, causing rapid and exces-sive engine braking and possibly 
an accident resulting in death or 
injury.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the engine and its components
(P.519)
display

84 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_Udifferent distances independently.
1Brighter
2Darker
and off.
adjusted automatically by GPS
e.g.
■Setting the time zone
1Press the “MENU” button.Changing the instrument 

85 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_U2Vehicle status information and indicators2Select “Setup” on the “Menu” 
screen.
Select the desired time zone.
Entune Premium Audio only:
If “Auto” is selected, the time zone is selected automatically by current vehicle position.
■Setting daylight saving time
2Select “Setup” on the “Menu” 
screen.
5Select “Daylight Saving 
Time” then on/off/auto
*.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
■Changing the clock 
between 12-hour/24-hour format
played in 12 hour time format.■Clock settings screen
display, the system may be malfunc-
tioning. Have the vehicle inspected 

86 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_U■Display
Driving support system status 
display area
Displays an image when the follow-
ing systems are operating and a 
menu icon other than  is 
selected:
• LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if 
equipped)
• LDA (Lane Depar ture Alert with 
steering control) (if equipped)
• Dynamic radar cruise control (if 
equipped)
• Dynamic radar cruise control with 
full-speed range (if equipped)
• RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if 
equipped) ( P.233)
Content display area
By selecting menu icons on the multi-information di splay, a variety 
of driving-related information can be displayed. The multi-information display can also be used to change display settings and other vehicle settings.
Warning or advice pop-up displays are also displayed in certain situa-
tions.
7-inch display
Displays an image  when the follow-
selected:
• LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)• Dynamic radar cruise control with 
full-speed range
of driving-related information can be displayed. The multi-information 
display can also be used to change display settings and  other vehicle 
settings.
Warning or advice pop-up displays 
are also displayed in certain situa-tions.
■Menu icons
The menu icons will be dis-
played by pressing the  or  
meter control switch.Multi-information dis-
play
Display and menu icons

87 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_U2Vehicle status information and indicators
Small spots or light spots may 
appear on the display. This phenom-enon is characteristi c of liquid crys-
tal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.
The multi-information display is 
operated using the meter control switches./ : Select menu icons
/ : Change displayed 
content, scroll up/down the 
screen and move the cursor up/down
Press: Enter/Set
Press and hold: Reset/Dis-play customizable items
Return to the previous screenCall sending/receiving and 
history display
Linked with the hands-free system, 
sending or receiving call is dis-played. For details regarding the hands-free system, refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Speedometer display/Driving 
range (4.2-inch display)
Fuel economy
Eco Driving Indicator/Driving range (if equipped)Driving information display 
(P.87)
Driving supp ort system 
information display (P.89)
Audio system-linked dis-play (P.90)
Vehicle information dis-play (P.90)
Settings display ( P.90)
Warning message display (P.490)
WARNING
■Caution for use while driving
●When operating the multi-infor-
mation display while driving, 
pay extra attention to the safety 
of the area aroun d the vehicle.
●Do not look continuously at the multi-information display while 
driving as you may fail to see 
pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead o f the vehicle.
■The information display at low temperatures
P.78, 83
Changing the meter dis-
play
Content of driving infor-
mation

88 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_U■Speedometer display/Driv-
ing range (4.2-inch display)
Speedometer display
Driving range
Displays driving range with remain-
ing fuel. Use the d isplayed values 
as a reference only.
This distance is  computed based 
on your average fuel consumption. 
As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
When only a small amount of fuel is 
added to the tank, the display may not be updated.When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the engine switch off, the display may not be updated.
■Fuel economy
Use the displayed values as a ref-erence only.
Average fuel economy (after 
reset)
To reset the average fuel economy 
display, press and hold the  
meter control switch.
Current fuel consumption
Displays instantaneous current fuel 
consumption.Driving range
Displays driving ra nge with remain-
ing fuel.
This distance is computed based 
on your average f uel consumption. 
added to the tank, the display may not be updated.When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the ve hicle is refueled 
without turning the engine switch off, the display may not be updated.
The average fuel economy dis-
play can be changed in . 
(P.90)
Average fuel economy (after 
start)
Displays the average fuel con-
sumption since engine start.
refuel)
sumption since the vehicle was refueled.
■Eco Driving Indicator/Driv-
ing range (if equipped)
Eco Driving Indicator

89 2-1. Instrument cluster
Eco Driving Indicator Light
During Eco-friendly acceleration 
(Eco driving), the Eco Driving Indi-cator Light will tu rn on. When the 
acceleration exceeds the Zone of Eco driving, or when the vehicle is stopped, the light turns off.
Eco Driving Indicator Zone 
Display
Suggests the Zone of Eco driving 
with current Eco driving ratio based on acceleration.
Eco driving ratio based on 
acceleration
If the acceleration exceeds the 
Zone of Eco driving, the right side of the Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display will illuminate.
At this time, the Eco Driving Indica-
tor Light will turn off.
Zone of Eco driving
Displays driving range with remain-ing fuel. Use the d isplayed values 
as a reference only.This distance is computed based on your average f uel consumption. 
■Eco Driving Indicator
Eco Driving Indicator will not oper-
ate under the following conditions:
●The shift lever is in any position other than D.
●A paddle shift switch is operated. (If equipped)
●The driving mode is set to sport mode. (If equipped)
●The vehicle spe ed is approxi-
mately 80 mph (130 km/h) or 
higher.
■Driving support system 
information
Select to display the operational status of the following systems:
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if 
equipped) ( P.195)
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) (if equipped) ( P.205)
Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped) ( P.223)
Dynamic radar cruise control Driving support system 
information display

90 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_Uwith full-speed range (if 
equipped) ( P.213)
■Navigation system-linked display (if equipped)
Select to display the following navigation system-linked infor-mation:
Route guidance to destination
Compass display (head-
ing-up display)
Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the meter using the meter control switches.
This menu icon can be set to be 
displayed/not displayed in .
■Drive information
Displays drive information such as 
the following:
Drive information type
Drive information itemsDisplays the following depend-
ing on which drive information type and drive information items 
were selected in . ( P.90)
After start
• Distance: Displays the distance 
driven since engine start
• Elapsed time: Displays the 
elapsed time since engine start
• Average vehicle speed: Displays 
the average vehicle speed since 
engine start
After reset
driven since the display was 
reset*
elapsed time since the display was reset
*
the average vehicle speed since the display was reset
*
*: To reset, display the desired item 
and press and hold the  
■Meter display settings that 
can be changed
Language
Select to change the language dis-
played.
Units
Select to change the units of mea-sure displayed.
Speedometer display (7-inch Audio system-linked dis-play
Vehicle information dis-
play
Settings display

91 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_U2Vehicle status information and indicatorsdisplay)
Select to set the  display of the 
speedometer to analog/digital.
Eco Driving Indicator Light (if 
equipped)
Select to enable/disable the Eco 
Driving Indicator Light.

• Fuel economy display
Select to change the average fuel 
consumption display between after start/after reset. ( P.88)

Select to display/not display the audio system linked display.

Select to change the displayed con-tent of the following:
• Drive information type
Select to change the drive informa-
tion type display between after start/after reset.
• Drive information items
Select to set the first and second 
items of the drive information dis-
play to any of the following: aver-
age vehicle speed/distance/elapsed time.
Pop-up display
Select to enable/disable pop-up displays for each relevant system.
Multi-information display off
Select to turn the m ulti-information 
display off.
To turn the multi-in formation display 
on again, press any of the following 
meter control switches //// /.
Default setting
Select to reset the meter display settings to the default setting.
■Vehicle functions and set-
tings that can be changed
P.548
■Suspension of the settings dis-
play
●Some settings cannot be changed while driving. When changing set-
tings, park the vehicle in a safe 
place.
●If a warning message is displayed, operation of the settings display will be suspended.
WARNING
■Cautions during setting up 
the display
If the engine is running when changing the dis play settings, 
ensure that the vehicle is parked 
in a place with adequate ventila-
tion. In a closed area such as a 
garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) 
may collect and enter the vehicle. 
This may lead to death or a seri-ous health hazard.
NOTICE
■During setting up the display
To prevent batte ry discharge, 
ensure that the engine is running while setting up the display fea-
tures.

92 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_UAudio system screen
■Trip information
Entune Audio without 
DCM/Entune Audio Plus with-out DCM
2Select “Info” on the “Menu” screen.
If a screen other than “Trip Informa-
tion” is displayed, select “Trip Infor-mation”.
Entune Audio with 
DCM/Entune Audio Plus with DCM/Entune Premium Audio
2Select “Info” on the “Menu” screen.3Select “ECO” on the “Infor-mation” screen.
Resetting the consumption 
data
Fuel consumption in the past 
15 minutes
Average vehicle speed since 
the engine was started.
Elapsed time since the 
engine was started.
Cruising range
Average fuel consumption for 
the past 15 minutes is divided by color into past averages and averages attained since the engine switch was last turned to ON. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a refer-ence.
The image is an example only, and 
may vary slightly from actual condi-tions.Fuel consumption 
tion can be displayed on the audio system screen.
Consumption

93 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_U2Vehicle status information and indicators■History
If a screen other than “History” is 
displayed, select “History”.
3Select “ECO” on the “Infor-mation” screen.
Best recorded fuel consump-
tion
Latest fuel consumptionPrevious fuel consumption 
record
Resetting the history dataUpdating the latest fuel con-
sumption data
The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past averages and the average fuel consumption since the last updated. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
may vary slightly from actual condi-tions.
■Updating the history data
Update the latest fuel consumption 
by selecting “Clip” to measure the 
current fuel consumption again.
■Resetting the data
The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting “Clear”.
■Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the 
quantity of fuel remaining.
This distance is computed based on 
your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that 
can be driven may differ from that 
displayed.

94 2-1. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_U

95
COROLLA_U3
3Before drivingBefore driving
.3-1. Key information
Keys ............................... 96
3-2. Opening, closing and 
locking the doors
Doors .......................... 103
Trunk........................... 108
Smart key system ....... 111
Front seats .................. 118
Rear seats................... 119
Head restraints............ 121
3-4. Adjusting the steering 
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel ............ 123
Inside rear view mirror
.................................. 124
Outside rear view mirrors
.................................. 125
3-5. Opening and closing the 
windows
Power windows ........... 127
Moon roof.................... 130

96 3-1. Key information
COROLLA_U3-1.Key information
The following keys are provided 
with the vehicle.
Type A
Keys (without a wireless remote control function)
 Key number plate
Type B
Key (with a wireless remote 
control function)
Operating the wireless remote con-
trol function (→P.98)
Keys (without a wireless 
remote control function)
 Key number plateType C
Keys (with a wireless remote 
Type D
 Electronic keys
• Operating the smart key system 
(P.111 )
• Operating the wireless remote 
control function ( P.98 )
 Mechanical keys
■When riding in an aircraft (with 
a wireless remote control func-tion)
When bringing a ke y with wireless 
remote control func tion onto an air-
craft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying Keys
The keys

97 3-1. Key information
COROLLA_U3Before drivingthe key in your bag, etc., ensure that 
the buttons are not likely to be 
pressed accidentally. Pressing a 
button may cause the key to emit radio waves that could interfere with 
the operation of the aircraft.
■Key battery depletion (with a 
wireless remote  control func-
tion)
Vehicles without a smart key sys-tem
●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
●The battery will be come depleted 
even if the key i s not used. The 
following symptoms indicate that the key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when neces-
sary. (P.458)
• The wireless remote control does 
not operate.
• The detection area becomes 
smaller.
Vehicles with a smart key system
●If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin and a 
message will be s hown on the 
multi-information display when the 
engine is stopped.
●To reduce key battery depletion 
when the electronic key is to not 
be used for long periods of time, set the electronic key to the bat-
tery-saving mode. ( P.113)
●As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery 
will become deplet ed even if the 
electronic key is not used. The fol-
lowing symptoms indicate that the 
electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. ( P.458)
• The smart key system or the wire-
less remote control does not oper-ate.
smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key sur-face does not turn on.
●To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electri-
cal appliances that produce a 
magnetic field:
•T V s
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones 
and battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or 
cordless phones
• Table lamps
• Induction cookers
●If the electronic key is near the vehicle for longer than necessary, 
even if the smart key system is not operated, the key battery may 
become depleted faster than nor-
mal.
■Replacing the battery (with a wireless remote control func-
tion)
P.458
■If “A New Key has been Regis-tered Contact Your Dealer for 
Details” is shown on the multi-information display (vehi-
cles with a smart key system)
This message will be displayed 
each time the driver’s door is 
opened when the doors are unlocked from the outside for 
approximately 10 days after a new 
electronic key has been registered.If this message is displayed but you 
have not had a new  electronic key 
registered, ask your Toyota dealer to 
check if an unknown electronic key 
(other than those in your posses-
sion) has been registered.
■If a wrong key is used (with a wireless remote control func-tion)
The key cylinder rotates freely, iso-lated from the internal mechanism.

98 3-1. Key information
COROLLA_UThe keys are equipped with the 
following wireless remote con-trol:
Vehicles without a smart key system
Locks the doors ( P.103)
Unlocks the doors ( P.103)
Opens the windows
*1 and 
moon roof*1, 2 (P.103)
Opens the trunk ( P.110)
Sounds the alarm ( P.99)
Vehicles with a smart key sys-temNOTICE
■To prevent key damage
●Do not drop the keys, subject 
them to strong shocks or bend 
them.
●Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of 
time.
●Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer 
etc.
●Vehicles with a smart key sys-tem: Do not attach metallic or 
magnetic materials to the keys 
or place the keys close to such materials.
●Do not disassemble the keys.
●Do not attach a sticker or any-
thing else to the surface of the 
key.
●Vehicles with a smart key sys-
tem: Do not place the keys near 
objects that produce magnetic 
fields, such as TVs, audio sys-tems and induction cookers, or 
medical electrical equipment, 
such as low-frequency therapy equipment.
■Carrying the electronic key 
on your person (vehicles with 
a smart key system)
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from elec-tric appliances that are turned on. 
Radio waves emitted from electric 
appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere 
with the key, causing the key to 
not function properly.
■In case of a smart key system malfunction or other 
key-related problems (vehi-
P.513■When an electronic key is lost 
(vehicles with a smart key 
system)
P.513
Wireless remote control 
(if equipped)

99 3-1. Key information
COROLLA_U3Before drivingLocks the doors ( P.103)
Opens the windows*1 and 
Opens the trunk ( P.110)
*1:This setting mu st be customized 
at your Toyota dealer.
*2:If equipped
■Panic mode (with a wireless 
When  is pressed for longer 
than about one second, an alarm 
will sound intermittently and the 
vehicle lights will f lash to deter any 
person from trying to break into or 
damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button 
on the wireless re mote control.
on the electronic key.■Conditions affecting the opera-tion of the smart key system or 
wireless remote control (with a 
wireless remote control func-tion)
The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the fol-
lowing situations:
●When the wireles s key battery is 
depleted
●Near a TV tower,  electric power 
plant, gas station, radio station, 
large display, airpo rt or other facil-
ity that generates strong radio 
waves or electrical noise
●When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless 
communication devices
●When the wireless key is in con-tact with, or is c overed by a metal-
lic object
●When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
●If window tint wit h a metallic con-
tent or metallic objects are 
attached to the rear window
P.113

100 3-1. Key information
COROLLA_U1 Releasing
To release the key, press the button
2 Folding
To stow the key, press the button 
then fold the key.
To take out the mechanical key, 
slide the release button and take the key out.
The mechanical key can only be 
inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to insert it.
After using the mechanical key, 
store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. (P.513)
■If you lose your mechanical 
keys
P.513Using the key (vehicles 
without a smart key sys-
tem and with a wireless remote control function)
Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a smart key 
system)

101 3-1. Key information
COROLLA_U3Before driving■Certification for the wireless r emote control (vehicles without  a 
smart key system)

102 3-1. Key information
COROLLA_U■Certification for the wireless r emote control (vehicles with a smart 
key system)
P.115

103 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_U3Before driving3-2.Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Smart key system (if 
equipped)
Carry the electronic key to enable this function.
1Grip the driver’s door handle 
to unlock the door. Holding the driver’s door handle for approximately 2 seconds unlocks all the doors. Grip the front passenger’s door handle to unlock all the 
doors.
*
Make sure to touch the sensor on 
the back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 
seconds after the doors are locked.
*: The door unlock settings can be 
changed. ( P.104, 548)
2Touch the lock sensor (the 
indentation on the side of the front door handle) to lock all the doors.
Check that the door is securely 
locked.■Wireless remote control (if 
equipped)
1Locks all the doors
Check that the d oor is securely 
locked.
2Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the 
driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.
Press and hold to open the win-
dows
*1 and moon roof.*1, 2
Vehicles with a smart key sys-
tem
locked.
driver’s door. Pressing the button Doors
Unlocking and locking the doors from the outside

104 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_Uagain within 3 seconds unlocks the 
other doors.
dows*1 and moon roof.*1, 2
■Key
Turning the key operates the 
doors as follows: 
1 Unlocks all the doors
Turning the key unlocks the driver’s 
door. Turning the key again unlocks the other doors.
Turn and hold to open the win-
dows
2 Locks all the doors
Turn and hold to close the win-
tem
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechani-cal key. ( P.513)■Switching the door unlock func-
tion (vehicles with a smart key 
system)
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote control. 
1Turn the engine switch off.
2When the indicator light on the 
key surface is not on, press and 
hold  ,  or  for 
approximately 5 seconds while 
pressing and holding .
The setting changes each time an 
operation is per formed, as shown 
below. (When changing the setting 
continuously, release the buttons, 
wait for at least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2 .)
For vehicles with an alarm: To pre-vent unintended triggering of the 
alarm, unlock the doors using the 
wireless remote control and open and close a door once after the set-
tings have been ch anged. (If a door Multi-informa-
tion display/BeepUnlocking func-
tion
Exterior: Beeps 3 
times
Interior: Pings 
onceHolding the 
driver’s door handle unlocks only the driver’s door.
Holding the front passenger’s door handle unlocks all the doors.
Exterior: Beeps 
twice
onceHolding either front door handle unlocks all the doors.

105 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_U3Before drivingis not opened within 60 seconds 
after  is press ed, the doors will 
be locked again an d the alarm will 
automatically be set.)
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. ( P.70)
■Operation signals (with a wire-
less remote control function)
A buzzer sounds and the emer-gency flashers flash to indicate that 
the doors have been locked/unlocked using the wireless 
remote control. (Locked: Once; 
Unlocked: Twice)
A buzzer sounds and the emer-
gency flashers flash to indicate that 
the doors have been locked/unlocked using the entry 
function or wireless remote control. 
(Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the 
windows and moon roof* are operat-
ing.
■Security feature (with a wireless 
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the 
vehicle is unlocked using the wire-
less remote control, the security fea-ture automatically locks the vehicle 
again.
If a door is not opened within 
approximately 60 seconds after the 
vehicle is unlocked using the entry 
function or wireless remote control, the security featu re automatically 
locks the vehicle again. ■When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on 
the surface of the front door 
handle (vehicles with a smart key system)
If the doors cannot be locked by touching the lock se nsor with a fin-
ger, touch the lock sensor with the palm of your hand.
If you are wearing gloves, remove 
them.
■Door lock buzzer (vehicles with a smart key system)
If an attempt to lock the doors using the entry function or wireless remote control is made when a door is not 
fully closed, a b uzzer will sound 
continuously for 5 seconds. Fully 
close the door to stop the buzzer, 
and lock the doors again.
■Alarm (if equipped)
Locking the doors  will set the alarm 
system. ( P.69)
■Conditions affecting the opera-tion of the smart key system or wireless remote control (if 
equipped)
P.99
P.113

106 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_U■If the smart key system or the 
wireless remote  control does 
not operate properly (if equipped)
Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. ( P.458)
Use the mechanical key to lock and 
unlock the doors. ( P.513)
■If the battery is discharged 
(vehicles with a smart key sys-tem)
The doors cannot be locked and unlocked using the smart key sys-
tem or wireless remote control. Lock 
or unlock the doors using the mechanical key. ( P.513)
Some functions can be customized. (P.548)
■Door lock switches (to 
lock/unlock)
2Unlocks all the doorsWARNING
■To prevent an accident
while driving t he vehicle.
Failure to do so m ay result in a 
door opening and  an occupant 
being thrown out of the vehicle, 
resulting in death or serious injury.
●Ensure that all doors are prop-
erly closed and locked.
●Do not pull the inside door han-
dle while driving.
Be especially careful of the front 
doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock 
buttons are in the locked posi-
tion.
●Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated 
in the rear seats. ■When opening or closing a door
Check the surroundings of the vehicle such as wh ether the vehi-
cle is on an incline, whether there 
is enough space for a door to 
open and whether a strong wind 
is blowing. When opening or clos-ing the door, hold the door handle 
tightly to prepare for any unpre-
dictable movement.
■When using the wireless remote control or the key and 
operating the power win-
dows or moon roof (if equipped)
Operate the power windows or moon roof after checking to make 
sure that there is no possibility of 
any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the windows 
or moon roof. Also, do not allow 
children to opera te the wireless 
remote control or the key. It is 
possible for children and other 
passengers to get caught in the power windows or moon roof.
Unlocking and locking the 
doors from the inside

107 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_U3Before driving■Inside lock buttons
1Locks the door
2Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened by 
pulling the inside ha ndle even if the 
lock buttons are in the lock position.
■Locking the front doors from 
the outside without a key
1Move the inside lock button to 
the lock position.
2Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if the key is in the engine switch.
The door cannot be locked if the engine switch is in ACC or ON, or the electronic key is left inside the 
vehicle.
The key may not b e detected cor-
rectly and the door may be locked.
■Open door warning buzzer
If a door or the trunk is not fully 
closed, a buzzer will sound when 
the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5 km/h).
The open door(s) or trunk is indi-
cated on the multi -information dis-
play.The door cannot be opened 
from inside the vehicle when lock is set.
1Unlock
2Lock
These locks can be set to prevent 
children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.
The following functions can be 
set or canceled:
For instructions on customizing, 
refer to P.548.Rear door child-protector lock
Automatic door locking 
and unlocking systems

108 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_U*: Vehicles with a continuously vari-
able transmissionFunction Operation
Speed linked 
door locking functionAll doors are auto-matically locked when vehicle speed is approxi-mately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Shift position linked door locking func-
tion
*All doors are auto-
matically locked when shifting the shift lever out of P.
Shift position linked door unlocking 
function
matically unlocked when shifting the shift lever to P.
Driver’s door linked door unlocking functionAll doors are auto-matically unlocked when driver’s door is opened.Trunk
The trunk can be opened 
using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless remote control or key.
WARNING
tions.
●Make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not 
fully closed, it may open unex-
pectedly while driving and hit near-by objects or luggage in 
the trunk may be thrown out, 
causing an accident.
●Do not allow child ren to play in 
the trunk.If a child is accidentally locked 
in the trunk, they could suffer from heat exhaustion, suffoca-
tion or other injuries.
●Do not allow a child to open or 
close the trunk lid.Doing so may cause the trunk 
lid to open unexpectedly, or 
cause the child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the 
closing trunk lid.
Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or 
a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
■Using the trunk
Failure to do so may cause parts 
of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.

109 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_U3Before driving
■Trunk opener
Pull the lever upward to release 
the trunk lid.
■Trunk release button (vehi-cles with a smart key sys-tem)
While carrying the electronic key, press the button on the trunk lid.
When all the doors are unlocked WARNING
●Remove any heavy loads, such 
as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening it. Failure to 
do so may cause the trunk lid to 
suddenly shut again after it is opened.
●When opening or closing the 
trunk lid, thoroughly check to 
make sure the surrounding area is safe.
●If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them 
know that the trunk is about to 
open or close.
●Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy 
weather as i t may move 
abruptly in strong wind.
●The trunk lid may suddenly shut 
if it is not opened fully. It is more 
difficult to open or close the 
trunk lid on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the 
trunk lid unexpectedly opening 
or closing by itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully open 
and secure before using the 
trunk.●When closing the  trunk lid, take 
extra care to pre vent your fin-
gers etc. from being caught.
●When closing the trunk lid, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface.
●Do not attach a ny accessories 
other than genuine Toyota parts to the trunk lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may 
cause the lid to suddenly shut 
again after it is opened.
Opening the trunk

110 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_Uusing one of the following meth-
ods, the trunk can be opened without the electronic key:
Entry function
Wireless remote control
Door lock switches
Automatic door unlocking sys-
tem
Mechanical key
■Wireless remote control (if equipped) 
Press and hold the switch.
A buzzer sounds.
A buzzer sounds.■Key (vehicles with a key cylinder on the trunk lid)
Turn the key clockwise to release the trunk lid.
■Trunk light
●The trunk light turns on when the 
trunk is opened.
●If the trunk light is left on when the engine switch is turned off, the light will go off automatically after 
20 minutes.
■Function to prevent the trunk 
being locked with the electronic key inside (vehicles with a 
●When all doors are locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic key 
left inside the trunk will sound an alarm.
In this case, the  trunk lid can be 
opened pressing the trunk release 
button on the trunk lid.
●If the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, 
the key confinement prevention 
function is activated so the trunk 

111 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_U3Before drivingcan be opened. In order to pre-
vent theft, take all electronic keys 
with you when leaving the vehicle.
●If the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the 
key may not be detected depend-ing on the location of the key and 
the surrounding radio wave condi-
tions. In this case, the key con-finement prevention function 
cannot be activate d, causing the 
doors to lock when the trunk is 
closed. Make sure to check where 
the key is before closing the trunk.
●The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any 
one of the doors  is unlocked. In 
this case, open the trunk using the 
trunk opener.
■Internal trunk release lever
The trunk lid can be opened by pull-ing up the glow-in -the-dark lever 
located on the inside of the trunk lid.
The lever will conti nue to glow for 
some time after the trunk lid is 
closed.
■If the smart key system or the wireless remote  control does 
P.107
Some functions can be customized. (P.548)*: If equipped
■Antenna location
Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
Antenna inside the trunkAntenna outside the trunkSmart key system*
The following operations 
can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket. The driver should always carry the electronic key.
Locks and unlocks the doors (P.103)
Opens the trunk ( P.109)
Starts the engine ( P.148)

112 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_U■Effective range (areas within 
which the electronic key is 
detected)
When locking or unlocking the 
doors
The system can be operated when 
the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of eithe r of the front out-
side door handles. (Only the doors detecting the key c an be operated.)
When starting the engine or changing engine switch modes
The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehi-cle.
When opening the trunk
The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of the trunk release but-ton.
■Alarms and warning messages
A combination of e xterior and inte-
rior buzzers as well as warning mes-
sages shown on the multi-information display are used to 
prevent theft of the vehicle and acci-
dents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate mea-
sures based on the  displayed mes-
sage. (→P.490) 
When only an ala rm sounds, cir-
cumstances and c orrection proce-
dures are as follows.
●Exterior buzzer sounds once for 5 
seconds●Interior buzzer sounds continu-
ously
■Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be activated in ord er to prevent the 
electronic key battery and the vehi-
cle battery from being discharged 
while the vehicle is not operated for 
a long time.
●In the following situations, the 
smart key system  may take some 
time to unlock the doors.
• The electronic key has been left 
within approximatel y 11 ft. (3.5 m) 
of the outside of the vehicle for 2 
minutes or longer.
• The smart key system has not SituationCorrection 
procedure
An attempt was 
made to lock the vehicle while a door was open.Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.
The trunk was closed while the electronic key was still inside the trunk and all the doors were locked.Retrieve the electronic key from the trunk and close the trunk lid.
SituationCorrection 
procedure
The engine switch was turned to ACC while the driver’s door was open (or the driver’s door was opened while the engine switch was in ACC).Turn the engine switch off and close the driver’s door.
The engine switch was turned to off while the driver’s door was open.
Close the driver’s door

113 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_U3Before drivingbeen used for 5 days or longer.
●If the smart key system has not 
been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cann ot be unlocked 
from any door except the driver’s door. In this case, hold the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless 
remote control or mechanical key 
to unlock the doors.
■Electronic key battery-saving function
When battery-savi ng mode is set, 
battery depletion is minimized by 
stopping the electronic key from 
receiving radio waves.
Press  twice while pressing and 
holding . Confirm that the elec-
tronic key indicator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is 
set, the smart key system cannot be 
used. To cancel the  function, press 
any of the electronic key buttons.
■Conditions affecting operation
The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situa-tions, the communication between 
the electronic key and the vehicle 
may be affected, preventing the smart key system, wireless remote control and engine immobilizer sys-
tem from operating properly.
●When the electronic key battery is depleted
●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station , radio station, 
ity that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
●When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication 
device
●When the electronic key is in con-tact with, or is c overed by the fol-
lowing metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is 
attached
• Cigarette boxes that have alumi-
num foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
•C o i n s
• Hand warmers made of metal• Media such as CDs and DVDs
●When other wirel ess keys (that 
emit radio waves) are being used 
nearby
●When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices 
that emit radio waves
• Another vehicle’s electronic key or 
a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal 
digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players• Portable game systems
●When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or elec-
tronic devices
●When the vehicle is parked in a pay parking spot where radio waves are emitted
If the doors cannot be locked/unlocked using the smart key 
system, lock/unlock the doors by 
performing any of the following:
●Bring the electronic key close to either front door handle and oper-ate the entry function.
●Operate the wireless remote con-trol.
If the doors cannot be locked/unlocked using the above methods, use the mechanical key. 
(P.513)
If the engine cannot be started using the smart key system, refer to 

114 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_UP.514.
■Note for the entry function
●Even when the electronic key is 
within the effective range (detec-tion areas), the system may not 
operate properly in the following 
cases:
• The electronic key is too close to 
the window or outside door han-dle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked 
or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the 
ground or in a high place, or too close to the center of the rear 
bumper when the trunk is opened.
• The electronic key is on the instru-
ment panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the door pockets or glove box when the engine is 
started or engine switch modes 
are changed.
●Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the 
vehicle. Depending on the radio 
wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna out-
side the cabin and the door will 
become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic 
key inside the vehicle.
●As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the 
doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the 
doors detecting the electronic key 
can be used to unl ock the vehicle.
●Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possi-ble to start the e ngine if the elec-
tronic key is near the window.
●The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on 
the door handle, such as in the 
rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is w ithin the effec-
tive range. (The doors will auto-
matically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the 
doors are not opened and closed.)●If the wireless remote control is 
used to lock the doors when the 
electronic key is near the vehicle, 
there is a possib ility that the door 
may not be unlocked by the entry 
function. (Use the wireless remote 
control to unlock the doors.)
●Touching the door lock or unlock sensor while wearing gloves may prevent lock or unlock operation.
●When the lock operation is per-formed using the lock sensor, rec-
ognition signals will be shown up 
to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be 
given.
●If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within 
the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that 
case, follow the following correc-
tion procedures to wash the vehi-
cle:
• Place the electronic key in a loca-
tion 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure 
that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to bat-
tery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. ( P.113)
●If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle 
becomes wet during a car wash, a message may be shown on the 
multi-information display and a 
buzzer will sound outside the vehi-cle. To turn off the alarm, lock all 
the doors.
●The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact 
with ice, snow, m ud, etc. Clean 
the lock sensor and attempt to 
operate it again.
●A sudden handle operation or a 
handle operation immediately 
after entering the effective range 
may prevent the doors from being unlocked. Touch the door unlock 
sensor and check that the doors 
are unlocked befo re pulling the 
door handle again.

115 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_U3Before driving●If there is another electronic key in 
the detection area, it may take 
slightly longer to unlock the doors 
after the door handle is gripped.
■When the vehicle  is not driven 
for extended periods
●To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 
6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.
●The smart key system can be deactivated in advance. ( P.548)
●Setting the electronic key to bat-tery-saving mode helps to reduce 
key battery depletion. ( P.113)
■To operate the system properly
●Make sure to carry the electronic key when operati ng the system. 
Do not get the electronic key too 
close to the vehicle when operat-
ing the system from the outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and hold-ing condition of the electronic key, 
the key may not be detected cor-
rectly and the system may not oper-ate properly. (The alarm may go off 
accidentally, or the door lock pre-
vention function may not operate.)●Do not leave the  electronic key 
inside the trunk.
The key confinement prevention 
function may not operate, depend-ing on the location of the key (the 
inside edge of the trunk), condi-
tions (inside a metal bag, close to metallic objects) and the radio 
waves in the surrounding area. (P.110)
■If the smart key  system does 
not operate properly
●Locking and unlocking the doors: P.513
●Starting the engine: P.514
■Customization 
■If the smart key system has been deactivated in a custom-
ized setting
●Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the wireless remote control or 
mechanical key. ( P.103, 513)
●Starting the engi ne and changing 
engine switch modes: P.514
●Stopping the engine: P.150
■Certification for the smart key system

116 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_UFor vehicles sold in Canada

117 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
WARNING
■Caution regarding interfer-
ence with electronic devices
●People with implantable car-diac pacemakers, cardiac 
resynchronization ther-
apy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defib rillators should 
keep away from the smart key system antennas. ( P.111)
The radio waves may affect the 
operation of such devices. If 
necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toy-
ota dealer for details, such as 
the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio 
waves. Then, consult your doc-
tor to see if you should disable the entry function.●Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable 
cardiac pacemakers, cardiac 
resynchronization ther-apy-pacemakers or implantable 
cardioverter defibrillators should 
consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its 
operation under the influence of 
radio waves.Radio waves could have unex-
pected effects on the operation 
of such medical devices.
Ask your Toyota dealer for details on disabling the entry function.

118 3-3. Adjusting the seats
COROLLA_U3-3.Adjusting the seats
Manual seat
Seat position adjustment 
lever
Seatback angle adjustment 
lever
Vertical height adjustment 
lever (driver’s side only)
Lumbar support adjustment 
switch* (driver’s side only)
*: If equippedPower seat (driver’s side 
only)
Seat position adjustment switch
switch
Seat cushion (front) angle 
adjustment switch
switch
switch
*
*: If equippedFront seats
Adjustment procedure
WARNING
■When adjusting the seat posi-
tion
●Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not 
injured by the moving seat.
●Do not put your hands under the 
seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become 
jammed in the seat mechanism.

119 3-3. Adjusting the seats
COROLLA_U3Before driving1Move the front seats forward. 
(P.118)
2Stow the rear armrest. (if equipped) ( P.413)
3Seats with an adjustable type head restraint: Lower the head restraints to the lowest position. ( P.121)
4Fold the seatback down while pushing the seatback lock release button.
Each seatback may be folded sep-
arately.WARNING
●Make sure to leave enough 
space around the feet so they do not get stuck.
■Seat adjustment
●Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.
●To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a colli-
sion, do not recline the seat 
more than necessary.If the seat is too reclined, the lap 
belt may slide past the hips and 
apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may 
contact the shoulder belt, 
increasing the ri sk of death or 
serious injury in  the event of an 
accident.Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat 
may unexpectedly move and 
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●Manual seat only: After adjust-
ing the seat, make sure that the 
seat is locked in position.
NOTICE
■When adjusting a front seat
When adjusting a front seat, make sure that the head restraint does 
not contact the headliner. Other-
wise, the head restraint and head-liner may be damaged.Rear seats
The seatbacks of the rear 
seats can be folded down.
Folding down the rear 
seatbacks
WARNING
tions. Failure to do so may result 
in death or serious injury.
■When folding the rear seat-
backs down
●Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.

120 3-3. Adjusting the seats
●Stop the vehicle on level 
ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P 
(continuously variable transmis-
sion) or N (manual transmis-sion).
●Do not allow anyo ne to sit on a 
folded seatback or in the trunk while driving.
●Do not allow child ren to enter 
the trunk.
●Be careful not to get your hand caught when folding the rear 
seatbacks.
●Adjust the position of the front 
seats before folding down the rear seatbacks so that the front 
seats do not int erfere with the 
rear seatbacks when folding down the rear seatbacks.
■After returning the rear seat-
back to the upright position
●Make sure that the seatback is 
securely locked in position by 
lightly pushing it back and forth.
If the seatback is not securely locked, the red marking will be 
visible on the seatback lock 
release button. Make sure that the 
red marking is  not visible.●Check that the seat belts are 
not twisted or caught in the 
seatback.
If the seat belt gets caught between the seatback’s securing hook and latch, it may damage 
the seat belt.
NOTICE
■When the right seatback is 
folded down
Make sure the luggage loaded in the enlarged tr unk will not dam-
age the webbing of the rear cen-
ter seat belt.

121 3-3. Adjusting the seats
■Front seats
1 Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2 Down
Push the head restraint down while 
pressing the lock release button .■Rear outside seats (adjust-
able type)
1 Up
2 Down
pressing the lock release button .
■Adjusting the height of the head 
restraints (front seats)
Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of 
the head restraint i s closest to the 
top of your ears. 
Pull the head restraint up while 
pressing the lock release button 
.Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
WARNING
■Head restraint precautions
regarding the head restraints. 
●Use the head restraints 
designed for each respective 
seat.
●Adjust the head restraints to the 
correct position at all times.
●After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them 
and make sure they are locked 
in position.
●Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Adjusting a head restraint
Removing the head 
restraints

122 3-3. Adjusting the seats
COROLLA_U■Rear outside seats (adjust-
able type)
Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button 
.
Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release 
button  when lowering the head 
restraint.■Rear outside seats (adjust-
able type)
Installing the head 

123 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
COROLLA_U3Before driving3-4.Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
1Hold the steering wheel and 
push the lever down.
2Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever up 
to secure the steering wheel.To sound the horn, press on or 
close to the  mark.Steering wheel
WARNING
■Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel 
while driving.Doing so may cause the driver to 
mishandle the vehicle and cause 
an accident, resul ting in death or 
serious injury.■After adjusting the steering 
wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly 
causing an accident, and resulting 
in death or seriou s injury. Also, 
the horn may not sound if the 
steering wheel is not securely 
locked.
Horn

124 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
COROLLA_UThe height of the rear view mir-
ror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.
Adjust the height of the rear 
view mirror by moving it up and down.
Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Reflected light from the head-lights of vehicles behind can be reduced by operating the lever.
Normal position
Anti-glare position
Auto anti-glare inside rear 
view mirror
Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Changing automatic anti-glare 
function mode
On/off
When the automatic anti-glare func-
tion is in ON mode, the indicator  
illuminates. The func tion will set to 
ON mode each time the engine switch is turned to ON.
Pressing the button turns the func-
tion to off mode. (The indicator  
also turns off.)Inside rear view mirror
The rear view mirror’s posi-
tion can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirma-tion of the rear view.
Adjusting the height of 
rear view mirror
WARNING
Do not adjust the position of the 
mirror while driving.Doing so may lead to mishandling 
of the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
Anti-glare function

125 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
COROLLA_U3Before driving■To prevent sensor error (vehi-
cles with an auto anti-glare 
inside rear view mirror)
To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.
1To select a mirror to adjust, 
turn the switch.
Left
RightOutside rear view mir-
rors
WARNING
while driving.Failure to do so may result in loss 
of control of the vehicle and cause 
an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not adjust th e mirrors while 
driving.
●Do not drive wit h the mirrors 
folded.
●Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended 
and properly adjusted before 
driving.

126 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
COROLLA_U2To adjust the mirror, operate 
the switch.
Up
Right
DownLeft
■Mirror angle can be adjusted 
when
The engine switch is in ACC or ON.
■When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view 
mirror defoggers)
The outside rear v iew mirrors can 
be cleared using the mirror defog-gers. Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear 
view mirror defoggers. ( P.388, 
392)
Push the mirror back in the 
direction of the vehicle’s rear.WARNING
■When the mirror defoggers 
are operating (vehicles with 
outside rear view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become 
very hot and burn you.
Folding the mirrorsWARNING
■When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mir-ror malfunction, be careful not to 
get your hand caught by the mov-ing mirror.

127 3-5. Opening and closing the windows
COROLLA_U3Before driving3-5.Opening and closing the windows
The power windows can be 
opened and closed using the switches.Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
1Closing
2One-touch closing
*
3Opening
4One-touch opening*
*: To stop the window partway, 
operate the switch in the opposite 
direction.
■The power windows can be 
operated when
The engine switch is in ON.
■Operating the power windows after turning the engine off
The power windows can be oper-ated for approximately 45 seconds 
after the engine switch is turned to 
ACC or OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is 
opened.
■Jam protection function
If an object becomes jammed between the window and the win-dow frame while the  window is clos-
ing, window move ment is stopped 
and the window is opened slightly.
■Catch protection function
If an object becomes caught between the door and window while 
the window is opening, window movement is stopped.
■When the window cannot be 
opened or closed
When the jam protection function or catch protection function operates 
unusually and the door window can-not be opened or closed, perform 
the following operations with the power window swit ch of that door.
●Stop the vehicle. With the engine switch in ON, within 4 seconds of the jam protection function or 
catch protection f unction activat-
ing, continuously operate the 
power window switch in the 
one-touch closing direction or 
one-touch opening direction so that the door window can be 
opened and closed.
●If the door window cannot be opened and closed even when 
performing the above operations, perform the follo wing procedure 
for function initialization.
1Turn the engine switch to ON.
2Pull and hold the power window switch in the on e-touch closing 
direction and completely close 
the door window.
3Release the power window 
switch for a m oment, resume 
pulling the switch in the 
one-touch closing direction, and 
hold it there for approximately 6 seconds or more.
4Press and hold the power win-dow switch in the one-touch 
opening direction. After the door 
window is completely opened, continue holding  the switch for 
an additional 1 second or more.
5Release the power window switch for a m oment, resume Power windows
Opening and closing the 
power windows

128 3-5. Opening and cl osing the windows
COROLLA_Upushing the switch in the 
one-touch opening direction, and 
hold it there for a pproximately 4 
seconds or more.
6Pull and hold the power window 
switch in the one-touch closing 
direction again. After the door 
window is completely closed, continue holding the switch for a 
further 1 second or more.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from 
the beginning.If the window reverses and cannot 
be fully closed or opened, have the 
vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■Door lock linked window opera-
tion
●Vehicles without a smart key sys-tem: The power windows can be 
opened and closed using the key.* 
(P.104)
Vehicles with a smart key system: 
opened and closed using the 
mechanical key.* (P.514)
●The power windows can be 
opened using the wireless remote 
control.* (with a wireless remote 
control function) ( P.103)
*: These settings must be custom-
ized at your Toyota dealer.
Some functions can be customized. 
(P.548)
WARNING
in death or serious injury.■Closing the windows
●The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, 
including the operation for the 
passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially 
by a child, do not let a child 
operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other 
passengers to have body parts 
caught in the power window. Also, when ridin g with a child, it 
is recommended to use the win-dow lock switch. (
P.129)
●Check to make sure that all pas-sengers do not have any part of 
their body in a pos ition where it 
could be caught when a window 
is being operated.
●When using the wireless remote control (if equipped), key or 
mechanical key and operating 
the power windows, operate the power window after checking to 
make sure that t here is no pos-
sibility of any passenger having 
any of their body parts caught in 
the window. Also do not let a 
child operate window by the wireless remote control (if 
equipped), key or mechanical 
key. It is possib le for children 
and other passengers to get 
caught in the power window.
●When exiting the vehicle, turn 
the engine switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be 
accidental operation, due to 
mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.

129 3-5. Opening and closing the windows
This function can be used to 
prevent children from acciden-tally opening or closing a pas-senger window.
Press the switch.
The indicator  will come on and 
the passenger w indows will be 
locked.
The passenger windows can still be 
opened and closed using the driver’s switch even if the lock switch is on.■The power windows can be 
■When the battery is discon-nected
The window lock s witch is disabled. 
If necessary, press the window lock 
switch after reconnecting the bat-tery.WARNING
●Never use any part of your body 
to intentionally a ctivate the jam 
protection function.
●The jam protection function may 
not work if something gets 
jammed just before the window 
is fully closed. Be careful not to 
get any part o f your body 
jammed in the window.
●Never use any part of your body or clothing to intentionally acti-
vate the catch p rotection func-
tion.
●The catch protection function 
may not work if something gets 
caught just before the window is 
fully opened. Be careful not to get any part of your body or 
clothing caught in the window. 
Preventing accidental 
operation (window lock 
switch)

130 3-5. Opening and cl osing the windows
COROLLA_U*: If equipped
■Opening and closing
1Opens the moon roof*
The moon roof stops slightly before 
the fully open position to reduce wind noise. Press the switch again to fully open the moon roof.
2Closes the moon roof*
*: Lightly press either side of the 
moon roof switch  to stop the 
moon roof partway.
■Tilting up and down
1Tilts the moon roof up*2Tilts the moon roof down*
*: Lightly press e ither side of the 
moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.
■The moon roof can be operated 
when
■Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 s econds after the 
engine switch is turned to ACC or 
OFF.  It cannot, however, be oper-
ated once either front door is 
opened.
If an object is dete cted between the 
moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is closing or tilting down, 
travel is stopped and the moon roof 
opens slightly.
■Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sun-shade will open aut omatically when 
the moon roof is opened.
■Door lock linked moon roof operation
●Vehicles without a smart key sys-tem: The moon roof can be 
(P.104)
The moon roof can be opened 
and closed using the mechanical 
key.* (P.514)
●The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control.
* 
(P.103)
■When the moon roof does not 
close normally
Perform the following procedure:Moon roof*
Use the overhead switches 
to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and down.
Operating the moon roof

131 3-5. Opening and closing the windows
COROLLA_U3Before driving●If the moon roof closes but then 
re-opens slightly
1Stop the vehicle.
2Press and hold the “CLOSE” 
switch.*1
The moon roof will close, reopen 
and pause for approximately 10 sec-onds.
*2 Then it will close again, tilt 
up and pause for approximately 1 
second. Finally, it will tilt down, open 
and close.
3Check to make sure that the 
moon roof is completely closed 
and then release the switch.
●If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
2Press and hold the “UP” switch*1 
until the moon r oof moves into 
the tilt up position and stops.
3Release the “UP” switch once 
and then press and hold the “UP” 
switch again.*1
The moon roof will pause for 
approximately 10 se conds in the tilt 
up position.*2 Then it will adjust 
slightly and pause for approximately 
1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, 
open and close.
4Check to make sure that the 
*1:If the switch is released at the 
incorrect time, t he procedure will 
have to be performed again from 
the beginning.
*2:If the switch is re leased after the 
above mentioned 10 second pause, automati c operation will 
be disabled. In that case, press and hold the “CLOSE” or “UP” switch, and the mo on roof will tilt 
up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is com-pletely closed and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close 
even after perfo rming the above 
procedure correctly, have the vehi-
cle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
WARNING
tions.
■Opening the moon roof
●Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside 
the vehicle while it is moving.
●Do not sit on top of the moon 
roof.
■Opening and closing the moon roof
●The driver is responsible for moon roof opening and closing 
operations.
In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, 
do not let a child operate the 
moon roof. It is possible for chil-dren and other passengers to 
have body parts caught in the 
moon roof.

132 3-5. Opening and cl osing the windows
●Check to make sure that all pas-
sengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it 
could be caught when the moon 
roof is being operated.
●When using the wireless remote control, key or mechanical key and operating the moon roof, 
operate the moon roof after 
checking to make sure that there is no possi bility of any 
passenger having any of their body parts caught in the moon roof. Also, do n ot let a child 
operate moon roof by the wire-less remote control, key or mechanical key. It is possible for 
children and othe r passengers 
to get caught in the moon roof.
the engine switch off, carry the 
key and exit the vehicle along 
with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to 
mischief, etc., that may possibly 
lead to an accident.
●Never use any part of your body to intentionally a ctivate the jam 
protection function.●The jam protection function may 
caught just before the moon roof is fully closed. Also, the jam 
protection function is not 
designed to operate while the moon roof switch is being 
pressed. Take care so that your 
fingers, etc. do not get caught.

133
COROLLA_U4
4DrivingDriving
.4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle....... 134
Cargo and luggage ..... 142
Vehicle load limits ....... 145
Trailer towing............... 145
Dinghy towing ............. 146
Engine (ignition) switch 
(vehicles without a smart 
key system)............... 147
(vehicles with a smart key system)...................... 148
Continuously variable trans-
mission (vehicles without 
paddle shift switches)
.................................. 153
mission (vehicles with pad-
dle shift switches)...... 155
Manual transmission ... 160
Turn signal lever.......... 162
Parking brake.............. 163
Electric parking brake . 164
Brake Hold .................. 167
4-3. Operating the lights and 
wipers
Headlight switch.......... 170
Automatic High Beam . 173
Windshield wipers and 
washer....................... 1764-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
.................................. 178
4-5. Using the dr iving support 
systems
Toyota Safety Sense 2.0
.................................. 180
.................................. 187
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
.................................. 195
LDA (Lane Departure Alert 
with steering control) . 205
Dynamic radar cruise con-
trol with full-speed range
.................................. 213
trol ............................. 223
RSA (Road Sign Assist)
.................................. 233
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
.................................. 236
Rear view monitor system
.................................. 241
.................................. 249
Driving assist systems
.................................. 250
Winter driving tips........ 255

134 4-1. Before driving
COROLLA_U4-1.Before driving
■Starting the engine
P.147, 148
■Driving
Continuously variable trans-
mission
1With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. ( P.153)
2Release the parking brake. (P.163, 164)
3Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to acceler-ate the vehicle.
Manual transmission
1While depressing the clutch pedal, shift the shift lever to 1. (P.160)
3Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gen-tly depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-cle.■Stopping
Continuously variable trans-mission
1With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
2If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an 
extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P. ( P.153)
1While depressing the clutch 
pedal, depress the brake pedal.
extended period of time, shift the 
shift lever to N. ( P.160)
■Parking the vehicle
mission
1With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle completely.
2Set the parking brake (P.163, 164), and shift the 
shift lever to P. ( P.153)
Check the parking brake indicator 
is illuminated.
3Vehicles without a smart key 
system: Turn the engine switch to OFF to stop the engine.Vehicles with a smart key system: Press the engine switch to stop the engine.Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:
Driving procedure

135 4-1. Before driving
COROLLA_U4Driving4Slowly release the brake 
pedal.
5Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels 
as needed.
2Set the parking brake. (P.163, 164)
Check that the park ing brake indi-
cator is illuminated.
3Shift the shift lever to N. (P.160)
If parking on a hill, shift the shift 
lever to 1 or R and block the wheels 
as needed.
4Vehicles without a smart key 
system: Turn the engine switch to OFF to stop the engine.Vehicles with a smart key system: Press the engine switch to stop the engine.
5Slowly release the brake pedal.
6Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.■Starting off on a steep uphill
1Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.
Hill-start assist cont rol will operate. 
(P.251)
2Gently depress the accelera-tor pedal.
3Release the parking brake.
1Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to 1.
(P.251)
2Lightly depress the accelera-tor pedal at the same time as gradually releasing the clutch pedal.
■Driving in the rain
●Drive carefully whe n it is raining, 
because visibility will be reduced, 
the windows may become 
fogged-up,  and the r oad will be 
slippery.
●Drive carefully whe n it starts to 
rain, because the road surface will 
be especially slippery.
●Refrain from hig h speeds when 
driving on an expressway in the 
rain, because there may be a 
layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing 
the steering and brakes from 
operating properly.

136 4-1. Before driving
COROLLA_U■Engine speed while driving 
(vehicles with a continuously 
variable transmission)
In the following conditions, the 
engine speed may become high 
while driving. This is due to auto-matic up-shifting control or 
down-shifting implementation to 
meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
●The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
●When the accelerator pedal is released
●When the brake pedal is depressed while sport mode is 
selected
■Restraining the engine output 
(Brake Override System)
●When the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, the engine output may be 
restrained.
●A warning messag e is displayed 
on the multi-information display while the system is operating.
■Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start Control [vehicles 
with a continuously variable 
transmission])
●When the following unusual oper-ation is performed, the engine out-put may be restrained.
• When the shift lever is shifted from 
R to D, D to R, N to R, P to D, or P 
to R (D includes B
*1 or M*2) with 
the accelerator pedal depressed, 
a warning message appears on 
the multi-informat ion display. If a 
warning message is shown on the 
multi-information display, read the 
message and follo w the instruc-
tion.
• When the accelerator pedal is 
depressed too much while the 
vehicle is in reverse.
*1:Vehicles without paddle shift 
switches
*2:Vehicles with paddle shift switches
●While Drive-Start Control is being 
activated, your v ehicle may have 
trouble escaping from the mud or 
fresh snow. In such case, deacti-
vate TRAC ( P.251) to cancel 
Drive-Start Cont rol so that the 
vehicle may become able to escape from the mud or fresh 
snow.
■Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:
●For the first 186 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
●For the first 621 miles (1000 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high 
speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.• Do not drive continuously in low 
gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed 
for extended periods.
■Operating your v ehicle in a for-
eign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle 
registration laws and confirm the 
availability of the correct fuel. (P.526)
WARNING
tions.
■When starting the vehicle 
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents 
the vehicle from creeping.

137 4-1. Before driving
COROLLA_U4DrivingWARNING
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not drive if y ou are unfamil-
iar with the location of the brake 
and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the 
accelerator pedal instead of the 
brake pedal will result in sudden 
acceleration that may lead to an accident.
• When backing up, you may twist 
your body around, leading to a 
difficulty in operating the pedals. 
Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct 
driving posture even when mov-ing the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake 
and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using 
your right foot. Depressing the 
brake pedal using your left foot 
may delay respon se in an emer-
gency, resulting in an accident.
●Do not drive the vehicle over or 
stop the vehicle near flammable 
materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be 
extremely hot. These hot parts 
may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.●During normal driving, do not 
turn off the engine. Turning the 
engine off while  driving will not 
cause loss of steering or brak-
ing control, but the power assist 
to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to 
steer and brake, so you should 
pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an 
emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the 
vehicle in the normal way: 
P.472
●Use engine braking (shift posi-
tion B*1 or downshift*2, 3) to 
maintain a safe speed when 
driving down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to over-
heat and lose effectiveness. 
(P.153, 155, 160)
*1:Vehicles with a continuously 
variable transmission (without 
*2:Vehicles with a continuously 
variable transmission (with paddle shift switches)
*3:Vehicles with a manual trans-
mission
●Do not adjust the positions of 
the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view 
mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.
●Always check that all passen-
gers’ arms, heads or other parts 
of their body are not outside the vehicle.

138 4-1. Before driving
●Do not drive in excess of the 
speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not 
drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) 
unless your vehicle has high-speed capabilit y tires. Driv-
ing over 85 mp h (140 km/h) 
may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to 
determine whether the tires on 
your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before 
driving at such speeds.
■When driving on slippery 
road surfaces
●Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability 
to control the vehicle.
●Sudden acceleration, engine 
braking due to shifting, or changes in engine speed could 
cause the vehicle to skid.
●After driving through a puddle, 
lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes 
are functioning properly. Wet 
brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning prop-
erly. If the brakes on only one 
side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may 
be affected.
■When shifting the shift lever
●Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission: Do not let 
the vehicle roll backward while a forward driving position is 
selected, or roll forward while 
the shift lever is in R.Doing so may cause the engine 
to stall or lead to poor brake and 
steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the 
vehicle.●Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission: Do not 
shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the trans-
mission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
●Do not shift the sh ift lever to R 
while the vehicle is moving for-ward.Doing so can damage the trans-
mission and may result in a loss 
of vehicle control.
●Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle 
is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the trans-mission and may result in a loss 
●Moving the shift lever to N while 
the vehicle is moving will disen-gage the engine from the trans-
mission. Engine braking is not 
available when N is selected.
●Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission: Be care-
ful not to shift the shift lever with 
the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift 
lever to any positions other than 
P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle 
that may cause an accident and 
result in death or serious injury.
■If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad 
wear indicators)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as 
soon as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the 
pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle 
when the wear limits of the brake 
pads and/or those  of the brake 
discs are exceeded.

139 4-1. Before driving
■When the vehicle is stopped
●Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other 
than P (continuously variable transmission) or N, the vehicle 
may accelerate suddenly and 
unexpectedly, causing an acci-dent.
●Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission: In order 
to prevent accidents due to the 
vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake 
pedal while the engine is run-
ning, and apply the parking brake as necessary.
●If the vehicle is stopped on an 
incline, in order to prevent acci-
dents caused by the vehicle roll-ing forward or backward, always 
depress the brake pedal and 
securely apply the parking brake as needed.
●Avoid revving or racing the 
engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is 
stopped may cause the exhaust 
system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible 
material is nearby.
■When the vehicle is parked
●Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft 
drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the fol-
lowing:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette 
lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the 
vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.• Soft drink cans may fracture, 
causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short cir-
cuit in the vehicl e’s electrical 
components.
●Do not leave cigarette lighters in 
the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter 
is in a place such as the glove 
box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is 
loaded or the se at is adjusted, 
causing a fire.
●Do not attach adhesive discs to 
the windshield or windows. Do 
not place containers such as air 
fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive 
discs or containers may act as 
lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.
●Do not leave a door or window 
open if the curved glass is 
coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored one. 
Reflected sunlight may cause 
the glass to act a s a lens, caus-
ing a fire.
●Vehicles with a continuously 
variable transmission: Always 
apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the 
engine and loc k the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unat-
tended while the engine is run-
ning.
If the vehicle is parked with the shift lever in P but the parking 
brake is not set, the vehicle may 
start to move, possibly leading to an accident.
Vehicles with a manual trans-
mission: Always apply the park-ing brake, stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
tended while the engine is run-ning.

140 4-1. Before driving
●Do not touch the  exhaust pipes 
while the engine is running or 
immediately after turning the 
engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
■When taking a nap in the vehi-cle
Always turn the engine off. Other-wise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or dep ress the acceler-
ator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the 
vehicle is parked in a poorly venti-
lated area, exhaust gases may 
collect and enter the vehicle, lead-
ing to death or a serious health 
hazard.
■When braking
●When the brakes a re wet, drive 
more cautiously.Braking distance increases 
when the brakes  are wet, and 
this may cause one side of the 
vehicle to brake differently than 
the other side. Also, the parking 
brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
●If the brake booster device does 
not operate, do not follow other 
vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require brak-
ing.
In this case, braking is still pos-sible, but the brake pedal 
should be depressed more 
firmly than usual. Also, the brak-ing distance will increase. Have 
your brakes fixed immediately.
●Do not pump the brake pedal if 
the engine stalls.Each push on the brake pedal 
uses up the reserve for the 
power-assisted brakes.●The brake system consists of 2 
individual hydraulic systems; if 
one of the systems fails, the other will still ope rate. In this 
case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance 
will increase. Have your brakes 
fixed immediately.
■If the vehicle becomes stuck
Do not spin the wheels exces-
sively when a driven wheel is up in the air, or the vehicle is stuck in 
sand, mud, etc. This may damage 
the driveline components or pro-pel the vehicle forward or back-
ward, causing an accident.
NOTICE
■When driving the vehicle 
●Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same 
time during driving, as this may restrain the engine output.
●Do not use the accelerator 
pedal or depress the accelera-
tor and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on 
a hill.
(vehicles with a manual trans-mission)
time during driving, as this may 
restrain the engine output.
●Do not shift gea rs unless the 
clutch pedal is fully depressed. 
After shifting, do not release the 
clutch pedal abruptly. Doing so may damage the clutch, trans-
mission and gears.

141 4-1. Before driving
COROLLA_U4DrivingNOTICE
●Observe the following precau-
tions.Failure to do so may cause 
excessive premature wear or 
damage to the clutch, eventu-ally making it difficult to acceler-
ate and start off from a stop. 
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
• Do not rest your foot on the 
clutch pedal or depress it any time other than when shifting.
Doing so may cause clutch trou-
ble.
• Do not use any gear other than 
the 1st gear when starting off 
and moving forward. 
Doing so may damage the clutch.
• Do not use the clutch pedal to 
adjust vehicle speed.Doing so may damage the clutch.
• When stopping the vehicle with 
the shift lever in  a position other 
than N, make sure to fully depress the clutch pedal and 
stop the vehicle using the 
brakes.
●Do not shift the shift lever to R without the vehicle completely 
stopped.
Doing so may damage the clutch, transmission and gears.
■When parking the vehicle 
(vehicles with a  continuously 
Always set the parking brake and 
shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to 
move or the vehi cle may acceler-
ate suddenly if the accelerator 
pedal is accidentally depressed.■Avoiding damage to vehicle 
parts
●Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold 
it there for an extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the 
power steering motor.
●When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible 
to avoid damaging the wheels, 
underside of the vehicle, etc.
■If you get a flat tire while driv-ing
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situat ions. Hold the 
steering wheel firmly and gradu-ally depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
●It may be difficult to control your 
vehicle.
●The vehicle will make abnormal 
sounds or vibrations.
●The vehicle will lean abnor-
mally.
Information on what to do in case 
of a flat tire ( P.503)
■When encountering flooded 
roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after h eavy rain etc. 
Doing so may cause the following 
serious damage to the vehicle:
●Engine stalling
●Short in electrical components
●Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a 
flooded road and the vehicle becomes flooded or stuck in mud 
or sand, be sure to have your Toy-
ota dealer check the following:

142 4-1. Before driving
COROLLA_UCargo capacity depends on the 
total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load 
capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct 
Load Limit —
(1) Locate the statement “The 
combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your 
vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined 
weight of the driver and passen-gers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined 
weight of the driver and passen-gers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals 
the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” 
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passen-gers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − NOTICE
●Brake function
●Changes in the quantity and 
quality of the eng ine oil, tran-
saxle fluid, clutch fluid, etc.
●Lubricant condition for the bear-
ings and suspension joints 
(where possible), and the func-tion of all joints , bearings, etc.Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following 
information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load:
Capacity and distribution

143 4-1. Before driving
COROLLA_U4Driving750 (5   150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined 
weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing 
a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehi-cle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (P.145)
Toyota does not recommend towing 
a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity (vehicle 
capacity weight) ( P.524)
When 2 people with the com-bined weight of A lb. (kg) are rid-ing in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:
B
*2 lb. (kg) - A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. 
(kg)
*1:A =Weight of people
*2:B =Total load capacity
*3:C =Available cargo and luggage 
load
In this condition,  if 3 more passen-
gers with the combined weight of D 
lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:
C lb. (kg) - D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. 
(kg)
*4:D =Additional weight of people
*5:E =Available cargo and luggage 
load
As shown in the example above, 
if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and lug-gage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the num-ber of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.Calculation formula for 
your vehicle

144 4-1. Before driving
■Things that must not be car-
ried in the trunk
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:
●Receptacles co ntaining gaso-
line
●Aerosol cans
■Storage precautions
Observe the following precau-tions.Failure to do so m ay prevent the 
pedals from be ing depressed 
properly, may block the driver’s vision, or may result in items hit-
ting the driver or passengers, pos-
sibly causing an accident.
●Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.
●To prevent cargo and luggage 
from sliding forward during 
braking, do not stack anything in the enlarged trunk. Keep cargo 
and luggage low, as close to the 
floor as possible.
●When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be 
placed directly behind the front 
seats.
●Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the follo wing locations.
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear 
seats (when stacking items)
• On the package tray• On the instrument panel• On the dashboard
●Secure all items in the occupant 
compartment.●Never allow anyon e to ride in 
the enlarged trunk. It is not 
designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with 
their seat belts  properly fas-
tened.
■Capacity and distribution
●Do not exceed the maximum 
axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
●Even if the total load of occu-
pant’s weight and the cargo 
load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load 
unevenly. Improper loading may 
cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may 
cause death or serious injury.

145 4-1. Before driving
COROLLA_U4Driving
■Total load capacity and seating 
capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (P.453)Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include 
total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity.
Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): P.524
Total load capacity means the 
combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.
Seating capacity: 5 occu-
pants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the max-
imum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
Towing capacity
Toyota does no t recommend tow-
ing a trailer with your vehicle.
Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occu-pants.
WARNING
■Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to 
the tires, but also degrade steer-ing and braking ability, resulting in 
an accident.Trailer towing
Toyota does not recom-
mend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer tow-ing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.

146 4-1. Before driving
COROLLA_UDinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed 
to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.
NOTICE
■To avoid serious damage to 
Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground.

147 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_U4Driving4-2.Driving procedures
1Check that the parking brake 
is set. (P.163, 164)
2Check that the shift lever is in P (continuously variable transmission) or N (manual transmission).
3Firmly depress the brake pedal (continuously variable transmission) or clutch pedal (manual transmission).
4Turn the engine switch to START to start the engine.
■If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may 
not have been deactivated. ( P.67) 
Contact your Toyota dealer.
■When the steering lock cannot 
be released
When starting the engine, the 
engine switch may seem stuck in 
OFF. To free it, turn the key while 
turning the steerin g wheel slightly 
left and right.
1OFF (“LOCK” position)
The steering wheel is locked and 
the key can be removed. (vehicles with a continuously variable trans-mission: The key can be removed only when the shift lever is in P.)
2ACC (“ACC” position)
Some electrical components such Engine (ignition) 
switch (vehicles with-out a smart key sys-
tem)
Starting the engineWARNING
■When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sit-
ting in the driver’s seat. Do not 
depress the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under 
any circumstances. Doing so may 
cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
●Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overhea t the starter 
and wiring system.
●Do not race a cold engine.
●If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle checked by your 
Toyota dealer immediately.
Changing the engine 
switch positions

148 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_Uas the audio system can be used.
3ON ( “ON” position)
All electrical com ponents can be 
used.
4START ( “START” position)
For starting the engine.
■Turning the key  from ACC to 
OFF
1 Shift the shift lever to P (continu-
ously variable transmission) or N 
(manual transmission).
2Push in the key and turn it to 
OFF.
■Key reminder function
A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door 
is opened while the engine switch is 
in OFF or ACC to r emind you to 
remove the key.1Check that the parking brake 
3Firmly depress the brake 
pedal (continuously variable 
transmission) or clutch pedal (manual transmission).
 and a message will be dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play. If it is not displayed, the 
engine cannot be started.
4Press the engine switch 
shortly and firmly.
When operating the engine switch, 
one short, firm press is enough. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.
The engine will crank until it starts 
or for up to 30 seconds, whichever 
is less.
Continue depressing the brake 
pedal (continuously variable trans-
mission) or clutch pedal (manual transmission) unt il the engine is 
completely started.WARNING
■Caution when driving
Do not turn the engine switch to OFF while driving. If, in an emer-
gency, you must turn the engine 
off while the vehicle is moving, turn the engine switch only to 
ACC to stop the engine. An acci-
dent may result i f the engine is 
stopped while driving. ( P.472)
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the engine switch in ACC or ON for long periods of time without the  engine running.Engine (ignition) 
switch (vehicles with a smart key system)
Performing the following 
operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the engine or changes engine switch modes.
Starting the engine

149 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_U4DrivingThe engine can be started from any 
engine switch mode.
●The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. 
(P.67)
●If a message related to start-up is 
shown on the multi-information display, read the message and fol-
low the instructions.
■If the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started using the smart key system. Refer to 
P.515 to restart the engine.
■Electronic key battery depletion
P.97
P.113
■Notes for the entry function
P.114
■Steering lock function
●After turning the engine switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steer ing wheel will be 
locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the engine switch again automatically can-cels the steering lock.
●When the steering lock cannot be released, “Push Engine Switch 
while Turning Steering Wheel in 
Either Direction” will be displayed 
on the multi-information display. 
Press the engine  switch shortly 
and firmly while turning the steer-ing wheel left and right.
●To prevent the steering lock motor 
from overheating, operation of the motor may be suspended if the 
engine is turned on and off repeat-
edly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from operating 
the engine switch.  After about 10 
seconds, the steering lock motor 
will resume functioning.
■Electronic key battery
P.458
■Operation of the engine switch
●If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the engine switch mode may not change or the 
engine may not start.
●If attempting to res tart the engine 
engine switch off, the engine may not start in some cases. After turn-
ing the engine switch off, please wait a few seconds before restart-ing the engine.
If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting, 
refer to P.513.
WARNING
any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death o r serious injury.

150 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_UContinuously variable trans-
mission
1Stop the vehicle completely.
shift lever to P.
3Press the engine switch.
The engine will stop, and the meter display will be extinguished.4Release the brake pedal and 
check that “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION ON” is not shown on the multi-information dis-play.
3Shift the shift lever to N. 
(P.160)
4Press the engine switch.
The engine will stop, and the meter 
display will be extinguished.
5Release the brake pedal and 
check that “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION ON” is not shown on the multi-information dis-play.WARNING
If engine failure o ccurs while the 
vehicle is moving, do not lock or 
open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete 
stop. Activation of the steering 
lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death 
NOTICE
●If the engine becomes difficult to 
start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle checked by your 
■Symptoms indicating a mal-
function with the engine switch
If the engine switch seems to be operating somewh at differently 
than usual, such  as the switch 
sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
Stopping the engineWARNING
■Stopping the engine in an emergency
●If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the 
vehicle, press and hold the 
engine switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 
times or more in succession. 
(P.472)
However, do not touch the 
engine switch while driving 
except in an emergency. Turn-ing the engine off while driving 
will not cause loss of steering or 
braking control, but the power assist to these s ystems will be 
lost. This will make it more diffi-cult to steer and  brake, so you 
should pull over and stop the 
vehicle as soon as it is safe to 
do so.

151 4-2. Driving procedures
Modes can be changed by 
pressing the engine switch with brake pedal (continuously vari-able transmission) or clutch pedal (manual transmission) released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)1OFF
*
The emergency flashers can be 
used.
2ACC
Some electrical components such 
as the audio sys tem can be used.
“ACCESSORY” will be displayed on the multi-information display.
3ON
All electrical components can be used.
“IGNITION ON” will be displayed on 
the multi-information display.
*: Vehicles with a continuously vari-
able transmission : If the shift 
lever is in a position other than P when turning off the engine, the engine switch will be turned to ACC, not to off.
■Auto power off function
Continuously variable transmission: 
If the vehicle is left in ACC for more 
than 20 minutes or ON (the engine is not running) for more than an WARNING
●If the engine switch is operated while the vehicle is running, a warning message will be shown 
on the multi-info rmation display 
and a buzzer sounds.
variable transmission: To restart 
the engine after performing an 
emergency shutdown, shift the shift lever to N and then press the engine switch.
●Vehicles with a manual trans-
mission: To restart the engine 
after performing  an emergency 
shutdown, depress the clutch 
pedal and then press the engine 
switch.
Changing engine switch 
modes

152 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_Uhour with the shift lever in P, the 
engine switch will automatically turn 
off. However, this function cannot 
entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the 
engine switch in ACC or ON for long periods of time when the engine is not running.
Manual transmission : If the vehicle 
is left in ACC for  more than 20 min-
utes or ON (the engine is not run-
ning) for more than an hour, the engine switch will automatically turn 
If the engine is stopped with the 
shift lever in a position other than P, the engine switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACC. Perform the fol-lowing procedure to turn the switch off:1Check that the parking brake is set.
2Shift the shift lever to P.
3Check that “ACCESSORY” is displayed on the multi-infor-mation display and press the engine switch shortly and firmly.
4Check that “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION ON” on the multi-information display are off.
NOTICE
●Do not leave the engine switch 
in ACC or ON for long periods of 
time without the engine running.
●If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION 
ON” is displayed on the multi-informatio n display, the 
engine switch is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the engine switch off.
When stopping the engine 
with the shift lever in a 
position other than P (vehicles with a continu-
ously variable transmis-
sion)NOTICE
Do not stop the engine when the 
shift lever is in a position other 
than P. If the engine is stopped in another shift lever position, the 
engine switch will not be turned 
off but instead be  turned to ACC 
mode. If the vehicle is left in ACC, 
battery dischar ge may occur.

153 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_U4Driving*: If equipped
*: To improve fuel efficiency and 
reduce noise, shift the shift lever 
to D for normal driving.
■When driving with the dynamic 
radar cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control with 
full-speed range activated
Even when switching the driving mode to sport mode with the intent 
of enabling engine braking, engine braking will not o ccur because 
dynamic radar cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range will not be can-celed. (P.249)
■Restraining sudden start 
(Drive-Start Control)
P.136
■G AI-SHIFT
G AI-SHIFT automat ically selects a 
suitable gear for sporty driving according to drive r’s input and driv-
ing conditions. G AI-SHIFT operates 
automatically when th e shift lever is 
in D and sport mode is selected for the driving mode. (Selecting normal 
mode or shifting the shift lever to the 
B position cancels this function.)
■After recharging/reconnecting 
the battery
P.518
■Continuously variable transmis-sion fail-safe control
The system detects  malfunctioning 
parts targeted (all of the solenoids that perform the shifting function) by 
the On-Board Diagnostics, and per-
forms fail-safe mechanisms, such as restricting the shifting function or 
transmission ratio control.
In this event, the malfunction indica-tor lamp turns on.Continuously variable 
transmission (vehi-cles without paddle 
*
Select the shift position 
depending on your purpose and situation.
Shift position purpose 
and functions
Shift posi-
tionObjective or function
PParking the vehi-
cle/starting the engine
R Reversing
NNeutral
(Condition in which the 
power is not transmit-
ted)
D Normal driving*
BApplying moderate 
engine braking driving 
down hillsWARNING
Do not accelerate or shift the shift gears suddenly. 
Sudden changes in engine brak-ing may cause the vehicle to spin 
or skid, resulting  in an accident.

154 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_U:While the engine switch is in 
ON and the brake pedal 
depressed*, shift the shift lever 
while pushing the shift release button on the shift knob.
:Shift the shift lever while 
pushing the shift release button on the shift knob.
:Shift the shift lever normally.
When shifting the shift lever 
between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped and the brake pedal is depressed.
*: For the vehicle  be able to be 
shifted from P, the brake pedal must be depresse d before the 
shift release button is pushed. If the shift release button is pushed first, the shift lock will not be released.■Shift lock system
The shift lock syste m is a system to 
prevent accidental operation of the 
shift lever in starting.
The shift lever can be shifted from P only when the engi ne switch is in 
ON and the brake pedal is being depressed.
■If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
First, check whether the brake pedal is being depressed.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted 
with your foot on the brake pedal, 
there may be a p roblem with the 
shift lock system. Have the vehicle 
inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as 
an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lev er can be shifted.
Releasing the shift lock:
1Set the parking brake.
2Turn the engine switch off.
3Depress the brake pedal.
4Ply the cover up with a flathead 
screwdriver or equivalent tool.To prevent damaging the cover, 
wrap the tip of the flathead 
screwdriver with a tape. 
5Press and hold the shift lock 
override button and then push 
the shift release button on the shift knob.
The shift lever can  be shifted while Shifting the shift lever

155 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_U4Drivingthe button is pressed.
P.249*: If equipped
■To protect the continuously 
variable transmission
If the continuously variable trans-mission fluid temperature is high, “Transmission Oil Temp. High Stop 
in a Safe Place and See Owner’s 
Manual” will be dis played on the 
multi-information display and the 
vehicle will go into  transmission pro-
tection mode automatically. Have WARNING
■To prevent an accident when releasing the shift lock
Before pressing the shift lock override button, make sure to set 
the parking brake and depress the 
brake pedal.If the accelerator pedal is acci-
dentally depressed instead of the 
brake pedal when the shift lock override button is pressed and the 
shift lever is shifted out of P, the 
vehicle may suddenly start, possi-bly leading to an accident result-
ing in death or serious injury.
Selecting the driving 
modeContinuously variable 
transmission (vehi-cles with paddle shift 
switches)
*
NNeutral
ted)
M10-speed sport sequen-
tial shiftmatic mode 
driving (P.158)

156 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_Uthe vehicle inspected by your Toyota 
dealer.
■When driving with dynamic 
radar cruise control with 
Even when switching the driving mode to sport mode with the intent of enabling engine braking, engine 
braking will not o ccur because 
dynamic radar cruise control with 
full-speed rang e will not be can-
celed. (P.249)
■Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start Control)
P.136
G AI-SHIFT automatically selects a 
suitable gear for sporty driving 
according to driver’s input and driv-ing conditions. G AI-SHIFT operates 
in D and sport mode is selected for 
the driving mode. (Selecting normal 
M position cancels this function.)
■After recharging/reconnecting the battery
P.518:While the engine switch is in 
between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped and the brake pe dal is depressed.
*: For the vehicle be able to be 
shifted from P, the brake pedal must be depressed before the shift release button is pushed. If the shift release button is pushed first, the shift lock will not be released.WARNING
Do not accelerate o r shift the shift 
gears suddenly. 
Sudden changes in engine brak-
ing may cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting in an accident.Shifting the shift lever

157 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_U4Driving■Shift lock system
The shift lock system is a system to 
The shift lever can be shifted from P only when the engine switch is in 
ON and the brake pedal is being 
depressed.
with your foot on the brake pedal, there may be a pr oblem with the 
shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
4Ply the cover up  with a flathead 
screwdriver or equivalent tool.
To prevent damaging the cover, 
The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.
P.249
To drive using temporary shift 
range selection, operate the “-” or “+” paddle shift switch. When the “-” paddl e shift switch 
is operated, the shift range switches to a range that enables engine braking force that is suit-able to driving conditions. When the “+” paddle shift switch is operated, the shift range switches to a range that is one WARNING
■To prevent an accident when 
releasing the shift lock
Before pressing the shift lock override button, m ake sure to set 
the parking brake and depress the brake pedal.If the accelerator pedal is acci-
mode
Selecting shift ranges in the D position

158 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_Urange higher than the current 
range. Changing the shift range allows restriction of the highest gear, preventing unnecessary upshift-ing and enabling the level of engine braking force to be selected.
1Upshifting
2Downshifting
The selected shift range, from D1 to 
D10, will be dis played on the 
■Gear step functions
●You can choose from 10 levels of 
engine braking force.
●A lower gear s tep will provide 
greater engine braking force than 
a higher gear step, and the engine speed will also increase.
■Deactivation of temporary 
10-speed Sport Sequential 
Shiftmatic mode
In the following situations, tempo-rary 10-speed Sport Sequential Shiftmatic mode will be deactivated:
●When the vehicle is stopped
●If the accelerator pedal is 
depressed continuously for more 
than a certain amount of time while in one gear range
●If the accelerator pedal is depressed abruptly and heavily●When the shift lever is shifted to a position other than D
●When the “+” paddle shift switch is operated for a certain amount of 
time continuously
To enter 10-speed sport 
sequential shiftmatic mode, shift the shift lever to M position. Gear steps can then be selected by operating the shift lever or paddle shift switches, allowing you to drive in the gear step of your choosing.
The gear changes once every time 
the shift lever or paddle shift switch is operated.
The selected gear step, from M1 to 
M10, will be dis played on the 
However, even when in the M 
position, the gear steps will be automatically changed if the Changing gears in the M 
position

159 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_U4Drivingengine speed is too high, or too 
low.
greater engine braking force than a higher gear step, and the engine 
speed will also increase.
■When the vehic le comes to a 
stop with the shift lever in the M 
position
●The transmission will automati-cally downshift to M1 once the 
vehicle is stopped.
●After a stop, the vehicle will start off in M1.
●When the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is set at M1.
■Downshifting restriction warn-
ing buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting opera-tion may sometimes b e restricted. In 
some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever or paddle shift switch is 
operated. (A buzzer will sound 
twice.)
■If the 10-speed sport sequential shiftmatic mode indicator does not come on even after shifting 
the shift lever to M
This may indicate a malfunction in the continuously variable transmis-
sion system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer 
(In this situation, the transmission will operate in t he same manner as 
when the shift lever is in D.)
The system detects malfunctioning parts targeted (all of the solenoids that perform the shifting function) by 
the On-Board Diagnostics, and per-forms fail-safe mechanisms, such 
as restricting the shifting function or 
In this event, the malfunction indica-tor lamp turns on.

160 4-2. Driving procedures
■Shifting the shift lever
1Depress the clutch pedal 
firmly.
2Shift the shift lever to the desired gear.
Make sure to only shift gears 
sequentially.
3Gradually release the clutch 
pedal.
It is difficult to shift in R, shift the 
lever to N, release the clutch pedal momentarily, and then try again.
■Shifting the shift lever to R
Shift the shift lever to R while lift-
ing up the ring section.■Maximum allowable speeds
Observe the following maximum 
allowable speeds in each gear when 
maximum acceleration is necessary.
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FAE) engine
2.0 L 4-cylinder (M20A-FKS) engineManual transmission*
Operating instructions
tionMaximum speed
mph (km/h)
1 30 (48)
2 57 (91)
3 83 (133)
mph (km/h)
1 35 (56)
2 61 (98)
3 91 (146)

161 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_U4DrivingThe iMT optimally controls the 
engine speed to suit the driver’s operation of the clutch pedal and shift lever, helping the driver to shift gears more smoothly.Additionally, when the clutch pedal is operated, the iMT helps reduce shift shock, allowing for lighter shift operations when driving on a winding road or incline.
Press the “iMT” switch.
The iMT indicator will illuminate in 
green.Press the switch again to cancel iMT.
■The iMT may not operate when
In the following situ ations, iMT may 
not operate. However, this does not 
indicate a malfunction.
●The clutch pedal is not fully 
depressed
●The clutch pedal is not fully released, such as if a foot is rest-
ing on the clutch pedal*
●Shift operation is performed after 
the vehicle has been coasting with 
the shift lever in NNOTICE
vehicle
When shifting gears, observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to the 
engine, manual transmission, 
and/or clutch.
●Do not shift the shift lever to R without depressing the clutch pedal.
●Do not lift up the ring section except when shifting the lever to 
R.
●Shift the shift lever to R only 
when the vehicle is stationary.
●Do not rest your hand on or hold the shift lever any time other 
than when shifting.
●In order to not cause the engine 
to overrev, make sure to only shift gears sequentially.
●Do not release the clutch pedal 
suddenly.iMT (Intelligent Manual 
Transmission) (if 
equipped)

162 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_U●The shift lever is not operated for 
a long time after  the clutch pedal 
is depressed
*: After the shift lever is moved, 
unless your foot is completely 
removed from the clutch pedal, the iMT may not operate and the engine speed m ay not be con-
trolled optimally for the next gear change.To enable the iMT, release the clutch pedal completely and then depress it again before operating 
the shift lever.
■If the iMT indicator illuminates 
in amber
The iMT may be temporarily unavailable or malfunctioning. Have 
the vehicle inspected at your Toyota 
dealer. 
1Right turn
2Lane change to the right 
(move the lever partway and release it)
The right hand s ignals will flash 3 
times.
3Lane change to the left (move the lever partway and release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3 
times.
4Left turn
■Turn signals can be operated 
when
■If the indicator flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal  lights has not WARNING
■Limitations of the iMT
iMT is not a syste m that prevents 
shift lever operation error or engine overrevving.
Depending on the situation, iMT 
may not operate normally and the shift position may not be changed 
smoothly. Overly relying on iMT 
may cause an unexpected acci-dent.Turn signal lever

163 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_U4Drivingburned out.
U.S.A.
Canada
1To set the parking brake, fully 
pull the parking brake lever while depressing the brake pedal.
2To release the parking brake, slightly raise the lever and lower it completely while pressing the button.
P.134
■Parking brake engaged warning 
buzzer
If the vehicle is dri ven at a speed of 
approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) or 
more with the parking brake 
engaged, a buzzer will sound.
“Release Parking Brake” will be dis-
play.Parking brake*

164 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_U■Usage in winter time
P.255
■Using the manual mode
The parking brake can be set 
and released manually.
U.S.A.
Canada
1Pull the switch to set the 
parking brake
The parking brake indicator and 
parking brake light will turn on.NOTICE
Fully release the parking brake. 
Driving the vehicl e with the park-
ing brake set will lead to brake 
components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.Electric parking 
brake*
The parking brake can be 
set or released automati-cally or manually.
In automatic mode, the parking brake can be set or released automatically. Also, even in automatic mode, the parking brake can be set or released manually.

165 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_U4DrivingPull and hold the parking brake 
switch if an emergency occurs and it is necessary to operate the park-ing brake while driving.
2Push the switch to release 
the parking brake
• Operate the parking brake switch 
while depressing the brake pedal.
• Using the parking brake auto-
matic release function, the park-
ing brake can be released by depressing the accelerator pedal. When using this function, slowly depress the accelerator pedal.
Make sure that t he parking brake 
indicator and par king brake light 
turn off.
■Turning automatic mode on
While the vehicle is stopped, 
pull and hold the parking brake 
switch until a message  is 
shown on the multi-information display (vehicles with a continu-ously variable transmission) or 
auto EPB OFF indicator  turn 
off (vehicles with a manual transmission)
When the automatic mode is 
turned on, the parking brake operates as follows.Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission
When the shift lever is moved out of P, the parking brake will be released, and the parking brake indicator and parking brake light will turn off.
When the shift lever is moved into P, the parking brake will be set, and the parking brake indicator and parking brake light will turn on.
Operate the shift lever with the vehicle stopped and the brake pedal depressed.
The parking brake may not operate 
automatically if the shift lever is moved quickly.In this case, it is  necessary to oper-
ate the parking brake switch. (P.164)
Vehicles with a manual trans-
mission
When the engine is off, the park-ing brake will be set, and the parking brake indicator and parking brake light turn on.
■Turning automatic mode off
While the vehicle is stopped and depressing the brake pedal, press and hold the parking 
brake switch until a message  
is shown on the multi-informa-tion display (vehicles with a con-tinuously variable transmission) 
or auto EPB OFF indicator  
comes on (vehicles with a man-ual transmission)

166 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_U■Parking brake operation
●When the engine switch is not in 
ON, the parking brake cannot be 
released using the parking brake 
switch.
●When the engine switch is not in ON, automatic mode (automatic brake setting and releasing [vehi-
cles with a continuously variable 
transmission]) is not available. 
■Parking brake automatic release function
The parking brake is automatically released when slowly depress the 
accelerator pedal.
The parking brake will be released 
automatically under the following 
conditions:
●The driver’s door is closed
●The driver is wearing the seat belt
●The shift lever is a forward or 
reverse position.
●The malfunction in dicator lamp or 
brake system warning light is not illuminated.
If the automatic release function does not operate, manually release 
the parking brake.
■If “Parking Brake Temporarily Unavailable” i s displayed on 
the multi-information display
If the parking brake is operated 
repeatedly over a short period of time, the system may  restrict opera-
tion to prevent overheating. If this happens, refrain from operating the parking brake. Nor mal operation will return after about 1 minute.
■If “Parking Brake Unavailable” is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display 
Operate the parking brake switch. If 
the message does not disappear 
after operating the switch several times, the system may be malfunc-
■Parking brake operation sound
When the parking brake operates, a motor sound (whirr ing sound) may 
be heard. This does not indicate a 
malfunction.
■Parking brake operation
●Depending on the engine switch position/mode, the parking brake 
indicator and parking brake light will turn on and stay on as 
described below: 
ON: Comes on until the parking brake is released.
Not in ON: Stays on for approxi-
mately 15 seconds. 
●When the engine switch is turned 
off with the parking brake set, the parking brake indicator and park-
ing brake light will stay on for 
about 15 seconds. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■When the parking brake switch 
malfunctions
Automatic mode (automatic brake setting and releas ing) will be turned 
on automatically.
P.134
buzzer
A buzzer will sound if  the vehicle is 
driven with the parking brake engaged. “Parking Brake ON” is dis-played on the multi-information dis-
play.

167 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_U4Driving■If the brake system warning 
light comes on
P.481
■Usage in winter time
P.255*: If equipped
Turn the brake hold system on
The brake hold standby indicator 
(green)  comes on. While the 
system is holding the brake, the brake hold operated indicator (yel-
low)  comes on. WARNING
■When parking the vehicle
Do not leave a child in the vehicle 
alone. The parking brake may be released unintentionally and there is the danger of the vehicle mov-
ing that may lead to an accident 
■Parking brake switch
Do not set any o bjects near the 
parking brake switch.Objects may inte rfere with the 
switch and may lead the parking brake to unexpectedly operate.
NOTICE
Before you leave the vehicle, set 
the parking brake, shift the shift 
lever to P (continuously variable transmission) or N (manual trans-
mission) and mak e sure that the 
vehicle does not move.
■When the system malfunc-
tions
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the warning messages.
■When the parking brake can-
not be released due to a mal-
function
components overheating, which 
may affect braking performance 
and increase brake wear.
Have the vehicle inspected by 
your Toyota dealer  immediately if 
this occurs.Brake Hold*
Continuously variable trans-
mission
The brake hold system keeps the 
brake applied when the shift lever is in D, B (vehicles without paddle shift switches), M (vehicles with paddle shift switches) or N with the system on and the brake pedal has been depressed to stop the vehicle. The system releases the b rake when the 
accelerator pedal is depressed with the shift leve r in D, B (vehi-
cles without paddle shift switches) or M (vehicles with paddle shift switches) to allow smooth start off.
Manual transmission
The brake hold system keeps the brake applied when the shift lever is in a forward driving position or N with the system on and the brake pedal has been depressed to stop the vehicle. The system releases the b rake when the 
accelerator pedal is depressed with the shift lever in a forward driving position  to allow smooth 
start off.
Enabling the system

168 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_U■Brake hold system operating 
conditions
The brake hold system cannot be turned on in the following condi-
tions:
●The driver’s doo r is not closed.
●The driver is not wearing the seat 
belt.
If any of the conditions above are detected when the  brake hold sys-
tem is enabled, the  system will turn 
off and the brake hold standby indi-
cator light will go of f. In addit ion, if 
any of the conditions are detected 
while the system is holding the 
brake, a warning buzzer will sound 
and a message will be shown on the multi-information display. The park-
ing brake will then be set automati-
cally.
■Brake hold function
●If the brake pedal is left released 
for a period of about 3 minutes 
after the system has started hold-
ing the brake, the parking brake 
will be set automat ically. In this 
case, a warning buzzer sounds 
and a message is shown on the 
multi-informat ion display.
●To turn the system  off while the 
system is holding the brake, firmly depress the brake pedal and press the button again.
●The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle wh en the vehicle 
is on a steep inclin e. In this situa-
tion, it may be necessary for the driver to apply the brakes. A warn-ing buzzer will sound and the multi-information display will 
inform the driver of this situation. If 
a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read 
the message and follow the 
instructions.
■When the parking brake is set automatically while the system 
is holding the brakes
Perform any of the following opera-tions to release the parking brake.
●Depress the accelerator pedal. (The parking brake will not be 
released automatically if the seat belt is not fastened.)
●Operate the parkin g brake switch 
with the brake pe dal depressed. 
Make sure that the parking brake indicator light goes off. ( P.164)
■When an inspection at your 
Toyota dealer is necessary
When the brake hold standby indi-cator (green) does  not illuminate 
even when the brake hold switch is 
pressed with the brake hold system 
operating conditions met, the sys-
tem may be malf unctioning. Have 
dealer.
■If “Brake Hold Malfunction 
Press Brake to Deactivate Visit Your Dealer” or “Brake Hold 
Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” 
is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your 
Toyota dealer.
■Warning messages and buzzers
Warning messages and buzzers are 
used to indicate a system malfunc-
tion or to inform the driver of the 
need for caution. If a warning mes-sage is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display, read the message and 
follow the instructions.

169 4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_U4Driving■If the brake hold operated indi-
cator flashes
P.487
WARNING
■When the vehicle is on a 
steep incline
When using the brake hold sys-tem on a steep incline exercise 
caution. The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle in such a situation.
■When stopped on a slippery 
road
The system cannot stop the vehi-cle when the gripping ability of the 
tires has been exceeded. Do not use the system when stopped on 
a slippery road.
NOTICE
The brake hold s ystem is not 
designed for use when parking 
the vehicle for a long period of time. Turning the engine switch off while the system i s holding the 
brake may release the brake, which would cause the vehicle to move. When operating the engine 
switch, depress the brake pedal, 
shift the shift lever to P (continu-ously variable transmission) or N 
(manual transmission) and set the 
parking brake.

170 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
COROLLA_U4-3.Operating the lights and wipers
Operating the  switch 
turns on the lights as follows:
U.S.A.
Canada
1  The headlights, daytime 
running lights ( P.170) and 
all the lights listed below turn 
on and off automatically. 
2  The side marker, park-
ing, LED accent (if equipped), tail, license plate, instrument panel lights, and daytime running lights (P.170) turn on.
3  The headlights and all 
lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on.
4  (U.S.A.) Off
 (Canada) The daytime 
running lights turn on. 
(P.170)
■AUTO mode can be used when
■Daytime running light system
●The daytime runn ing lights illumi-
nate using the same lights as the 
headlights and illu minate darker 
than the headlights.
●To make your vehicle more visible 
to other drivers  during daytime 
driving, the daytime running lights 
turn on automatically when all of 
the following conditions are met. 
(The daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.)
• The engine is running• The parking brake is released
• The headlight s witch is in the  
(Canada only),  or 
* posi-
tion
*: When the surroundings are bright
The daytime running lights remain 
on after they illumi nate, even if the 
parking brake is set again.
●For the U.S.A.: Daytime running 
lights can be turned off by operat-ing the switch.
●Compared to turning on the head-lights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability 
and consumes less electricity, so 
it can help improve fuel economy.Headlight switch
The headlights can be oper-
ated manually or automati-cally.

171 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
COROLLA_U4Driving■Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function prop-
erly if an object is placed on the sen-sor, or anything that blocks the 
sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interfere s with the sensor 
detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic head-
light system to malfunction.
■Automatic light off system
●When the headlights are on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after the driver’s door 
is opened and closed if the engine 
switch is turned  to ACC or OFF. 
(Vehicles with a wireless remote 
control: The lights turn off immedi-
ately if  on the key is pressed 
after all the doors are closed.)
●When only the tail lights are on: 
The tail lights tu rn off automati-
cally if the engine switch is turned 
to ACC or OFF an d the driver’s 
door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to ON, or turn the light switch off once and then back to 
 or .
■Light reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned to OFF or ACC and the driver’s door is opened while the 
lights are turned on.
■Automatic headlight leveling 
system (if equipped)
The level of the headlights is auto-matically adjusted according to the 
number of passengers and the load-
ing condition of the vehicle to 
ensure that the headlights do not interfere with o ther road users.
■Windshield wiper linked head-light illumination
When driving during daytime with 
the headlight switch turned to , if 
the windshield wipers are used, the 
headlights will turn o n automatically 
after several se conds to help 
enhance the visibility of your vehi-cle.
In order to prevent the battery of the vehicle from discharging, if the 
headlights and/or tail lights are on when the engine switch is turned off 
the battery saving function will oper-
ate and automatically turn off all the lights after approximately 20 min-
utes. When the engine switch is 
turned to ON, the  battery-saving 
function will be disabled.
When any of the following are per-
formed, the battery-saving function is canceled once and then reacti-
vated. All the lights will turn off auto-
matically 20 minutes after the 
Battery- saving function has been 
reactivated:
●When the headlight switch is oper-ated
●When a door is opened or closed
(P.548)
NOTICE
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary w hen the engine 
is not running.

172 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
COROLLA_U1With the headlights on, push 
the lever away from you to turn on the high beams.
Pull the lever to ward you to the 
center position to turn the high 
beams off.
2Pull the lever toward you and 
release it to flash the high beams once.
You can flash the high beams with 
the headlights on or off.
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting 
System) secures excellent visi-
bility at intersections and on curves by automatically adjust-ing the direction of the light axis of the headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire’s angle as controlled by steering input.
AFS operates at speeds of approxi-
mately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.
Some functions can be customized. (P.548)Turning on the high beam headlights
AFS (Adaptive Front-light-ing System) (if equipped)

173 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
1Press the Automatic High 
Beam switch.2Push the lever away from you with the headlight switch 
in the  or  position.
The Automatic High Beam indicator 
will come on when the system is 
operating.
■Conditions to turn the high 
beams on/off automatically
●When all of the f ollowing condi-
tions are met, t he high beams will 
be turned on autom atically (after 
approximately 1 second):
• The vehicle speed is approxi-
mately 21 mph (34 km/h) or more.
• The area ahead of the vehicle is 
dark.
• There are no vehicles ahead with 
headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are few str eetlights on the 
road ahead.
●If any of the following conditions 
are met, the high beams will turn off automatically:
• The vehicle speed is below 
approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).
not dark.
• Vehicles ahead have their head-
lights or tail lights turned on.
• There are many streetlights on the 
■Camera sensor detection infor-mation
●The high beams m ay not be auto-
matically turned off in the following situations:
• When a vehicle suddenly appears Automatic High Beam
The Automatic High Beam 
uses a camera sensor located behind the upper portion of the windshield to assess the brightness of the lights of vehicles ahead, streetlights, etc., and auto-matically turns the high beams on or off as neces-sary.
WARNING
■Limitations of the Automatic 
High Beam
Do not overly rely on the Auto-matic High Beam. Always drive 
safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and turning the high 
beams on or off manually if nec-
essary.
■To prevent incorrect opera-tion of the Automatic High 
Beam system
Activating the Automatic 
High Beam

174 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
COROLLA_Ufrom around a curve
• When the vehicle is cut in front of 
by another vehicle
• When vehicles ahead cannot be 
detected due to repeated curves, 
road dividers or roadside trees
• When vehicles ahead appear in a 
faraway lane on a wide road
• When the lights of vehicles ahead 
are not on
●The high beams may be turned off 
if a vehicle ahead that is using fog lights without its headlights turned 
on is detected.
●House lights, streetlights, traffic signals, and illumi nated billboards 
or signs and other reflective 
objects may cause the high 
beams to change to the low 
beams, or the low beams to remain on.
●The following factors may affect the amount of time taken for the 
high beams to turn on or off:
• The brightness of the headlights, 
fog lights, and ta il lights of vehi-
cles ahead
• The movement and direction of 
vehicles ahead
• When a vehicle ahead only has 
operational lights on one side
• When a vehicle ahead is a 
two-wheeled vehicle
• The condition of the road (gradi-
ent, curve, condi tion of the road 
surface, etc.)
• The number of passengers and 
amount of luggage in the vehicle
●The high beams may turn on or off 
unexpectedly.
●Bicycles or similar vehicles may not be detected.
●In the following situations the sys-tem may not be abl e to correctly 
detect the surrounding brightness 
level. This may cause the low 
beams to remain on or the high beams to flash or dazzle pedestri-
ans or vehicles ahead. In such a 
case, it is necess ary to manually 
switch between the high and low 
beams.• When driving in inclement weather 
(heavy rain, snow, fog, sand-storms, etc.)
• When the windshi eld is obscured 
by fog, mist, ice, dirt, etc.
• When the windshield is cracked or 
damaged
• When the camera sensor is 
deformed or dirty
• When the temperature of the cam-
era sensor is extremely high
• When the surrounding brightness 
level is equal to that of headlights, 
tail lights or fog lights
• When headlights or tail lights of 
vehicles ahead are turned off, dirty, changing color, or not aimed 
properly
• When the vehicle is hit by water, 
snow, dust, etc. from a preceding vehicle
• When driving through an area of 
intermittently changing brightness and darkness
• When frequently and repeatedly 
driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with rough, bumpy 
or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel roads, 
etc.)
taking curves or driving on a wind-ing road
• When there is a h ighly reflective 
object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or mirror
• When the back of a preceding 
vehicle is highly reflective, such as a container on a truck
• When the vehicle’s headlights are 
damaged or dirty, or are not aimed properly
• When the vehicle is listing or titling 
due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed, etc.
• When the headlights are changed 
between the high beams and low 
beams repeatedly in an abnormal 
manner
• When the driver believes that the 
high beams may be flashing or dazzling pedestrians or other driv-
ers

175 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
COROLLA_U4Driving■Temporarily lowering sensor 
sensitivity
The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.
1Turn the engine s witch off while 
the following cond itions are met.
●The headlight switch is in  or 
.
●The headlight switch lever is in 
high beam position.
●Automatic High Beam switch is on.
2Turn the engine switch to ON.
3Within 60 seconds after step 2, 
repeat pulling the headlight 
switch lever to the original posi-
tion then pushing it to the high beam position qu ickly 10 times, 
then leave the lever in high beam position.
4If the sensitivity is changed, the Automatic High Beam indicator 
is turn on and off 3 times.
Automatic High Beam (headlights) may turn on even w hen the vehicle 
is stopped.
■Switching to the low beams
Pull the lever to its original posi-
tion.
will turn off.
Push the lever away from you to 
activate the Automatic High Beam 
system again.■Switching to the high 
beams
Press the Automatic High Beam switch.
will turn off and the  high beam indi-
cator will turn on.
Press the switch to activate the 
Automatic High Beam system again.
Turning the high beams on/off manually

176 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
COROLLA_UOperating the  lever oper-
ates the wipers or washer as fol-
lows.
1  (U.S.A.) or  (Canada)
Intermittent windshield wiper 
operation
2  (U.S.A.) or  (Canada)
Low speed windshield wiper operation
3  (U.S.A.) or  (Canada)
High speed windshield wiper operation
4  (U.S.A.) or  (Canada)
Temporary operation
5  Washer/wiper dual 
operation
Pulling the lever operates the wip-
ers and washer.
Wipers will automati cally operate a 
couple of times after the washer 
squirts.
Interval adjustment type only:
Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.
6Increases the intermittent 
windshield wiper frequency
7Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequencyWindshield wipers and 
washer
Operating the lever can use 
the windshield wipers or the washer.
NOTICE
■When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they 
may damage the windshield.
Operating the wiper lever

177 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
COROLLA_U4Driving■The windshield wiper and 
washer can be operated when
■If no windshield washer fluid 
sprays
Check that the wash er nozzles are 
not blocked if there is washer fluid in 
the windshield was her fluid reser-
voir.
■When stopping the engine in an 
emergency while driving
If the windshield wipers are operat-ing when the engine is stopped, the 
windshield wipers will operate in high speed operation. After the vehi-
cle is stopped, operation will return 
to normal when the engine switch is turned to ON.
WARNING
■Caution regarding the use of 
washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield 
becomes warm. The fluid may 
freeze on the windshield and 
cause low visibility. This may lead 
to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continu-ally as the washer fluid pump may 
overheat.
■When a nozzle becomes 
blocked
In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will 
be damaged.

178 4-4. Refueling
COROLLA_U4-4.Refueling
Turn the engine switch off and 
ensure that all the doors and windows are closed.
Confirm the type of fuel.
■Fuel types
P.535
■Fuel tank opening for unleaded 
gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only acco mmodates the spe-
cial nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■If the malfunction indicator lamp illuminates
The malfunction indicator lamp may illuminate erroneous ly if refueling is 
performed repeatedly when the fuel tank is nearly full.Opening the fuel tank 
cap
Perform the following steps 
to open the fuel tank cap:
Before refueling the vehi-
cle
WARNING
■When refueling the vehicle
while refueling the vehicle. Failure 
to do so may result in death or serious injury.●After exiting the vehicle and 
before opening the fuel door, 
touch an unpainted metal sur-face to discharge any static 
electricity. It is important to dis-
charge static electricity before refueling because sparks result-
ing from static electricity can 
cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
●Always hold the grips on the 
fuel tank cap and turn it slowly 
to remove it.A whooshing sound may be 
heard when the f uel tank cap is 
loosened. Wait until the sound 
cannot be heard before fully 
removing the cap. In hot 
weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and 
cause injury.
●Do not allow anyone that has 
not discharged static electricity from their body to come close to 
an open fuel tank.
●Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
●Do not smoke while refueling 
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
●Do not return to the vehicle or 
touch any person or object that 
is statically charged.This may cause static electricity 
to build up, resulting in a possi-
ble ignition hazard.
■When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:
●Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
●Stop filling the tank after the fuel 
nozzle automatically clicks off.

179 4-4. Refueling
COROLLA_U4Driving1Pull up the opener to open 
the fuel filler door.
2Turn the fuel tank cap slowly and remove it, then hang it on the back of the fuel filler door.After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click. Once the cap is released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction.
WARNING
●Do not top off the fuel tank.
NOTICE
■Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehi-cle, such as causing the emission 
control system to operate abnor-
mally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s 
painted surface.
Opening the fuel tank capClosing the fuel tank cap
WARNING
■When replacing the fuel tank 
cap
Do not use anything but a genu-ine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may 
cause a fire or other incident 
which may result i n death or seri-
ous injury.

180 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4-5.Using the driving support systems
■PCS (Pre-Collision System)
P.187
■LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)*
P.195
■LDA (Lane Departure Alert 
with steering control)*
P.205
■Automatic High Beam
P.173
■RSA (Road Sign Assist)*
P.233
■Dynamic radar cruise con-trol with full-speed range
*
P.213
■Dynamic radar cruise con-trol
*
P.223*: If equipped
Two types of sensors, located 
behind the front grille and wind-shield, detect information neces-sary to operate the drive assist systems.
Radar sensor
Front cameraToyota Safety Sense 
2.0
The Toyota Safety Sense 2.0 
consists of the following drive assist systems and contributes to a safe and comfortable driving experi-ence:
Driving assist systemWARNING
■Toyota Safety Sense 2.0
The Toyota Safety Sense 2.0 is 
designed to operate under the assumption that the driver will 
drive safely, and is designed to 
help reduce the impact to the occupants and the vehicle in the 
case of a collision or assist the 
driver in normal driving condi-
tions.As there is a limit to the degree of 
recognition accuracy and control 
performance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this 
system. The driver is always 
responsible for paying attention to the vehicle’s su rroundings and 
driving safely.
Sensors

181 4-5. Using the driving support systems
■To avoid malfunction of the 
radar sensor
Observe the following precau-tions.Otherwise, the radar sensor may 
not operate properly, possibly 
leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
●Keep the radar sensor and the grille cover clean at all times.
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FAE) 
engine
Grille cover
If the front of the r adar sensor or 
the front or back of the grille cover 
is dirty or cove red with water 
droplets, snow, etc., clean it.
Clean the radar s ensor and grille 
cover with a soft cloth to avoid 
damaging them.2.0 L 4-cylinder (M20A-FKS) 
engine
If the front of the radar sensor or 
the front or back of the grille cover is dirty or covered with water droplets, snow, etc., clean it.
Clean the ra dar sensor a nd grille 
damaging them.
●Do not attach a ccessories, 
stickers (including transparent 
stickers) or other items to the 
radar sensor, gr ille cover or sur-
rounding area.
●Do not subject the radar sensor 
or its surroundi ng area to a 
strong impact.
If the radar sens or, front grille, 
or front bumper has been sub-
jected to a strong impact, have 
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
●Do not disassemble the radar 
sensor.
●Do not modify or paint the radar 
sensor or grille cover.
●If the radar sens or, front grille, 
or front bumper needs to be 
removed and installed, or 
replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.

182 4-5. Using the driving support systems
front camera
Observe the following precau-tions.Otherwise, the fr ont camera may 
not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
●Keep the windshield clean at all times.
• If the windshield is dirty or cov-
ered with an o ily film, water 
droplets, snow, etc., clean the windshield.
• If a glass coating agent is 
applied to the windshield, it will 
still be necessary to use the 
windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc. from the 
area of the windshield in front of 
the front camera.
• If the inner side of the wind-
shield where the front camera is 
installed is dir ty, contact your 
Toyota dealer.●Do not attach objects, such as stickers, transpa rent stickers, 
etc., to the outer side of the 
windshield in front of the front 
camera (shaded area in the 
illustration).
From the top of the windshield 
to approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below the bottom of the front camera
Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm) 
(Approximately 4.0 in. [10 cm] to the right and left from the center of the front camera)
●If the part of the windshield in 
front of the fr ont camera is 
fogged up or cov ered with con-
densation, or ice, use the wind-shield defogger to remove the fog, condensation, or ice. (
P.387, 392)
●If water droplets cannot be 
properly removed from the area 
of the windshield in front of the front camera by the windshield 
wipers, replace the wiper insert or wiper blade.
If the wiper inserts or wiper blades 
need to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.
●Do not attach window tint to the 
windshield.
●Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked.
If the windshield needs to be 

183 4-5. Using the driving support systems
●Do not allow liquids to contact 
●Do not allow bright lights to shine into the front camera.
●Do not dirty or damage the front 
camera.
When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens of 
the front camera. Also, do not 
touch the lens.If the lens is dirty or damaged, 
contact your Toyota dealer.
●Do not subject the front camera 
to a strong impact.
●Do not change the installation position or direction of the front 
camera or remove it.
●Do not disassemble the front 
camera.
●Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the front 
camera (inside rear view mirror, 
etc.) or ceiling.
●Do not attach any accessories to the hood,  front grille or front 
bumper that may obstruct the front camera. Contact your Toy-ota dealer for details.
●If a surfboard o r other long 
object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure that it will not obstruct the front camera.
●Do not modify the headlights or 
other lights.

184 4-5. Using the driving support systems

185 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Driving■If a warning message is displayed on the multi-information disp lay
A system may be tempor arily unavailable or there may be a malfu nction in 
the system.
●In the following situations, perform the actions specified in t he table. When 
the normal operating conditions  are detected, the message will disappear 
and the system will be come operational.
If the message does not disapp ear, contact your Toyota dealer.
Situation Actions
When the area around a sensor is 
covered with dirt, moisture (fogged up, covered with condensation, ice, etc.), or other foreign matterTo clean the part of the windshield in front of the front camera, use the 
windshield wipers or the windshield defogger of the air conditioning sys-tem (P.387, 392).

186 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U●In the following situations, if th e situation has changed (or t he vehicle has 
been driven for some time) and the normal operating conditions are 
detected, the message will disappear and the system will become  opera-
tional.
• When the temperature around the radar sensor is outside of the  opera-
tional range, such as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an e xtremely cold 
environment
• When the front camera cannot d etect objects in front of the ve hicle, such 
as when driving in the dark, sno w, or fog, or when bright light s are shining 
into the front cameraWhen the temperature around the 
front camera is out side of the opera-
tional range, such as when the vehi-cle is in the sun or in an extremely 
cold environmentIf the front camera is hot, such as after the vehicle had been parked in the sun, use the air conditioning sys-tem to decrease the temperature around the front camera.
If a sunshade was used when the 
vehicle was parked, depending on its type, the sunlight r eflected from the 
surface of the sunshade may cause the temperature of the front camera to become exce ssively high.
If the front camera is cold, such after the vehicle is parked in an extremely cold environment, use the air condi-tioning system to increase the tem-perature around the front camera.
The area in front of the front camera is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a sticker is attached to the part of the windshield in front of the front camera.
Close the hood, remove the sticker, etc. to clear the obstruction.Situation Actions

187 4-5. Using the driving support systems
The system can detect the fol-
lowing:
Vehicles
Bicyclists
Pedestrians■Pre-collision warning
When the system determines 
that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, a buzzer will sound and a warning message will be displayed on the multi-information display to urge the driver to take evasive action.
■Pre-collision brake assist
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.
■Pre-collision braking
If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal colli-sion is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or reduce the impact of the colli-sion.PCS (Pre-Collision Sys-
tem)
The pre-collision system 
uses a radar sensor and front camera to detect objects ( P.190) in front of 
the vehicle. When the sys-tem determines that the possibility of a frontal colli-sion with an object is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential brake pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the system determines that the possi-bility of a frontal collision with an object is extremely high, the brakes are auto-matically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the col-lision.
The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can be changed. ( P.189)
Detectable objectsSystem functions

188 4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Limitations of the pre-colli-
sion system
●The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe 
your surroundings.
Do not use the pre-collision sys-tem instead of normal braking 
operations under any circum-
stances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen col-lision damage or injury in every 
situation. Do not overly rely on 
this system. Failure to do so may lead to an accident, result-
●Although this system is 
designed to help avoid a colli-sion or help reduce the impact 
of the collision, its effectiveness 
may change according to vari-ous conditions, therefore the 
system may not always be able 
to achieve the same level of performance.
Read the following conditions 
carefully. Do not  overly rely on 
this system and always drive 
carefully.
• Conditions under which the sys-
tem may operate even if there is 
no possibility of a collision: 
P.191
tem may not operate properly: 
P.192
●Do not attempt to test the oper-ation of the pre-collision system 
yourself.
Depending on the objects used for testing (dummies, card-
board objects imitating detect-
able objects, etc.), the system may not operate properly, possi-
bly leading to an accident.■Pre-collision braking
●When the pre-collision braking 
function is operating, a large 
amount of braking force will be 
applied.
●If the vehicle is stopped by the operation of the pre-collision 
braking function, the pre-colli-
sion braking function operation will be canceled after approxi-
mately 2 seconds. Depress the 
brake pedal as necessary.
●The pre-collision braking func-tion may not operate if certain 
operations are performed by the 
driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the 
steering wheel is being turned, 
the system may d etermine that 
the driver is taking evasive 
action and possibly prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating.
●In some situations, while the 
pre-collision brak ing function is 
operating, operation of the func-
tion may be canceled if the 
accelerator pedal  is depressed 
strongly or the steering wheel is 
turned and the system deter-
mines that the driver is taking 
evasive action.
●If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may 
determine that t he driver is tak-
ing evasive action and possibly 
delay the operation timing of the 
pre-collision braking function.
■When to disable the pre-colli-
In the following situations, disable 
the system, as it m ay not operate 
properly, possibly leading to an 
accident resulting in death or seri-
ous injury:
●When the vehicle is being towed

189 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Driving■Enabling/disabling the 
pre-collision system
The pre-collision system can be 
enabled/disabled on  
(P.548) of the multi-informa-
tion display.
The system is automatically 
enabled each time the engine switch is turned to ON.
If the system is disabled, the 
PCS warning light will turn on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.
■Changing the pre-collision warning timing
The pre-collision warning timing 
can be changed on  
The warning timing setting is 
retained when the engine switch is turned off. Howeve r, if the pre-colli-
sion system is disabled and re-enabled, the ope ration timing will 
return to the default setting (mid-dle).WARNING
●When your vehicle is towing 
another vehicle
●When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar 
means of transportation
●When the vehicle is raised on a 
lift with the engine running and the tires are allowed to rotate freely
●When inspecting  the vehicle 
using a drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or speed-ometer tester, or when using an 
on vehicle wheel balancer
●When a strong impact is applied 
to the front bumper or front grille, due to a n accident or 
other reasons
●If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an acci-
dent or is malfunctioning
●When the vehicle is driven in a 
sporty manner or off-road
●When the tires are not properly inflated
●When the tires are very worn
●When tires of a size other than 
specified are installed
●When tire chains are installed
●When a compact spare tire or 
an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used
●If equipment (snow plow, etc.) 
that may obstruct the radar sen-
sor or front camera is temporar-ily installed to the vehicleChanging settings of the 

190 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U1Early2Middle
This is the default setting.
3Late
■Operational conditions
The pre-collision syst em is enabled and th e system determines t hat the pos-
sibility of a frontal c ollision with a detected object is high.
Each function is operatio nal at the following speed
●Pre-collision warning
●Pre-collision brake assist
●Pre-collisio n brakingDetectable objects Vehicle speedRelative speed between 
your vehicle and object
VehiclesApprox. 7 to 110 mph 
(10 to 180 km/h)Approx. 7 to 110 mph 
(10 to 180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestri-
ansApprox. 7 to 50 mph (10 
to 80 km/h)Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10 
to 80 km/h)
Detectable objects Vehicle speedRelative speed between 
VehiclesApprox. 20 to 110 mph 
(30 to 180 km/h)Approx. 20 to 110 mph 
(30 to 180 km/h)
ansApprox. 20 to 50 mph 
(30 to 80 km/h)Approx. 20 to 50 mph 
(30 to 80 km/h)

191 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4DrivingThe system may not operate in the following situations:
●If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and  then the 
vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time
●If the shift lever is in R
●When the VSC OFF indicator is illuminated (only the pre-collisi on warning 
function will be operational)
■Object detection function
The system detects objects based 
on their size, profile, motion, etc. However, an object may not be 
detected depending on the sur-
rounding brightness and the motion, posture, and angle of the detected 
object, preventing the system from 
operating properly. ( P.192)
The illustration sh ows an image of 
detectable objects.
■Cancelation of t he pre-collision 
braking
If either of the fo llowing occur while 
the pre-collision braking function is operating, it will be canceled:
●The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.
●The steering wheel is turned 
sharply or abruptly.■Conditions under which the 
system may operate even if 
there is no possibility of a colli-
sion
●In some situations such as the fol-lowing, the system may determine that there is a possibility of a fron-
tal collision and operate.
• When passing a detectable object, 
etc.
• When changing lanes while over-
taking a detectable object, etc.
• When approaching a detectable 
object in an adjacent lane or on 
the roadside, such as when changing the course of travel or 
driving on a winding road
• When rapidly closing on a detect-
able object, etc.
• When approaching objects on the 
roadside, such as detectable 
objects, guardrails, utility poles, 
trees, or walls
• When there is a d etectable object 
or other object by  the roadside at 
the entrance  of a curveDetectable objects Vehicle speedRelative speed between 
to 80 km/h)

192 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U• When there are patterns or paint 
in front of your vehicle that may be 
mistaken for a detectable object
• When the front of your vehicle is 
hit by water, snow, dust, etc.
• When overtaking a detectable 
object that is ch anging lanes or 
making a right/left turn
• When passing a detectable object 
in an oncoming lane that is stopped to make a right/left turn
• When a detectable object 
approaches very close and then 
stops before entering the path of your vehicle
• If the front of your vehicle is raised 
or lowered, such as when on an uneven or undulating road surface
• When driving on a road sur-
rounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge
• When there is a metal object 
(manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a protrusion in front of your vehicle
• When passing under an object (road sign, billboard, etc.)
• When approaching an electric toll 
gate barrier, parking area barrier, or other barrier that opens and 
closes
• When using an automatic car 
wash
• When driving through or under 
objects that may contact your 
vehicle, such as thick grass, tree 
branches, or a banner
• When driving through steam or 
smoke
• When driving near an object that 
reflects radio waves, such as a large truck or guardrail
• When driving near a TV tower, 
broadcasting station, electric power plant, or other location 
where strong radio waves or elec-trical noise may be present
■Situations in which the system 
may not operate properly
●In some situations such as the fol-lowing, an object may not be 
detected by the radar sensor and front camera, pre venting the sys-
tem from opera ting properly:
• When a detectable object is 
approaching your vehicle
• When your vehicle or a detectable 
object is wobbling
• If a detectable object makes an 
abrupt maneuver (such as sudden 

193 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Drivingswerving, accelera tion or deceler-
ation)
• When your vehicle approaches a 
detectable object rapidly
• When a detectable object is not 
directly in front of your vehicle
• When a detectable object is near 
a wall, fence, guardrail, manhole 
cover, vehicle, steel plate on the road, etc.
• When a detectable object is under 
a structure
• When part of a detectable object 
is hidden by an object, such as large baggage, an umbrella, or guardrail
• When multiple detectable objects 
are close together
• If the sun or other light is shining 
directly on a detectable object
• When a detectable object is a 
shade of white and looks 
extremely bright
• When a detectable object appears 
to be nearly the same color or brightness as its surroundings
• If a detectable object cuts or sud-
denly emerges in front of your vehicle 
• When a very bright light ahead, 
such as the sun or the headlights 
of oncoming traffic, shines directly 
into the front camera
• When approaching the side or 
front of a vehicle ahead
• If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle• If a vehicle ahead is narrow, such 
as a personal mobility vehicle
• If a preceding vehicle has a small 
rear end, such as an unloaded 
truck
• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end, such as a low bed trailer
• If a vehicle ahead has extremely 
high ground clearance
• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a 
load which protrudes past its rear bumper
• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly 
shaped, such as a tractor or side car
• If a vehicle ahead is a child sized 
bicycle, a bicycle that is carrying a large load, a bicycle ridden by 
more than one person, or a 
uniquely shaped bicycle (bicycle with a child seat, tandem bicycle, 
etc.)
• If a pedestrian/or the riding height 
of a bicyclist ahead is shorter than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller 
than approximate ly 6.5 ft. (2 m)
• If a pedestrian/bic yclist is wearing 
oversized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), making their sil-houette obscure
• If a pedestrian is bending forward 
or squatting or bicyclist is bending forward
• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is moving 
fast
• If a pedestrian is pushing a 
stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or 
other vehicle
• When driving in inclement weather 
such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm

194 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U• When driving through steam or 
smoke
• When the surrounding area is dim, 
such as at dawn or dusk, or while 
at night or in a t unnel, making a 
detectable object appear to be nearly the same color as its sur-roundings
• When driving in a place where the 
surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance 
or exit of a tunnel
• After the engine has started the 
• While making a left/right turn and 
for a few seconds after making a left/right turn
• While driving on a  curve and for a 
few seconds after driving on a curve
• If your vehicle is skidding
• If the front of the vehicle is raised 
or lowered
• If the wheels are misaligned
• If a wiper blade is blocking the 
• The vehicle is being driven at 
extremely high speeds
• When driving on a hill
• If the radar sensor or front camera 
is misaligned
●In some situations such as the fol-
lowing, sufficient braking force 
may not be obtained, preventing the system from performing prop-
erly:
• If the braking functions cannot 
operate to their full extent, such as 
when the brake parts are 
extremely cold, extremely hot, or 
wet
• If the vehicle is not properly main-
tained (brakes or tires are exces-sively worn, imprope r tire inflation 
pressure, etc.)
• When the vehicle is being driven 
on a gravel road or  other slippery 
surface
■If VSC is disabled
●If VSC is disabled ( P.252), the 
pre-collision br ake assist and 
pre-collision brakin g functions are 
also disabled.
●The PCS warning light will turn on and “VSC Turned OFF Pre-Colli-sion Brake System Unavailable” 
will be displayed on the 

195 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Driving*: If equippedLTA (Lane Tracing 
Assist)*
When driving on highways 
and freeways with white (yellow) lane lines, this function alerts the driver when the vehicle might depart from its lane or 
course
* and provides assis-
tance by operating the 
steering wheel to keep the vehicle in its lane or 
course
*. Furthermore, the 
system provides steering 
assistance when dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is operat-ing to keep the vehicle in its lane.
The LTA system recognizes white (yellow) lane lines or a 
course
* using the front cam-
era. Additionally, it detects 
preceding vehicles using the front camera and radar.
*: Boundary between asphalt and 
the side of the road, such as 
grass, soil, or a curbWARNING
■Before using LTA system
●Do not rely solely upon the LTA 
system. The LTA system does not automatically drive the vehi-
cle or reduce the amount of 
attention that m ust be paid to 
the area in front of the vehicle. 
The driver must always assume 
full responsibilit y for driving 
safely by paying careful atten-
tion to the surrounding condi-
tions and operating the steering 
wheel to correct the path of the vehicle. Also, the driver must 
take adequate breaks when 
fatigued, such as from driving for a long period of time.
●Failure to perform appropriate 
driving operations and pay care-
ful attention may lead to an accident, result ing in death or 
serious injury.
●When not using the LTA system, use the LTA swit ch to turn the 
system off.
■Situations unsuitable for LTA 
system
In the following situations, use the LTA switch to turn the system off. 
Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or 

196 4-5. Using the driving support systems
●Vehicle is driven on a road sur-
face which is slippery due to rainy weather, fallen snow, 
freezing, etc.
●Vehicle is driven on a snow-cov-
ered road.
●White (yellow) lin es are difficult 
to see due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.
●Vehicle is driven in a temporary 
lane or restricted lane due to 
construction work.
●Vehicle is driven in a construc-tion zone.
●A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are 
equipped.
●When the tires have been 
excessively worn, or when the tire inflation pressure is low.
specified are installed.
●Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes 
other than that highways and freeways.
●During emergency towing.
■Preventing LTA system mal-
functions and operations per-
formed by mistake
●Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc. on the sur-
face of the lights.
●Do not modify the suspension 
etc. If the suspension etc. needs 
to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.
●Do not install or place anything 
on the hood or gr ille. Also, do 
not install a gr ille guard (bull 
bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).●If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Toyota 
dealer.
■Conditions in which functions may not operate properly
In the following situations, the 
functions may not operate prop-
erly and the vehicle may depart 
from its lane. Drive safely by always paying careful attention to 
your surroundings and operate 
the steering whee l to correct the 
path of the vehicle without relying 
solely on the functions.
●When the follow- up cruising dis-
play is displayed ( P.201) and 
the preceding vehicle changes lanes. (Your vehicle may follow 
the preceding vehicle and also change lanes.)
the preceding vehicle is sway-ing. (Your vehicle may sway accordingly and depart from the 
lane.)
the preceding vehicle departs from its lane. (Y our vehicle may 
follow the preceding vehicle and 
depart from the lane.)
the preceding vehicle is being driven extremely close to the 
left/right lane line. (Your vehicle 
may follow the preceding vehi-
cle and depart from the lane.)

197 4-5. Using the driving support systems
●Vehicle is being driven around a 
sharp curve.
●Objects or patterns that could be mistaken for white (yellow) 
lines are present on the side of 
the road (guardrails, reflective poles, etc.).
●Vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc.
●Repair marks of asphalt, white (yellow) lines, etc. are present 
due to road repair.●There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, 
the white (yellow) lines.
●The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, 
such as in front  of a tollgate or 
checkpoint, or at an intersec-
tion, etc.
●The white (yellow) lines are 
cracked, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised 
pavement marker” or stones are present.
●The white (yellow) lines cannot 
be seen or are difficult to see 
due to sand, etc.
●The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, 
puddles, etc.
●The traffic lines are yellow 
(which may be more difficult to recognize than lines that are 
white).
●The white (yellow) lines cross 
over a curb, etc.
●The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete.
●If the edge of the road is not 
clear or straight.
●The vehicle is driven on a sur-
face that is br ight due to 
reflected light, etc.
●The vehicle is driven in an area 
where the brightness changes 
suddenly, such as at the entrances and ex its of tunnels, 
etc.
●Light from the headlights of an 
oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. 
enters the camera.
●The vehicle is driven on a slope.
●The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a wind-
ing road.

198 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U■Lane departure alert func-
tion
When the system determines that the vehicle might depart 
from its lane or course*, a warn-
ing is displayed on the 
multi-information display, and a warning buzzer will sound to alert the driver.
When the warning buzzer sounds, 
check the area around your vehicle 
and carefully operate the steering 
wheel to move the vehicle back to the center of the lane.
Vehicles with a Blind Spot Monitor: 
When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane and that the possibility of a col-lision with an overta king vehicle in 
the adjacent lane is high, the lane departure alert will operate even if 
the turn signals  are operating.
the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
■Steering assist function
When the system determines WARNING
●The vehicle is driven on an 
unpaved or rough road.
●The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide.
●The vehicle is extremely tilted 
due to carrying heavy luggage 
or having improper tire pres-sure.
●The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short.
●The vehicle is moving up and 
down a large amount due to 
road conditions during driving (poor roads or road seams).
●When driving in a tunnel or at 
night with the headlights off or 
when a headlight is dim due to its lens being dirty or it being 
misaligned.
●The vehicle is struck by a cross-
wind.
●The vehicle is affected by wind from a vehicle driven in a 
nearby lane.
●The vehicle has just changed 
lanes or crossed an intersec-tion.
●Tires which differ by structure, 
manufacturer, b rand or tread 
pattern are used.
●Snow tires, etc. are equipped.
●The vehicle is being driven at 
extremely high speeds.
Functions included in LTA 
system

199 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Drivingthat the vehicle might depart 
from its lane or course*, the sys-
tem provides assistance as nec-
essary by operating the steering wheel in small amounts for a short period of time to keep the vehicle in its lane.
If the system detects that the steer-
ing wheel has not been operated 
for a fixed amount of time or the steering wheel is not being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the function is t emporarily can-
celed.
When the system de termines that 
the vehicle might depart from its lane and that the possibility of a col-lision with an over taking vehicle in 
the adjacent lane is high, the steer-ing assist function will operate even if the turn signals  are operating.
the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb■Vehicle sway warning func-
tion
When the vehicle is swaying within a lane, the warning buzzer will sound and a mes-sage will be displayed on the multi-information display to alert the driver.

200 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U■Lane centering function
This function is linked with 
dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range and pro-vides the required assistance by operating the steering wheel to keep the vehicle in its current lane.
When dynamic radar  cruise control 
with full-speed range is not operat-
ing, the lane centering function does not operate.
In situations where the white (yel-
low) lane lines are difficult to see or are not visible, such as when in a traffic jam, this function will operate to help follow a preceding vehicle by monitoring the position of the preceding vehicle.
ing wheel has not been operated for a fixed amount of time or the steering wheel is not being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the function is temporarily can-celed.
Press the LTA switch to turn the 
LTA system on.
The LTA indicator illuminates and a 
message is displayed on the multi-information display.
Press the LTA swit ch again to turn 
the LTA system off.
When the LTA system is turned on 
or off, operation of the LTA system continues in the same condition the next time the engine is started.Turning LTA system on

201 4-5. Using the driving support systems
LTA indicator
The illumination c ondition of the 
indicator informs the driver of the 
system operation status.
Illuminated in white: LTA system is 
Illuminated in green: Steering wheel 
assistance of the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating.
Flashing in orange: Lane departure 
alert function is operating.
Operation display of steering 
wheel operation support
Displayed when the multi-informa-
tion display is switched to the driv-ing support system information screen.
Indicates that steering wheel assis-
tance of the steering assist function or lane centering f unction is operat-
ing.
Both outer sides of the lane are dis-
played: Indicates that steering wheel assist of the lane centering function is operating.
One outer side of the lane is dis-
played: Indicates that steering wheel assist of the steering assist function is operating.
Both outer sides of the lane are 
flashing: Alerts the driver that their input is necessary to stay in the center of the lane (lane centering function).
Lane departure alert function 
display
tion display is swit ched to the driv-
ing support system information screen.
Inside of displayed lines is 
white
Indicates that the system is rec-ognizing white (yellow) lines or a 
course
*. When the vehicle 
departs from its lane, the white 
line displayed on the side the vehicle departs from flashes orange.Indications on multi-infor-

202 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_UInside of displayed lines is 
black
Indicates that the system is not able to recognize white (yellow) 
lines or a course
* or is temporar-
ily canceled.
grass, soil, or a curb
Follow-up cruising display
Displayed when the multi-informa-tion display is switched to the driv-ing support system information screen.
Indicates that steering assist of the 
lane centering function is operating by monitoring the position of a pre-ceding vehicle.
When the follow-up cruising display 
is displayed, if the preceding vehi-cle moves, your vehicle may move in the same way. A lways pay care-
ful attention to your surroundings and operate the steering wheel as necessary to correct the path of the vehicle and ensure safety.
■Operation conditions of each 
function
●Lane departure alert function
This function oper ates when all of 
• LTA is turned on.• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 
mph (50 km/h) or more.*1
• System recognizes white (yellow) 
lane lines or a course*2. (When a 
white [yellow] line or course*2 is 
recognized on only one side, the system will operate only for the 
recognized side.)
• Width of traffic lane is approxi-
mately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
(Vehicles with a Blind Spot Moni-
tor: Except when another vehicle 
is in the lane on the side where the turn signal was operated)
• Vehicle is not being driven around 
a sharp curve.
• No system malfunctions are 
detected. ( P.204)
*1:The function oper ates even if the 
vehicle speed is less than 
approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) when the lane centering function is operating.
*2:Boundary between asphalt and 
●Steering assist function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met in addition to the operation conditions for the lane departure alert function.
• Setting for “Steering Assist” in  
of the multi-information display is 
set to “ON”. ( P.548)
• Vehicle is not accelerated or 
decelerated by a fixed amount or more.
• Steering wheel is not operated 
with a steering force level suitable 
for changing lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC  and PCS are 
not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel warning 
is not displayed. ( P.204)
●Vehicle sway warning function
This function operates when all of 

203 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Drivingthe following cond itions are met.
• Setting for “Sway Warning” in  
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 
mph (50 km/h) or more.
mately 9.8 ft. ( 3 m) or more.
●Lane centering function
• LTA is turned on.• Setting for “Steering Assist” and 
“Lane Center” in  of the 
multi-information di splay are set to 
“ON”. (P.548)
• This function recognizes white 
(yellow) lane lines or the position 
of a preceding vehicle (except 
when the preceding vehicle is small, such as a motorcycle).
• The dynamic radar cruise control 
with full-speed range is operating in vehicle-to-vehic le distance con-
trol mode.
mately 10 to 13 ft. (3 to 4 m).
• Turn signal lever  is not operated.
• Vehicle does not accelerate or 
decelerate by a fixed amount or more.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are 
• The vehicle is being driven in the 
center of a lane.
• Steering assist function is not 
operating.■Temporary cancelation of func-tions
●When operation conditions are no longer met, a function may be 
temporarily canceled. However, 
when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the func-
tion is automatically restored. 
(P.202)
●If the operation conditions (P.200) are no longer met while 
the lane centering function is 
operating, the buzzer may sound 
to indicate that the function has been temporarily canceled.
■Steering assist function/lane 
centering function
●Depending on the vehicle speed, lane departure situation, road con-
ditions, etc., the driver may not feel the function is operating or 
the function may  not operate at 
all.
●The steering control of the func-
tion is overridden by the driver’s steering wheel operation.
●Do not attempt to test the opera-tion of the steering assist function.
■Lane departure alert function
●The warning buzzer may be diffi-cult to hear due to external noise, 
audio playback, etc.
●If the edge of the course* is not 
clear or straight, the lane depar-
ture alert function may not oper-
ate.
●Vehicles with a Blind Spot Monitor: It may not be possible for the sys-
tem to determine if there is a dan-ger of a collision with a vehicle in 
an adjacent lane.
●Do not attempt to test the opera-tion of the lane departure alert 
function.

204 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U■Hands off steering wheel warn-
ing
In the following situations, a warning message urging the driver to hold 
the steering wheel and the symbol 
shown in the illustration are dis-played on the multi-information dis-
play to warn the driver. The warning 
stops when the sys tem determines 
that the driver holds the steering 
wheel. Always keep your hands on 
the steering wheel when using this system, regardless of warnings.
●When the system determines that the driver is driving without hold-
ing the steering wheel while the 
system is operating
If the driver continues to keep their hands off of the steering wheel, the buzzer sounds, the driver is warned 
and the function is temporarily can-
celed. This warning also operates in the same way when the driver con-
tinuously operates the steering 
wheel only a small amount.
●When the system determines that the vehicle may not turn and instead depart from its lane while 
driving around a curve
Depending on the vehicle condition and road conditions, the warning 
may not operate. Also, if the system determines that the vehicle is driv-
ing around a curv e, warnings will 
occur earlier than during 
straight-lane driving.
●When the system determines that the driver is driving without hold-ing the steering wheel while the 
steering wheel assist of the steer-
ing assist function is operating.If the driver continues to keep their hands off of the steering wheel and 
the steering wheel assist is operat-
ing, the buzzer sounds and the driver is warned. Each time the 
buzzer sounds, the continuing time 
of the buzzer becomes longer.
■Vehicle sway warning function
When the system determines that the vehicle is swaying while the vehicle sway warning function is 
operating, a buzzer sounds and a 
warning message urging the driver to rest and the sym bol shown in the 
illustration are simultaneously dis-played on the multi-information dis-play. 
Depending on the vehicle and road 
conditions, the warning may not 
operate.
■Warning message
If the following warning message is 
displayed on the multi-information 
display and the LTA indicator illumi-
nates in orange, follow the appropri-ate troubleshooting procedure. Also, 
if a different warning message is 
displayed, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
●“LTA Malfunction Visit Your Dealer”
The system may not be operating properly. Have the vehicle inspected 
●“LTA Unavailable”
The system is temporarily canceled 
due to a malfunction in a sensor other than the front camera. Turn 
the LTA system off, wait for a little 
while, and then tu rn the LTA system 
back on.

205 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Driving●“LTA Unavailable at Current 
Speed”
The function cannot be used as the vehicle speed exceeds the LTA 
operation range. Drive slower.
■If a battery terminal has been 
disconnected and reconnected
The system needs to  be initialized. 
To initialize the system, drive the vehicle straight ahead for 5 seconds 
or more at a speed of approximately 
22 mph (35 km/h) or more.
Function settings can be changed. (P.548)*: If equippedLDA (Lane Departure 
Alert with steering control)
*
course
course
*.
The LDA system recog-
nizes white (yellow) lane 
lines or a course* using the 
front camera. Additionally, it 
detects preceding vehicles using the front camera and radar.

206 4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Before using LDA system
●Do not rely solely upon the LDA 
system. The LDA system does 
not automatically drive the vehi-cle or reduce the amount of 
attention that must be paid to 
the area in front of the vehicle. The driver must always assume 
tion to the surrounding condi-tions and operating the steering 
wheel to correct the path of the 
vehicle. Also, the driver must take adequate breaks when 
fatigued, such as from driving 
for a long period of time.
●Failure to perform  appropriate 
ful attention may lead to an 
accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
●When not using the LDA sys-
tem, use the LDA switch to turn 
the system off.
■Situations unsuitable for LDA system
In the following situations, use the LDA switch to turn the system off. 
Failure to do so may lead to an 
face which is slippery due to 
rainy weather, fallen snow, freezing, etc.
ered road.
to see due to rain, snow, fog, 
dust, etc.
equipped.●When the tires have been excessively worn, or when the 
tire inflation p ressure is low.
●When tires of a size other than specified are installed.
other than that highways and 
freeways.
■Preventing LDA system mal-functions and operations per-
●Do not modify the suspension etc. If the suspension etc. needs 
to be replaced, contact your 
●Do not install or place anything on the hoo d or grille. Also, do 
bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).
●If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Toyota 
dealer.
■Conditions in which functions 
functions may not operate prop-erly and the vehicle may depart 
from its lane. Drive safely by 
always paying careful attention to your surroundings and operate 
●Vehicle is being driven around a sharp curve.

207 4-5. Using the driving support systems
●Objects or patterns that could 
be mistaken for white (yellow) lines are present on the side of 
the road (guardrails, reflective 
poles, etc.).
●Vehicle is driven where the road 
diverges, merges, etc.
●Repair marks of asphalt, white 
(yellow) lines, etc. are present due to road repair.
●There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, 
the white (ye llow) lines.●The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, 
tion, etc.
cracked, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker” or stones are 
present.
be seen or are difficult to see due to sand, etc.
●The vehicle is driven on a road 
surface that is wet due to rain, 
●The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to 
recognize than lines that are 
white).
●The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc.
●The vehicle is driven on a bright 
surface, such as concrete.
●The vehicle is driven on a sur-face that is br ight due to 
●The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly, such as at the 
entrances and ex its of tunnels, 
etc.
ing road.
●The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road.

208 4-5. Using the driving support systems
tion
from its lane or course
*, a warn-
multi-information display, and a warning buzzer will sound to alert the driver.When the warning buzzer sounds, 
check the area around your vehicle and carefully operate the steering wheel to move the vehicle back to the center of the lane.
that the vehicle might depart 
essary by operating the steering wheel in small amounts for a short period of time to keep the WARNING
●The traffic lane is excessively 
narrow or wide.
●The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage 
or having improper tire pres-
sure.
●The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to 
road conditions during driving 
(poor roads or road seams).
●When driving in a tunnel or at night with the headlights off or 
when a headlight is dim due to 
its lens being dirty or it being misaligned.
wind.
Functions included in 
LDA system

209 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Drivingvehicle in its lane.
ing wheel has not been operated for a fixed amount of time or the steering wheel is not being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the function is t emporarily can-
celed.
■Vehicle sway warning func-
tion
Press the LDA switch to turn the 
LDA system on.
The LDA indicator illuminates and a 
Press the LDA swit ch again to turn 
the LDA system off.
When the LDA system is turned on 
or off, operation of the LDA system continues in the same condition the next time the engine is started.Turning LDA system on

210 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_ULDA indicator
Illuminated in white: LDA system is 
assistance of the steering assist function is operating.
tance of the steering assist function is operating.Lane departure alert function 
display
white
course
line displayed on the side the vehicle departs from flashes orange.
Inside of displayed lines is black
ily canceled.Indications on multi-infor-

211 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Driving*: Boundary between asphalt and 
function
• LDA is turned on.• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 
lane lines or a course*. (When a 
white [yellow] line or course* is 
recognized on only one side, the system will operat e only for the 
(Vehicles with a Blind Spot Moni-tor: Except when a nother vehicle 
is in the lane on the side where 
the turn signal was operated)
detected. ( P.212)
the following conditions are met in addition to the operation conditions for the lane departure alert function.
with a steering force level suitable for changing lanes.
not operating.• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.• Hands off steering wheel warning 
is not displayed. ( P.212)
the following conditions are met.
■Temporary cancelation of func-
tions
When operation conditions are no longer met, a func tion may be tem-
porarily canceled. However, when 
the operation conditions are met 
again, operation of the function is 
automatically restored. ( P.211)
●Depending on the vehicle speed, lane departure situation, road con-ditions, etc., the driver may not 
feel the function is operating or 
all.
●The steering control of the func-tion is overridden by the driver’s 
steering wheel operation.
ate.
●Vehicles with a Blind Spot Monitor: It may not be possible for the sys-tem to determine if there is a dan-
ger of a collision with a vehicle in 

212 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U●Do not attempt to  test the opera-
tion of the lane departure alert 
function.
■Hands off steering wheel warn-
ing
Depending on the vehicle condition 
and road conditions, the warning 
may not operate. Also, if the system 
determines that the vehicle is driv-ing around a curve, warnings will occur earlier than during 
ing the steering wheel while the steering wheel assi st of the steer-
ing assist function is operating.
If the driver continues to keep their 
hands off of the steering wheel and 
the steering wheel assist is operat-ing, the buzzer sounds and the 
driver is warned. Each time the 
buzzer sounds, the continuing time of the buzzer becomes longer.
When the system determines that the vehicle is swaying while the 
vehicle sway warning function is 
operating, a buzzer sounds and a warning message urging the driver 
to rest and the sym bol shown in the 
illustration are simultaneously dis-
play. 
operate.
display and the LDA indicator illumi-nates in orange, follow the appropri-
ate troubleshooting procedure. Also, 
if a different warning message is displayed, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
●“LDA Malfunction Visit Your Dealer”

213 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4DrivingThe system may not be operating 
properly. Have the vehicle inspected 
●“LDA Unavailable”
The system is tempo rarily canceled 
due to a malfuncti on in a sensor 
other than the front camera. Turn 
the LDA system off, wait for a little while, and then turn the LDA system 
back on.
●“LDA Unavailable at Current Speed”
The function cannot be used as the vehicle speed exceeds the LDA 
●“LDA Unavailable Below Approx. 32MPH”
The LDA system cannot be used as the vehicle spee d is less than 
approximately 32 mph (50 km/h). 
Drive the vehicle at approximately 
32 mph (50 km/h) or more.
■If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected
To initialize the system, drive the 
vehicle straight ahead for 5 seconds 
or more at a speed of approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) or more.
Function settings can be changed. (P.548)*: If equipped
■Meter display
Multi-information displayDynamic radar cruise 
control with full-speed range
*
In vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode, the vehicle automatically accel-erates, decelerates and stops to match the speed changes of the preceding vehicle even if the accelera-tor pedal is not depressed. In constant speed control mode, the vehicle runs at a fixed speed.
Use the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range on free-ways and highways.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ( P.216)
Constant speed control mode ( P.220)
System Components

214 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_USet speed
■Operation switches
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance 
switch
“+RES” switchCruise control main switchCancel switch“-SET” switch
WARNING
■Before using dynamic radar 
cruise control with full-speed 
range
●Driving safely is the sole responsibility of the driver. Do not rely solely o n the system, 
and drive safely by always pay-ing careful attention to your sur-roundings.
●The dynamic radar cruise con-
trol with full-speed range pro-
vides driving assistance to reduce the driver’s burden. 
However, there are limitations to 
the assistance provided.
Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always drive carefully.
• When the sensor may not be 
correctly detect ing the vehicle 
ahead: 
P.222• Conditions under which the 
vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode may not function cor-rectly: P.222
●Set the speed appropriately 
depending on the speed limit, 
traffic flow, road conditions, weather conditions, etc. The 
driver is responsible for check-
ing the set speed.
●Even when the system is func-tioning normally, the condition of 
the preceding vehicle as 
detected by the system may dif-fer from the condition observed 
by the driver. Therefore, the 
driver must always remain alert, assess the danger of each situ-
ation and drive safely. Relying 
solely on this system or assum-ing the system ensures safety 
while driving can lead to an 
accident, result ing in death or 
●Switch the dynamic radar cruise 
control with full-speed range 
setting to off, using the cruise control main switch when not in 
use.
■Cautions regarding the driv-
ing assist systems
Observe the following precau-tions, as there ar e limitations to 
the assistance provided by the 
system. Failure  to do so may 
cause an accident resulting in 

215 4-5. Using the driving support systems
●Assisting the driver to measure 
following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is only intended to help the driver in 
determining the following distance 
between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling 
ahead. It is not a mechanism that 
allows careless or inattentive driv-ing, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility 
conditions.
It is still necessary for driver to 
pay close attention to the vehi-
cle’s surroundings.
●Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range determines 
whether the follo wing distance 
between the driver’s own vehicle 
and a designated vehicle traveling 
ahead is within a set range. It is 
not capable of making any other type of judgement. Therefore, it is 
absolutely necessary for the 
driver to remain  vigilant and to 
determine whether or not there is 
a possibility of d anger in any 
given situation.
●Assisting the driver to operate 
the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range does not 
include function s which will pre-
vent or avoid collisions with vehi-
cles ahead of your vehicle. 
Therefore, if there is ever any 
possibility of da nger, the driver 
must take immediate and direct 
control of the vehicle and act 
appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.■Situations unsuitable for 
dynamic radar cruise control 
with full-speed range
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range in any of the following situations. 
Doing so may result in inappropri-
ate speed cont rol and could 
●Roads where there are pedes-
trians, cyclists, etc.
●In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
●On winding roads
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or 
snow
●On steep downhills, or where 
there are sudden changes between sharp up and down 
gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep 
hill.
●At entrances to freeways and highways
●When weather conditions are 
bad enough that they may pre-
vent the sensors from detecting correctly (fog, snow, sand-
storm, heavy rain, etc.)
●When there is rain, snow, etc. 
on the front surface of the radar or front camera
●In traffic conditions that require frequent repeated acceleration 
and deceleration
●During emergency towing
●When an approach warning 
buzzer is heard often

216 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_UThis mode employs a radar to detect the presence of vehicles up to 
approximately 328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current veh i-
cle-to-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a s uitable 
following distance from the vehicle ahead. The desired vehi-cle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehi-cle-to-vehicle distance switch.
When driving on downhill slopes, t he vehicle-to-vehicle distanc e may 
become shorter.
Example of constant speed cruisingWhen there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the  speed set by the driver.
Example of deceleration crui sing and follow-up cruising
When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed appears
When a vehicle is detected runni ng ahead of you, the system aut omatically 
decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle s peed is nec-
essary, the system applies the brakes (the stop lights will com e on at this 
time). The system will respond to  changes in the speed of the vehicle 
ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver. 
Approach warning warns you when  the system cannot decelerate su ffi-
ciently to prevent your vehicle  from closing in on the vehicle ahead.
When the vehicle ahead of you st ops, your vehicle will also sto p (vehicle is 
stopped by system control). Afte r the vehicle ahead starts off,  pressing the 
“+RES” switch or depressing the accelerator pedal (start-off operation) will 
resume follow-up cruising. If the start-off operation is not pe rformed, system 
control continues to keep your vehicle stopped.Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

217 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4DrivingWhen the turn signal lever is operated and your vehicle moves t o a left lane 
while driving at 50 mph (80 km/h ) or more, the vehicle will qui ckly acceler-
ate to help to overtake a passing vehicle.
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The syst em then 
returns to constan t speed cruising.
1Press the cruise control main switch to activate the cruise control.
Dynamic radar cruise control indi-
cator will come on and a message 
will be displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display. Press the switch again to deactivate the cruise con-trol.
If the cruise cont rol main switch is 
pressed and held for 1.5 seconds 
or more, the syste m turns on in 
constant speed control mode. (P.220)
2Accelerate or decelerate, 
with accelerator pedal opera-tion, to the desired vehicle speed (at or above approxi-mately 20 mph [30 km/h]) and press the “-SET” switch to set the speed.Cruise control “SET” indicator will 
come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment 
the switch is released becomes the set speed.
To change the set speed, press 
the “+RES” or “-SET” switch until the desired set speed is displayed.
1Increases the speed (Except 
when the vehicle has been stopped by system control in Setting the vehicle speed 
(vehicle-to-vehicle dis-tance control mode)
Adjusting the set speed

218 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_Uvehicle-to-vehicle distance 
control mode)
2Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Press the switch.
Large adjustment: Press and hold 
the switch to change the speed, and release when the desired speed is reached.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode, the set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
For the U.S. mainland and Hawaii
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 
km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2 each 
time the switch is pressed 
Large adjustment: Increases or 
decreases in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 
1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2 increments for 
as long as the switch is held
Except for the U.S. mainland 
and Hawaii
decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h)*1 or 5 
km/h (3.1 mph)*2 increments for as 
long as the switch is held
In the constant speed control 
mode ( P.220), the set speed 
will be increased or decreased as follows:
time the switch is pressed
Large adjustment:  The speed will continue to change while the switch 
is held.
*1:When the set speed is shown in 
“MPH”
*2:When the set speed is shown in 
“km/h”
Pressing the switch changes the 
vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows:
1Long
2Medium
3Short
The vehicle-to-veh icle distance is 
set automatically to long mode 
when the engine switch is turned to ON.
If a vehicle is running ahead of you, 
the preceding vehicle mark  will 
also be displayed.Changing the vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance (vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode)

219 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4DrivingSelect a distance from the table 
below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accor-dance with vehicle speed. When the vehicle is stopped by system control, the vehicle stops at a certain vehicle-to-vehicle dis-tance depending on the situa-tion.
After the vehicle ahead of you 
starts off, press the “+RES” switch.
Your vehicle will also resume 
follow-up cruising if the acceler-ator pedal is depressed after the vehicle ahead of you starts off.
1Pressing the cancel switch 
cancels the speed control.
The speed control is also canceled 
when the brake pedal is depressed. (When the vehicle has been stopped by system control, depressing the br ake pedal does 
not cancel the setting.)
2Pressing the “+RES” switch 
resumes the cruise control and returns vehicle speed to the set speed.
When your vehicle is too close Vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance settings (vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
Distance 
optionsVehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance
LongApproximately 160 ft. 
(50 m)
MediumApproximately 130 ft. 
(40 m)
ShortApproximately 100 ft. 
(30 m)
Resuming follow-up cruising when the vehicle has been stopped by sys-
tem control (vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control mode)Canceling and resuming 
the speed control
Approach warning (vehi-

220 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_Uto a vehicle ahead, and suffi-
cient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possi-ble, the display will flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a vehicle. Depress the brake pedal to ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
■Warnings may not occur when
In the following instances, warn-ings may not occur even when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is small.
When the speed of the pre-
ceding vehicle matches or exceeds your vehicle speed
When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow speed
Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
When depressing the acceler-ator pedalWhen constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehi-cle distance. Select this mode only when vehicle- to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode does not function correctly due to a dirty radar, etc.
1With the cruise control off, 
press and hold the cruise control main switch for 1.5 seconds or more.
Immediately after the switch is 
pressed, the dynamic radar cruise 
control indicator will come on. After-wards, it switches to the cruise con-
trol indicator.
Switching to const ant speed control 
mode is only possible when operat-
ing the switch with the cruise con-trol off.
with accelerator pedal opera-tion, to the desired vehicle speed (at or above approxi-mately 20 mph [30 km/h]) and press the “-SET” switch to set the speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will 
Selecting constant speed 
control mode

221 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Drivingcome on.
Adjusting the speed setting: 
P.217
Canceling and resuming the speed setting: P.219
■Dynamic radar cruise control 
with full-speed range can be set 
when
●The shift lever is in D.
●The desired set speed can be set 
when the vehicle speed is approx-
imately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more. (However, when the vehicle speed 
is set while driving at below 
approximately 20 mph [30 km/h], the set speed will be set to 
approximately 20 mph [30 km/h].)
■Accelerating after setting the 
vehicle speed
The vehicle can accelerate by oper-ating the accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the set speed 
resumes. However, during vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may 
decrease below the set speed in 
order to maintain the distance to the preceding vehicle.
■When the vehicle stops while follow-up cruising
●Pressing the “+RES” switch while the vehicle ahead stops will 
resume follow-up cruising if the 
vehicle ahead starts off within approximately 3 seconds after the switch is pressed.
●If the vehicle ahead starts off within 3 seconds after your vehicle 
stops, follow-up c ruising will be 
resumed.
■Automatic cancelation of vehi-
cle-to-vehicle d istance control 
mode
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control 
mode is automatically canceled in 
the following situations.
●VSC is activated.
●TRAC is activated for a period of 
time.
●When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.
●The sensor cannot detect cor-rectly because i t is covered in 
some way.
●Pre-collision braking is activated.
●The parking brake is operated.
●The vehicle is stopped by system 
control on a steep incline.
●The following are detected when the vehicle has been stopped by 
system control:
• The driver is not wearing a seat 
belt.
• The driver’s door is opened.
• The vehicle has been stopped for 
about 3 minutes
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for 
any reasons other than the above, 
there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact you r Toyota dealer.
■Automatic cancelation of con-
stant speed control mode
Constant speed control mode is 
automatically cance led in the follow-
●Actual vehicle speed is more than 
approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) 
below the set vehicle speed.
●Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

222 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U●VSC is activated.
time.
If constant speed control mode is 
automatically canceled for any rea-
sons other than the above, there may be a malfunction in the system. 
■Brake operation
A brake operation sound may be heard and the brake pedal response 
may change, but the se are not mal-
functions.
■Warning messages and buzzers 
for dynamic radar cruise con-
Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunc-tion or to inform  the driver of the 
need for caution while driving. If a warning message is shown on the 
message and follow the instructions. 
(P.185, 490)
■When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle 
ahead
In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, oper-
ate the brake pedal when decelera-tion of the system is insufficient or 
operate the accelerator pedal when 
acceleration is required.
As the sensor may not be able to 
correctly detect these types of vehi-cles, the approach warning 
(P.219) may not be activated.
●Vehicles that cut in suddenly
●Vehicles traveling at low speeds
●Vehicles that are not moving in the same lane
●Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board, 
etc.)●Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
●When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders 
the detecting of the sensor
●When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load 
in the luggage compartment, etc.)
●Preceding vehicle has an extremely high ground clearance
■Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehic le distance con-
trol mode may not function cor-
rectly
In the case of the following condi-tions, operate the brake pedal (or 
accelerator pedal, depending on the situation) as necessary.
correctly detect vehicles ahead, the 
system may not operate properly.
●When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow

223 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Driving●When steering wheel operation or 
your position in t he lane is unsta-
ble
●When the vehicle ahead of you 
decelerates suddenly
●When driving on a road sur-rounded by a structure, such as in 
a tunnel or on a bridge
●While the vehicle speed is decreasing to the set speed after the vehicle accelerates by 
depressing the accelerator pedal*: If equipped
Set speed
IndicatorsDynamic radar cruise 
control*
tance control mode, the vehicle automatically accel-erates and decelerates to match the speed changes of the preceding vehicle even if the accelerator pedal is not depressed. In constant speed control mode, the vehicle runs at a fixed speed.
Use the dynamic radar cruise control on freeways and highways.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ( P.226)
Constant speed control mode ( P.230)

224 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U■Operation switches
switch
“+RES” switch
Cruise control main switchCancel switch“-SET” switch
WARNING
cruise control
●Driving safely is the sole responsibility of the driver. Do 
not rely solely o n the system, 
and drive safely by always pay-
ing careful attention to your sur-
roundings.
trol provides driving assistance to reduce the dr iver’s burden. 
However, there are limitations to the assistance provided.
ahead: 
P.231
• Conditions under which the 
trol mode may not function cor-rectly: P.232●Set the speed appropriately 
control setting to off, using the 
cruise control main switch when not in use.
●Assisting the driver to measure following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver 
in determining the following dis-
tance between the driver’s own vehicle and a desi gnated vehicle 
traveling ahead. It is not a mecha-nism that allows careless or inat-tentive driving, and it is not a system that can a ssist the driver 
in low-visibility conditions.
It is still necessa ry for driver to 
pay close attenti on to the vehi-

225 4-5. Using the driving support systems
●Assisting the driver to judge 
proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following distance between the driver’s own 
vehicle and a designated vehicle 
traveling ahead is within a set range. It is not capable of making 
any other type of judgement. 
Therefore, it is absolutely neces-sary for the drive r to remain vigi-
lant and to determine whether or 
not there is a possibility of danger 
in any given situation.
●Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control does not include functions which 
will prevent or avoid collisions 
with vehicles ahead of your vehi-cle. Therefore, if there is ever any 
appropriately in order to ensure 
the safety of all involved.
■Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situ-
ations. Doing so  may result in 
inappropriate speed control and 
could cause an accident resulting 
snow●On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes 
between sharp up and down gradients
hill.
●At entrances to freeways and 
highways
●When weather conditions are bad enough that they may pre-
vent the sensors from detecting 
correctly (fog, snow, sand-storm, heavy rain, etc.)
on the front surface of the radar 
or front camera

226 4-5. Using the driving support systems
When the turn signal lever is operated and your vehicle moves t o a left lane 
Example of accelerationDriving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

227 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4DrivingWhen there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower 
than the set speed
constant speed control mode. 
(P.230)
come on.
1Increases the speed
the switch to cha nge the speed, 
and release when the desired speed is reached.
tance control mode, the set speed will be increased or Setting the vehicle speed 
(vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

228 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_Udecreased as follows:
For the U.S. mainland and 
Hawaii
and Hawaii
mode ( P.230), the set speed 
Large adjustment:  The speed will 
continue to change while the switch 
is held.
“MPH”
“km/h”Pressing the switch changes the 
1Long
2Medium
3Short
also be displayed.
Select a distance from the table 
below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accor-dance with vehicle speed.Changing the vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance 
Vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

229 4-5. Using the driving support systems
when the brake pedal is depressed.
However, cruise control does not 
resume when the vehicle speed is approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or less.
When your vehicle is too close 
to a vehicle ahead, and suffi-cient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possi-ble, the display will flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a vehicle. Depress the brake pedal to ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
When depressing the acceler-ator pedalDistance 
tance
(50 m)
(40 m)
(30 m)
Canceling and resuming 

230 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_UWhen constant speed control 
mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehi-cle distance. Select this mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle dis-tance control mode does not function correctly due to a dirty radar, etc.
Switching to constant speed control 
ing the switch wit h the cruise con-
trol off.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will come on.
P.227
Canceling and resuming the speed setting:  P.229
can be set when
●Vehicles with a continuously vari-able transmission: The shift lever 
is in D.
●Vehicles with a manual transmis-
sion: The shift lever is in range 2nd or higher.
●Depending on the control mode, this item can be set at the follow-
ing speeds.
• Vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode: Approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more
• Constant speed control mode: 
Approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) 
or more
The vehicle can a ccelerate by oper-
ating the accelera tor pedal. After 
accelerating, the set speed resumes. However, during vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control 
mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in 
order to maintain the distance to the 
preceding vehicle.Selecting constant speed 

231 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Driving■Shift position selection (vehi-
cles with a ma nual transmis-
sion)
Select a shift position according to 
the vehicle speed. If the engine 
speed is too high or too low, control may be automatically canceled.
mode
mode is automatically canceled in the following situations.
●Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 16 mph (25 km/h).
●TRAC is activated for a period of time.
some way.
sion: When the shif t lever is in N 
or the clutch pedal is depressed 
for a certain amount of time or 
more.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for any reasons other than the above, 
there may be a malfunction in the 
system. Contact your Toyota dealer.
■Automatic cancelation of con-stant speed control mode
Constant speed control mode is automatically cance led in the follow-
●Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) 
●Actual vehicle speed falls below 
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
time.●When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.
sion: When the shift lever is in N or the clutch pedal is depressed 
more.
If constant speed control mode is automatically canceled for any rea-sons other than the above, there 
may be a malfunction in the system. 
A brake operation sound may be heard and the brake pedal response may change, but these are not mal-
for dynamic radar cruise con-trol
Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunc-
■When the sensor may not be 
correctly detecting the vehicle 
ahead
In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, oper-ate the brake pedal when decelera-
tion of the system is insufficient or 
operate the accelerator pedal when acceleration is required.
correctly detect th ese types of vehi-
cles, the approach warning 
(P.229) may not be activated.

232 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_Uetc.)
●Motorcycles traveling in the same 
lane
●When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the detecting of the sensor
■Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode may not function cor-rectly
accelerator pedal, depending on the 
situation) as necessary.
correctly detect vehicles ahead, the system may not operate properly.
●When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unsta-ble
●When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
●While the vehicle speed is decreasing to the set speed after 
the vehicle accelerates by 
depressing the accelerator pedal

233 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Driving*: If equipped When the front camera recog-
nizes a sign, the sign will be dis-played on the multi-information display.
When the driving support sys-
tem information is selected, a maximum of 3 signs can be displayed. ( P.86)
When a tab other than the driving support system infor-mation is selected, only a rec-ognized speed limit sign or do not enter sign (when notifica-tion is necessary) will be dis-played. ( P.86)
If signs other than speed limit signs 
are recognized, t hey will be dis-
played in an overlapping stack under the current speed limit sign.RSA (Road Sign 
Assist)*
The RSA system recognizes 
specific road signs using the front camera to provide information to the driver via the display.
If the system judges that the vehicle is being driven over the speed limit, performing prohibited actions, etc. in relation to the recognized road signs, it alerts the driver using a warning dis-play and warning buzzer.
WARNING
■Before using the RSA
Do not rely solely upon the RSA 
system. RSA is a system which 
supports the driver by providing 
information, but it is not a replace-ment for a driver’s own vision and 
awareness. Drive safely by 
always paying careful attention to the traffic rules.Indication on the 
multi-information display

234 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_UThe following types of road 
signs, including electronic signs and blinking signs, are recog-nized.
A non-official or a recently intro-
duced traffic sign may not be recog-nized.
RSA system will alert the driver.
When the vehicle speed 
exceeds the speed warning threshold of the speed limit sign displayed, the sign dis-play will be emphasized and a buzzer will sound.
When the RSA system recog-nizes a do not enter sign and determines that your vehicle has entered a no-entry area, the displayed sign will flash and a buzzer will sound.
Depending on the situation, traf-fic environment (traffic direction, speed unit) may be detected incorrectly and a warning dis-play may not operate properly.
■Setting procedure
1Press  or  of the meter 
control switch es and select 
2Press  or  of the meter 
, then press 
■Automatic turn-off of RSA sign 
display
In the following si tuations, a dis-
played speed limit sign will stop 
being displayed automatically:
●A new sign is not recognized for a certain distance.
●The road changes due to a left or 
right turn, etc.
In the following situ ations, do not 
enter, stop and yie ld signs will stop 
●The system determines that your 
vehicle has passed the sign.
●The road changes due to a left or right turn, etc.
■Conditions in which the func-
tion may not operate or detect correctly
In the following si tuations, RSA 
does not operate normally and may 
not recognize signs, display the 
incorrect sign, etc. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.
●The front camera is misaligned due to a strong impact being 
applied to the sensor, etc.
●Dirt, snow, stickers, etc. are on the windshield near the front camera.Supported types of road 
signs
Speed limit
Do Not Enter
StopYield
Warning display

235 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Driving●In inclement weather such as 
heavy rain, fog, snow or sand 
storms.
●Light from an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the front cam-
era.
●The sign is dirty, faded, tilted or bent, and if an electronic sign, the contrast is poor.
●All or part of the sign is hidden by the leaves of a tree, a pole, etc.
●The sign is only visible to the front camera for a short amount of time.
●The driving scene (turning, lane change, etc.) is judged incorrectly.
●Even if it is a sign not appropriate for the currently traveled lane, 
such a sign exists  directly after a 
freeway branches, or in an adja-
cent lane just before merging.
●Stickers are attached to the rear of the preceding vehicle.
●A sign resembling a system com-patible sign is recognized.
●Side road speed signs may be detected and displayed (if posi-
tioned in sight of the front camera) 
while the vehicle is traveling on the main road.
●Roundabout exit road speed signs may be detected and displayed (if 
positioned in sight of the front 
camera) while traveling on a roundabout.
●The front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load.
●The surrounding brightness is not sufficient or changes suddenly.
●When a sign intended for trucks, etc. is recognized.
●The speed information displayed on the meter and that displayed on the navigation system may be 
different due to the navigation sys-
tem using map data.
■Speed limit sign display
If the engine switch  was last turned off while a speed limit sign was dis-played on the multi-information dis-
play, the same sig n displays again 
when the engine switch is turned to 
ON.
■If “RSA Malfunction Visit Your 
Dealer” is shown

236 4-5. Using the driving support systems
Meter control switches
Turning the Blind Spot Monitor 
on/off.
Outside rear view mirror indi-
cators
When a vehicle is detected in a 
blind spot of the outside rear view 
mirrors or approaching rapidly from behind into a blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator on the detected side will illuminate. If the turn signal lever is operated toward the detected side, the outside rear view mirror indicator flashes.
BSM indicator
Illuminates when the Blind Spot Monitor is enabled
■Outside rear vie w mirror indica-
tor visibility
In strong sunlight, the outside rear 
view mirror indicator may be difficult 
to see.
■When “Blind Spot Monitor 
Unavailable” is shown on the multi-information display
Ice, snow, mud, etc., may be attached to the rear bumper around the sensors. ( P.238) The system 
should return to normal operation after removing the ice, snow, mud, etc. from the rear bumper. Addition-
ally, the sensors may not operate BSM (Blind Spot Moni-
tor)*
The Blind Spot Monitor is a 
system that uses rear side radar sensors installed on the inner side of the rear bumper on the left and right side to assist the driver in confirming safety when changing lanes.
WARNING
■Cautions regarding the use of 
the system
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, 
taking care to o bserve your sur-
The Blind Spot Monitor is a sup-
plementary function which alerts the driver that a v ehicle is in a 
blind spot of the outside rear view mirrors or is approaching rapidly from behind into a  blind spot. Do 
not overly rely on the Blind Spot Monitor. As the function cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, 
over reliance could lead to an 
accident resulting in death or seri-ous injury.
As the system may not function 
correctly under certain condi-
tions, the driver’s own visual con-
firmation of safety is necessary.System components

237 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Drivingnormally when driving in extremely 
hot or cold environments.
■When “Blind Spot Monitor Mal-
function Visit Your Dealer” is 
shown on the multi-information display
There may be a sensor malfunction of misaligned. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■Certification

238 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_UUse the meter control switches 
to turn on/off the function.
1Press  or  to select .
2Press  or  to select  
and then press .WARNING
■Handling the rear side radar 
sensor
Blind Spot Monitor sensors are installed behind t he left and right 
sides of the rear bumper respec-
tively. Observe the following to 
ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can operate correctly.
●Keep the sensors and the sur-rounding areas on the rear 
bumper clean at all times.
If a sensor or its surrounding area 
on the rear bumper is dirty or cov-ered with snow, the Blind Spot Monitor may not operate and a warning message ( P.236) will 
be displayed. In this situation, clear off the dirt or snow and drive the vehicle with the operation con-ditions of the BSM function (P.240) satisfied for approxi-
mately 10 minutes. If the warning message does not disappear, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
●Do not attach accessories, 
stickers (including transparent stickers), aluminum tape, etc. to 
a sensor or its surrounding area 
on the rear bumper.●Do not subject a sensor or its 
surrounding area on the rear 
bumper to a strong impact.If a sensor is moved even 
slightly off position, the system 
may malfunction and vehicles may not be detected correctly.
In the following si tuations, have 
your vehicle inspected by your 
• A sensor or its surrounding area 
is subject to a strong impact.
• If the surrounding area of a sen-
sor is scratched or dented, or part of them h as become dis-
connected.
●Do not disassemble the sensor.
●Do not modify the sensor or sur-
rounding area on the rear 
bumper.
●If a sensor or the rear bumper needs to be removed/installed 
or replaced, contact your Toyota 
dealer.
●Do not paint the rear bumper any color other t han an official 
Toyota color.
Turning the Blind Spot 
Monitor on/off

239 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Driving■Vehicles that can be detected by the Blind Spot Monitor
The Blind Spot Monitor uses rear side radar sensors to detect the fol-
lowing vehicles traveling in adjacent lanes and advises the dri ver of 
the presence of such vehicles v ia the indicators on the outside  rear 
view mirrors.
Vehicles that are traveling in areas that are not visible using  the 
outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)
Vehicles that are approaching r apidly from behind in areas that  
are not visible using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)
■The Blind Spot Monitor detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The range of each detection area is:
Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either s ide of 
the vehicle*1
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) to 197 ft. (60 m) from the rear 
bumper*2Blind Spot Monitor operation

240 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U*1:The area between the side of the vehicle and 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) f rom the side 
of the vehicle cannot be detected.
*2:The greater the difference in speed between your vehicle and t he 
detected vehicle is, the farthe r away the vehicle will be detec ted, causing 
the outside r ear view mirror indicato r to illumina te or flash.
■The Blind Spot Monitor is oper-
ational when
The Blind Spot Monitor is opera-tional when all of the following con-
ditions are met:
●The Blind Spot Monitor is on.
●The shift lever is in a position 
other than R.
●The vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).
■The Blind Spot Monitor will 
detect a veh icle when
The Blind Spot Mon itor will detect a 
vehicle present in the detection area in the followin g situations:
●A vehicle in an adjacent lane over-takes your vehicle.
●You overtake a vehicle in adjacent lane slowly.
●Another vehicle enters the detec-tion area when it changes lanes.
Blind Spot Monitor will not 
detect a vehicle
The Blind Spot Monitor is not 
designed to detect the following 
types of vehicles and/or objects:
●Small motorcycles, bicycles, 
pedestrians, etc.*
●Vehicles traveling in the opposite 
direction
●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary 
objects*
●Following vehicles that are in the same lane
*
●Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away from your vehicle
*●Vehicles which are being over-taken rapidly by your vehicle
*
*: Depending on the conditions, 
detection of a v ehicle and/or 
object may occur.
Blind Spot Monitor may not 
function correctly
●The Blind Spot Monitor may not detect vehicles corr ectly in the fol-
• When the sensor is misaligned 
due to a strong impact to the sen-sor or its surrounding area
• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, 
etc. is covering the sensor or sur-rounding area on the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface 
that is wet with standing water during bad weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog
• When multiple vehicles are 
approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle
• When the distance between your 
vehicle and a following vehicle is short
• When there is a significant differ-
ence in speed between your vehi-cle and the vehicle that enters the 
detection area
• When the difference in speed 
between your vehicle and another vehicle is changing
• When a vehicle enters a detection 
area traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle
• As your vehicle starts from a stop, 
a vehicle remains in the detection area
• When driving up and down con-
secutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the road, etc.
• When driving on r oads with sharp 
bends, consecutive curves, or 

241 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Drivinguneven surfaces
• When vehicle lanes are wide, or 
when driving on the edge of a 
lane, and the vehicle in an adja-cent lane is far away from your 
vehicle
• When an accessory (such as a 
bicycle carrier) is installed to the 
rear of the vehicle
ence in height between your vehi-cle and the vehicle that enters the 
• Immediately after the Blind Spot 
Monitor is turned on
●Instances of the Blind Spot Moni-
tor unnecessarily d etecting a vehi-
cle and/or object may increase in 
the following situations:
• When the distanc e between your 
vehicle and a guar drail, wall, etc. 
that enters the detection area is 
short
• When vehicle lanes are narrow, or 
when driving on the edge of a lane, and a vehicle traveling in a 
lane other than the adjacent lanes enters the detection area
• When driving on roads with sharp 
bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces
• When the tires are slipping or 
spinning
bicycle carrier) is installed to the rear of the vehicle
The rear view image is dis-
played when the shift lever is in R and the engine switch is in ON.Rear view monitor sys-
tem
Entune Audio
The rear view monitor sys-
tem assists the driver by displaying an image of the view behind the vehicle with fixed guide lines on the screen while backing up, for example while parking.
The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.
Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio
Owners of models equipped with a navigation/multime-dia system should refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
System overview

242 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_UThe rear view monitor system will be deactivated when the 
shift lever is shifted to any posi-tion other than R.
■Screen description
The rear view monitor system scr een will be displayed if the sh ift 
lever is shifted to R while the engine switch is in ON.
Vehicle width extension guide line
Displays a guide path w hen the vehicle is being backed straight  up. The 
displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.
Vehicle center guide line
This line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.
Distance guide line
Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (r ed) from the e dge of the 
bumper.
Displays a point approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (blue)  from the edge  of the 
bumper.Using the rear view monitor system

243 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Driving■Area displayed on screen
Corners of bumper
The rear view monitor system 
displays an image of the view from the bumper of the rear area of the vehicle.
The image adjustment proce-
dure for the rear view monitor system screen is the same as the procedure for adjusting the screen. ( P.274)
The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation conditions.
Objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be displayed.The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance.
Items which are located higher than the camera may not be displayed on the moni-tor.
■Rear view monitor system camera
The camera for the rear view monitor system is located as shown in the illustration.
Using the camera
If dirt or foreign matter (such as 
water droplets, snow, mud etc.) is 
adhering to the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In this case, flush it with a large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.
■Differences between the 
screen and the actual road
The distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space, even when they appear Rear view monitor system 
precautions

244 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_Uto be so. Be sure to check visu-
ally.
The distances between the vehi-
cle width guide lines and the left and right dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distance guide lines give a 
distance guide for flat road sur-faces. In any of the following sit-uations, there is a margin of error between the fixed guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.
When the ground behind the 
vehicle slopes  up sharply
The distance guide lines will appear 
to be closer to the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guide lines and the actual distance/course on the road.
vehicle slopes down sharply
to be further from  the vehicle than 
the actual distance. Because of 
this, objects will appear to be closer than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a  margin of error 
between the guide lines and the actual distance/course on the road.
When any part of the vehicle 
sags

245 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4DrivingA margin of error
When any part of the vehicle sags 
due to the number of passengers or the distribution of t he load, there is 
a margin of error between the fixed 
guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.
■When approaching 
three-dimensional objects
The distance guide lines are dis-played according to flat surfaced objects (such as the road). It is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the distance guide lines. When approaching a three-dimen-sional object that extends out-ward (such as the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the follow-ing.
Vehicle width guide linesVehicle width guide lines
Visually check the surroundings 
and the area behind  the vehicle. In 
the case shown below, the truck appears to be outside of the vehicle width guide lines and the vehicle does not look as if it hits the truck. However, the rear body of the truck may actually cross over the vehicle width guide lines. In  reality if you 
back up as guided by the vehicle width guide lines, the vehicle may hit the truck.
Distance guide lines

246 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_UVisually check the surroundings 
and the area behind the vehicle. On the screen, it appears that a truck is 
parking at point . However, in reality if you back up to point , you will hit the truck. On the screen, it appears that  is closest and  
is farthest away. However, in reality, 
the distance to  and  is the same, and  is farther than  
and .
■If you notice any symptoms
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause 
and the solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicl e 
Things you should know

247 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4DrivingSymptom Likely cause Solution
The image is difficult to 
seeThe vehicle is in a dark area
The temperature around the lens is either high or low
The outside tempera-ture is low
There are water drop-lets on the camera
It is raining or humid
Foreign matter (mud etc.) is adhering to the camera
Sunlight or headlights are shining directly into the camera
The vehicle is under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, mer-cury lights etc.If this happens due to these causes, it does not indicate a malfunc-tion. Back up while visu-ally checking the vehicle’s surroundings. (Use the monitor again once conditions have been improved.) The procedure for adjusting the picture quality of the rear view monitor sys-tem is the same as the procedure for adjusting the screen. ( P.274)
The image is blurryDirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering to the camera.Flush the camera with a large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.
The image is out of alignmentThe camera or sur-rounding area has received a strong impact. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toy-ota dealer.
The fixed guide lines are very far out of alignmentThe camera position is out of alignment.Have the vehicle inspected by your Toy-ota dealer.
The vehicle is tilted (there is a heavy load on the vehicle, tire pressure is low due to a tire puncture, etc.)
The vehicle is used on an incline.If this happens due to these causes, it does not indicate a malfunc-tion.
Back up while visually 
checking the vehicle’s surroundings.

248 4-5. Using the driving support systems
■When using the rear view 
monitor system 
The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist the driver when backing up. 
When backing up, be sure to visu-
ally check all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors 
before proceeding. Observe the 
following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries.
●Never depend on t he rear view 
monitor system entirely when backing up. The image and the position of the guide lines dis-
played on the screen may differ 
from the actual state. Use cau-tion, just as you would when 
backing up any vehicle.
●Be sure to back up slowly, 
depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
●The instructions given are only 
guide lines. When and how 
much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traffic con-
ditions, road surface condi-
tions, vehicle condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to 
be fully aware o f this before 
using the rear view monitor sys-
tem. 
●When parking, be sure to check 
that the par king space will 
accommodate your vehicle 
before maneuveri ng into it.
●Do not use the r ear view moni-
tor system in the following cases:
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or 
in snow
• When using tire chains or emer-
gency tires• When the trunk is not closed 
completely
• On roads that are not flat or 
straight, such as curves or slopes
●In low temperatures, the screen 
may darken or the image may 
become faint. The image could distort when the vehicle is mov-
ing, or you may become unable 
to see the image on the screen. Be sure to visually check all 
around the vehicle both directly 
and using the mirrors before proceeding.
●If the tire sizes are changed, the 
position of the fixed guide lines 
displayed on the screen may change.
●The camera uses a special lens. 
The distances between objects 
and pedestrians that appear in the image displayed on the 
screen will differ from the actual 
distances. ( P.243)
NOTICE
■How to use the camera
●The rear view monitor system may not operate properly in the 
following cases.
• If the back of the vehicle is hit, 
the position and mounting angle of the camera may change.
• As the camera has a water 
proof construction, do not 
detach, disassemble or modify 
it. This may cause incorrect operation.

249 4-5. Using the driving support systems
Each time the switch is pressed, the 
system changes between sport mode and normal mode.
1Normal mode
Provides an optimal balance of fuel economy, quietness, and dynamic performance. Suitable for normal driving.
2Sport mode
Controls the transmission and engine to provide quick, powerful acceleration. This mode also changes the steering feel, making it suitable for when agile driving response is desire d, such as when 
driving on roads w ith many curves.
When the sport mode is selected, sport mode indicator comes on.
■Automatic deactivation of sport 
mode
If the engine switch is turned off after driving in sport mode, the drive NOTICE
• When cleaning the camera lens, 
flush the camera with a large 
quantity of water and wipe it 
with a soft and wet cloth. 
Strongly rubbing the camera lens may cause the camera lens 
to be scratched and unable to 
transmit a clear image.
• Do not allow organic solvent, 
car wax, window cleaner or glass coating to adhere to the 
camera. If this happens, wipe it 
off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rap-
idly, such as when hot water is 
poured on the vehicle in cold 
weather, the system may not operate normally.
• When washing the vehicle, do 
not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the 
camera malfunctioning.
●Do not expose  the camera to 
strong impact as this could 
cause a malfunction. If this hap-pens, have the vehicle 
inspected by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.Driving mode select 
switch*
The driving modes can be 
selected to suit driving con-dition.
Selecting a drive mode

250 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_Umode will be chang ed to normal 
mode.
■ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-
tem)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slip-pery road surface
■Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop sit-uation
■VSC (Vehicle Stability Con-trol)
Helps the driver to control skid-ding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road sur-faces.Driving assist systems
To keep driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automati-cally in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when oper-ating the vehicle.
Summary of the driving 
assist systems

251 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Driving■Enhanced VSC (Enhanced 
Vehicle Stability Control)
Provides cooperative control of the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS.Helps to maintai n directional 
stability when swerving on slip-pery road surfaces by con-trolling steering performance.
■TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slip-pery roads
■Active Cornering Assist (ACA)
Helps to prevent the vehicle from drifting to the outer side by performing inner wheel brake control when attempting to 
accelerate while turning
■Hill-start assist control
Helps to reduce the backward 
movement of the vehicle when starting on an uphill
■EPS (Electric Power Steer-ing)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel.
■The Secondary Collision Brake
When the SRS airbag sensor detects a collision and the sys-tem operates, the brakes and brake lights are automatically controlled to reduce the vehicle speed and help reduce the pos-sibility of further damage due to a secondary collision.
■When the TRAC/VSC systems 
are operating
The slip indicator light will flash while the TRAC/VSC systems are 
■Disabling the TRAC system
If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt 
or snow, the TRAC system may 
reduce power from the engine to the 
wheels. Pressing  to turn the 
system off may make it easier for 
you to rock the vehicle in order to 
free it.
To turn the TRAC system off, quickly 
press and release .
The “Traction Cont rol Turned OFF” 
will be shown on the multi-informa-
Press  again to turn the system 
back on.

252 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U■Turning off both TRAC and VSC 
systems
To turn the TRAC and VSC systems 
off, press and h old  for more 
than 3 seconds while the vehicle is 
stopped.
The VSC OFF indicator light will 
come on and the “Traction Control Turned OFF” will be shown on the 
*
Press  again to turn the system back on.
*: PCS will also be disabled (only 
Pre-Collision warning is avail-
able). The PCS warning light will come on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. ( P.194)
■When the message is dis-
played on the multi-information 
display showing that TRAC has 
been disabled even if  has 
not been pressed 
TRAC is temporary deactivated. If 
the information continues to show, 
■Operating conditions of hill-start assist control
When the following four conditions are met, the hill-start assist control 
will operate:
●Vehicles with continuously vari-able transmission: The shift lever 
is in a position other than P or N (when starting off forward/back-
ward on an upward incline)
●Vehicles with manual transmis-sion: The shift lever is in a position 
other than R when starting off for-ward on an upward incline, or the 
shift lever is in R when starting off 
backward on an upward incline.
●The vehicle is stopped
●The accelerator pedal is not depressed
●The parking brake is not engaged
■Automatic system cancelation of hill-start assist control
The hill-start assist  control will turn 
off in any of the fo llowing situations:
●Vehicles with a continuously vari-able transmission: The shift lever is shifted to P or N.
sion: The shift lever is shifted to R 
when starting off forward on an 
upward incline, or th e shift lever is 
shifted to other than R when start-
ing off backward on an upward 
incline.
●The accelerator pedal is depressed
●The parking brake is engaged
●2 seconds at maximum elapsed 
after the brake pedal is released
■Sounds and vibrations caused 
by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC and hill-start assist con-
trol systems
●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the 
brake pedal is depressed repeat-edly, when the engine is started or 
just after the vehicle begins to 
move. This sound does not indi-cate that a mal function has 
occurred in any of these systems.
●Any of the following conditions 
may occur when the above sys-
tems are operating.None of these ind icates that a 
malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be  felt through the 
vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard also 
after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal  may pulsate 
slightly after the ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down 

253 4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_U4Driving■Active Cornering Assist opera-
tion sounds and vibrations
When the Active Cornering Assist is operated, operation sounds and 
vibrations may b e generated from 
the brake system, but this is not a 
■EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel is oper-ated, a motor sou nd (whirring 
sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC systems
After turning the TRAC and VSC systems off, the systems will be 
automatically re-enabled in the fol-
●When the engine switch is turned off
●If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will  turn on when 
vehicle speed increases
If both the TRAC and VSC sys-
tems are turned off, automatic re-enabling will not occur when 
vehicle speed increases.
■Operating conditions of Active 
Cornering Assist
The system operates when the fol-lowing occurs.
●TRAC/VSC can operate
●The driver is at tempting to accel-
erate while turning
●The system detects that the vehi-
cle is drifting to the outer side
●The brake pedal is released
■Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS sys-
tem is reduced to prevent the sys-
tem from overheating when there is 
frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steer-
ing wheel may feel heavy as a 
result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or 
stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The EPS system should return 
to normal within 10 minutes.
■Secondary Collision Brake 
operating conditions
The system operates when the SRS airbag sensor de tects a collision 
while the vehicle is in motion.
However, the system does not oper-
ate in any of the following situations.
●The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h)
●Components are damaged
■Secondary Collision Brake automatic cancellation
The system is automatically can-celed in any of th e following situa-
tions.
●The vehicle speed drops below 
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
●A certain amount of time elapses during operation
●The accelerator pedal is depressed a large amount
WARNING
■The ABS does not operate effectively when
●The limits of tire gripping perfor-mance have been exceeded 
(such as excessively worn tires 
on a snow covered road).
●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or 
slick roads.
■Stopping distance when the 
ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping dis-
tance. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from the veh icle in front of 
you, especially in the following sit-
uations:
●When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

254 4-5. Using the driving support systems
●When driving with tire chains
●When driving over bumps in the 
road
●When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces
■TRAC/VSC may not operate 
effectively when
Directional control and power may 
not be achievable while driving on 
slippery road surfaces, even if the 
TRAC/VSC system is operating. Drive the vehicle carefully in con-
ditions where st ability and power 
may be lost.
■Active Cornering Assist does 
not operate effectively when
●Do not overly rely on Active Cornering Assist. Active Corner-
ing Assist may not operate 
effectively when accelerating down slopes or driving on slip-
pery road surfaces.
●When Active Cornering Assist 
frequently operates, Active Cor-nering Assist may temporarily 
stop operating to ensure proper 
operation of the brakes, TRAC and VSC.
■Hill-start assist control does 
●Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist 
control may not operate effec-tively on steep inclines and 
roads covered with ice.
●Unlike the parking brake, 
hill-start assist control is not intended to hold  the vehicle sta-
tionary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold 
the vehicle on an incline, as 
doing so may lead to an acci-dent.■When the TRAC/VSC is acti-
vated
The slip indicator  light flashes. 
Always drive carefully. Reckless 
driving may cause an accident. Exercise particula r care when the 
indicator light flashes.
■When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the sys-
tems to help ensure vehicle stabil-
ity and driving force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC systems off 
unless necessary.
■Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the 
specified size, brand, tread pat-
tern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires 
are inflated to the recommended 
tire inflation p ressure level.
The ABS, TRAC and VSC sys-tems will not functi on correctly if 
different tires are installed on the 
vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther information when replacing 
tires or wheels.
■Handling of tires and the sus-
pension
Using tires with any kind of prob-lem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist sys-
tems, and may cause a system to 
■Secondary Collision Brake
Do not rely sole ly upon the Sec-
ondary Collision Brake. This sys-tem is designed to help reduce the possibility of  further  damage 
due to a secondary collision, how-ever, that effect changes accord-
ing to various conditions. Overly 
relying on the system may result 

255 4-6. Driving tips
COROLLA_U4Driving4-6.Driving tips
Use fluids that are appropriate 
to the prevailing outside tem-peratures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
Have a service technician 
inspect the condition of the battery.
Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the front tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same 
size and brand, and that chains 
match the size of the tires.Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary 
preparations and inspec-tions before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a man-ner appropriate to the pre-vailing weather conditions.
Pre-winter preparations
WARNING
■Driving with snow tires
to reduce the risk of accidents.
loss of vehicle control and cause 
●Use tires of the size specified.
●Maintain the recommended 
level of air pressure.●Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of 
the type of snow tires being used.
●Use snow tires on all, not just 
some wheels.
■Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven 
safely, and may cause death or 
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specifi ed for the tire 
chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
●Avoid driving on bumpy road 
surfaces or over potholes.
●Avoid sudden acceleration, 
abrupt steering, sudden brak-
ing and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.
●Slow down sufficiently before 
entering a curve to ensure that 
vehicle control is maintained.
●Do not use LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) system. (if equipped)
●Do not use LDA  (Lane Depar-
ture Alert with steering control) system. (if equipped)
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing snow 
tires (vehicles with a tire pres-
sure warning system)
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and 
attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure 
warning valves and transmitters.

256 4-6. Driving tips
COROLLA_UPerform the following according 
to the driving conditions:
Do not try to forcibly open a 
window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the wind-shield.
Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.
Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle.
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suit-able to road conditions.
Park the vehicle and shift the 
shift lever to P (continuously variable transmission), or 1 or R (manual  transmission) without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, make sure to block the wheels.Failure to do so may be dan-gerous because it may cause the vehicle to move unexpect-edly, possibly leading to an accident.
Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission: If the vehicle is parked without set-ting the parking brake, con-firm that the shift lever cannot 
be moved out of P
*.
*: The shift lever will be locked if it is 
attempted to be sh ifted from P to 
any other position without 
depressing the brake pedal. If the shift lever can be shifted from P, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehi-cle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Use the correct tire chain size 
when mounting the tire chains.Chain size is regulated for each 
tire size.Before driving the vehicle
When driving the vehicle
When parking the vehicleSelecting tire chains

257 4-6. Driving tips
COROLLA_U4DrivingSide chain (0.12 in. [3 mm] in 
diameter)
Side chain (0.39 in. [10 mm] 
in width)
Side chain (1.18 in. [30 mm] 
in length)
Cross chain (0.16 in. [4 mm] 
in diameter)
Cross chain (0.55 in. [14 mm] 
in width)
Cross chain (0.98 in. [25 mm] 
in length)
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.
■Tire chain installation
when installing and removing chains:
●Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
●Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on the rear tires.●Install tire chains on the front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten 
chains after driving 1/4 1/2 mile 
(0.51.0 km).
●Install tire chains following the 
instructions provided with the tire chains.
Regulations on the use of 
tire chainsNOTICE
■Fitting tire chains (vehicles 
with a tire pressure warning system)
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fit-
ted.

259
COROLLA_U5
5Entune audioEntune audio
.5-1. Basic function
Buttons overview......... 261
Menu screen ............... 263
Status icon .................. 264
“Setup” screen ............ 266
5-2. Basic information before 
operation
Initial screen................ 267
Touch screen............... 268
Home screen............... 270
.................................. 271
Screen adjustment ...... 274
Linking multi-information 
display and the system
.................................. 275
Registering/Connecting a 
Bluetooth® device ..... 276
Setting Bluetooth® details
.................................. 280
Wi-Fi® Hotspot ............ 287
Apple CarPlay ............. 292
General settings.......... 296
Voice settings.............. 299
Vehicle settings ........... 3005-5. Using the audio/visual 
system
Quick reference........... 302
Some basics................ 303
AM/FM radio................ 307
Internet radio ............... 309
USB memory............... 311
iPod/iPhone................. 313
Bluetooth® audio ......... 316
AUX............................. 319
5-8. Audio/visual remote con-
trols 
Steering switches ........ 321
Setup........................... 323
5-10.Tips for operating the 
Operating information.. 324
5-11.Voice command system 
operation 
Voice command system
.................................. 336
Command list .............. 339
5-12.Mobile Assistant opera-
tion 
Mobile Assistant .......... 343

260
COROLLA_U5-13.Phone operation 
(Hands-free system for 
cellular phones) 
Quick reference........... 345
Some basics ............... 346
Placing a call using the 
Bluetooth® hands-free sys-
tem ............................ 350
Receiving a ca ll using the 
tem ............................ 353
hands-free system..... 354
function...................... 356
Setup........................... 360
5-15.What to do if... (Blue-
tooth®)
Troubleshooting .......... 369
Toyota Entune ............. 373
Type A: Function achieved 
by using a smart phone or 
DCM.......................... 374
Type B: Function achieved 
by using DCM and the sys-
tem ............................ 377
Type C: Function achieved 
by using DCM............ 3785-17.Toyota Entune operation 
Toyota Entune App Suite 
Connect..................... 379
5-18.Toyota Entune App Suite 
Connect settings
Setup........................... 383

261 5-1. Basic function
COROLLA_U5Entune audio5-1.Basic function
Entune Audio Plus/Entune Premium Audio
Owners of this system should refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MUL-
TIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
By touching the screen with y our finger, you can control the 
selected functions. ( P.268, 268)
Press to seek up or down for a radio station or to access a desired track/file. ( P.307, 311, 313, 316)
Press to access the Bluetooth
® hands-free system. ( P.345)
When an Apple CarPlay connection is established, press to dis-
play the Phone app screen.*1, 2
Press to display the Toyota Entune App Suite Connect screen.*2, 
3 (P.373)
Turn to change the radio station or skip to the next or previou s 
track/file. ( P.307, 311, 313, 316)
Press to turn the audio/visual system on and off, and turn it t o Buttons overview*
Operations of each part

262 5-1. Basic function
COROLLA_Uadjust the volume. Press and hold to restart the system. 
(P.267,  303)
play the Maps app screen.*1, 2
Press to display the audio/visual system screen. ( P.302, 303)
Press to display the “Menu” screen. ( P.263)
Press to display the home screen. ( P.270)
*1:For details about Apple CarPlay:  P.292
*2:This function is not made available in some countries or areas .
*3:The Toyota Entune App Suite Connect screen may not be displaye d 
when an Apple CarPlay connection is established.
The screen shots in this document and the actual screens of the  system dif-
fer depending on whether the functions and/or a contract existe d.WARNING
For safety, the dr iver should not 
operate the system while he/she 
is driving. Insufficient attention to the road and traffic may cause an 
accident.

263 5-1. Basic function
COROLLA_U5Entune audioPress the “MENU” button to dis-
play the “Menu” screen.
Displays the clock. Select to display the clock settings screen. ( P.297)
Select to display the audio control screen. ( P.302)
Select to display the hands-free operation screen. (P.345)
When an Apple CarPlay con-nection is established, select to display the Phone app 
screen.
*
Select to display the applica-tion screen.
* (P.373)
When an Apple CarPlay con-
nection is established and this button displays “Apple CarPlay”, select to display the home screen of Apple 
CarPlay. 
* (P.292)
Vehicles without DCM: Select 
to display the fuel consump-tion screen. ( P.92)
Vehicles with DCM: Select to display the information screen.Select “ECO” to display the fuel consumption screen. (P.92)
The “Vehicle Alert History” shown on the information 
screen. 
*
Select to display the “Setup” 
screen. ( P.266)
Select to adjust the contrast, brightness, etc. of the dis-play. (P.274)
*: This function is not made avail-
able in some countries or areas.Menu screen
Menu screen operation

264 5-1. Basic function
COROLLA_UIndicate during data commu-
nication performed via Data Communication Module 
(DCM)
*1
The reception level of Data 
Communication Module 
(DCM) display*1 (P.264)
The reception level of the 
connected phone display (P.264)
Remaining battery charge display (P.265)
Bluetooth
® phone connection 
condition display ( P.265)
Wi-Fi® connection condition 
display*1, 2 (P.287)
*1:Vehicles with DCM*2:This function is not made avail-
able in some countries or areas.
The number of status icons that can 
be displayed differs depending on the displayed screen.
The level of reception does not 
always correspond with the level displayed on the cellular phone. The level of reception may not be displayed depending on the phone you have.
When the cellular phone is out 
of the service area or in a place inaccessible by radio waves, 
/  is displayed.
“Rm” is displayed when receiv-ing in a roaming area. While roaming, display “Rm” top-left on the icon.
The receiving area may not be 
displayed depending on the type 
of Bluetooth
® phone you have.
While connected with cellular 
phoneStatus icon
Status icons are displayed at the top of the screen.
Status icon explanation
 Reception level display
Reception Level Indicators
Poor
Excellent

265 5-1. Basic function
COROLLA_U5Entune audioWhile using Data Communi-
cation Module (DCM)
While using Wi-Fi® Hotspot
When Wi-Fi® Hotspot is off, no item 
is displayed.
The amount displayed does not always correspond with the amount displayed on the Blue-
tooth
® device.
The amount of battery charge 
left may not be displayed depending on the type of the 
Bluetooth
® device connected.
This system does not have a 
charging function.An antenna for the Bluetooth® 
connection is built into the instrument panel.
The condition of the Bluetooth
® 
connection may deteriorate and 
the system may not function 
when a Bluetooth® phone is 
used in the following conditions 
and/or places:
The cellular phone is obstructed 
by certain objects (such as when it is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box).
The cellular phone is touching or 
is covered with metal materials.
Leave the Bluetooth
® phone in a 
place where the condition of the 
Bluetooth® connection is good.Reception Level Indicators
Poor
Excellent
No connection
Connected
Remaining battery charge 
display
Remaining 
chargeIndicators
Empty
Full
Bluetooth® connection 
condition display
Indicators Conditions
(Blue)Indicates that the con-
dition of the Blue-
tooth® connection is 
good.
(Gray)While in this condition, 
sound quality during phone calls may dete-riorate.
Indicates that the cel-lular phone is not con-
nected via Bluetooth
®.

266 5-1. Basic function
COROLLA_UPress the “MENU” button, then 
select “Setup” to display the “Setup” screen. The items shown on the “Setup” screen can be set.
Select to change the selected language, operation sound settings, etc. ( P.296)
Select to set Bluetooth
® 
device and Bluetooth® sys-
tem settings. ( P.280)
Select to set audio settings. (P.323)
Select to set the phone sound, contacts, message settings, etc. ( P.360)
Select to set the voice set-tings. (P.299)Select to set vehicle informa-tion. ( P.300)
Select to set Wi-Fi
® connec-
tion settings.*1, 2 (P.288)
Select to set Toyota Entune 
App Suite Connect settings.*2 
(P.383)
*1:Vehicles with DCM
*2:This function is not made avail-
able in some countries or areas.“Setup” screen
“Setup” screen

267 5-2. Basic information before operation
COROLLA_U5Entune audio5-2.Basic information before operation
After a few seconds, the caution 
screen will be displayed.
After about 5 seconds or select-
ing “Continue”, the caution screen automatically switches to the next screen.
When system response is 
extremely slow, the system can be restarted.
Press and hold the “POWER 
VOLUME” knob for 3 seconds or more.Initial screen
When the engine switch is turned to ACC or ON, the initial screen will be dis-played and the system will begin operating.
Caution screen
WARNING
When the vehicle is stopped with 
the engine running, always apply the parking brak e for safety.
Restarting the system

268 5-2. Basic information  before operation
COROLLA_UOperations are performed by touching the touch screen directly with 
your finger.
*: The above operations may not be performed on all screens.
Flick operations may not be perf ormed smoothly at high altitude s.
This system is operated mainly 
by the buttons on the screen. (Referred to as screen buttons in this manual.)
When a screen button is touched, a beep sounds. (To set 
the beep sound: P.296)
●If the system does not respond to 
touching a screen button, move 
your finger away from the screen 
and then touch it again.
●Dimmed screen buttons cannot be Touch screen
Touch screen gestures
Operation method Outline Main use
Touch
Quickly touch and 
release once.Selecting an item on the screen
Drag*
Touch the screen with your finger, and move the screen to the desired position.
Scrolling the lists
Flick*
Quickly move the screen by flicking with your finger.Scrolling the main screen page
Touch screen operation

269 5-2. Basic information before operation
COROLLA_U5Entune audiooperated.
●The displayed image may become 
darker and moving images may be slightly distorted when the 
screen is cold.
●In extremely cold conditions, the screen may not be displayed and 
the data input b y a user may be 
deleted. Also, the screen buttons 
may be harder than usual to 
depress.
●When you look at the screen through polarized material such as polarized sunglasses, the screen 
may be dark and hard to see. If 
so, look at the scr een from differ-
ent angles, adjust the screen set-
tings on the display settings 
screen or take  off your sun-
glasses.
●When  is displayed on the 
screen, select  to return to the 
previous screen.
The operable areas of the 
capacitive touch screen buttons use capacitive touch sensors and may not operate properly in the following situations:
If the screen is dirty or wetIf a source of strong electro-
magnetic waves is brought near the screen
If a glove is worn during oper-ation
If the screen is touched by a fingernail
If a stylus is used to operate the buttons
If your palm touches the oper-able area of another button during operation
If a button is touched quickly
If the operable part of a capacitive touch screen but-ton is touched by or covered with a metal object, such as the following, it may not oper-ate properly:
• Magnetic isolation cards
• Metallic foil, such as the inner 
packaging of a cigarette box
•C o i n s
• Discs, such as a CD or DVD
If the operable part of a 
capacitive touch screen but-ton is wiped, it may operate unintentionally.
If the capacitive touch screen button is being touched when the engine switch is changed to ACC or ON, the button may not operate properly. In this case, remove anything touch-ing the button, turn the engine switch off and then turn it to NOTICE
●To prevent damaging the 
screen, lightly touch the screen 
buttons with your finger.
●Do not use objects other than 
your finger to touch the screen.
●Wipe off fingerprints using a glass cleaning cloth. Do not use 
chemical cleaners to clean the 
screen, as they may damage the touch screen.
Capacitive touch screen 
buttons

270 5-2. Basic information  before operation
COROLLA_UACC or ON, or restart the sys-
tem by press and hold the “POWER VOLUME” knob for 3 seconds or more.
Capacitive touch screen button sen-
sor sensitivity can be adjusted. (P.296)
1Press the “HOME” button.
2Check that the home screen 
Selecting a screen will display it full 
screen.
●The display information and area 
on the home screen can be cus-tomized.
●The home screen can be set to several types of split layoutsHome screen
On the home screen, multi-
ple screens, such as the audio/visual system screen, hands-free screen and clock screen, can be displayed simultaneously.
Home screen operation

271 5-2. Basic information before operation
COROLLA_U5Entune audioThe display information/area on 
the home screen and the home screen layout can be changed.
2Select “Setup”.
If the general settings screen is not 
displayed, select “General”.
3Select “Customize Home 
Screen”.
4Select the items to be set.
Select to change the display 
information and area on the home screen.
Select to change the home 
screen layout.When searching by a name or entering data, letters and num-bers can be entered via the screen.
Text field. Entered charac-ter(s) will be displayed.
Select to erase one charac-
ter. Select and hold to continue erasing characters.
Select to move the cursor.Select to choose predictive 
text candidate for entered text. (P.272)
Select to display a list of pre-dictive text candidates when there is more than one. (P.272)
Select to enter desired char-acters.
Select to enter characters in 
lower case or in upper case.Customizing the home 
screen
Entering letters and 
numbers/list screen operation
bers

272 5-2. Basic information  before operation
COROLLA_USelect to change character 
types. (P.272)
Select to make a space on cursor.
Keyboard layout can be changed. 
(P.296)
1Select “Change Type”.
2Select the desired character.
Depending on the screen being dis-played, it may not be possible to 
change keyboard characters.
When text is input, the system 
predicts the text that may com-plete the currently unconfirmed text and displays predictive replacement candidates that match the beginning of the text.1Input text.
2Select the desired candidate.
To select a candidate that is not 
displayed, select , and 
then select the desired predic-
tive replacement candidate.
The list screen may be dis-
played after entering characters. When a list is displayed, use the appropriate screen button to scroll through the list.Changing character type
Displaying predictive text 
candidates
List screen
Scrolling list screen

273 5-2. Basic information before operation
COROLLA_U5Entune audioTo scroll up/down the list, 
flick the list up/down.
Select to skip to the next or 
previous page. Select and 
hold  or  to scroll 
through the displayed list.
Indicates the position of the 
displayed entries in the entire list.To scroll up/down pages, drag the bar.
If  appears to the right of an item 
name, the complete name is too 
long to display.
●Select to  scroll to the end of 
the name.
●Select  to mov e to the begin-
ning of the name.
Items are displayed in the list 
with the most similar results of the search at the top.
1Select .2Input text.
3Select “Search”.
4The list is displayed.
Searching a list

274 5-2. Basic information  before operation
COROLLA_U1Press the “MENU” button.
2Select “Display”.
3Select the desired items to 
be set.
Select to turn the screen off. 
To turn it on, press any but-ton.
Select to turn day mode 
on/off. (P.274)
Select to adjust the screen display. ( P.274)
Select to adjust the camera display.
When the screen is viewed through 
polarized sunglasses, a rainbow 
pattern may appear  on the screen 
due to optical characteristics of the 
screen. If this is disturbing, please 
operate the screen without polarized 
sunglasses.
Depending on the position of the 
headlight switch, the screen changes to day or night mode. This feature is available when the headlight is switched on.
Select “Day Mode”.
If the screen is set to day mode with 
the headlight switch turned on, this 
condition is memorized even with the engine turned off.
The contrast and brightness of 
the screen can be adjusted according to the brightness of your surroundings.
1Select “General” or “Cam-
era”.
2Select the desired item.
“Display (General)” screen only: Screen adjustment
The contrast and brightness of the screen display and the image of the camera dis-play can be adjusted. The screen can also be turned off, and/or changed to either day or night mode.
(For information regarding audio/visual screen adjust-ment:  P.305)
Displaying the screen 
adjustment screen
Changing between day 
and night mode
Adjusting the con-
trast/brightness

275 5-2. Basic information before operation
COROLLA_U5Entune audioSelect “<” or “> ” to select the 
desired display.
“Contrast”
“+”: Select to strengthen the con-
trast of the screen.
“-”: Select to weaken the contrast of 
the screen.
“Brightness”
“+”: Select to brighten the screen.
“-”: Select to darken the screen.Linking multi-informa-
tion display and the system
The following functions of 
the system are linked with the multi-information dis-play in the instrument clus-ter:
Audio
Phone*
etc.
These functions can be operated using multi-infor-mation display control switches on the steering wheel. ( P.87)
*: When an Apple CarPlay con-
nection is esta blished, this 
function will be unavailable.

276 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_U5-3.Connectivity settings
●This system is n ot guaranteed to 
operate with all Bluetooth® 
devices.
●If your cellular phone does not 
support HFP, registering the Blue-
tooth® phone or using OPP, 
PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles indi-
vidually will not be possible.
●If the connect ed Bluetooth® 
device version is older than rec-
ommended or incompatible, the 
Bluetooth® device function may 
not work properly.
●Refer to
http://www.toyota.com/Entune/
in the United States, 
http://www.toyota.ca/entune  in 
Canada, and http://www.toyo tapr.com/entune
 in 
Puerto Rico, to find approved Bluetooth® phones for this sys-
tem.
●Certification
Bluetooth is a registered trademark 
of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
■Registering from the sys-
tem
1Turn the Bluetooth® connec-
tion setting of your cellular phone on.
This function is not available when 
Bluetooth® connection setting of 
your cellular phone is set to off.
2Press the “MENU” button.
3Select “Phone”.
Operations up to this point can also 
be performed by pressing the “PHONE” button on the instrument 
panel.Registering/Connect-
ing a Bluetooth® 
device
To use the hands-free sys-
tem, it is necessary to regis-
ter a Bluetooth® phone with 
Once the phone has been 
registered, it is possible to use the hands-free system.
This operation cannot be performed while driving.
When an Apple CarPlay connection is established, 
Bluetooth
® functions of the 
system will become unavail-
able and any connected 
Bluetooth® devices will be 
disconnected.Registering a Bluetooth® 
phone for the first time

277 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_U5Entune audio4Select “Yes” to register a 
phone.
5Select the desired Bluetooth® 
device.
If the desired Bluetooth® phone is 
not on the list, select “If you cannot 
find...” and follow  the guidance on 
the screen. ( P.278)
6Register the Bluetooth® 
device using your Blue-
tooth® device.
For details about operating the Bluetooth
® device, see 
the manual that comes with it.
A PIN code is not required for 
SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® 
devices. Depending on the 
type of Bluetooth® device 
being connected, a message 
confirming registration may be displayed on the Blue-
tooth
® device’s screen. 
Respond and operate the Bluetooth
® device according 
to the confirmation message.
7Check that the following 
screen is displayed, indicat-ing pairing was successful (a 
Bluetooth
® link has been 
established but registration is 
not yet complete).
The system is connecting to the registered device.
At this stage, the Bluetooth
® 
functions are not yet avail-able.

278 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_U8Check that “Connected” is 
displayed and registration is complete.
If an error messa ge is displayed, 
follow the guidance on the screen 
to try again.
If a cellular phone does not operate properly after being connected, turn 
the cellular phone off and on and 
then connect it again.
■Registering from phone
1Select “If you cannot find…”.
2Select “Register from 
Phone”.
3Check that the following screen is displayed, and reg-ister the Bluetooth
® device 
using your Bluetooth® 
device.
For details about operating 
the Bluetooth® device, see 
SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) 
compatible Bluetooth® 
devices. Depending on the type of Bluetooth
® device 
tooth
4Follow the steps in “Register-ing a Bluetooth
® phone for 
the first time” from step 7. 
(P.276)
To use the Bluetooth® audio, it is 
necessary to register an audio 
Registering a Bluetooth® 
audio player for the first 
time

279 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_U5Entune audioplayer with the system.
Once the player has been regis-
tered, it is possible to use the 
Bluetooth® audio.
This operation cannot be per-
formed while driving.
For details about registering a 
Bluetooth® device: P.276
nection is established, Blue-
tooth® functions of the system 
will become unavailable and any 
connected Bluetooth® devices 
will be disconnected.
tion setting of your audio 
player on.
This function is n ot available when 
the Bluetooth® connection setting 
of your audio player is set to off.
2Press the “AUDIO” button.
3Select “Source” on the audio screen or press “AUDIO” but-ton again.
4Select “Bluetooth”.
5Select “Yes” to register an audio player.6Follow the steps in “Register-
ing a Bluetooth
® phone for 
the first time” from step 5. 
(P.276)
This system supports the follow-ing services.
■Bluetooth® Core Specifica-
tion
Ver. 2.0 (Recommended: Ver. 4.1 +EDR)
■Profiles
HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 (Recommended: Ver. 1.7)
This is a profile to allow hands-free 
phone calls using a cellular phone. It has outgoing and incoming call functions.
OPP (Object Push Profile) 
Ver. 1.1 (Recommended: Ver. 1.2)
This is a profile to transfer contacts 
data.
PBAP (Phone Book Access 
Profile) Ver. 1.0 (Recom-mended: Ver. 1.2)
This is a profile to transfer phone-
book data.
MAP (Message Access Pro-
file) Ver. 1.0 (Recommended: Ver. 1.2)
This is a profile to use phone mes-
sage functions.
SPP (Serial Port Profile) Rec-
ommended: Ver. 1.2Profiles

280 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_UThis is a profile to use the “Toyota 
Entune” function.
A2DP (Advanced Audio Dis-
tribution Profile) Ver. 1.0 (Rec-ommended: Ver. 1.3)
This is a profile to transmit stereo 
audio or high quality sound to the audio/visual system.
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote 
Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 (Rec-ommended: Ver. 1.6)
This is a profile to allow remote 
control the A/V equipment.1Press the “MENU” button.
3Select “Bluetooth”.
4Select the desired item to be 
set.
Connecting a Bluetooth® Setting Bluetooth® 
details
Displaying the Blue-
tooth® setup screen
Bluetooth® setup screen

281 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_U5Entune audiodevice and editing the Blue-
tooth® device information 
(P.280, 283)
device (P.282)
Deleting a Bluetooth® device 
(P.283)
Setting the Bluetooth® sys-
tem (P.285)
Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices 
(Phones (HFP) and audio play-
ers (AVP)) can be registered.
If more than 1 Bluetooth® device 
has been registered, select 
which device to connect to.
1Display the Bluetooth® set-
tings screen. ( P.280)
2Select “Registered Device”.
3Select the device to be con-
nected.
: Phone
: Audio player: Phone/“Toyota Entune” service
The profile icon for a currently connected device will be dis-
played in color.
Selecting a profile icon which is not currently connected will switch the connection to the function.
If the desired Bluetooth
® 
device is not on the list, select “Add New Device” to register the device. ( P.282)
4Select the desired connec-tion.
“Device Info”: Select to confirm and 
change the Bluetooth® device infor-
mation. ( P.283)
When another Bluetooth® 
device is connected
To disconnect the Bluetooth® 
device, select “Yes”.
5Check that a confirmation 
screen is displayed when the connection is complete.
If an error message is displayed, 
follow the guidance on the screen to try again.
●It may take time if the device con-nection is carried out during Blue-
tooth® audio playback.
●Depending on the type of Blue-tooth
® device being connected, it 
may be necessary to perform Connecting a Bluetooth® 
device

282 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_Uadditional steps on the device.
●When disconnecting a Bluetooth® 
device, it is recommended to dis-
connect using the system.
■Connecting a Bluetooth® 
device in a different way 
(from phone top screen)
P.347
device in a different way (from phone setup screen)
P.360
(from Bluetooth® audio 
screen)
P.318
■Auto connection mode
To turn auto connection mode 
on, set “Bluetooth Power” to on. 
(P.285) Leave the Bluetooth® 
device in a location where the 
connection can be established.
When the engine switch is in 
ACC or ON, the system searches for a nearby regis-tered device.
The system will connect with the registered device that was last connected, if it is nearby. When automatic connection priority is set to on and there is more than one registered 
Bluetooth
® phone available, 
the system will automatically connect to the Bluetooth
® phone with the highest prior-
ity. (P.285)
■Connecting manually
When the auto connection has failed or “Bluetooth Power” is turned off, it is necessary to con-
nect the Bluetooth
® device man-
ually.
tings screen. ( P.280)
2Follow the steps in “Connect-
ing a Bluetooth® device” from 
step 2. (P.281)
■Reconnecting the Blue-tooth
® phone
If a Bluetooth® phone is discon-
nected due to poor reception from the Bluetooth
® network 
when the engine switch is in 
ACC or ON, the system auto-matically reconnects the Blue-
tooth
® phone.
Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices can 
be registered.
Bluetooth® compatible phones 
(HFP) and audio players (AVP) 
can be registered simultane-ously.
formed while driving.Registering a Bluetooth® 
device

283 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_U5Entune audio1Display the Bluetooth® set-
2Select “Add New Device”.
When another Bluetooth® 
When 5 Bluetooth® devices 
have already been registered
A registered device needs to be 
replaced. Select “Yes”, and select the device to be replaced.
3Follow the steps in “Register-
ing a Bluetooth® phone for 
(P.276)
2Select “Remove Device”.
3Select the desired device.
4Select “Yes” when the confir-
mation screen appears.5Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.
When deleting a Bluetooth® phone, 
the contact data will be deleted at 
the same time.
The Bluetooth® device’s infor-
mation can be displayed on the screen. The displayed informa-tion can be edited.
1Display the Bluetooth
® set-
3Select the desired device to 
be edited.
4Select “Device Info”.Deleting a Bluetooth® 
device
Editing the Bluetooth® 
device information

284 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_U5Confirm and change the 
Bluetooth® device informa-
tion.
The name of the Bluetooth® 
device is displayed. It can be 
changed to a desired name. (P.284)
Select to set the Bluetooth
® 
audio player connection method. ( P.284)
Device address is unique to the device and cannot be changed.
Phone number is unique to 
the Bluetooth
® phone and 
cannot be changed.
Compatibility profile is unique 
to the Bluetooth® device and 
Select to reset all setup 
items.●If 2 Bluetooth® devices have been 
registered with the same device 
name, the devices can be distin-
guished referring to the device’s address.
●Depending on the type of Blue-
tooth® phone, some information 
may not be displayed.
1Select “Device Name”.
2Enter the name and select 
“OK”.
Even if the device name is changed, 
the name registered in your Blue-
tooth® device does not change.
1Select “Connect Audio Player 
From”.
2Select the desired connec-tion method.
“Vehicle”: Select to connect the 
audio player fro m the vehicle’s 
audio/visual system.
“Device”: Select to connect the 
vehicle’s audio/visual system from 
the audio player.
Depending on the audio player, the 
“Vehicle” or “Device” connection method may be best. As such, refer 
Changing a device name
Setting audio player con-
nection method

285 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_U5Entune audioto the manual that comes with the 
audio player.
The Bluetooth® settings can be 
confirmed and changed.
2Select “Detailed Settings”.
3Select the desired item to be 
set.
Select to set Bluetooth® con-
nection on/off. ( P.285)
Select to change the auto-
matic connection priority of 
the registered Bluetooth® 
devices. ( P.285)
Select to edit the system 
information. ( P.286)
Select to reset all setup items.
1Select “Bluetooth Power”.
When “Bluetooth Power” is on: 
The Bluetooth
® device is auto-matically connected when the 
engine switch is in ACC or ON.
When “Bluetooth Power” is off: 
The Bluetooth® device is dis-
connected, and the system will 
not connect to it next time.
While driving, the auto connection 
state can be changed from off to on, 
but cannot be changed from on to 
off.
The automatic connection prior-
ity of the registered Bluetooth® 
devices can be changed.
1Select “Preferred Device Set-
tings”.
2Select the desired item to be set.
Select to set automatic con-
nection priority on/off.
the registered Bluetooth
® 
phones. ( P.286)
the registered Bluetooth® “Detailed Settings” 
screen
Changing “Bluetooth 
Power”
Setting automatic connec-tion priority

286 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_Uaudio players. ( P.286)
items.
■Changing Bluetooth® 
device automatic connec-tion priority
1Select “Preferred Phones” or “Preferred Audio Players”.
2Select the desired Bluetooth
® 
device and select “Move Up” or “Move Down” to change the preferred order.
A newly registered Bluetooth® 
device will automatically be given 
the highest automatic connection 
priority.
1Select “System Information”.2Select the desired item to be 
set.
Displays system name. Can 
be changed to a desired name. (P.287)
PIN code used when the 
Bluetooth
® device was regis-
tered. Can be changed to a 
desired code. ( P.287)
Select to set the connection 
status display of the phone on/off.
status display of the audio player on/off.
Compatibility profile of the 
system
items.Editing the system infor-
mation

287 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_U5Entune audio■Editing the system name
1Select “System Name”.
2Enter a name and select 
“OK”.
■Editing the PIN code
1Select “System PIN Code”.
2Enter a PIN code and select “OK”.*: If equipped
1Enable the Wi-Fi® Hotspot 
function. ( P.288)
2Disable the “Hide Access Point” function. ( P.288)
3Search for the vehicle access point using the device you wish to connect.
For details about  operating the 
device, refer to the documentation 
which came with it.Wi-Fi® Hotspot*
By connecting a device to 
the vehicle via Wi-Fi®, it can 
access the internet through 
the DCM.
To use this function, a 
Wi-Fi® Hotspot service sub-
scription from Verizon Wire-
less is required. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.
This function is not made available in some countries or areas.
Connecting a device to 
the in-vehicle access point
Searching for and con-
necting a device to the 
vehicle access point

288 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_U4Operate the device to con-
nect it to the vehicle access point.
To check the vehicle access point 
password, check “Password”. 
(P.288)
Hints for connecting to the vehicle 
via Wi-Fi® can be displayed. 
(P.288)
function. ( P.288)
2Enable the “Hide Access 
Point” function. ( P.287)
3Enter the access point name (SSID) into the device you wish to connect and connect it.
To check the vehicle access point password, check “Pass-word”. ( P.288)
The security settings on the device must be the same as that displayed for “Security”. (P.288)
For details about operating the device, refer to the docu-mentation which came with it.1Press the “MENU” button.
3Select “Wi-Fi
*”.
*:W i - F i® is a registered trademark 
of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
4Select the desired item to be set.
Select to enable/disable the 
Wi-Fi
® Hotspot function. 
(P.289)Connecting a device to the 
in-vehicle access point using the access point 
name (SSID)Changing the Wi-Fi® set-
tings

289 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_U5Entune audioSelect to check/change the 
access point password. (P.289)
Select to display hints for connecting to the vehicle via 
Wi-Fi
®.
Select to make the access 
point searchable/unsearch-able.
Select to check/change the 
security protocol of the access point (for authentica-tion and encryption). (P.290)
Select to change the access point name (SSID). ( P.290)
Select to change the Wi-Fi
® 
connection channel (within the 2.4GHz frequency band). (P.290)
If any settings have been changed, 
it will be necessa ry to reset the 
Wi-Fi® system to complete the 
changes. To reset the Wi-Fi® sys-
tem, select “Yes” on the pop-up dis-
played after changing the settings.
When the Wi-Fi® Hotspot func-
tion is enabled, the system 
checks for a valid Hotspot ser-vice subscription.
If a Hotspot service subscription 
has not been started, start the Toyota Entune App Suite Con-nect application to activate the service subscription. (If the Toyota Entune App Suite Con-nect application has not been installed, install the application.)
Contact your Toyota dealer for 
details about the Toyota Entune App Suite Connect application.
1Select “Password”.
2Check that the following 
screen is displayed.
Displays the password
Select to display/hide the 
entered password.
Select to change the pass-
word.
1Select “Change Password”.
2Enter the desired password and select “OK”.
When setting/changing a pass-
word, observe the following guide-
lines to help prevent the password from being cracked by a third party:
Use an 8-character or longer 
password consisting of letters Enabling/disabling the 
Wi-Fi® Hotspot functionChecking/changing the 
password
Changing the password

290 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_Uand numbers. (Non-ASCII 
characters will not be recog-nized by the system.)
Change the password regu-larly.
If you write the password down, do not leave it some-where where it would be visi-ble.
Do not use the same or a sim-ilar password to that for other accounts.
Avoid using easy to identify words, such as your vehicle’s model name or license plate number, simple dictionary words, or words with simple obfuscation, such as c@t (for cat), as your password.
1Select “Security”.
2Select the desired security protocol.
1Select “Access Point Name”.
2Enter the desired access point name (SSID) and select “OK”.
1Select “Channel”.2Check that the following screen is displayed.
Select to change the chan-
nel selection to auto-matic/manual.
When “Manual” is selected, 
select to change the channel.
1Set “Select Channel” to “Manual”.
2Select “Channel Number”.
3Enter the desired channel number and select “OK”.
Channels 1 through 11 can be 
selected.
■Wi-Fi® function operating hints
●If a connected device is taken out 
of the Wi-Fi® connection area, the 
connection will be severed.
●If the vehicle is d riven out of the 
cellular communic ation coverage 
area, connecting to the internet 
via the Wi-Fi® Hotspot will not be 
possible.
●If a Bluetooth® device is used 
while a device is  connected using Changing the security pro-
tocol
Changing the access point 
name (SSID)
Selecting a Wi-Fi® connec-
tion channelChanging the channel
Wi-Fi® function operating 
hints

291 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_U5Entune audiothe Wi-Fi® Hotspot function, the 
communication speed may 
decrease.
●If the vehicle is  near a radio 
antenna, radio station or other 
source of strong radio waves and 
electrical noise, communication may be slow or impossible.
The condition of Wi-Fi® connec-
tion appears on the right upper 
side of the screen. ( P.264)Communication standardsIEEE 802.11bIEEE 802.11gIEEE 802.11n (2.4GHz)
Security
WPA™WPA2™
• WPA™ and WPA2™ are trade-
marks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.WARNING
●Use Wi-Fi® devices only when 
safe and legal to do so.
●Your audio unit is fitted with 
Wi-Fi® antennas. People with 
implantable cardiac pacemak-
ers, cardiac resynchronization 
therapy-pacemakers or implant-able cardioverter  defibrillators 
should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves 
and the Wi-Fi
® antennas.
operation of such devices.
●Before using Wi-Fi® devices, 
users of any electrical medical 
device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization ther-
apy-pacemakers or implantable 
cardioverter defib rillators should 
consult the manufacturer of the 
device for information about its 
operation under the influence of radio waves. 
Radio waves could have unex-
pected effects on  the operation 
Conditions displayed with 
Wi-Fi® iconSpecifications

292 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_U*: if equipped
1Enable Siri on the device to 
be connected.
2Connect the device to the USB port. ( P.304)
3Select “Always Enable” or “Enable Once”.
If “Do Not Enable” is selected, an Apple CarPlay connection will not be established. In this case, the device can be oper-ated as a normal Apple device, such as an iPod.
Depending on the device con-nected, it may take approxi-mately 3 to 6 seconds before an Apple CarPlay connection is established.
4Check that home screen of Apple CarPlay is displayed.
Select to display the home 
screen of Apple CarPlay.Touch and hold to activate Siri.
Select to start the application.
User can use any iPhone application supported by Apple CarPlay.
Select to display the system 
screen.
●When an Apple CarPlay connec-
tion is established, the function of some system bu ttons will change.
●When an Apple CarPlay connec-tion is established, some system functions, such as the following, 
will be replaced by similar Apple 
CarPlay function s or will become 
unavailable:
• iPod (Audio Playback)Apple CarPlay*
Apple CarPlay allows some 
applications, such as Map, Phone, and Music, to be used on the system.
When an Apple CarPlay connection is established, Apple CarPlay compatible applications will be dis-played on the system dis-play.
Compatible device
Apple iPhone (iOS Ver. 9.3 or later) that supports Apple CarPlay. For details, refer tohttps://www.apple.com/ios/
carplay/ .
Establishing an Apple 
CarPlay connection

293 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_U5Entune audio• Hands-free Phone
• USB audio/USB video
• Bluetooth® audio
• Bluetooth® phone
• Toyota Entune A pp Suite Connect
●The guidance volume can be 
changed on the voice settings 
screen. ( P.299)
●To disable Apple CarPlay while a device is connected, set “Apple CarPlay” on the general settings screen to off. ( P.296) 
●Apple CarPlay is an application developed by Apple Inc. Its func-
tions and services may be termi-
nated or changed without notice depending on the connected 
device’s operation system, hard-
ware and software, or due to changes in Apple CarPlay specifi-
cations.
●In some regions, speed limit infor-mation is displayed on the route 
guidance screen of the iOS 11 or later map application. The dis-
played information is based on the 
information in the map application, so it may differ from the speed 
limit information displayed on the 
multi-informat ion display.●Use of the Apple CarPlay logo means that a vehicle user inter-
face meets Apple  performance 
standards. Apple is not responsi-
ble for the operation of this vehicle 
or its compliance with safety and 
regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this product with 
iPhone or iPod may affect wire-
less performance.
●Apple, iPad, iPhone, iPod, and iPod touch are t rademarks of 
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. 
and other countries. Apple Car-
Play is a trademark of Apple Inc.
If you are experiencing difficulti es with Apple CarPlay, check the fol-
lowing table.WARNING
Do not connect iPhone or operate the controls while driving.
NOTICE
●Do not leave your iPhone in the 
vehicle. In particular, high tem-
peratures inside the vehicle may damage the iPhone.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the 
iPhone while it is connected as 
this may damage the iPhone or its terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into 
the port as this may damage the 
iPhone or its terminal.
Troubleshooting

294 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_USymptom Solution
An Apple CarPlay connec-
tion cannot be estab-lished.Check if the device supports Apple CarPlay.Check if Apple CarPlay is enabled on the con-nected device.For details, refer to https://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
.
Check if “Apple CarPlay” on the general set-tings screen is set to on. ( P.296)
Check if the Lightning cable being used is certi-fied by Apple Inc., and i f it is securely con-
nected to the devic e and USB port.
When the iPhone is c onnected using a USB 
hub, etc., an Apple CarPlay connection may not be established. Connect the lightning cable to USB the port directly.
After checking all of the above, try to establish an Apple CarPlay connection. ( P.292)
When an Apple CarPlay connection is established and a video is being played, the video is not displayed, but audio is output through the sys-tem.
As the system is not designed to play video through Apple CarPlay, this is not a malfunc-tion.
Although an Apple Car-Play connection is estab-lished, audio is not output through the system.
The system may muted or the volume may be low. Increase the system volume.
The Apple CarPlay screen has artifacts and/or audio from Apple CarPlay has noise.Check if the Lightning cable being used to con-nect the device to th e system is damaged.
To check if the Lightning cable is damaged internally, connect the  device to another sys-
tem, such as a PC, and check if the device is recognized by the conn ected system. (The 
device should begin charging when connected.)

295 5-3. Connectivity settings
COROLLA_U5Entune audio
*: Applications not compatible with  Apple CarPlay are application s installed 
on the iPhone that are not disp layed on the Apple CarPlay scree n appli-
cation list. (such as visual voicemail)During Apple CarPlay 
music application (Apple Music, Spotify, etc.) play-back, if the iPhone is operated to start and play audio from an application that is not compatible with 
Apple CarPlay
* and the 
onboard device volume is 
changed, the audio of the incompatible application stops and the system resumes playback of the original music application.This operation is perfo rmed according to the 
specification of the onboard device, this is not a malfunction.
After interrupt audio (such as navigation route guid-ance) is played from an application that is not compatible with Apple CarPlay while the onboard device is playing audio (FM/AM, CD, etc.), the system does not resume playback of the original audio (FM/AM, CD, etc.).This operation is perfo rmed according to the 
Manually change the audi o source by yourself. 
Or, do not use applications that are not compat-
ible with Apple CarPlay.
* Due to some naviga-
tion applications are compatible from iOS 12, 
update to the latest iOS and application ver-sions.Symptom Solution

296 5-4. Other settings
COROLLA_U5-4.Other settings
be set.
“Clock”
Select to change the time zone and 
select “On” or “Off” for daylight sav-ing time, automatic adjustment of the clock, etc. ( P.297)“Language”
Select to change the language. The language setting of Apple CarPlay can only be chan ged on the con-
nected iPhone.
“Customize Home Screen”
Select to change the display infor-mation/area on the home screen and the home screen layout.  (P.270)
“Theme Setting”
Select to change the screen theme setting.
“Beep”
Select to turn the beep sound on/off.
“Units of Measurement”
Select to change the unit of mea-sure for distance/fuel consumption.
“Keyboard Layout”
Select to change the keyboard lay-out.
“Delete Keyboard History”
Select to delete the keyboard his-tory.
“Memorize Keyboard History”
Select to set the memorize key-board history on/off.
“Animation”
Select to turn the animations on/off.
“Apple CarPlay”*1
Select to turn automatic Apple Car-Play connection establishment on/off when a compatible iPhone is connected to the system via USB.
“Driver Setting”General settings
Settings are available for 
clock, operation sounds, etc.
Displaying the general 
settings screen
General settings screen

297 5-4. Other settings
COROLLA_U5Entune audioSelect to change  the driver set-
tings. (P.298)
“Delete Personal Data”
Select to delete  personal data. 
(P.298)
“Software Update”
Select to update software versions. 
For details, contact your Toyota dealer.
“Software Update Setting”*2
Select to set software update set-ting. (P.299)
“Gracenote Database 
Update”
Select to update Gracenote® data-
base versions. For details, contact 
“Software Information”
Select to display the software infor-mation. Notices related to third party software used in this product are enlisted. (This includes instruc-tions for obtaining such software, where applicable.)
“SW Sensitivity Level”
Select to change  the capacitive 
touch screen button sensitivity to 1 
(low), 2 (medium), or 3 (high).
*1:This function is not made avail-
1Display the general settings 
screen. ( P.296)
2Select “Clock”.3Select the desired items to be set.
Select to change the time 
zone. ( P.297)
Select to set daylight saving time on/off.
Select to set automatic 
adjustment of the clock by GPS on/off.When set to off, the clock can be manually adjusted. (P.297)
Select to set the 24 hour time format on/off.When set to off, the clock is displayed in 12 hour time for-mat.
1Select “Time Zone”.
2Select the desired time zone.
When “Auto Adjust by GPS” is turned off, the clock can be manually adjusted.
1Select “Auto Adjust by GPS” 
to set to off.Clock settings
Setting the time zone
Manual clock setting

298 5-4. Other settings
COROLLA_U2Adjust the clock manually.
Select “+” to set the time for-
ward one hour and “-” to set the time back one hour.
ward one minute and “-” to set the time back one minute.
Select to round to the nearest 
hour.e.g.1:00 to 1:29  1:00
The driver settings feature will allow the system to link some preferences (such as audio pre-sets, screen theme, language, 
etc.) to a paired Bluetooth
® 
phone.
2Select “Driver Setting”.3Select “Enable This Feature”.
1Select “Manually Select Linked Settings”.
2Select the desired phone.
After a few seconds, loaded screen 
automatically switches to the home screen.
Registered or changed per-
sonal settings will be deleted or returned to their default condi-tions.
2Select “Delete Personal Data”.
3Select “Delete”.Driver settings
Manually select linked set-
tings
Deleting personal data

299 5-4. Other settings
COROLLA_U5Entune audio4Select “Yes” when the confir-
mation screen appears.
Examples of settings that can be 
returned to their default conditions:
Audio settings
Phone settings
etc.
When the automatic update 
check function is enabled, if a software update is available from the Toyota Entune center, a message will be displayed.
2Select “Software Update Set-ting”.
3Select “Automatic Update Check” to enable/disable the automatic update check func-tion.
When software update information 
is displayed, contact your Toyota 
dealer.1Press the “MENU” button.
3Select “Voice”.
4Select the desired items to 
be set.
Select to adjust the volume of 
voice guidance.
Select to set the voice recog-
nition prompts.
Select to train voice recogni-
tion.Software update settings*
Voice settings
Voice volume, etc. can be set.
Displaying the voice set-
tings screen
Voice settings screen

300 5-4. Other settings
COROLLA_UThe voice command system 
adapts the user accent.
Select to start the voice rec-
ognition tutorial.
Select to set the voice 
prompt interrupt on/off.
items.
3Select “Vehicle”.
4Select the desired items to be set.
Select to set vehicle customi-
zation. ( P.548)
Select to set valet mode. (P.301)Vehicle settings
Settings are available for vehicle customization, etc.
Displaying the vehicle 
Vehicle settings screen

301 5-4. Other settings
COROLLA_U5Entune audioThe security system can be set 
to on by entering a security code (4-digit number).
When set to on, the system will 
become inoperative once the electrical power source is dis-connected until the security code is entered.
1Display the vehicle settings 
screen. ( P.300)
2Select “Valet Mode”.
3Enter the 4-digit personal code and select “OK”.
4Enter the same 4-digit per-sonal code again and select “OK”.
The system will request that you input the security code again to confirm that you remember it correctly.
When valet mode activates, the system stops and a secu-rity code (4-digit number) standby screen is displayed.
If the 4-digit perso nal code is forgot-
ten, please contact your Toyota 
dealer.
Enter the 4-digit personal code 
and select “OK”.
If an incorrect secu rity code (4-digit 
number) is entered 6 times, the sys-
tem will not accept  another security code (4-digit number) for 10 min-utes.Setting the valet mode
If the valet mode has been 
activated

302 5-5. Using the audio/visual system
COROLLA_U5-5.Using the audio/visual system
The audio control screen can be reached by the following method s:
From the “AUDIO” button
Press the “AUDIO” button.
From the “MENU” button
Press the “MENU” button, then select “Audio”.
• Using the radio ( P.307)
• Playing a USB memory ( P.311)
• Playing an iPod/iPhone ( P.313)
• Playing a Bluetooth® device ( P.316)
• Using the AUX port ( P.319)
• Using the steering wheel audio switches ( P.321)
• Audio system settings ( P.323)Quick reference
Functional overview

303 5-5. Using the audio/visual system
“POWER VOLUME” knob: 
Press to turn the audio/visual system on and off. The system turns on in the last mode used. Turn this knob to adjust the vol-ume.1Press the “AUDIO” button.
2Select “Source” or press “AUDIO” button again.
3Select the desired source.
●Dimmed screen buttons cannot be 
operated.
●When there are tw o pages, select 
 or  to change the page.
●When an Apple Carplay connec-
tion is established, some system functions, such as the following, 
CarPlay function or will become 
unavailable*:
• iPod (Audio Playback)
• Toyota Entune App Suite Connect
1Display the audio source 
selection screen. ( P.303)
2Select “Reorder”.Some basics
This section describes some of the basic features of the audio/visual system. Some information may not pertain to your system.
Your audio/visual system works when the engine switch is in ACC or ON.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being 
discharged, do not leave the audio/visual system on longer 
than necessary when the engine 
Turning the system on 
and offSelecting an audio source
Reordering the audio 
source

304 5-5. Using the audio/visual system
COROLLA_U3Select the desired audio 
source then  or  to reor-
der.
4Select “OK”.
1Connect a device.
Turn on the power of the device if it 
is not turned on.
●The AUX port only supports audio input.
●If a USB hub is plugged-in, two devices can be connected at a 
time.
●Even if a USB hub is used to con-nect more than two USB devices, 
only the first two connected devices will be recognized.
●If a USB hub that has more than two ports is connected to the USB 
port, devices connected to the 
USB hub may not charge or be 
inoperable, as the supply of cur-
rent may be insufficient.
1Display the audio control 
screen. ( P.303)
2Select “Sound”.3Select the desired item to be set.
Select to set the tre-
ble/mid/bass. ( P.304)
Select to set the fader/bal-ance. ( P.305)
Select to set the automatic sound levelizer. ( P.305)
■Treble/Mid/Bass
How good an audio program sounds is largely determined by the mix of the treble, mid and bass levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal pro-grams usually sound better with different mixes of treble, mid and bass.
1Select “Treble/Mid/Bass”.
2Select the desired screen 
button.
Select “+” or “-” to adjust 
high-pitched tones.USB/AUX port
Sound settings

305 5-5. Using the audio/visual system
COROLLA_U5Entune audioSelect “+” or “-” to adjust 
mid-pitched tones.
low-pitched tones.
■Fader/Balance
A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear sound levels is also important.
Keep in mind that when listening 
to a stereo recording or broad-cast, changing the right/left bal-ance will increase the volume of 1 group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another.
1Select “Fader/Balance”.
button.
Select to adjust the sound 
balance between the front and rear speakers.
balance between the left and right speakers.
■Automatic sound levelizer (ASL)
The system adjusts to the opti-mum volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed to compensate for increased road noise, wind noise, or other noises while driving.
1Select “Automatic Sound 
Levelizer”.
2Select “High”, “Mid”, “Low” or “Off”.
■Screen format settings
The screen format can be selected for USB video.
3Select “Audio”.
4Select “Common”.
5Select “Screen Format”.
6Select the desired item to be 
adjusted.
Select to display a 4 : 3 
screen, with either side in black.
Select to enlarge the image 
horizontally and vertically to full screen.
by the same ratio horizontally 
Audio screen adjustment

306 5-5. Using the audio/visual system
COROLLA_Uand vertically.
■Contrast and brightness 
adjustment
The contrast and brightness of the screen can be adjusted.
5Select “Display”.
adjusted.
“-”: Select to darken the screen.
Depending on the audio source, 
some functions may not be avail-able.
1Press this switch to operate 
the voice command system.The voice command system and its 
list of commands c an be operated. 
(P.336)

307 5-6. Radio operation
COROLLA_U5Entune audio5-6.Radio operation
The radio operation screen can 
be reached by the following methods:P.303
Select to display the audio source selection screen.
Select to display the preset 
stations screen. ( P.307)
Select to display a list of receivable stations. ( P.308)
Select to display the radio options screen. ( P.308)
Select to display the sound setting screen. ( P.304)
Select to tune to preset sta-tions/channels. ( P.307)Press to seek for stations in the relevant program type.Press and hold for continu-ous seek.
Turn to step up/down fre-
quencies.Turn to move up/down the station. Also, the knob can be used to enter selections on the list screens by pressing it.
The radio automatically changes to 
stereo reception when a stereo 
broadcast is received.
Radio mode has a mix preset 
function, which can store up to 36 stations (6 stations per page x 6 pages) from any of the AM or FM bands.
1Tune in the desired station.AM/FM radio
Overview
Control screen
Control panel
Presetting a station

308 5-6. Radio operation
COROLLA_U2Select and hold “(Add New)”.
When “(Add New)” is 
selected, a confirmation mes-sage appears. Select “Yes” and select “OK”.
To change the preset station to a different one, select and hold the preset station.
The number of preset radio stations 
displayed on the screen can be 
changed. ( P.323)
1Select “Station List”.
2Select “AM” or “FM”.
Select the desired program genre 
when the genre selection screen is 
3Select the desired station.
■Refreshing the station list
1Select “Refresh”.
“Cancel Refresh”: Select to can-
cel the refresh.
“Source”: Select to change to 
another audio source while refreshing.
●The audio/visual system sound is 
muted during refresh operation.●In some situations, it may take some time to update the station 
list.
1Select “Options”.
2Select the desired item to be 
set.
Analog FM only: Select to 
display RBDS text mes-sages.
Select to scan for receivable 
stations.
This audio/visual system is equipped with Radio Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS). RBDS mode allows text messages to be received from radio stations that utilize RBDS transmitters.
When RBDS is on, the radio can 
do the following functions.• Only selecting stations of a 
particular program type
• Displaying messages from 
radio stations
• Searching for a stronger sig-
nal stationSelecting a station from 
the list
Radio options
Radio broadcast data sys-
tem

309 5-6. Radio operation
COROLLA_U5Entune audioRBDS features are available 
only when listening to an FM station that broadcasts RBDS information and the “FM Info” function is on. ( P.308)
●Other applications can be acti-
vated while listeni ng to internet 
radio.
●Some parts of applications can be 
adjusted using the switches on the steering wheel.
●For additional information, refer tohttp://www.toyota.com/Entune/
 or 
call1-800-331-4331 in the United States,
http://www.toyota.ca/entune
 or call
1-888-869-6828 in Canada, and
http://www.toyotapr.com/entune  or 
call1-877-855-8377 in Puerto Rico.
2Select the desired application screen button.
The internet radio application screen is displayed.
Perform operations accord-ing to the displayed applica-tion screen.
For the instrument panel operation method:  P.303
If a compatible phone is Internet radio
One of Toyota Entune App Suite Connect features is the ability to listen to inter-net radio. In order to use this service, a compatible phone and the system needs to be set up. For details:  P.379
Listening to internet radio

310 5-6. Radio operation
COROLLA_Ualready registered, it will be 
connected automatically.

311 5-7. Media operation
COROLLA_U5Entune audio5-7.Media operation
The USB memory operation 
screen can be reached by the following methods: P.303
Connecting a USB memory (P.304)
When an Apple CarPlay con-nection is established, this func-
tion will be unavailable
*.
able in some countries or areas.USB audio
Select to display the audio 
source selection screen.
Select to return to the top 
screen.
Select to display a song list 
screen.
Select to display the play 
mode selection screen.
Select to display the sound 
setting screen. ( P.304)
Select to set repeat playback. (P.312)
Select to change the file/track.Select and hold to fast rewind.
Select to play/pause.Select to change the 
file/track.Select and hold to fast for-ward.
Select to set random play-
back. ( P.313)
Select to change the folder/album.
Displays cover artUSB memory
WARNING
Do not operate the player’s con-
trols or connect the USB memory while driving.
NOTICE
●Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, 
high temperatures inside the 
vehicle may damage the porta-ble player.
●Do not push down  on or apply 
unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is con-nected as this may damage the 
portable player or its terminal.
the port as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.
OverviewControl screen

312 5-7. Media operation
COROLLA_USelect to change the artist.
USB video
1Select “Browse”.
2Select “Videos”.
3Select the desired folder and 
file.
screen.
screen.
setting screen. ( P.304)
Select to change the file.Select and hold to fast rewind.
Select to play/pause.Select to change the file.
Select and hold to fast for-
ward.
Select to display a full screen 
image.
Select to change the folder.Press to change the 
file/track.Press and hold to fast for-ward/rewind.
Turn to change the file/track.
Turn to move up/down the list. Also, the knob can be used to enter selections on the list screens by pressing it.
●While the vehicle i s being driven, 
this function can only output 
sound.
●If tag information exists, the file/folder names  will be changed 
to track/album names.
The file/track or folder/album 
currently being listened to can be repeated.
Select .
●Each time  is selected, the 
mode changes as follows:
When random playback is off
File/track repeat  folder/album 
repeat   off
When random playback is on
File/track repeat  off
Repeating

313 5-7. Media operation
COROLLA_U5Entune audioFiles/tracks or folders/albums 
can be automatically and ran-domly selected.
Select .
Each time  is selected, the 
Random (1 folder/album random)  
folder/album random (all 
folder/album random)  off
The iPod/iPhone operation 
Connecting an iPod/iPhone (P.292, 304)
When the iPod/iPhone con-nected to the system includes video, the system can only out-put the sound.Random order
iPod/iPhone
WARNING
trols or connect the iPod/iPhone while driving.
NOTICE
●Do not push down on or apply 
unnecessary pressure to the 
portable player while it is con-nected as this may damage the 
Overview

314 5-7. Media operation
COROLLA_USelect to display the audio 
screen.*1
Select to display a song list screen.
*1
Select to display the play mode selection screen.
*1
Select to display the audio control screen of Apple Car-
Play.
*2
Select to set repeat playback. 
(P.315)
Select to change the track.Select and hold to fast rewind.
Select to play/pause.Select to change the track.
Select and hold to fast for-ward.
back. (P.315)
Select to change the 
album.
*1Displays cover art
Select to change the artist.*1
Select to change the play-
list.*1
*1:When an Apple CarPlay connec-
tion is established, this switch 
will not be displayed.
*2:This switch will only be displayed 
when an Apple CarPlay connec-tion is established.
Press to change the track.
Press and hold to fast for-ward/rewind.
Turn to change the track.
●Some functions may not be avail-
able depending on the type of 
model.
●When an iPod/iPhone is con-nected using a genuine 
iPod/iPhone cable, the iPod/iPhone starts charging its 
battery.
●Depending on the iPod/iPhone, the video sound may not be able Control screen

315 5-7. Media operation
COROLLA_U5Entune audioto be heard.
●Depending on the iPod/iPhone 
and the songs in the iPod/iPhone, a cover art may be displayed. This 
function can be changed to “On” 
or “Off”. ( P.323) It may take time 
to display the co ver art, and the 
iPod/iPhone may n ot be operated 
while the cover art display is in process.
●When an iPod/iPhone is con-nected and the audio source is 
changed to iPod/iPhone mode, 
the iPod/iPhone will resume play-ing from the same point it was last 
used.
●Depending on the iPod/iPhone that is connected to the system, 
certain functions may not be avail-able.
●If an iPhone is connected via 
Bluetooth® and USB at the same 
time, system operation may 
become unstable. For known 
phone compatibility information, 
refer to
http://www.toyota.com/Entune/ .
●Tracks selected by operating a 
connected iPod/i Phone may not 
be recognized or displayed prop-erly.
●The system may not function properly if a conversion adapter is used to connect a device.
The track currently being lis-
tened to can be repeated.
Select .
When shuffle is off (iPhone 5 or 
later)
Track repeat  album repeat  offWhen shuffle is off (iPhone 4s or 
earlier)
Track repeat  off
When shuffle is on
Tracks or albums can be auto-
matically and randomly selected.
Select .
Shuffle (1 alb um shuffle)  album 
shuffle (all album shuffle)  off
Repeating
Random order

316 5-7. Media operation
COROLLA_U●Depending on the Bluetooth® 
device that is co nnected to the 
system, the music may start play-
ing when selecting  while it is 
paused. Conversely, the music 
may pause when selecting  
while it is playing.
●In the following conditions, the 
system may not function:
• The Bluetooth® device is turned 
off.
• The Bluetooth® device is not con-
nected.
• The Bluetooth® device has a low 
battery.
●When using the Bluetooth® audio 
and Wi-Fi® Hotspot functions at 
the same time, the following prob-
lems may occur:
• It may take longer than normal to 
connect to the Bluetooth® device.
• The sound may cut out.
●It may take time to connect the phone when Bluetooth® audio is 
being played.
●For operating the portable player, see the instruction manual that comes with it.
●If the Bluetooth® device is discon-
nected due to poor reception from 
the Bluetooth® network when the 
engine switch is in ACC or ON, 
the system automatically recon-
nects the portable player.
nected on purpose, such as it was turned off, this does not happen. 
Reconnect the portable player manually.
●Bluetooth® device information is 
registered when the Bluetooth® 
device is connected to the Blue-
tooth® audio system. When selling 
or disposing o f the vehicle, 
remove the Bluetooth® audio 
information from the system. 
(P.298)
●In some situations, sound output 
via the Bluetooth® audio system 
may be out of sync with the con-
nected device or output intermit-
tently.Bluetooth® audio
The Bluetooth® audio sys-
tem enables users to enjoy 
listening to music that is played on a portable player on the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.
This audio/visual system 
supports Bluetooth®, a wire-
less data system capable of 
playing portable audio music without cables. If your device does not sup-
port Bluetooth
®, the Blue-
tooth® audio system will not 
function.
WARNING
●Do not operate the player’s con-
trols or connect to the Blue-
tooth® audio system while 
driving.

317 5-7. Media operation
The Bluetooth® audio operation 
screen can be reached by the 
following methods: P.303
Connecting a Bluetooth® audio 
device ( P.318)
Depending on the type of porta-ble player connected, some functions may not be available and/or the screen may look dif-ferently than shown in this man-ual.
tooth
® audio will be suspended 
and become unavailable*.
screen.
screen.
Select to display the portable 
device connection screen. (P.318)
Select to display the sound setting screen. ( P.304)
Select to set repeat playback. (P.318)
Select to change the track.Select and hold to fast rewind.WARNING
Bluetooth® antennas. People 
with implantable cardiac pace-
makers, cardiac resynchroniza-tion therapy-pacemakers or 
implantable cardioverter defibril-
lators should maintain a reason-able distance between 
themselves and the Bluetooth
® 
antennas. The radio waves may 
affect the operation of such devices.
●Before using Bluetooth® 
devices, users of any electrical medical device other than 
ers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implant-
able cardioverter  defibrillators 
should consult the manufacturer 
of the device for information 
about its operation under the 
influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected 
effects on the operation of such 
medical devices.
NOTICE
Do not leave your portable player 
in the vehicle. In particular, high 
temperatures inside the vehicle 
may damage the portable player.

318 5-7. Media operation
COROLLA_USelect to play/pause.
Select to change the track.
back. (P.318)
Select to change the album.
Displays cover art
The track or album currently being listened to can be repeated.
Select .
mode changes as follows:When random playback is off
Track repeat  album repeat   off
Select .
Random (1 album random)  
album random (all album random) 
 off
To use the Bluetooth® audio 
system, it is necessary to regis-
ter a Bluetooth® device with the 
system.
Registering an additional 
device
1Display the Bluetooth® audio 
control screen. ( P.317)
2Select “Connect”.
3Select “Add Device”.
When another Bluetooth® device is 
connected, a confirmation screen 
will be displayed. To disconnect the 
Bluetooth® device, select “Yes”.
4Follow the steps in “Register-
(P.276)Control panel
Repeating
Bluetooth® device

319 5-7. Media operation
COROLLA_U5Entune audioSelecting a registered device
4Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the connection is complete.
The AUX operation screen can 
be reached by the following methods: P.303
Connecting a device to the AUX port (P.304)AUX
WARNING
Do not connect portable audio 
device or operate  the controls 
while driving.
NOTICE
●Do not leave portable audio device in the vehicle. The tem-
perature inside the vehicle may 
become high, resulting in dam-age to the player.
portable audio dev ice while it is 
connected as this may damage 
the portable audio device or its 
terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the 
portable audio d evice or its ter-
minal.
Overview

320 5-7. Media operation
source selection screen. (P.303)
Select to return to the control screen.

321 5-8. Audio/visual remote controls
COROLLA_U5Entune audio5-8.Audio/visual remote controls 
Some parts of the audio/visual 
system can be adjusted using the switches on the steering wheel.
Volume control switch
“MODE” switch*: When Apple CarPlay is estab-
lished, this function will be 
unavailable.
 switch
*: When Apple CarPlay is estab-Steering switches
Steering switch operation
Mode Operation/function
AllPress: Volume up/down
Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more): Volume up/down continuously
AM/FMPress: Change audio modes
Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more): Mute (Press and hold again to resume the sound.)AUXPress: Change audio modes
Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more): Mute
USB*, 
iPod/iPhone, 
Bluetooth® 
audio*, APPS*Press: Change audio modes
Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more): Pause (Press and hold again to resume the play mode.)
AM/FMPress: Preset channel up/down
Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more): Seek up/down
Press and hold (1.5 sec. or more): Seek up/down con-tinuously while the switch is being pressed
USB*, 
audio*Press: Track/file up/down
Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more): Fast for-ward/rewindMode Operation/function

322 5-8. Audio/visual remote controls
COROLLA_Ulished, this fun ction will be 
In the APPS mode, s ome operation 
may be done on the screen depend 
on the selected APPS.

323 5-9. Audio settings
COROLLA_U5Entune audio5-9.Audio settings
be set.
Select to set the common 
settings. ( P.323)
Select to set the radio set-tings. (P.323)1Display the audio settings screen. ( P.323)
2Select “Common”.
3Select the desired items to be set.
Select to set the cover art 
display on/off.
Select to prioritize the display 
of information from the Gra-cenote database.
Select to change the screen 
size.
* (P.305)
Select to display the image quality adjustment screen.
* 
(P.306)
*: Only in USB video mode
1Display the audio settings 
screen. ( P.323)
2Select “Radio”.
3Select the desired number of preset radio stations dis-played on the screen.Setup
Detailed audio settings can be programmed.
Displaying the audio set-
Audio settings screen
Common settings
Radio settings

324 5-10. Tips for operating the audio/visual system
COROLLA_U5-10.Tips for operating the audio/visual system 
The use of a cellular phone inside or 
near the vehicle may cause a noise 
from the speakers of the audio/visual system  which you are 
listening to. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.
Usually, a problem with radio 
reception does not mean there is a problem with the radio  it 
is just the normal result of condi-tions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings 
and terrain can interfere with FM reception. Power lines or phone wires can interfere with AM sig-nals. And of course, radio sig-
nals have a limited range. The 
farther the vehicle is from a sta-tion, the weaker i ts signal will 
be. In addition, reception condi-tions change constantly as the vehicle moves.
Here are some common recep-
tion problems that may not indi-cate a problem with the radio as described.
■FM
Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the effective range of FM is about 25 miles (40 km). Once outside this range, you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by dis-tortion.
Multi-path: FM signals are 
reflective, making it possible for 2 signals to reach the vehicle’s antenna at the same time. If this happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of reception.
Static and fluttering: These 
occur when signals are blocked by buildings, trees or other large objects. Increasing the bass level may reduce static and flut-tering.
Station swapping: If the FM sig-
nal being listened to is inter-rupted or weakened, and there is another strong station nearby on the FM band, the radio may tune in the second station until the original signal can be picked up again.
■AM
Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by the upper atmo-sphere  especially at night. 
These reflected signals can interfere with those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak.Operating information
NOTICE
To avoid damage to the 
audio/visual system:
Be careful not to spill beverages 
over the audio/visual system.
Radio

325 5-10. Tips for operating the audio/visual system
COROLLA_U5Entune audioStation interference: When a 
reflected signal and a signal received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it diffi-cult to hear the broadcast.
Static: AM is easily affected by 
external sources of electrical noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening or electri-cal motors. This results in static.
Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an acces-sory has been designed to connect specifically to the Apple product(s) identified in the badge, and has been cer-tified by the developer to meet Apple performance stan-dards. Apple is not responsi-ble for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory stan-dards. Please note that the use of this accessory with an Apple product may affect wireless performance.
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
■Compatible models
The following iPod nano®, iPod 
touch® and iPhone® devices 
can be used with this system.
Made for
• iPhone 7• iPhone 7 Plus• iPhone SE• iPhone 6s• iPhone 6s Plus• iPhone 6• iPhone 6 Plus• iPhone 5s• iPhone 5c• iPhone 5• iPhone 4s• iPod touch (6th generation)• iPod touch (5th generation)• iPod nano (7th generation)
●This system only supports audio 
playback.
●Depending on difference between models or software versions etc., 
some models might be incompati-
ble with this system.iPod

326 5-10. Tips for operating the audio/visual system
COROLLA_UThis device supports high-reso-
lution sound sources.
The definition of high-resolution 
is based on the standards of groups such as the CTA (Con-sumer Technology Association).
Supported formats and play-
able media are as follows.
■Supported formats
WAV, FLAC, ALAC, OGG Vorbis
■Playable media
USB memory*: USB video onlyHigh-resolution sound 
source
File information
Compatible USB devices
USB communi-cation formats USB 2.0 HS (480 Mbps)
File formats FAT 16/32
Correspon-dence class Mass storage class
Compatible audio format
Compatible compressed files
Item USB
Compatible file 
formatMP3/WMA/AAC
WAV(LPCM)/FL
AC/ALAC/OGG 
Vorbis
MP4/AVI/WMVCompatible file 
format (video)*MP4/AVI/WMV
Folders in the 
deviceMaximum
3000
Files in the 
9999
Files per folderMaximum
255
Corresponding sampling fre-
quency
File type Frequency (kHz)
MP3 files: 
MPEG 1 LAYER 3 32/44.1/48
MP3 files: MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3
16/22.05/24
WMA files: 
Ver. 7, 8, 9*1 
(9.1/9.2)32/44.1/48
AAC files: 
MPEG4/AAC-LC11.025/12/16/
22.05/24/32/
44.1/48
WAV (LPCM) 
files*28/11.025/12/16/
44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192
FLAC*28/11.025/12/16/
44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192Item USB

327 5-10. Tips for operating the audio/visual system
COROLLA_U5Entune audio*1:Only compatible with Windows 
Media Audio Standard
*2:Sound source of 48kHz or more 
is down-converted to 
48kHz/24bit.
*1:Variable Bit Rate (VBR) compati-
ble
*2:Only compatible with Windows 
Media Audio StandardMP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3), 
WMA (Windows Media Audio) and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) are audio compres-sion standards.
This system can play MP3/WMA/AAC files on USB memory.
MP4, WMV and AVI files can use the following resolutions: 128x96, 160x120, 176x144 (QCIF), 320x240 (QVGA), 352x240 (SIF), 352x288 (CIF), 640x480 (VGA), 720x480 (NTSC), 720x576 (PAL)ALAC*28/11.025/12/16/
44.1/48/64/
88.2/96
OGG Vorbis*28/11.025/16/
22.05/32/44.1/
48
Corresponding bit rates*1
File type Bit rate (kbps)
MP3 files:
MPEG 1 LAYER 3 32 - 320
MP3 files:MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3
8 - 160
WMA files: Ver. 7, 8CBR 48 - 192
WMA files:
Ver. 9*2 (9.1/9.2)CBR 48 - 320
AAC files:
MPEG4/AAC-LC8 - 320
OGG Vorbis 32-500File type Frequency (kHz)File typeQuantization bit 
rate (bit)
WAV (LPCM) files
16/24FLAC
ALAC
Compatible channel modes
File type Channel mode
MP3 filesStereo, joint ste-reo, dual chan-nel and monaural
WMA files 2ch
AAC files1ch, 2ch (Dual channel is not supported)
WAV (LPCM)/
FLAC/ALAC/
OGG Vorbis2ch

328 5-10. Tips for operating the audio/visual system
COROLLA_UWhen naming an 
MP3/WMA/AAC file, add an appropriate file extension (.mp3/.wma/.m4a).
This system plays back files with .mp3/.wma/.m4a file extensions as MP3/WMA/AAC files respec-tively. To prevent noise and playback errors, use the appropriate file extension.
MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3 formats. This system cannot display disc title, track title and artist name in other formats.
WMA/AAC files can contain a WMA/AAC tag that is used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA/AAC tags carry infor-mation such as track title and artist name.
The emphasis function is available only when playing MP3 files.
This system can play back AAC files encoded by iTunes.
The sound quality of MP3/WMA files generally improves with higher bit rates. 
m3u playlists are not compati-ble with the audio player.
MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO formats are not compatible with the audio player.The player is compatible with VBR (Variable Bit Rate).
When playing back files recorded as VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if the fast forward or reverse operations are used.
It is not possible to check fold-ers that do not include MP3/WMA/AAC files.
MP3/WMA/AAC files in fold-ers up to 8 levels deep can be played. However, the start of playback may be delayed when using USB memory containing numerous levels of folders. For this reason, we recommend creating USB memory with no more than 2 levels of folders.
The play order of the USB memory with the structure shown above is as follows:

329 5-10. Tips for operating the audio/visual system
COROLLA_U5Entune audioThe order changes depending 
on the personal computer and MP3/WMA/AAC encoding software you use.Compatible video format
Format Codec
MPEG-4Video codec:
H.264/MPEG-4 AVC
MPEG4
Audio codec:AAC
MP3
Corresponding screen size:MAX 19201080
Corresponding frame rate:MAX 60i/30p

330 5-10. Tips for operating the audio/visual system
COROLLA_U■ID3 tag
This is a method of embedding track-related information in an 
MP3 file. This embedded infor-mation can include the track number, track title, the artist’s name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments, cover art and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 tag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted to a num-ber of characters, the informa-tion can be viewed when the track is played back.
■WMA tag
WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA tags carry information such as track title and artist name.
■MP3
MP3 is an audio compression standard determined by a work-ing group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Standard Organi-zation). MP3 compresses audio data to about 1/10 the size of that on conventional discs.
■WMA
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio compression for-
mat developed by Microsoft
®. 
It compresses files into a size 
smaller than that of MP3 files. The decoding formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8 and 9.
Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trade-AVI ContainerVideo codec:
MPEG4
WMV9
WMV9 Advanced pro-file
MP3
WMA9.2 (7,8,9.1,9.2)
Windows Media VideoVideo codec:WMV9
Audio codec:WMA9.2 (7,8,9.1,9.2)
TermsFormat Codec

331 5-10. Tips for operating the audio/visual system
COROLLA_U5Entune audiomark of Microsoft Corpora-
tion in the United States and/or other countries. This product includes technol-ogy owned by Microsoft Cor-poration and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licens-ing, Inc.
■AAC
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.
■USB■iPod
■Bluetooth® audio
If the malfunction is not rectified: 
Take your vehicle to your Toyota 
dealer.Error messages
Message Explanation
“USB Error”This indicates a 
problem in the USB memory or its connection.
“No music files found.”This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are included in the USB mem-ory.
“No video files found.”This indicates that no video files are included in the USB mem-ory.Message Explanation
“iPod Error”This indicates a problem in the iPod or its con-nection.
“No music files found.”This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
“Please check the iPod firm-ware version.”This indicates that the software version is not compatible. Per-form the iPod firmware updates and try again.
“Unable to authorize the iPod.”This indicates that it failed to authorize the iPod.
Please check 
your iPod.
“Music tracks not supported. Please check your portable player.” This indicates a problem in the 
Bluetooth
® 
device.

332 5-10. Tips for operating the audio/visual system
COROLLA_U■Except for vehicles sold in CanadaCertification

333 5-10. Tips for operating the audio/visual system
COROLLA_U5Entune audio■For vehicles sold in Canada

334 5-10. Tips for operating the audio/visual system
COROLLA_U■Gracenote
■For U.S. owners

335 5-10. Tips for operating the audio/visual system

336 5-11. Voice command system operation
COROLLA_U5-11.Voice command system operation 
■Steering switch
Talk switch
Voice command system
Press the talk switch to start the 
voice command system. To can-cel voice command, press and hold the talk switch.
When an Apple CarPlay con-nection is established
Press and hold the talk switch to start Siri. To cancel Siri, press the talk switch.
Press the talk switch to start the voice command system.■Microphone
It is unnecessary to speak directly into the microphone when giving a command.
●Voice commands may not be rec-
ognized if:
• Spoken too quickly.• Spoken at a low or high volume.• The windows are open.
• Passengers are talking while 
voice commands are spoken.
• The fan speed of the air condition-
ing system is set at high.
• The air conditioning vents are 
turned towards the microphone.
●In the following c onditions, the 
system may not recognize the 
command properly and using 
voice commands may not be pos-sible:
• The command is incorrect or 
unclear. Note that certain words, accents or speech patterns may 
be difficult for the system to recog-
nize.
• There is excessive background 
noise, such as wind noise.
●Normally, it is necessary to wait 
for a beep before saying a com-
mand. To enable th e ability to talk 
over prompts and say commands before the beep, enable the voice 
prompt interrupt function. 
(P.299)
●This system may not operate immediately after the engine switch is in ACC or ON.Voice command sys-
tem
The voice command sys-
tem enables the radio, phone dialing, etc. to be operated using voice com-mands. Refer to the com-mand list for samples of voice commands. ( P.339)
Using the voice command 
system

337 5-11. Voice command system operation
COROLLA_U5Entune audioThe voice command system is 
operated by saying commands which correspond to a sup-ported function. To display examples of commands for sup-ported functions, select a func-tion button on the screen after starting the voice command sys-tem.
1Press the talk switch.
Voice guidance for the voice com-
mand system can be skipped by pressing the talk switch.
2If “Getting Started with Voice” 
screen is displayed, select “OK” or press the talk switch. (P.338)
3After hearing a beep, say a supported command.To display sample commands of the desired function, say the desired function or select the desired function button. To display more commands, select “More Commands”.
Selecting “Help” or saying “Help” prompts the voice com-mand system to offer exam-ples of commands and operation methods.
Registered POIs, registered names in the contacts list etc., can be said in the place of the “<>” next to the commands. (P.339)
For example: Say “Find a restau-
rant”, “Call John Smith” etc.
If a desired outcome is not 
shown, or if no selections are available, perform one of the following to return to the pre-vious screen:
• Say “Go back”.
•S e l e c t  .
To cancel voice recognition, 
select , say “Cancel”, or 
press and hold the talk switch.
To perform the voice com-
mand operation again, select “Start Over” or say “Start over”.
To suspend voice command operation, select “Pause” or say “Pause”. To resume the voice command operation, select “Resume” or press the NOTICE
Do not touch and put a sharp 
object to the microphone. It may cause failure.
Voice command system 
operation
Operation from the main 
menu

338 5-11. Voice command system operation
COROLLA_Utalk switch.
●If the system does not respond or 
the confirmation screen does not disappear, press the talk switch 
and try again.
●If a voice command cannot be rec-ognized 3 consecutive times, 
voice recognition will be canceled.
●Voice recognition prompts can be 
changed on the voice settings screen. ( P.299)
This function can be used to cancel voice guidance by turning the voice 
prompts off. When you press the 
talk switch while using this setting, a beep sounds, and then you can 
immediately say a command.
●Some voice guidance can be can-celed by setting voice prompts to 
off. Use this setting when it is desirable to say a command 
immediately after pressing the talk 
switch and hearing a beep.
To increase voice recognition 
performance, use the “Tutori-als” and “Voice Training” func-tions on the “Getting Started with Voice” screen. These func-tions are only available when the vehicle is not moving.
The “Tutorials” and “Voice Train-
ing” functions can also be started on the voice settings screen. ( P.299)
1Press the talk switch.2Select the desired item to be set.
Select to display the voice 
command tutorials.
Select to train the voice com-
mand system.
The user will be a sked to say 10 
sample phrases. This will help the 
voice command system adapt to 
the user’s accent.
Select to prevent the screen 
from being displayed again.
Select to proceed to the 
voice command screen.Increasing the voice rec-
ognition performance

339 5-11. Voice command system operation
COROLLA_U5Entune audioRecognizable voice commands 
and their actions are shown below.
Frequently used commands 
are listed in the following tables.
For devices that are not installed to the vehicle, com-mands relating to that device may not be displayed on the screen. Also, depending on other conditions, such as compatibility, some com-mands may not be displayed on the screen.
The functions available may vary according to the system installed.
Voice recognition language can be changed. ( P.296)
■Common■Top menu
*: Vehicle must be parked
■Phone*1Command list
Command list overview
Command list
Command Action
“Help”Displays exam-
ples of some of the available commands
“Go back”Returns to the previous screen
“Cancel”Cancels the voice command system“Start over”Returns to top menu screen
“Pause”Temporarily pauses a voice session until it is resumed by pressing the talk switch again.
“Show com-mand examples for <menu>”Displays the command list of the selected menu
“More com-mands”Displays more commonly used commands
“Voice settings”Displays Voice Setting screen
“Train my voice”Displays Train Voice Recogni-
tion screen
*
“Call <con-
tact>”*2Places a call to 
the specified contact from the phone book
“Call <contact> 
<phone type>”*2Places a call to 
the specified phone type of the contact from the phone bookCommand Action

340 5-11. Voice command system operation
COROLLA_U*1:When an Apple CarPlay connec-
tion is established, this voice 
commands will be unavailable.
*2:If the system does not recognize 
the name of a con tact, create a 
voice tag. ( P.362) The name of 
a contact can also be recognized by adding a voice tag.
■While in a phone call**: When an Apple CarPlay connec-
tion is established, this voice commands will be unavailable.
■While incoming message 
notification is displayed*1, 2
*1:Full screen message notification 
must be turned on within the 
phone settings ( P.360) 
*2:When an Apple CarPlay connec-
■Radio“Dial <phone number>”Places a call to the specified phone number
“Redial”Places a call to the phone num-ber of the latest outgoing call
“Call back”Places a call to the phone num-ber of latest incoming call
“Show recent calls” Displays the call history screen
“Send a mes-sage to <con-tact>”Sends a text message to specified con-tact from the phone book
“Send <digits>”Sends DTMF tones has speci-fied
“Mute”Mutes the micro-phone (far side cannot hear the conversation)
“Unmute”Unmutes the microphoneCommand Action
“Read message”Reads the incoming mes-sage over the vehicle speakers
“Ignore”Ignores the incoming mes-sage notification
“Reply”Initiates sending a reply to the incoming mes-sage
“Call”Places a call to the phone num-ber of incoming message
“Tune to <fre-quency> AM”Changes the radio to the specified AM fre-quency
“Tune to <fre-quency> FM”Changes the radio to the specified FM fre-quency

341 5-11. Voice command system operation
COROLLA_U5Entune audio*: A station list must be built first 
using the radio screen ( P.307) 
■Audio*1
*1:The audio device must be con-
nected via a USB cable to use 
the functionality in this section
■Apps*1
*2:When an application is opened 
and is in full screen mode, press-ing the talk switch will start the voice command system and commands for the currently dis-played application will be avail-able
●Commands relating to operation 
of the audio/visual system can “Play a <genre> 
station”Changes the radio to an FM station of the 
specified genre
*
“Tune to preset 
<1-36>”Changes the radio to the specified preset radio station
“Play Playlist 
<name>”*2Plays tracks 
from the selected playlist
“Play Artist 
from the selected artist
“Play Song 
<name>”*2Plays the 
selected track
“Play Album 
from the selected album
“Play Genre 
from the selected genre
“Play Composer 
from the selected com-poser
“Play Podcast 
from the selected podcastCommand Action
“Play Audiobook 
from the selected audio-book
“Audio On”Turns the audio/visual sys-tem on
“Audio Off”Turns the audio/visual sys-tem off
“Change the audio source to <source name>” Sets the source to the specified audio mode
“Launch <appli-
cation name>”*2Activates the 
Toyota Entune App Suite Con-nect applicationCommand Action

342 5-11. Voice command system operation
COROLLA_Uonly be performed when the 
audio/visual system is turned on.

343 5-12. Mobile Assistant operation
COROLLA_U5Entune audio5-12.Mobile Assistant operation 
●While a phone call is active, the 
Mobile Assistant cannot be used.
●If using the navig ation feature of 
the cellular phone, ensure the 
active audio source is Bluetooth® 
audio or iPod in order to hear turn 
by turn direction prompts.
●Wait for the listening beeps before using the Mobile Assistant.
●The Mobile Assistant may not rec-ognize commands in the following situations:
• Spoken too quickly.• Spoken at a low or high volume.• The windows are open.• Passengers are talking while the 
Mobile Assistant is being used.
turned toward the microphone.
Mobile Assist supports the Siri 
Eyes Free Mode and Google App. The available features and functions may vary based on the iOS/Android version installed on the connected device.
Type A
1Press and hold the talk 
switch on the steering wheel 
until Mobile Assistant screen is displayed.
Type B
1Press and hold the  switch 
on the steering wheel until Mobile Assistant
The Mobile Assistant func-
tion is a voice input assist function. Mobile Assist sup-ports the Siri Eyes Free Mode and Google App. (Google App can be used only with the corresponding device.) Instructions can be spoken into the vehicle microphone as if speaking a command to the phone. The content of the request is then interpreted by the phone and the result is out-put from the vehicle speak-ers. To operate the Mobile Assistant, a compatible device must be registered and connected to this sys-
tem via Bluetooth
®. 
(P.276)
When an Apple CarPlay 
connection is established, this function will be unavail-able.Connectable devices and 
available functions
Mobile Assistant opera-tion

344 5-12. Mobile Assistant operation
COROLLA_UMobile Assistant screen is 
2The Mobile Assistant can be used only when the following screen is displayed.
Type A: To cancel the Mobile Assistant, select “Cancel” or press and hold the talk switch on the steering wheel.Type B: To cancel the Mobile Assistant, select “Cancel” or 
press and hold the  switch 
on the steering wheel.
Type A: To restart the Mobile 
Assistant for additional com-mands, press the talk switch on the steering wheel.Type B: To restart the Mobile Assistant for additional com-
mands, press the  switch 
• Mobile Assistant can only be restarted after the system 
responds to a voice command.
• After some phone and music 
commands, the Mobile Assistant feature will automatically end to complete the requested action.
The volume of the Mobile 
Assistant can be adjusted using the “POWER VOLUME” knob or steering wheel vol-ume control switches. The Mobile Assistant and phone call volumes are synchro-nized.

345 5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)
COROLLA_U5Entune audio5-13.Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones) 
The phone screen can be 
reached by the following meth-ods:
From the “PHONE” button
Press the “PHONE” button.
Press the “MENU” button, then select “Phone”.
used on phone operation:
Registering/connecting a 
Bluetooth
® device ( P.276)
Placing a call using the Blue-tooth
® hands-free system 
(P.350)
Receiving a call using the 
Bluetooth® hands-free system 
(P.353)
Talking on the Bluetooth® 
hands-free system ( P.354)The following function can be 
used on message function:
Using the Bluetooth® phone 
message function ( P.356)
made in the system:
Phone settings ( P.360)
Bluetooth® settings ( P.280)Quick reference
Phone screen operation
Bluetooth® hands-free 
system operation
Message function
Setting up a phone

346 5-13. Phone operation (Hands-fr ee system for cellular phones)
COROLLA_U●This system is n ot guaranteed to 
devices.
support Bluetooth®, this system 
cannot function.
• The cellular phone is turned off.
• The current position is outside the 
communication area.
• The cellular phone is not con-
nected.
• The cellular phone has a low bat-
tery.
tooth® phone, some function is 
not available.●When using the hands-free sys-tem or Bluetooth
® audio and 
Wi-Fi® Hotspot functions at the 
same time, the following problems 
may occur:
• The Bluetooth® connection may 
be cut.
• Noise may be heard on the Blue-
• A noise may be heard during 
phone calls.
●Bluetooth® uses the 2.4 GHz fre-
quency band. If both a Wi-Fi® con-
nection and Bluetooth® 
connection are being used simul-
taneously, each connection may 
●If a Bluetooth® device is attempt-
ing to connect to the vehicle while 
another device is connected as a 
Bluetooth® audio device or con-
nected using the hands-free sys-
tem or Wi-Fi® Hotspot function, 
the communication speed may 
decrease or malfunctions may 
occur, such as image distortion or 
audio skipping. If a Bluetooth® 
device is connected to the system, 
the interference it may cause will be reduced. When carrying a 
device with its Bluetooth® connec-
tion enabled, make sure to regis-
ter it to the system and connect it 
or disable its Bluetooth® function.
●When a device is connected via Bluetooth
®, the Bluetooth® icon 
on the status bar will be displayed 
in blue. ( P.264)Some basics
The hands-free system 
enables calls to be made and received without having to take your hands off the steering wheel.
This system supports Blue-
tooth®. Bluetooth® is a wire-
less data system that 
enables cellular phones to be used without being con-nected by a cable or placed in a cradle.
The operating procedure of the phone is explained here.
When an Apple CarPlay connection is established, phone functions will be per-formed by Apple CarPlay instead of the hands-free system.
WARNING
●While driving, do not operate a 
cellular phone.

347 5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)
To use the hands-free system 
for cellular phones, it is neces-sary to register a cellular phone with the system. ( P.276)■Connecting a Bluetooth® 
device
Registering an additional device
1Display the phone top screen. ( P.345)
2Select “Select Device”.
(P.276)
Selecting a registered device
3Select the desired device to be connected.
■Bluetooth® phone condition 
display
The condition of the Bluetooth® 
phone appears on the upper 
right side of the screen. (P.265)WARNING
® 
NOTICE
Do not leave your cellular phone 
in the vehicle. The temperature 
inside may rise to a level that could damage the phone.
Bluetooth® phone

348 5-13. Phone operation (Hands-fr ee system for cellular phones)
COROLLA_U■Steering switch
By pressing the phone switch, a 
call can be received or ended without taking your hands off the steering wheel.
Phone switch
• If the switch is pressed during a 
call, the call will end.
• If the switch is pressed when an 
incoming call is r eceived, the call 
will be answered.
call when a separate incoming 
call is waiting, the waiting call will be answered.
Apple CarPlay connection is established, the Apple CarPlay phone application will be dis-played on the system screen.
• Press the “+” side to increase the 
volume.
• Press the “-” side to decrease the 
volume.
■Microphone
The microphone is used when 
talking on the phone.●The other party’s voice will be 
heard from the front speakers. 
The audio/vis ual system will be 
muted during phone calls or when 
hands-free voice commands are 
used.
●Talk alternately with the other party on the phone. If both parties speak at the same time, the other 
party may not hear what has been 
said. (This is not a malfunction.)
●Keep call volume down. Other-wise, the other party’s voice may be audible outside the vehicle and 
voice echo may increase. When 
talking on the phone, speak clearly towards the microphone.
●The other party may not hear you clearly when:
• Driving on an unpaved road. 
(Making excessive traffic noise.)
• Driving at high speeds.
• The windows are open.
pointed towards the microphone.
• The sound of the air conditioning 
fan is loud.
• There is a negative effect on 
sound quality due to the phone and/or network being used.Using the phone 
switch/microphone
NOTICE
object to the microphone. It may 
cause failure.

349 5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)
COROLLA_U5Entune audioPress this switch to operate the 
voice command system.
The voice command system and 
its list of commands can be operated. ( P.336)
The following data is stored for every registered phone. When another phone is connected, the following registered data cannot be read:
Contact data
Call history data
Favorites data
Image data
All phone settings
Message settings
When a phone’s registration is 
deleted, the above-mentioned data 
is also deleted.A lot of personal data is regis-
tered when the hands-free sys-tem is used. When selling or disposing of the v ehicle, initial-
ize the data. ( P.298)
The following data in the system can be initialized:
Once initialized, t he data and set-
tings will be erased. Pay additional 
attention when initializing the data.Voice command system
About the contacts in the 
contact listWhen selling or disposing of the vehicle

350 5-13. Phone operation (Hands-fr ee system for cellular phones)
COROLLA_U1Display the phone top 
screen. ( P.345)
2Select the desired method to call from.
■Calling methods from phone screen
By call history ( P.350)
By favorites ( P.350)
By contacts ( P.351)
By keypad ( P.352)
By message ( P.359)
■Also the following lists are available from each func-tion’s screen
By voice command system (P.337)
By home screen ( P.352)
Up to 30 of the latest call history items (missed, incoming and outgoing) can be selected.
1Display the phone top 
2Select “History” and select the desired contact.
If the contact which is not regis-
tered on the contact list is selected, 
the name is displayed as “Unknown Contact”. In this case, select the 
number to make a call properly.
3Check that the dialing screen 
●The icons of call type are dis-
played.
: Missed call
: Incoming call
: Outgoing call
●When making a call to the same 
number continuously, only the 
most recent call is listed in call his-tory.
●When a phone number registered in the contact list is received, the 
name is displayed.
●Number-withheld calls are also 
memorized in the system.
●International phone calls may not be made depending on the type of 
Bluetooth® phone you have.
●The list should group together 
consecutive entries with the same 
phone number and same call 
type. For example, two calls from John’s mobile would be displayed 
as follows: John (2)
Calls can be made using regis-
tered contacts which can be Placing a call using 
the Bluetooth® 
hands-free system
After a Bluetooth® phone 
has been registered, a call 
can be made using the hands-free system. There are several methods by which a call can be made, as described below.
Calling methods on the 
By call historyBy favorites list

351 5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)
COROLLA_U5Entune audioselected from a contact list. 
(P.351)
2Select “Favorites” and select the desired contact.
3Select the desired number.
4Check that the dialing screen is displayed.
Calls can be made by using contact data which is transferred from a registered cellular phone. (P.362)
Up to 5000 contacts (maximum of 4 phone numbers, e-mail addresses and addresses per contact) can be registered in the contact list.
2Select “Contacts” and select the desired contact.
“Add Favorite”/“Remove Favorite”: 
Select to register /remove the con-
tact in the favorites list. ( P.366, 
367)
“E-mail Addresses”: Select to dis-play all registered e-mail addresses 
for the contact.
“Addresses”: Select to display all 
registered addresses for the con-
tact.
4Check that the dialing screen 
■For PBAP compatible Blue-
tooth® phones when “Auto-
matic Transfer” is set to on 
(P.362)
Contacts are transferred auto-matically.
matic Transfer” is set to off 
(P.362)
1Select the desired item.
Select to always transfer all 
the contacts from a con-nected cellular phone auto-matically.
Select to transfer all the con-
tacts from a connected cellu-lar phone only once.
Select to cancel transferring.By contacts list
When the contact list is 
empty

352 5-13. Phone operation (Hands-fr ee system for cellular phones)
COROLLA_U2Check that a confirmation 
screen is displayed when the operation is complete.
■For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Blue-
tooth
® phones
Select to transfer the con-
tacts from the connected cel-lular phone.Transfer the contact data to the system using a Blue-
tooth
® phone.
Select to add a new contact 
manually.Follow the steps in “Register-ing a new contact to the con-tacts list” from step 2. 
(P.365)
Select to cancel transferring.
●If your cellular phone is neither 
PBAP nor OPP compatible, the 
contacts cannot be transferred 
using Bluetooth®. But the contacts 
can be transferred from USB 
device. ( P.364)
tooth® phone:
• It may be necessa ry to perform 
additional steps on the phone 
when transferring contact data.
• The registered image in the con-tact list may not transfer depend-
ing on the type of Bluetooth® 
phone connected.
2Select “Keypad” and enter the phone number.
3Select  or press the  
switch on the steering wheel.
Depending on the type of Blue-
tooth® phone being connected, it 
may be necessary to perform addi-
tional steps on the phone.
1Display the home screen. 
(P.270)
2Select the desired contact.
3Check that the dialing screen is displayed.
■Registering a new contact
1Select and hold the screen button to add a contact.
●If there is no contact in the con-
tacts list, the cont acts cannot be 
registered at the home screen.
●The contact cannot be registered 
at the home screen while driving.
By keypad
By home screen

353 5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)
COROLLA_U5Entune audio1Select “Answer” or press the 
 switch on the steering 
wheel to talk on the phone.
“Decline”: Select to refuse to 
receive the call.
To adjust the volume of a received 
call: Turn the “POWER VOLUME” knob, or use the volume control switch on the steering wheel.
●The contact image picture can be 
displayed only when the vehicle is 
not moving.
●During international phone calls, the other party’s name or number may not be displayed correctly 
depending on the type of Blue-
tooth
●The incoming call display mode 
can be set. ( P.361)
●The ringtone that has been set in the sound settings screen can be 
heard when there is an incoming call. Depending on the type of Bluetooth
® phone, both the sys-
tem and Bluetooth® phone may 
ring simultaneously when there is an incoming call. ( P.360)Receiving a call using 
When a call is received, the 
following screen is dis-played with a sound.
Incoming calls

354 5-13. Phone operation (Hands-fr ee system for cellular phones)
COROLLA_USelect to display the keypad 
to send tones. ( P.354)
Select to send tones. This button only appears when a number that contains a (w) is dialed in hands-free mode. (P.354)
Select to adjust your voice volume that the other party hears from their speaker. (P.355)
Select to mute your voice to the other party.
Select to change handset 
modes between hands-free and cellular phone.
Select to put a call on hold.
To cancel this function, select “Activate”.
Select to hang up the phone.
●Changing from hands-free call to 
cellular phone call is not possible while driving.
●Only when the vehicle is not mov-ing, the contact image can be dis-
played.
●When cellular phone call is changed to hands-free call, the 
hands-free screen will be dis-played and its functions can be 
operated on the screen.
●Changing between cellular phone call and hands-free call can be 
performed by operating the cellu-lar phone directly.
●Transferring methods and opera-tions will be differ ent depending 
on the type of cellular phone you 
have.
●For the operation of the cellular phone, see the manual that 
comes with it.
■By keypad
1Select “0-9”.
2Enter the desired number.
■By selecting “Release 
Tones”
“Release Tones” appear when a continuous tone signal (s) con-taining a (w) is registered in the contact list.This operation can be per-formed while driving.
Select “Release Tones”.Talking on the Blue-
tooth® hands-free sys-
tem
While talking on the phone, 
the following screen is dis-played. The operations out-lined below can be performed on this screen.
Call screen operation
Sending tones

355 5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)
COROLLA_U5Entune audio●A continuous tone signal is a char-
acter string that consists of num-
bers and the characters “p” or “w”. (e.g. 056133w0123p#1)
●When the “p” pause tone is used, the tone data up  until the next 
pause tone will be automatically 
sent after 2 seconds have elapsed. When the “w” pause tone 
is used, the tone data up until the 
next pause tone will be automati-
cally sent after a user operation is performed.
●Release tones can be used when automated operation of a phone 
based service su ch as an answer-
ing machine or bank phone ser-
vice is desired. A phone number 
with continuous tone signals can be registered in the contact list.
●Tone data after a “w” pause tone can be operated by voice com-
mand during a call.
1Select “Transmit Volume”.
2Select the desired level for 
the transmit volume.
3Select  to display previ-
ous screen.
●The sound quality of the voice 
heard from the other party’s 
speaker may be negatively impacted.
●“Transmit Volume” is dimmed when mute is on.
When there are no calls on 
hold during a call: “Hold” is displayed. When selected, the current call is placed on hold.
When there is no current call, but there is a call on hold: “Activate” is displayed. When selected, the system switches to the call that was on hold.
When there is another call on hold during a call: “Swap Calls” is displayed. When selected, the current call is placed on hold, and the sys-tem switches to the call that was on hold.
This function may not be available 
depending on the type of cellular 
phone.
When a call is interrupted by a 
third party while talking, the incoming screen is displayed.
Select “Answer” or press the  
switch on the steering wheel to 
start talking with the other party.
To refuse to receive the call: 
Select “Decline”.
Each time “Swap Calls” is selected, the party who is on hold will be switched.
depending on the type of Bluetooth® 
phone.Transmit volume setting
Switching calls while a 
call is in progress
Incoming call waiting

356 5-13. Phone operation (Hands-fr ee system for cellular phones)
2Select “Message”.
A confirmation message appears 
when the “Automatic Message 
Transfer” function is set to off 
(P.368), select “Yes”.
3Check that the message 
“Phone”: Select to change to phone 
mode.
The account name is dis-
played on the left side of screen.
Account names are the names of the accounts that exist on the currently con-nected phone.
The following functions can be used on message function:
• Receiving a message 
(P.356)
• Checking messages 
(P.357)
• Replying to a message (dicta-
tion reply) ( P.358)
• Replying to a message (quick 
reply) ( P.358)
• Calling the message sender 
(P.359)
• Message settings ( P.368)
When an e-mail/SMS/MMS is received, the incoming message screen pops up with sound and is ready to be operated on the screen.
Select to check the message.
Select to not open the mes-
sage.
Select to call the message 
sender.
●Depending on the type of Blue-Bluetooth® phone 
message function
Received messages can be forwarded from the con-
nected Bluetooth
® phone, 
enabling checking and 
replying using the system.
Depending on the type of 
Bluetooth® phone con-
nected, received messages 
may not be transferred to the system.
If the phone does not sup-port the message function, this function cannot be used. Even when the sup-ported phone is used, reply function may not be used.
Displaying the message 
screenReceiving a message

357 5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)
COROLLA_U5Entune audiotooth® phone used for receiving 
messages, or its registration sta-
tus with the system, some infor-
mation may not be displayed.
●The pop-up screen is separately available for incoming e-mail and 
SMS/MMS messages under the following conditions:
E-mail:
• “Incoming E-mail Display” is set to 
“Full Screen”. ( P.361)
• “E-mail Notification Pop-up” is set 
to on. (P.361)
SMS/MMS:• “Incoming SMS/MMS Display” is 
set to “Full Screen”. ( P.361)
• “SMS/MMS Notification Pop-up” is 
set to on. ( P.361)
tooth® phone being connected, 
E-Mail function cannot be used via Bluetooth
®.
1Display the message screen. 
(P.356)
2Select a desired account name.
3Select the desired message from the list.
4Check that the message is displayed.
Select to call the message sender.
Select to have messages 
read out.To cancel this function, select “Stop”.When “Automatic Message Readout” is set to on, mes-sages will be automatically read out. ( P.368)
Select to display the previous or next message.
This function can be chosen 
the method to reply mes-sage with “Dictation” or “Quick Message”.
●Reading a text message is not 
available while driving.
this function cannot be used.
® phone being connected, it 
may be necessary to perform 
additional steps on the phone.
●Messages are displayed in the appropriate connected Blue-
tooth® phone’s registered mail 
address folder. Select the desired 
folder to be displayed.
●Only received messages on the 
connected Bluetooth® phone can 
be displayed.
●The text of the message is not dis-
played while driving.
●Turn the “POWER VOLUME” knob, or use the volume control 
adjust the message read out vol-
ume.
●“Subject:” field is not shown on SMS case.
●E-mail only: Select “Mark Unread” Checking received mes-
sages

358 5-13. Phone operation (Hands-fr ee system for cellular phones)
COROLLA_Uor “Mark Read” to mark mail 
unread or read on the message 
screen.
This function is available when “Update Message Read Status on 
Phone” is set to on. ( P.368)
(P.356)
2Select the desired message from the list.
3Select “Reply”.
4Select “Dictation”.
5When the “Say Your Mes-sage” screen is displayed, speak message that you want to send.
6Select “Send” to send mes-sage.
“Cancel”: Select to cancel sending 
the message.
“Retry”: Select to retry speaking 
message that you want to send.
While the message is being sent, a 
sending message screen is dis-
played.
7Check that a confirmation 
15 messages have already been stored.
(P.356)
4Select “Quick Message”.
5Select the desired message.
: Select to edit the message. 
(P.358)
6Select “Send”.
played.
screen is displayed when the 
operation is complete.
tooth® phone, reply function is not 
available.
■Editing quick reply mes-
sages
This operation cannot be per-formed while driving.
1Select  corresponding to 
the desired message to edit.
2Select “OK” when editing is 
completed.
To reset the edited quick reply mes-
sages, select “Default”.Replying to a message 
(dictation reply)*
Replying to a message 
(quick reply)

359 5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)
COROLLA_U5Entune audioCalls can be made to an 
e-mail/SMS/MMS message sender’s phone number.
This operation can be per-
■Calling from e-mail/SMS/MMS message display
1Display the message screen. (P.356)
2Select the desired message.
3Select , or press the  
If there are 2 o r more phone num-
bers, select the desired number.
■Calling from a number within a message
Calls can be made to a number identified in a message’s text area.
(P.356)
2Select the desired message.3Select the text area.
Identified phone numbers con-
tained in the message are dis-
played in blue text.
4Select the desired number.
5Check that the dialing screen 
A series of numbers may be recog-
nized as a phone number. Addition-ally, some phone numbers may not 
be recognized, such as those for 
other countries.
■Calling from the incoming 
message screen
For detail, refer to “Receiving a message”. ( P.356)Calling the message 
sender

360 5-14. Phone settings
COROLLA_U5-14.Phone settings
set.
Connecting a Bluetooth® 
device and editing the Blue-
Sound settings* (P.360)
Notification settings* 
(P.361)
Contact/call history settings* (P.362)
Message settings* (P.368)
*: This operation cannot be per-
The call and ringtone volume 
can be adjusted. A ringtone can be selected.
1Display the phone settings 
screen. ( P.360)
2Select “Sounds”.
3Select the desired item to be set.
Select to set the desired ring-
tone.
Select “-” or “+” to adjust the 
ringtone volume.
default volume of the other party’s voice.Setup
Displaying the phone set-
Phone settings screen
Sounds settings screen

361 5-14. Phone settings
COROLLA_U5Entune audioSelect to set the desired 
incoming e-mail tone.
Select to set the desired 
incoming SMS/MMS tone.
incoming SMS/MMS tone volume.
incoming e-mail tone volume.
message readout volume.
items.
tooth® phone, certain functions may 
not be available.
2Select “Notifications”.3Select the desired item to be set.
Select to change the incom-
ing call display.
“Full Screen”: W hen a call is 
received, the incoming call screen 
is displayed and can be operated on the screen.“Drop-down”: A message is dis-played at the top  of the screen.
Select to set the SMS/MMS 
notification pop-up on/off.
ing SMS/MMS display.“Full Screen”: When an SMS/MMS message is 
received, the incoming 
SMS/MMS display screen is displayed and can be oper-ated on the screen.“Drop-down”: When an SMS/MMS message is received, a message is dis-played at the top of the Notifications settings 
screen

362 5-14. Phone settings
COROLLA_Uscreen.
Select to set the e-mail notifi-
cation pop-up on/off.
ing e-mail display.“Full Screen”: When an e-mail is received, the incom-ing e-mail display screen is displayed and can be oper-ated on the screen.“Drop-down”: When an e-mail is received, a mes-sage is displayed at the top of the screen.
Select to set display of the 
contact/history transfer com-pletion message on/off.
items.
tooth® phone, these functions may 
Contacts can be transferred 
from a Bluetooth® phone to this 
system. Contacts and favorites 
can be added, edited and deleted. Also, the call history can be deleted.
2Select “Contacts/Call His-tory”.3Select the desired item to be set.
For PBAP compatible Blue-
tooth
® phones: Select to 
change the contact/history 
transfer settings. ( P.363)
Select to update contacts from the connected device. (P.363)
Select to sort contacts by the first name or last name field.
Select to add contacts to the 
favorites list. ( P.366)
Select to delete contacts from the favorites list. (P.366)
Select to clear the call his-
tory.
*
Select to add new contacts to the contact list.
* (P.365)
Select to edit contacts in the Contacts/Call history set-

363 5-14. Phone settings
COROLLA_U5Entune audiocontact list.* (P.365)
Select to delete contacts 
from the contact list.* 
(P.366)
Select to set the voice tags. 
(P.367)
*: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® 
phones, this function is available 
when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (P.363)
tooth® phone, certain functions 
may not be available.
●Contact data is managed inde-
pendently for every registered 
phone. When one phone is con-nected, another phone’s regis-
tered data cannot be read.
The automatic contact/history 
function is available for PBAP 
compatible Bluetooth® phones 
only.
1Select “Automatic Transfer”.
set.Select to set automatic con-tact/history transfer on/off. When set to on, the phone’s contact data and history are automatically transferred.
Select to update contacts 
from the connected phone. (P.363)
Select to set the transferred contact image display on/off.Only when the vehicle is not moving, the contact image can be displayed.
items.
■Updating contacts from phone
1Select “Update Now”.
Contacts are trans ferred automati-
cally.
2Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.
This operation may be unnec-essary depending on the type 
® phone.
If another Bluetooth® device 
is connected when transfer-
ring contact data, depending on the phone, the connected 
Bluetooth
® device may need 
to be disconnected.
Depending on the type of Bluetooth
® phone being con-
nected, it may be necessary 
to perform additional steps on the phone.Setting automatic con-
tact/history transfer

364 5-14. Phone settings
COROLLA_U■Updating the contacts in a 
different way (from the call 
history screen)*
2Select “History” and select a contact not yet registered in the contact list.
3Select “Update Contact”.
4Select the desired contact.
5Select a phone type for the phone number.
when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (P.362)
When the contact is not regis-
tered
1Select “Transfer Contacts from Device”.
2Select “From Phone (Blue-tooth)”.
3Transfer the contact data to the system using a Blue-
tooth
® phone.
This operation may be unnec-
essary depending on the type 
of Bluetooth® phone.
To cancel this function, select “Cancel”.
4Check that a confirmation 
When the contact is regis-tered
3Select “Replace Contacts” or “Add Contact”.
“Replace Contacts”: Select to trans-
fer the contact fr om the connected 
cellular phone and replace the cur-
rent one.
“Add Contact”: Select to transfer 
the desired contact data from the 
connected cellular phone to add to 
the current one.
4Transfer the contact data to 
the system using a Blue-
tooth® phone.
To cancel this function, select 
“Cancel”.
5Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.
Backed-up contact data (vCard formatted) can be transferred 
from USB device or Bluetooth
® 
phone to this system.Transfer contacts from 
device
From phone (OPP compati-
ble Bluetooth® phones only)
From USB device

365 5-14. Phone settings
COROLLA_U5Entune audio1Connect a USB device. 
(P.304)
2Select “Transfer Contacts from Device”.
3Select “From USB”.
4Select “USB 1” or “USB 2” when the multiple USB devices are connected. If a USB device is connected, skip this procedure.
5Select “Replace Contacts” or “Add Contact”. If the contact is already registered, skip this procedure.
fer the contact fro m the connected 
USB device or Bluetooth® phone 
and replace the current one.
connected USB device or Blue-
tooth® phone to add to the current 
one.
6Select a desired file from 
vCard file list.
7Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.
tooth® phone used and number of 
files, it may take time to display 
vCard file lists and download con-
tacts.
●Downloading may not complete correctly in the following cases:
• If the engine switch is turned off 
during downloading.
• If the USB device or Bluetooth® 
phone is removed before down-loading is complete.New contact data can be regis-
tered.
Up to 4 numbers per person can 
be registered. For PBAP com-
patible Bluetooth® phones, this 
function is available when “Auto-
matic Transfer” is set to off. (P.362)
1Select “New Contact”.
2Enter the name and select “OK”.
3Enter the phone number and select “OK”.
4Select the phone type for the phone number.
5To add another number to this contact, select “Yes”.
■Registering a new contact in a different way (from the call history screen)
3Select “Add to Contacts”.
4Follow the steps in “Register-ing a new contact to the con-tacts list” from step 2. 
(P.365)
For PBAP compatible Blue-Registering a new contact 
to the contacts list
Editing the contact data

366 5-14. Phone settings
COROLLA_Utooth® phones, this function is 
available when “Automatic 
Transfer” is set to off. ( P.362)
1Select “Edit Contact”.
3Select  next to the name 
or desired number.
4Enter the name or the phone 
number and select “OK”.
tooth® phones, this function is 
1Select “Delete Contacts”.
2Select the desired contact and select “Delete”.
3Select “Yes” when the confir-mation screen appears.
●Multiple data can be selected and 
deleted at the same time.
●When a Bluetooth® phone is 
deleted, the contact data will be 
Up to 15 contacts (maximum of 
4 numbers per contact) can be registered in the favorites list.
■Registering the contacts in the favorites list
1Select “Add Favorite”.
2Select the desired contact to add to the favorites list.Dimmed contacts are already 
stored as a favorite.
3Check that a confirmation 
When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favorites list
1When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favorites list, a registered contact needs to be replaced.Select “Yes” when the confir-mation screen appears to replace a contact.
2Select the contact to be replaced.
3Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.
■Registering contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the contact details screen)
3Select “Add Favorite”.
4Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.
■Deleting the contacts in the favorites list
1Select “Remove Favorite”.
2Select the desired contacts and select “Remove”.Deleting the contact data
Favorites list setting

367 5-14. Phone settings
COROLLA_U5Entune audio3Select “Yes” when the confir-
■Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the contact details screen)
2Select “Favorites” or “Con-tacts” and select the desired contact to delete.
3Select “Remove Favorite”.
4Select “Yes” when the confir-mation screen appears.
5Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the 
Calls can be made by saying the 
voice tag of a registered contact in the contact list. ( P.336)
1Select “Manage Voice Tags”.
Select to register a new voice tag. (P.367)
Select to edit a voice tag. 
(P.367)
Select to delete a voice tag. (P.367)
■Registering a voice tag
Up to 50 voice tags can be reg-istered.
1Select “New”.
2Select the desired contact to 
register a voice tag for.
3Select “REC” and record a voice tag.
When recording a voice tag, do so 
in a quiet area.
“Play”: Select to p lay the voice tag.
4Select “OK” when voice tag 
registration is complete.
■Editing a voice tag
1Select “Edit”.
2Select the desired contact to edit.
3Follow the steps in “Register-ing a voice tag” from step 3. 
(P.367)
■Deleting the voice tag
1Select “Delete”.
●Voice tags are deleted when the set language of the system is changed. ( P.296)Setting voice tags

368 5-14. Phone settings
COROLLA_U1Display the phone settings 
2Select “Messaging”.
Select to set automatic mes-
sage transfer on/off.
sage readout on/off.
Select to set updating mes-
sage read status on phone on/off.
Select to set display of mes-
saging account names on the message screen on/off.When set to on, messaging account names used on the cellular phone will be dis-played.
Select to set adding the vehi-
cle signature to outgoing messages on/off.The vehicle signature can be edited. ( P.368)
Depending on the phone, these functions may not be available.
1Select “Vehicle Signature”.
cle signature to outgoing messages on/off.
Select to edit the vehicle sig-
nature. ( P.368)
■Editing vehicle signature
1Select “Edit Vehicle Signa-ture”.
2Enter desired signature with using keyboard.
3Select “OK”.
4Select “OK” on the confirma-tion screen, or select “Edit Again” when it needs to amend.Message settings screen
Vehicle signature settings

369 5-15. What to do if... (Bluetooth®)
COROLLA_U5Entune audio5-15.What to do if... (Bluetooth®)
■When using the hands-free 
system with a Bluetooth® 
device
The hands-free system or Blue-tooth
® device does not work.
■When registering/connect-
ing a cellular phone
A cellular phone cannot be reg-istered.Troubleshooting
If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a 
Bluetooth
® device, first 
check the table below.
TroubleshootingLikely cause Solution
The connected 
device may not be a compatible 
Bluetooth
® cellu-
lar phone.For a list of spe-
cific devices which operation has been con-firmed on this system, check with your Toyota dealer or the fol-lowing website: http://www.
toyota.com/
Entune/  in the 
United States, http://www.
toyota.ca/
entune  in 
Canada, and http://www.
toyotapr.com/
entune  in Puerto 
Rico
The Bluetooth® 
version of the connected cellu-lar phone may be older than the specified ver-sion.Use a cellular phone with Blue-
tooth
® version 
2.0 or higher 
(recommended: Ver. 4.1 +EDR or higher). (P.279)

370 5-15. What to do if... (Bluetooth®)
COROLLA_UA Bluetooth® connection can-
not be made.■When making/receiving a 
call
A call cannot be made/received.
■When using the phonebook
Phonebook data cannot be transferred manually/automati-cally.Likely cause Solution
An incorrect 
passcode was entered on the cellular phone.Enter the correct passcode on the cellular phone.
The registration operation has not been com-pleted on the cel-lular phone side.Complete the registration oper-ation on the cel-lular phone (approve regis-tration on the phone).
Old registration information remains on either this sys-tem or the cellu-lar phone.Delete the exist-ing registration information from both this system and the cellular phone, then reg-ister the cellular phone you wish to connect to this system. (P.282)
Likely cause Solution
Another Blue-
tooth® device is 
already con-
nected.Manually con-nect the cellular phone you wish to use to this system. (P.280)
Bluetooth® func-
tion is not enabled on the cellular phone.Enable the Blue-
tooth® function 
on the cellular 
phone.Automatic Blue-
tooth® connec-
tion on this 
system is set to 
off.Set automatic 
Bluetooth® con-
nection on this 
system to on when the engine switch is in ACC or ON. ( P.284)
Preferred device settings function on this system is set to on.Set preferred device settings function on this system to off. (P.285)
Set the desired cellular phone to the highest auto-matic connec-tion priority. (P.285)
Your vehicle is in 
a  area.Move to where 
 no longer 
appears on the 
display.Likely cause Solution

371 5-15. What to do if... (Bluetooth®)
Phonebook data cannot be 
edited.■When using the Bluetooth® 
Messages cannot be viewed.
New message notifications are 
not displayed.
■In other situations
The Bluetooth® connection sta-Likely cause Solution
The profile ver-
sion of the con-nected cellular phone may not be compatible with transferring phonebook data.For a list of spe-cific devices which operation has been con-firmed on this system, check with your Toyota dealer or the fol-lowing website: http://www.
entune  in 
Rico
Automatic con-tact transfer function on this system is set to off.Set automatic contact transfer function on this system to on. (P.363)
Passcode has not been entered on the cellular phone.Enter the pass-code on the cel-lular phone if requested (default pass-code: 1234).
Transfer opera-tion on the cellu-lar phone has not completed.Complete trans-fer operation on the cellular phone (approve transfer opera-tion on the phone).Likely cause Solution
Automatic con-tact transfer function on this system is set to on.Set automatic contact transfer function on this system to off. (P.363)
Message trans-fer is not enabled on the cellular phone.Enable mes-sage transfer on the cellular phone (approve message trans-fer on the phone).
Automatic trans-fer function on this system is set to off.Set automatic transfer function on this system to on. (P.363)
Notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system is set to off.Set notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system to on. (P.361)
Automatic mes-sage transfer function is not enabled on the cellular phone. Enable auto-matic transfer function on the cellular phone.

372 5-15. What to do if... (Bluetooth®)
COROLLA_Utus is displayed at the top of the 
screen each time the engine switch is in ACC or ON.
Even though all conceivable 
measures have been taken, the symptom status does not change.
For details, refer  to the owner’s 
manual that came with the cellular 
phone.Likely cause Solution
Connection con-
firmation display on this system is set to on.To turn off the display, set con-nection confir-mation display on this system to off. (P.285)
The cellular phone is not close enough to this system. Bring the cellu-lar phone closer to this system.
Radio interfer-ence has occurred.Turn off Wi-Fi® 
devices or other devices that may emit radio waves.The cellular phone is the most likely cause of the symptom.Turn the cellular phone off, remove and rein-stall the battery pack, and then restart the cellu-lar phone.
Enable the cellu-lar phone’s Blue-
tooth
® 
connection.
Stop the cellular 
phone’s security software and close all applica-tions.
Before using an application installed on the cellular phone, carefully check its source and how its opera-tion might affect this system.Likely cause Solution

373 5-16. Toyota Entune overview
COROLLA_U5Entune audio5-16.Toyota Entune overview
Entune Audio Plus/Entune 
Premium Audio
Owners of this system should refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
●Availability of fun ctions of the Toy-
ota Entune is dependent on net-
work reception level.
●Each function is available in the following areas:
• Toyota Entune App Suite Connect 
is available in the contiguous United States, Wa shington D.C., 
Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and 
Canada.
is not available in the United 
States Virgin Islands.
•W i - F i
® Hotspot is available in the 
contiguous Unit ed States, Wash-
ington D.C.,Alas ka and Hawaii.
•W i - F i® Hotspot is not available in 
Puerto Rico, Canada, and in the United States Virgin Islands.
• Safety Connect features include:
Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, S.O.S, 
Stolen Vehicle Location (available 
in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C., Hawaii, Alaska, 
Puerto Rico and Canada) and 
Enhanced Roadside Assistance (available in the contiguous 
United States, Wa shington D.C., 
Alaska, Puerto Rico and Canada).
• Safety Connect is not available in 
the United States Virgin Islands.The functions included in Toy-
ota Entune are classified into the following three types.
• Type A: Function achieved by 
using a smart phone or an 
embedded cellular device in the vehicle (DCM: Data Communica-tion Module) and the system
• Type B: Function achieved by 
• Type C: Function achieved by 
using DCMToyota Entune
Toyota Entune is a service 
that includes Toyota Entune 
App Suite Connect, Wi-Fi® 
Hotspot and Safety Con-
nect.Functional overview
Function Type
Toyota Entune App 
Suite ConnectType A
Wi-Fi® Hotspot Type B
Safety Connect Type C

374 5-16. Toyota Entune overview
COROLLA_U*: If equippedType A: Function achi eved by using a smart 
phone or DCM*
Of the functions included with Toyota Entune, the Toyota 
Entune App Suite Connect relies on the use of a smart phone or DCM.
Using a smart phone
• Toyota Entune App Suite Connect enables applicable apps 
installed on a smart phone to be displayed on and operated from  
the screen via a Bluetooth®.
Via DCM
installed on the system to be displayed on and operated from th e 
screen.
A few settings must be performed before Toyota Entune App Suite Connect can be used. ( P.379)
By using a smart phone or DCM

375 5-16. Toyota Entune overview
COROLLA_U5Entune audioContent provider
Provides contents to the application server.
Application server
Provides applications to the system or a smart phone.
Smart phone*
Using the Toyota Entune App Su ite Connect, communication is 
relayed between the system, application server and contents pro-
vider. The smart phone cannot be operated while communicating.
Applications
Display usable content from the content providers on the screen  
using the data connection of t he connected smart phone or DCM.
SystemContent received, via a smart phone or DCM, from content pro-vider servers is displayed on the screen. The system is equippe d 
with an application player to run applications.
Via DCM
*: For known compatible phones, refer to
in the United States,
in Canada, andhttp://www.toyo tapr.com/entune
in Puerto Rico.
The required operations to acti-
vate applications and connect a smart phone to the system, and the registration steps for the Toyota Entune App Suite Con-nect are explained in this sec-tion.
Toyota Entune App Suite 
Connect does not require an activation fee or monthly recurring fees.
Services requiring a separate contract can also be used.
*
*: For details, refer to 
or call 1-800-331-4331 in the 
United States,http://www.toyota.ca/entune
or call 1-888-869-6828 in Can-ada, andhttp://www.toyotapr.com/entune
or call 1-877-855-8377 in Puerto Rico.
■Availability of function
Connect is available in the contiguous United States, Before using the function

376 5-16. Toyota Entune overview
COROLLA_UWashington D.C., Alaska, 
Hawaii, Puerto Rico and Can-ada.
Toyota Entune App Suite Connect is not available in the United States Virgin Islands.
●Data usage fees may apply while 
using Toyota Entune App Suite 
Connect function. Confirm data 
usage fees before using this func-
tion.
●For details regarding operation of the Toyota Entune App Suite Con-
nect and the applications, refer to
in Canada, and
http://www.toyo tapr.com/entune
●These functions are not made 
available in some countries or 
areas. Availability of functions of 
the Toyota Entune App Suite Con-
nect service is dependent on net-
■Initializing personal data
The personal data used in appli-
cations can be reset. ( P.298)
The following personal data can be deleted and returned to their default settings:
Downloaded contents
Radio stations that were lis-
tened to
Once initialized, the data and set-
tings will be erased. Pay much 
attention when initializing the data.■Settings required to use 
Toyota Entune App Suite Connect
Perform the settings in the fol-lowing order.
1Download the Toyota Entune 
App Suite Connect applica-tion to your smart phone or the system.
2Register a Bluetooth
® phone 
with the hands-free system. (P.276)
●Applications can only be used 
when the Toyota Entune App Suite Connect application has 
been downloaded to your smart 
phone or the system, and the application is running.
●Toyota Entune App Suite Connect operational procedures can also 
be confirmed by visiting
http://www.toyotapr.com/entune
●If a Toyota Entune App Suite Con-
nect application is used while iPod 
audio/video is being played back, system operation may become 
unstable.Preparation before using 
Connect

377 5-16. Toyota Entune overview
COROLLA_U5Entune audio*: If equipped
■Subscription
Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving ser-vices. A variety of subscription terms are available. Contact your Toyota dealer, or call 1-800-331-4331 in the United States, 1-888-869-6828 in Can-ada, and 1-877-855-8377 in Puerto Rico, for further sub-scription details. ( P.375)
■Availability of functions
Wi-Fi® Hotspot is available in 
the contiguous United States, Washington D.C., Alaska and Hawaii.Wi-Fi
® Hotspot is not avail-
able in Puerto Rico, Canada, and in the United States Vir-gin Islands.Type B: Function 
achieved by using DCM and the system
*
The functionality of Wi-Fi® 
Hotspot is made possible 
through the shared work of the DCM and the system.
This service is available by subscription and supported by the Toyota Entune center, which operates 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
For details about Wi-Fi® 
Hotspot: P.287
Before using the function

378 5-16. Toyota Entune overview
COROLLA_U*: If equippedType C: Function 
achieved by using DCM
*
The functionality of Safety 
Connect is made possible by the use of a DCM.
For details, ( P.61)

379 5-17. Toyota Entune operation
COROLLA_U5Entune audio5-17.Toyota Entune operation 
1Press the “MENU” button.2Select “Apps”.
3Follow the steps in “From the 
“APPS” button” from step 3. (P.379)
From the “APPS” button
1Press the “APPS” button.
2Select “Apps”.
If a specific application screen is 
displayed, select “Apps” again.
3Select the desired application 
screen button.
: Select to activ ate an applica-
tion.
“Update”: Select to update the 
applications. ( P.379)
“App Catalog”: Select to change the order of the applications. ( P.380)
: Displays the number of new 
notifications for the application
When the App Suite is activated, 
an application may need to be updated. To update an applica-tion, it is necessary to download update data and install it.
■Downloading update
If an update is available, “Update” can be selected.Toyota Entune App 
Suite Connect
App Suite is a function that 
enables certain apps installed on a smart phone or the system to be dis-played on and operated from the system screen. Before the Toyota Entune App Suite Connect can be used, some setup needs to be performed. ( P.376)
For details about the func-tions and services provided by each application, refer tohttp://www.toyota.com/
Entune/
in the United States,http://www.toyota.ca/entune
in Canada, andhttp://www.toyotapr.com/
entune
Using Toyota Entune App 
Updating an application

380 5-17. Toyota Entune operation
COROLLA_U1Select “Update” on the appli-
cation screen. ( P.379)
2Check that downloading starts.
“Download in Background”: Select 
to operate other functions while downloading.
“Cancel”: Select to cancel updating.
3Check that downloading is 
complete.
“Later”: Select to install later. When 
this screen button  is selected, the 
screen will re turn to the last dis-
played screen. To install the update data: (P.380)
“See Detail”: Select to display detailed information on the update 
data.
“Install”: Select to install the update 
data. Follow the steps “Installing 
the update data” from step 2. 
(P.380)
■Installing the update data
After the downloading is com-
plete, “Update” will be changed to “Install”.
1Select “Install” on the appli-
cation screen. ( P.379)
2Select “Continue”.
“Later”: Select to postpone the 
installation of the update data and go back to the previous screen.
3Check that installing is 
started.
“Install in Background”: Select to 
operate other functions while 
installing.
4Select “OK” after the install-
ing is complete.
The Toyota Entune App Suite Con-
nect function cannot be operated while installing.
Order of the applications can be 
changed.
1Display the application 
screen. ( P.379)
2Select “App Catalog”.
3Select the desired application to be moved.
4Select “<<” or “>>” to move the application, and then select the done button.
When problems occur with start-ing the application player, a message will appear on the screen. Referring to the follow-ing items, identify the problem and take the suggested correc-tive action.
“When it is safe and legal to 
do so, please ensure your Entune App Suite application is running and logged in on your phone.”
nect application cannot be con-
nected to Bluetooth® SPP.
Refer to
in Canada, andhttp://www.toyotapr.com/entuneReordering the applica-
tions
If a message appears on 
the screen

381 5-17. Toyota Entune operation
COROLLA_U5Entune audioin Puerto Rico, to confirm if the 
phone is Bluetooth® SPP compati-
ble or not, and then activate the 
Toyota Entune App Suite Connect application.
“Installation failed, please try 
again”
Installation can be attempted again 
by changing to the application screen and pressing the “Install” switch.
“Application download error. 
Please try again later.”
Downloading can be attempted 
again by checking the communica-tion status, chang ing to the applica-
tion screen and pressing the “Download” switch again.
“Download error, some 
Entune App Suite functions may not work as expected. Please reinitiate the download process.”
Refer to
in Canada, andhttp://www.toyotapr.com/entune
in Puerto Rico, to confirm if the 
Please ensure your Toyota Entune 
App Suite Connect application is running and logged in on your phone while vehicle is not moving.“To use the services, Entune 
APP Suite Connect applica-tion needs to be running on your phone. For more infor-mation, please visit toy-ota.com or call 1-800-331-4331 in the United States, 1-888-869-6828 in Canada, and 1-877-855-8377 in Puerto Rico.”
Refer to
“Communication unsuccess-
ful. Please try again.”
Communication was disconnected.
After a few moments, retry the 
operation.
A keyword can be entered to an 
application by the software key-board or voice recognition func-tion. For details about the functions and services provided by each application, refer tohttp://www.toyota.com/Entune/Entering keyword opera-
tion

382 5-17. Toyota Entune operation
COROLLA_Uin the United States,
The keyboard layout can be 
changed. ( P.296)
1Display the application screen. ( P.379)
3Select the character entering space.
4Enter a search term, and then select “OK”.
5Entering characters will be 
reflected on the character 
entering space.
For details on operating the key-
board: P.271
3Press the talk switch. (P.336)
4Say the desired keyword.
Completion of the keyword will be 
detected automatically.5Search results will be dis-
played on the screen.
Entering a keyword using 
the software keyboard
the voice recognition func-tion

383 5-18. Toyota Entune App Suite Connect settings
COROLLA_U5Entune audio5-18.Toyota Entune App Suite Connect settings
3Select “Entune App Suite”.
be set.
Select to set the pop up 
reminder for smart phone data usage. ( P.381)Select to detect iPhone app automatically on/off.
Select to set the enhanced 
mode with connecting USB device on/off. 
When an iPhone is connected while 
this setting is set to “On”, communi-cation with devices connected to other USB ports may not be possi-ble. Also, depending on the device, charging may not be possible.
Select to configure the Apps 
menu layout (e.g. app order, which applications are acti-vated, etc.). This updates a setting file stored on the Toy-ota Entune center, this set-tings file can also be updated from the navigation system, smart phone app and by web portal.
Select to install the Apps via 
a USB memory device. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.
items.
The data use notification pop-up, which indicates that the system will use an internet con-nection, can be enabled/dis-abled.
1Display the Toyota Entune 
App Suite Connect settings screen. ( P.383)Setup
The settings of Toyota Entune App Suite Connect can be changed.
Displaying the Toyota 
Entune App Suite Con-nect settings screen
Connect settings screen
Data use notification 
pop-up settings

384 5-18. Toyota Entune A pp Suite Connect settings
COROLLA_U2Select “Data Usage Mes-
sage”.
3Change the setting as desired.

385
COROLLA_U6
6Interior featuresInterior features
.6-1. Using the air conditioning 
system and defogger
Manual air conditioning sys-
tem ............................ 386
Automatic air conditioning 
system....................... 391
heaters ...................... 396
Interior lights list .......... 398
List of storage features
.................................. 400
Trunk features............. 403
Other interior features . 404
Garage door opener.... 414

386 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_U6-1.Using the air conditioning system and defogger
The display and button positions w ill differ depending on the t ype of 
Fan speed control switch
Temperature control switch“MAX A/C” switch“A/C” switchOutside air mode switchRecirculated air mode switch
Airflow mode control switch
Rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers 
switch
*
Windshield defogger switch
On/off switch
Rear window defogger switch*
■Adjusting the temperature 
setting
To adjust the temperature set-ting, turn the temperature con-trol switch clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).If “A/C” switch is not pressed, the 
system will blow ambient tempera-ture air or heated air.
For quick cooling, press the “MAX 
A/C” switch. The air conditioning will automatically turn  on and, if an Manual air condi tioning system*
Air conditioning controls

387 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_U6Interior featuresair outlet position  or  is 
selected, the system will be set to 
recirculated air mode. While “MAX A/C” is selected, it is not possible to turn off the air conditioning.
■Fan speed setting
To adjust the fan speed, turn the 
fan speed control switch clock-wise (increase) or counterclock-wise (decrease).
Pressing the on/off switch to turns 
off the fan.
When the fan is o ff, pressing the 
on/off switch or turning the fan 
speed control switch clockwise will turn on the fan.
■Change the airflow mode
Press the airflow mode control 
switch.
The airflow mode changes as fol-
lows each time the switch is pressed.
1Upper body
2Upper body and feet
3Feet
4Feet and the windshield defogger operates
■Switching between outside 
air and recirculated air modes
To change to recirculated air mode, press the recirculated air mode switch.
The indicator illuminates on the 
recirculated air mode switch.
To change to outside air 
mode, press the outside air mode switch.
The indicator illuminates on the out-
side air mode switch.
■Set cooling and dehumidifi-
cation function
Press the “A/C” switch.
When the function is on, the indica-
tor illuminates on the “A/C” switch.
■Defogging the windshield
Defoggers are used to defog the 
windshield and front side win-dows.
Press the windshield defogger 
switch.
Set the outside/recirculated air 
mode switch to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used.
To defog the windshield and the 
side windows quickly, turn the air flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode, 
press the windshield defogger switch again when the windshield is defogged.
When the windshield defogger 
switch is on, the indicator illumi-
nates on the windshield defogger 

388 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_Uswitch.
■Defogging the rear window 
and outside rear view mir-rors 
Vehicles without outside rear view mirror defoggers
A defogger is used to defog the rear window.
Press the rear window defogger 
switch.
The defogger will automatically turn 
off after a while.
When the rear window defogger 
switch is on, the indicator illumi-nates on the rear window defogger switch.
Vehicles with outside rear 
view mirror defoggers
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove 
raindrops, dew and frost from 
the outside rear view mirrors.
Press the rear window and out-
side rear view mirror defoggers switch.
The defoggers will automatically 
turn off after a while.
When the rear window and outside 
rear view mirror defoggers switch is on, the indicator illuminates on the 
rear window and ou tside rear view 
mirror defoggers switch.
■Fogging up of the windows
●The windows will easily fog up 
when the humidity in the vehicle is 
high. Turning “A/C” switch is on 
will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield 
effectively.●If you turn “A/C” s witch is off, the 
windows may fog up more easily. 
●The windows may fog up if the 
recirculated air mode is used.
■Outside/recirculated air mode
When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the 
outside/recirculated air mode switch 
to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preve nting outside air 
from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air m ode will also cool 
the vehicle interior effectively.
■When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32°F (0°C)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when “A/C” switch is pressed. 
■Ventilation and air conditioning 
odors
●To let fresh air in, set the air condi-tioning system to the outside air 
mode.
●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the 
air conditioning system. This may 
then cause odor to be emitted 
from the vents.
●It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to out-
side air mode prior to turning the 
vehicle off.
●When parking, the system auto-matically switches to outside air mode to encourage better air cir-
culation throughout the vehicle, 
helping to reduce odors that occur when starting the vehicle.
■Air conditioning filter
P.457
■Air conditioning system refrig-erant
●A label regarding the refrigerant of the air conditioning system is attached to the h ood at the loca-
tion shown in the  following illustra-

389 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_U6Interior featurestion.
●The meaning of each symbol on 
the label are as follows:
■Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume 
changes according to the selected air flow mode.
: If equippedCaution
Air conditioning sys-
tem
Air conditioning sys-tem lubricant type
Requires registered technician to service air conditioning sys-tem
Flammable refrigerant
WARNING
■To prevent the windshield 
from fogging up
Do not use the windshield defog-ger switch during cool air opera-
tion in extremely humid weather. The difference between the tem-perature of the outside air and 
that of the windshield can cause 
the outer surface of the wind-shield to fog up, blocking your 
vision.■When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are operat-
ing (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the outside rear view mirror surfaces, as they can 
become very hot and burn you.
NOTICE
Do not leave the air conditioning 
system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
■When repairing/replacing 
parts of the air conditioning 
system
Have repair/replacement per-formed by your Toyota dealer.When a part of the air conditioning 
system, such as the evaporator, is 
to be replaced, it must be replaced with a new one.
Air outlet lay out and oper-
ations

390 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_U■Adjusting the position of 
and opening and closing the air outlets
Front center
Direct air flow to th e left or right, up 
or down
Front right-hand side
or down
Front left-hand side
or downWARNING
defogger from operating improperly
Do not place anything on the instrument panel which may cover 
the air outlets. Otherwise, air flow 
may be obstructed, preventing the windshield defoggers from defog-
ging.

391 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_U6Interior features*: If equipped
Temperature control switch
Fan speed control switch“A/C” switchOutside air mode switchRecirculated air mode switchEco air conditioning mode switchAirflow mode control switchRear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers 
switch
Off switch
Automatic mode switch
setting
To adjust the temperature set-ting, turn the temperature con-trol switch clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).
If “A/C” switch is not pressed, the 
system will blow ambient tempera-ture air or heated air.Automatic air conditioning system*
Air outlets are automatically selected and fan speed is auto-
matically adjusted according to the set temperature setting.Also, the display and button positions will differ depending on  
the type of the system.

392 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_U■Setting the fan speed
Pressing the off switch to turns off 
the fan.
switch.
3Feet
4Feet and the windshield 
defogger operates
■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
The indicator illu minates on the recirculated air mode switch.
To change to outside air mode, press the outside air mode switch.
switch.
mode switch to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)
nates on the windshield defogger switch.
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from 

393 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_U6Interior featuresthe outside rear view mirrors.
■Eco air conditioning mode
The air conditioning is controlled 
with low fuel consumption priori-tized such as reducing fan speed, etc.
Press the eco air conditioning 
mode switch.
When the eco air conditioning 
mode is on, the indicator illumi-nates on the eco air conditioning mode switch.
■When the outside temperature 
exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air 
conditioning system is on
●In order to reduce the air condi-
tioning power consumption, the air 
conditioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automati-
cally. This may also reduce fuel 
consumption.
●Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the engine switch is turned to ON.
●It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing 
the outside air mode switch.
●The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is 
high. Turning “A /C” on will dehu-
midify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.
●If you turn “A/C” off, the windows may fog up more easily. 
●The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
●When driving on du sty roads such 
as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recirculated air mode 
switch to the recirculated air 
mode. This is effective in prevent-ing outside air from entering the 
vehicle interior. During cooling 
operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle 
interior effectively.
●Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on 
the temperature setting or the inside temperature.
falls to nearly 32°F (0°C)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when “A/C” switch 
is pressed. 
■Ventilation and air conditioning odors
mode.
●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may 
enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may 
●To reduce potential odors from 
occurring:
• It is recommended that the air 
conditioning system be set to out-side air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may 
be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air con-ditioning system is started in auto-
matic mode.
●When parking, the system auto-matically switches to outside air 

394 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_Umode to encourage better air cir-
helping to reduce odors that occur 
when starting the vehicle.
P.457
●A label regarding the refrigerant of the air conditioning system is attached to the ho od at the loca-
tion shown in the f ollowing illustra-
tion.
●The meaning of each symbol on the label are as follows:
Some functions can be customized. (P.548)1Press the automatic mode 
switch.
2Adjust the temperature set-ting.
3To stop the operation, press the off switch.
If the fan speed setting or air Caution
tem
Flammable refrigerantWARNING
Do not use the windshield defog-ger switch during cool air opera-tion in extremely humid weather. 
The difference between the tem-
perature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause 
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, blocking your vision.
■When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are operat-
ing
NOTICE
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
■When repairing/replacing parts of the air conditioning 
system
Have repair/replacement per-formed by your Toyota dealer.
When a part of the air conditioning system, such as the evaporator, is 
to be replaced, it must be 
replaced with a new one.
Using automatic mode

395 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_U6Interior featuresflow modes are operated, the 
automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that operated is maintained.
■Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automati-
cally according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a 
while until warm or cool air is ready 
to flow immediately after the auto-matic mode switch pressed. 
Prevent ice from building up on 
the windshield and wiper blades.
When the windshield wiper de-icer 
switch is on, the indicator illumi-nates on the windshield wiper de-icer switch.
The windshield wip er de-icer will 
automatically turn of f after a period 
of time.■Location of air outlets
:If equipped
■Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Direct air flow to the  left or right, up 
or downWindshield wiper de-icer 
(if equipped)WARNING
■To prevent burns
Do not touch the glass at lower 
part of the windshield or to the 
side of the front p illars when the 
windshield wiper de-icer is on.
ations

396 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_UFront right-hand side
or down
or down*: If equipped
WARNING
ging.Heated steering 
wheel*/seat heaters*
Heated steering wheel
Warms up the grip of the 
steering wheel
Seat heaters
Warm up the seat upholstery
WARNING
■To prevent minor burn inju-
ries
Care should be taken if anyone in the following categories comes in 
contact with the steering wheel or 
seats when the  heater is on:
●Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physi-
cally challenged
●Persons with sensitive skin
●Persons who are fatigued
●Persons who have taken alco-
hol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, 
etc.)
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the seat heaters
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the 
seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into 
the seat.
Do not use the functions when the engine is off.

397 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_U6Interior features■Heated steering wheel
Turns heated steering wheel 
on/off
When the heated steering wheel is 
on, the indicator illuminates on the 
heated steering wheel switch.
■Seat heaters
Front
Turns seat heaters on/off
1High temperature
2Low temperature
When the seat hea ter is on, the 
indicator illumina tes on the seat 
heater switch.
When not in use, put the switch in 
the neutral position. The indicator will turn off.
Rear
Turns seat heaters on/offWhen the seat heater is on, the indicator illuminates on the seat heater switch.
■The heated steering wheel and 
seat heaters can be used when
The engine switch is in ON.Operation instructions
WARNING
■To prevent overheating and minor burn injuries
Observe the following precautions when using the seat heaters.
●Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using 
the seat heater.
●Do not use seat heater more 
than necessary.

398 6-2. Using the interior lights
COROLLA_U6-2.Using the interior lights
Rear interior light ( P.399)
Door trim lights (if equipped)
Front interior/personal lights ( P.398)
Center tray light (if equipped)Cup holder lights (if equipped)
■Front
1Turns the door position on/off
When a door is opened while the 
door position is on,  the lights turn 
on.Interior lights list
Location of the i nterior lights
Operating the interior 
lights

399 6-2. Using the interior lights
COROLLA_U6Interior features2Turns the lights on/off
■Rear
1Turns the door position on
The rear interior light turns on/off 
together the front interior lights.
front and rear interior light door position is on, the  lights turn on.
2Turns the light on
Turns the lights on/off
■Illuminated entry system
The lights automatically turn on/off 
according to the engine switch mode (position), the presence of the 
electronic key (vehicles with a smart 
key system), whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the 
doors are opened/closed.■To prevent the battery from 
being discharged
If the interior light s remain on when 
the engine switch is turned off, the 
lights will go off aut omatically after 
■The interior li ghts may turn on 
automatically when
If any of the SRS airbags deploy 
(inflate) or in the event of a strong 
rear impact, the in terior lights will 
turn on automatically.The interior light s will turn off auto-
matically after approximately 20 minutes.The interior lights can be turned off 
manually. However, in order to help 
prevent further co llisions, it is rec-
ommended that they  be left on until 
safety can be ensured.(The interior lights may not turn on automatically depending on the 
force of the impact and conditions of 
the collision.)
Some functions can be customized. (P.548)Operating the personal 
lights
NOTICE
Do not leave the lights on longer 
than necessary w hen the engine 

400 6-3. Using the storage features
COROLLA_U6-3.Using the storage features
Bottle holders/door pockets ( P.401)
Open trays (if equipped) ( P.402)
Glove box ( P.401)
Cup holders (if equipped) ( P.401)
Console box ( P.402)List of storage features
Location of the storage features
WARNING
■Items that should not be left 
in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, 
as this may cau se the following 
when cabin temperature becomes 
high:
●Glasses may be deformed by 
heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored 
items.●Lighters or spray cans may 
explode. If they come into con-
tact with other stored items, the 
lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, 
causing a fire hazard.

401 6-3. Using the storage features
COROLLA_U6Interior featuresPull up the lever to open the 
glove box.
■Glove box light (if equipped)
The glove box light turns on when 
the tail lights are on.
Front
Rear (if equipped)
Pull the armrest down.Front
RearGlove box
WARNING
Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sud-den swerving, an accident may 
occur due to an occupant being 
struck by the open glove box or the items stored inside.
Cup holdersWARNING
■Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anyth ing other than 
cups or beverage cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of 
the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot 
drinks to pre vent burns.
Bottle holders

402 6-3. Using the storage features
COROLLA_U■Bottle holders
●When storing a bottle, close the 
cap.
●The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.
1Slide the lid to the rear most 
position. (vehicles with a slide function)
2Lift the lid while pulling up the knob.
■Slide function (if equipped)
The console box lid can be slid for-ward or backward.
Front (if equipped)
RearWARNING
■Items unsuitable for the bottle 
holders
Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders.
the holders in the event of an 
accident or sudden braking and 
Console boxWARNING
Keep the console box closed.Injuries may resul t in the event of 
an accident or sudden braking.
Open trays
WARNING
when putting ite ms in the open 
tray. Failure to do so may cause 
items to be thrown out of the tray in the event of s udden braking or 
steering. In these cases, the items may interfere with pedal operation or cause driver distraction, result-
ing in an accident.

403 6-3. Using the storage features
COROLLA_U6Interior featuresLift the deck mat.
Type A
Type BWARNING
●Do not store items in the tray 
that can easily shift or roll out.
●Do not stack items in the tray higher than the tray’s edge.
●Do not put items in the tray that 
may protrude over the tray’s 
edge.Trunk features
Auxiliary box

404 6-4. Other interior features
COROLLA_U6-4.Other interior features
The USB charging port are used 
to supply 2.1 A of electricity at 5 V to external devices.The USB charging port are for charging only. They are not designed for data transfer or other purposes.Depending on the external device, it may not charge prop-erly. Refer to the manual included with the device before using a USB charging port.
■Using the USB charging port
Lift the lid while pulling up the knob.
■The USB charging port can be 
used when
■Situations in which the USB 
charging port may not operate 
correctly
●If a device which consumes more than 2.1 A at 5 V is connected
●If a device designed to communi-cate with a personal computer, such as a USB memory device, is connected
●If the connected external device is turned off (depend ing on device)
●If the temperature inside the vehi-
cle is high, such as after the vehi-
cle has been parked in the sun
■About connected external 
device
Depending on the connected exter-nal device, charging may occasion-ally be suspended and then start 
again. This is not  a malfunction.Other interior features
USB charging port (if 
equipped)
NOTICE
USB charging port
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port.
●Do not spill wate r or other liq-
uids into the port.
●Do not apply exc essive force to 
or impact the USB charging port.
●Do not disassemble or modify the USB charging port.
■To prevent damage to exter-
nal devices
●Do not leave external devices in the vehicle. The temperature 
inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to an 
external device.
unnecessary force to an exter-nal device or the cable of an 
external device while it is con-
nected.
Do not use the USB charging port 
for a long period of time with the engine stopped.

405 6-4. Other inte rior features
COROLLA_U6Interior featuresThe power outlet can be used 
for 12 V accessories that run on less than 10 A.
Lift the lid while pulling up the 
knob and open the power outlet lid.
■The power outlet can be used 
when
■When turning the engine switch off
Disconnect electrical devices with charging functions, such as mobile 
battery packs.
If such devices are left connected, the engine switch may not be turned 
off normally.A portable device, such as a 
smartphone or mobile battery, can be charged by just placing it on the charging area, provided the device is compatible with the Qi wireless charging standard created by the Wireless Power Consortium.
The wireless charger cannot be 
used with a portable device that is larger than the charging area. Additionally, depending on the portable device, the wireless charger may not operate prop-erly. Refer to the operation man-ual of the portable device.
■The “Qi” symbol 
The “Qi” symbol is a trademark of the Wireless Power Consor-tium. Power outlet
NOTICE
■To prevent the fuse from 
being blown
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
■To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. 
Foreign objects or liquids that 
enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.■To prevent the battery from 
Do not use the p ower outlet lon-
ger than necessary when the 
engine is not running.
Wireless charger (if 
equipped)

406 6-4. Other interior features
COROLLA_U■Name for all parts
Power supply switch
Operation indicator lightCharge area
■Using the wireless charger
1Press the power supply 
switch of the wireless char-ger.
Pressing the switch again turns the 
wireless charger off.
When turned on, the  operation indi-
cator light (green) comes on. 
When the engine switch is turned 
off, the on/off state of the wireless 
charger will be memorized.
2Place a portable device on 
the charging area with its charging surface facing down.While charging, the  operation indi-
cator light (oran ge) will be illumi-
nated.
If charging does not begin, move the portable device as close to the 
center of the char ging area as pos-
sible.
When charging is complete, the 
operation indicato r light (green) will 
illuminate.
■Recharging function
If a certain amount of time has 
elapsed since charging com-pleted and the portable device has not been moved, the wireless charger will restart charging.
If the portable device is moved within the charging area, charging will stop tem-porarily then restart.

407 6-4. Other inte rior features
COROLLA_U6Interior features■Operation indicator light status
*: Depending on the portable devic e, the operation indicator ligh t may stay 
illuminated (orange) after charging has completed.
If the operation indicator light blinks
If an error is detec ted, the operation in dicator light will bli nk (orange). Take 
the appropriate measures according to the table below.
■The wireless charger can be 
■Portable devices  that can be 
charged
●Portable devices compatible with the Qi wireless charging standard can be charged by the wireless charger. However, compatibility 
with all devices which meet the Qi 
wireless charging standard is not guaranteed.
●The wireless char ger is designed 
to supply low power  electricity (5 
W or less) to a cellular phone, smartphone, or other portable device.Operation indicator light State
Off The Wireless charger is off
Green (illuminated)Standby (charging is possible)
Charging is complete*
Orange (illuminated)A portable device has been placed on the 
charging area (identifying the portable device)
Charging in progress
Operation indicator light Suspected cause Measure
Blinks (orange) at a one second interval continu-ouslyVehicle to charger com-munication failure. Contact your Toyota dealer.
Blinks (orange) 3 times repeatedlyA foreign object exists between the portable device and charging area.
Remove the foreign object.
Portable device is not positioned properly on the charging area. Move the portable device toward the cen-ter of the charging area.
Blinks (orange) 4 times repeatedlyThe temperature of the wireless charger is excessively high. Stop charging immedi-ately and continue charging after a while.

408 6-4. Other interior features
COROLLA_U■If a cover or accessory is 
attached to the portable device
Do not charge a portable device if a cover or accessory which is not Qi 
compatible is attached. Depending 
on the type of cover and/or acces-sory attached, it may not be possi-
ble to charge the portable device. If 
the portable device is placed on the 
charging area and does not charge, 
remove the cover and/or accesso-
ries.
■If interference is heard in AM 
radio broadcasts while 
charging
Turn off the wireless charger and check if the noise is reduced. If 
noise is reduced, press and hold the power supply switch of the wireless 
charger for 2 seconds. The fre-
quency of the wireless charger is changed and noise may be 
reduced. When the frequency is 
changed, the operation indicator light will blink (o range) 2 times.■Charging precautions
●If the electronic key cannot be detected in the cabin, charging cannot be performed. When a 
door is opened and closed, 
charging may be temporarily sus-pended.
●While charging, the wireless char-ger and the portable device will 
become warm. 
This is not a malfunction.If a porta-ble device becomes warm while 
charging and charging stops due 
to the protection f unction of the 
portable device, wait until the por-
table device cools down and 
charge it again.
■Sound generated during opera-tion
When the power supply switch is turned on or while a portable device 
is being identified, operation sounds 
may be heard. This is not a malfunc-tion.
■Cleaning the wireless charger
P.425
■Certification for the wireless charger

409 6-4. Other inte rior features
COROLLA_U6Interior features

410 6-4. Other interior features
COROLLA_U

411 6-4. Other inte rior features
COROLLA_U6Interior featuresWARNING
When charging a portable device 
while driving, for safety reasons, 
the driver should not operate the 
portable device.
People with implantable cardiac 
pacemakers, cardiac resynchroni-
zation therapy pacemakers or 
implantable cardioverter defibrilla-tors, as well as any other electri-
cal medical device, should consult 
their physician about the usage of the wireless charger.
Operations of the wireless char-
ger may have an affect on medi-cal devices.
■To prevent damage or burns
Failure to do so may  result in the 
possibility of fire , equipment fail-
ure or damage, or burns due to heat.
●Do not put any metallic objects 
between the charging area and the portable device while 
charging.
●Do not attach me tallic objects, 
such as aluminum stickers, to 
the charging area.
●Do not cover the wireless char-
ger with a cloth or other object 
while charging.
●Do not attempt t o charge porta-
ble devices whic h are not com-
patible with the Qi wireless 
charging standard.
●Do not disassemble, modify or remove the wireless charger.
●Do not apply force or impact to 
the wireless charger.NOTICE
■Conditions in which the wire-
less charger may not operate correctly
wireless charger may not operate 
correctly:
●When a portable device is fully charged
●When there is a foreign object between the charging area and 
portable device
●When a portable device becomes hot wh ile charging
●When a portable device is 
placed on the wireless area with 
its charging surface facing up
●When a portable device is not centered on the charging area
●When the vehicle is near a TV 
tower, electric po wer plant, gas 
station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or ot her facilit y that 
generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
●When the portable device is in contact with, or is covered by 
any of the following metallic 
objects:
attached
• Cigarette boxes that have alu-
minum foil inside
• Coins• Metal hand warmers• Media such as CDs and DVDs

412 6-4. Other interior features
COROLLA_U1 To set the visor in the for-
ward position, flip it down.
2 To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side.
3To use the side extender, place the visor in the side position, then slide it back-ward. (if equipped)
Slide the cover to open.
The vanity light  turns on. (if 
equipped)
■To prevent batte ry discharge 
(vehicles with vanity lights)
If the vanity lights remain on when 
the engine switch is OFF, the lights 
will go off automatically after 20 min-utes.NOTICE
●When wireless keys (that emit radio waves) other than those of your vehicle are being used 
nearby.
If in situations other than above 
the wireless charger does not operate properly or the operation indicator light is blinking, the wire-
less charger may be malfunction-ing. Contact your Toyota dealer.
■To prevent failu re or damage 
to data
●Do not bring magnetic cards, 
such as a credit card, or mag-
netic recording media, close to 
the wireless charger while charging. Otherwise, data may 
be erased due to the influence 
of magnetism.Additionally, do not bring preci-
sion instruments such as wrist 
watches, close to the wireless charger, as such objects may 
●Do not leave portable devices in 
the cabin. The temperature inside the cabin may become 
high when parked  in the sun, 
and cause damage to the 
device.
Do not use the wireless charger for a long period of time with the 
engine stopped.Sun visors
Vanity mirrors

413 6-4. Other inte rior features
COROLLA_U6Interior featuresFold down the armrest for use.
An assist grip installed on the 
ceiling can be used to support your body while sitting on the seat.The coat hooks are provided with the rear assist grips.NOTICE
■To prevent the battery from 
being discharged (vehicles with vanity lights)
Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the 
Armrest (if equipped)
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not apply too much load on the armrest.
Assist gripsWARNING
■Assist grip
Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or 
rising from your seat.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the assist grip
Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.
Coat hooks
WARNING
■Items that cannot be hung on the coat hook
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the 
hook. If the SRS curtain shield air-
bags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death 

414 6-4. Other interior features
The HomeLink® wireless control 
system in your vehicle has 3 
buttons which can be pro-grammed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the program-ming methods on the following pages to determine the method which is appropriate for the device.HomeLink
® indicator light
Garage door operation indi-cators
HomeLink
® icon
Illuminates while HomeLink® is 
Buttons
■Codes stored in the Home-
Link® memory
●The registered codes are not 
erased even if the battery cable is 
disconnected.
●If learning failed when registering 
a different code to a HomeLink® 
button that already has a code 
registered to it, the already regis-
tered code will not be erased.
■Certification for the garage door opener
Except for vehicles sold in CanadaGarage door opener*
The garage door opener can 
be programmed using the 
HomeLink® to operate 
garage doors, gates, entry 
doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices.

415 6-4. Other inte rior features
COROLLA_U6Interior featuresFor vehicles sold in Canada
■When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.
homelink.com/toyota  or call 
1-800-355-3515.
■Before programming Home-
Link®
During programming, it is pos-
sible that garage doors, gates, or other devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or other devices to prevent injury or other potential harm.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote control transmitter for more accurate programming.
WARNING
■When programming a garage 
door or other remote control 
device
The garage door o r other device 
may operate, so ensure people 
and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■Conforming to federal safety 
standards
Do not use the HomeLink® com-
patible transceiver with any 
garage door opener or device that 
lacks safety stop and reverse fea-
tures as required by federal safety standards.
This includes any garage door 
that cannot detect an interfering 
object. A door or device without 
these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.■When operating or program-
ming HomeLink®
Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink
® buttons.
Programming the Home-
Link®

416 6-4. Other interior features
COROLLA_UGarage door opener motors 
manufactured after 1995 may be equipped with rolling code protection. If this is the case, you may need a stepladder or other sturdy, safe device to reach the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor.
■Programming HomeLink®
Steps 1 through 3 must be per-
formed within 60 seconds, oth-erwise the indicator light will stop flashing and programming will not be able to be completed.
1Press and release the Home-
Link
® button you want to pro-
gram and check that the 
HomeLink® indicator light 
flashes (orange).
2Point the remote control 
transmitter for the device at the rear view mirror, 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the 
HomeLink
® buttons.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator light 
in view while programming.
3Program a device.Programming a device other 
than an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)
Press and hold the handheld transmitter button until the 
HomeLink
® indicator light 
changes from slowly flashing 
orange to rapidly flashing green (rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code), then release the button.
Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Program-ming a device in the Cana-dian market
Press and release the remote control transmitter button at 2 second intervals, repeatedly, 
until the HomeLink
® indicator 
light changes from slowly flash-
ing (orange) to rapidly flashing (green) (rolling code) or continu-ously lit (green) (fixed code).
4Test the HomeLink
® opera-
tion by pressing the newly 
programmed button and observing the indicator light:
Indicator light illuminates: Programming of a fixed code device has completed. The 

417 6-4. Other inte rior features
COROLLA_U6Interior featuresgarage door or other device 
should operate when a Home-
Link® button is pressed and 
released.
Indicator light flashes rapidly: 
The garage door opener motor or other device is equipped with a rolling code. To complete programming, firmly press and hold the 
HomeLink
® button for 2 sec-
onds then release it.
If the garage door or other 
device does not operate, pro-ceed to “Programming a roll-ing code system”.
5Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the remaining Home-
Link
® buttons.
■Programming a rolling code 
system
2 or more people may be neces-sary to complete rolling code programming.
1Locate the “Learn” or “Smart” 
button on the garage door opener motor in the garage.
This button can usually be found 
where the hanging antenna wire is 
attached to the unit. The name and 
color of the button may vary by manufacturer. Ref er to the owner’s 
manual supplied with the garage door opener motor for details.
2Press and release the 
“Learn” or “Smart” button.
Perform 3 within 30 seconds after 
performing 2 .
3Press and hold the desired 
HomeLink® button (inside the 
vehicle) for 2 seconds and 
release it. Repeat this sequence (press/hold/release) up to 3 times to complete program-ming.If the garage door opener motor operates when the 
HomeLink
® button is 
pressed, the garage door 

418 6-4. Other interior features
COROLLA_Uopener motor recognizes the 
HomeLink® signal.
■Enabling 2-way communi-
cation with a garage door (only available for compati-ble devices)
When enabled, 2-way communi-cation allows you to check the status of the opening and clos-ing of a garage door through indicators in your vehicle.
2-way communication is only 
available if the garage door opener motor used is a compati-ble device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.homelink.com.)
1Within 5 seconds after pro-
gramming the garage door opener has been completed, if the garage door opener motor is trained to Home-
Link
®, both garage door 
operation indicators will flash 
rapidly (green) and the light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicat-ing that 2-way communica-tion is enabled.
If the indicators do not flash, per-form 2 and 3 within the first 10 
presses of the HomeLink® button 
after programming has been com-
pleted.
2Press a programmed Home-
Link® button to operate a 
garage door.
3Within 1 minute of pressing the HomeLink
® button, after 
the garage door operation 
has stopped, press the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor. Within 5 seconds of the establishment of 2-way communication with the garage door opener, both garage door operation indica-tors in the vehicle will flash rapidly (green) and the light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicat-ing that 2-way communica-tion is enabled.
■Reprogramming a single 
HomeLink® button
When the following procedure is 
performed, buttons which already have devices registered to them can be overwritten:
1With one hand, press and 
hold the desired HomeLink
® 
button.
2When the HomeLink® indica-
tor starts flashing (orange), 
continue to hold the Home-
Link® button and perform 
“Programming HomeLink®” 1 

419 6-4. Other inte rior features
COROLLA_U6Interior features(it takes 20 seconds for the 
HomeLink® indicator to start 
flashing).
■Before programming
●Install a new battery in the trans-
mitter.
●The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the 
HomeLink®.
Press the appropriate Home-
Link® button. The HomeLink® 
indicator light should turn on.
The status of the opening and 
closing of a garage door is shown by the indicators.
Opening
Closing
This function is onl y available if the 
garage door opener motor used is a 
compatible device. (To check device compatib ility, refer to 
www.homelink.com.)The indicators can operate 
within approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of the garage door. However, if there are obstructions between the garage door and the vehicle, such as houses and trees, feedback signals from the garage door may not be received.
To recall the previous door oper-
ation status, press and release 
either HomeLink
® buttons  
and  or  and  
simultaneously. The last 
recorded status will be dis-played for 3 seconds.
Press and hold the 2 outside 
buttons for 10 seconds until the 
HomeLink
changes from continuously lit 
(orange) to rapidly flashing (green).
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to 
erase the programs  stored in the Operating HomeLink®Color Status
Orange (flash-
ing)Currently open-
ing/closing
GreenOpening/closing 
has completed
Red (flashing)Feedback sig-
nals cannot be 
received
Erasing the entire Home-
Link® memory (all three 
codes)

420 6-4. Other interior features
COROLLA_UHomeLink® memory.

421
COROLLA_U7
7Maintenance and careMaintenance and care
.7-1. Maintenance and care
vehicle exterior.......... 422
vehicle interior........... 424
.................................. 427
General maintenance.. 428
Emission inspection and 
maintenance (I/M) pro-
grams ........................ 431
7-3. Do-it-yourself mainte-
nance
Do-it-yourself service pre-
cautions..................... 432
Hood ........................... 434
Positioning a floor jack
.................................. 435
Engine compartment... 436
Tires ............................ 444
Tire inflation pressure.. 453
Wheels ......... ............... 455
Air conditioning filter.... 457
Wireless remote con-
trol/electronic key battery
.................................. 458
Checking and replacing 
fuses.......................... 461
Light bulbs................... 464

422 7-1. Maintenance and care
COROLLA_U7-1.Maintenance and care
Working from top to bottom, 
liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse 
thoroughly with water.
Wipe away any water.
Wax the vehicle when the 
waterproof coating deterio-rates.
If water does not bead on a clean 
surface, apply wax when the vehi-cle body is cool.
■Automatic car washes
●Fold the mirrors before washing 
the vehicle. Start washing from the 
front of the vehicle. Make sure to 
extend the mirrors before driving.
●Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm  your vehicle’s 
paint.
●Vehicles with a rear spoiler: In cer-
tain automatic car washes, the rear spoiler may interfere with 
machine operation. This may pre-
vent the vehicle from being 
cleaned properly or result in dam-age to the r ear spoiler.
■High pressure car washes
As water may enter the cabin, do not bring the nozzle tip near the 
gaps around the doors or perimeter 
of the windows, or spray these areas continuously.
■When using a car wash (vehi-
If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the 
effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, 
follow the following correction pro-
cedures to wash the vehicle:
●Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being 
washed. (Take care to ensure that 
the key is not stolen.)
●Set the electronic key to bat-tery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. ( P.112)
■Aluminum wheel s (if equipped)
●Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent.
●Wash detergent off with water immediately after use.
●To protect the paint from damage, make sure to obs erve the follow-
ing precautions.
• Do not use acidic, alkaline or 
abrasive detergent
• Do not use hard brushes• Do not use detergent on the 
wheels when they  are hot, such 
as after driving or parking in hot weather
■Bumpers and side moldings
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.Cleaning and protect-
ing the vehicle exte-rior
Perform cleaning in a man-
ner appropriate to each component and its material.
Cleaning instructions

423 7-1. Maintenance and care
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and careWARNING
■When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of 
the engine compartment. Doing 
so may cause the electrical com-ponents, etc. to catch fire.
■Precautions regarding the 
exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the 
exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be 
careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touch-
ing a hot exhaust pipe can cause 
burns.
■Precaution regarding the rear bumper with Blind Spot Moni-
tor (if equipped)
If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system 
may malfunction. If this occurs, consult your Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
■To prevent paint deteriora-tion and corrosion on the 
body and components (alumi-
num wheels, etc.)
●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads• If coal tar or tre e sap is present 
on the paint surface
• If dead insects, insect droppings 
or bird droppings are present on 
the paint surface
• After driving in an area contami-
nated with soot, oily smoke, 
mine dust, iron powder or chem-
ical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily 
soiled with dust or mud• If liquids such as benzene and 
gasoline are spilled on the paint 
surface
●If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired 
●To prevent the wheels from cor-
roding, remove any dirt and store in a place  with low humid-
ity when storing the wheels.
■Cleaning the exterior lights
●Wash carefully. Do not use 
organic substances or scrub 
with a hard brush.This may damage the surfaces 
of the lights.
●Do not apply wax to the sur-
faces of the lights.Wax may cause damage to the 
lenses.
windshield wiper arms
When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side wiper arm upward first, and 
repeat for the passenger side. 
When returning the wipers to their original position , do so from the 
passenger side first.
■When using a high pressure car wash
●When washing the vehicle, do not spray the camera or its sur-rounding area directly with a 
high pressure washer. Shock 
applied from high pressure water may cause the device to 
not operate normally.
●Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manu-
factured cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts 
may be damaged if they come 
into contact with high-pressure water.
• Traction related parts

424 7-1. Maintenance and care
COROLLA_URemove dirt and dust using a 
vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth damp-ened with lukewarm water.
If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral deter-gent diluted to approximately 1%.Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.
■Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foam-
ing-type cleaners available. Use a 
sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not 
use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and 
let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as 
dry as possible.
■Handling the seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also 
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.NOTICE
• Steering parts
• Suspension parts• Brake parts
●Keep the cleaning nozzle at 
least 11.9 in. (30 cm) away from the vehicles bod y. Otherwise 
resin section, such as moldings and bumpers, may be deformed and damaged. Also, do not con-tinuously hold the nozzle in the 
same place.
●Do not spray the lower part of 
the windshield continuously. If water enters the air conditioning 
system intake located near the 
lower part of the windshield, the air conditioning system may not 
operate correctly.Cleaning and protect-
ing the vehicle interior
Protecting the vehicle 
interior

425 7-1. Maintenance and care
■Water in the vehicle
●Do not splash or spill liquid in 
Doing so may cause electrical components, etc. to malfunc-
tion or catch fire.
●Do not get any of the SRS com-
ponents or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.(P.29)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting 
●Vehicles with wireless charger:
Do not let the wireless charger (P.405) get wet. Failure to do 
so may cause the charger to become hot and cause burns or could cause electric shock 
resulting in dea th or serious 
injury.
■Cleaning the interior (espe-
cially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel 
may reflect off the windshield, 
obstructing the dr iver’s view and 
leading to an accident, resulting in 
NOTICE
■Cleaning detergents
●Do not use the f ollowing types 
of detergent, as they may dis-color the vehicle interior or 
cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Areas other than the seats and 
steering wheel: Organic sub-
stances such as benzene or 
gasoline, alkaline or acidic solu-
tions, dye, and bleach• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solu-
tions, such as th inner, benzene, 
and alcohol
• Steering wheel: Organic sub-
stances, such as thinner, and 
cleaner that contains alcohol
●Do not use polish wax or polish 
cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior part’s painted 
surface may be damaged.
■Preventing damage to leather 
surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deteriora-tion of leather surfaces:
●Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
●Do not expose the vehicle to 
direct sunlight for extended peri-
ods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during 
summer.
●Do not place items made of 
vinyl, plastic, or  containing wax 
on the upholstery, as they may 
stick to the leather surface if the 
vehicle interior heats up signifi-cantly.
■Water on the floor
Do not wash the v ehicle floor with 
water.
Vehicle systems such as the 
audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with 
electrical components such as the 
audio system abov e or under the 
floor of the vehicle. Water may 
also cause the body to rust.
■When cleaning the inside of the windshield
Do not allow glass cleaner to con-tact the lens. Also, do not touch 
the lens. ( P.180)

426 7-1. Maintenance and care
COROLLA_URemove dirt using a 
water-dampened soft cloth or synthetic chamois.
Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture.
■Cleaning the areas with 
satin-finish metal accents
The metal areas use  a layer of real 
metal for the surface. It is necessary 
to clean them regularly. If dirty areas are left uncleaned for long periods 
of time, they may be difficult to 
clean.
Remove dirt and dust using a 
vacuum cleaner.
Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth damp-ened with diluted detergent.Use a diluted water solution of 
approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
Wring out any excess water 
from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.
■Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the 
interior of the vehicle at least twice a 
year to maintain t he quality of the 
vehicle’s interior.
Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral deter-gent diluted to approximately 1%.
Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.NOTICE
■Cleaning the inside of the rear 
window
●Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear 
window defogger heater wires 
or antenna. Use  a cloth damp-
ened with lukewarm water to 
gently wipe the window clean. 
Wipe the window in strokes run-ning parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
●Be careful not to scratch or 
damage the heater wires or 
antenna.
Cleaning the areas with 
Cleaning the leather areasCleaning the synthetic leather areas

427 7-2. Maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and care7-2.Maintenance
■Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine 
Toyota parts be used for repairs to 
ensure performanc e of each sys-
tem. If non-Toyota parts are used in 
replacement or if a repair shop other 
than a Toyota dealer performs 
repairs, confirm the warranty cover-age.
■Allow inspection and repairs to 
be performed by a Toyota 
dealer
●Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest ser-
vice information. They are well 
informed about the operation of all systems on your vehicle.
●Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under war-
ranty coverage. If any problem 
should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota 
dealer will promptly  take care of it.General maintenance should be 
performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.
Scheduled maintenance should 
be performed at specified inter-vals according to the mainte-nance schedule.
For details about maintenance 
items and schedules, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.Maintenance require-
ments
To ensure safe and econom-
ical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Toyota recommends the maintenance below.
WARNING
■If your vehicle is not properly 
maintained
Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the 
vehicle and possible death or seri-
ous injury.■Handling of the battery
●Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety 
of automobile components con-
tain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause 
cancer and birth defects and 
other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
●Oils, fuels and fluids contained 
in vehicles as well as waste pro-
duced by component wear con-tain or emit chemicals known to 
the State of California to cause 
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid 
exposure and wash any 
affected area immediately.
●Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead 
and lead compounds which are 
known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after han-
dling. (P.442)
General maintenance
Scheduled maintenance

428 7-2. Maintenance
COROLLA_U■Resetting the message indicat-
ing maintenance is required
After the required maintenance is performed according to the mainte-
nance schedule, please reset the message.
To reset the messa ge, follow the 
procedure described below:
control switch to select .
2Press  or  to select “Vehi-
cle Settings” and then press and 
hold .
3Press  or  to select 
“Scheduled Maintenance” and 
then press .
4Press  or  to select “Yes” 
and then press .
A message will be displayed on the 
reset procedure has been com-
pleted.
You can perform some mainte-
nance procedures by yourself.Please be aware that do-it-your-self maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Toyota repair manuals is 
recommended.
For details about warranty cover-
age, refer to the separate “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.Do-it-yourself mainte-nance
Listed below are the general 
maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Sched-uled Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice.
WARNING
■If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure 
that there is adequate ventilation 
before performing maintenance 
checks.
Engine compartment
Items Check points
BatteryCheck the connec-
tions. (P.442)
Brake fluidIs the brake fluid at the correct level? (P.441)
Engine coolantIs the engine cool-ant at the correct level? ( P.440)
Engine oilIs the engine oil at the correct level? (P.437)

429 7-2. Maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and careExhaust sys-
temThere should not be any fumes or strange sounds.
Radiator/con-denserThe radiator and condenser should be free from for-eign objects. (P.440)
Washer fluidIs there sufficient washer fluid? (P.443)
Vehicle interior
Accelerator pedalThe accelerator pedal should move smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching).
Continuously variable trans-mission “Park” mechanismWhen parked on a slope and the shift lever is in P, is the vehicle securely stopped?
Brake pedal• Does the brake 
pedal move smoothly?
• Does the brake 
pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor? (P.530)
pedal have the correct amount of free play? (P.530)Items Check points
Clutch pedal• Does the clutch 
• Does the clutch 
pedal have the correct amount of free play? (P.530)
Brakes• The vehicle 
should not pull to one side when the brakes are applied.
• The brakes 
should work effectively.
• The brake pedal 
should not feel spongy.
should not get too close to the floor when the brakes are applied.
Head restraintsDo the head restraints move smoothly and lock securely?
Indica-tors/buzzersDo the indicators and buzzers func-tion properly?
LightsDo all the lights come on?Items Check points

430 7-2. Maintenance
COROLLA_UParking brake• Does the park-
ing brake oper-
ate normally?
• When parked on 
a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?
Seat belts• Do the seat belts 
operate smoothly?
• The seat belts 
should not be damaged.
SeatsDo the seat con-trols operate prop-erly?
Steering wheel• Does the steer-
ing wheel rotate smoothly?
• Does the steer-
ing wheel have the correct amount of free play?
• There should not 
be any strange sounds coming from the steer-ing wheel.
Vehicle exterior
Doors/trunkDo the doors/trunk operate smoothly?
Engine hoodDoes the engine hood lock system work properly?Items Check points
Fluid leaksThere should not be any signs of fluid leakage after the vehicle has been parked.
Tires• Is the tire infla-
tion pressure correct?
• The tires should 
not be damaged or excessively worn.
• Have the tires 
been rotated according to the maintenance schedule?
• The wheel nuts 
should not be loose.
Windshield wipers• The wiper blades 
should not show any signs of cracking, split-ting, wear, con-tamination or deformation.
• The wiper blades 
should clear the windshield with-out streaking or skipping.Items Check points

431 7-2. Maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and careThe OBD system determines 
that a problem exists some-where in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.
When the battery is discon-
nected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set 
during ordinary driving are erased.Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.
When the fuel tank cap is 
looseThe malfunction indicator lamp 
comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
The error code in the OBD sys-
tem will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
Contact your Toyota dealer to 
prepare the vehicle for re-test-ing.Emission inspection 
and mainte nance (I/M) 
programs
Some states have vehicle 
emission inspection pro-grams which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control sys-tem.
If the malfunc tion indica-
tor lamp comes on
Your vehicle may not pass 
the I/M test in the follow-
ing situations:When the malfunction 
indicator lamp still 
remains on after several driving trips
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

432 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_U7-3.Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service 
If you perform maintenance 
by yourself, be sure to fol-low the correct procedure as given in these sections.
Maintenance
Items Parts and tools
Battery 
condition (P.442)•W a r m  w a t e r• Baking soda•G r e a s e• Conventional 
wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level (P.443)• FMVSS No.116 
DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluidFMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel• Funnel (used only 
for adding brake fluid)Engine coolant level (P.440)• “Toyota Super Long 
Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene gly-col-based non-sili-cate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid tech-nologyFor the U.S.A.:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water.For Canada:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only 
for adding coolant)
Engine oil level (P.437)• “Toyota Genuine 
Motor Oil” or equiva-lent
for adding engine oil)
Fuses (P.461)• Fuse with same 
amperage rating as original
Light bulbs (P.464)• Bulb with same 
number and wattage rating as original
• Flathead screw-
driver
•W r e n c hItems Parts and tools

433 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and careRadiator 
and con-denser (P.440)
Tire infla-tion pres-sure (P.453) • Tire pressure gauge• Compressed air 
source
Washer fluid (P.443)• Water or washer 
fluid containing anti-freeze (for winter use)
for adding water or washer fluid)
WARNING
The engine compartment contains 
many mechanisms and fluids that 
may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. 
To avoid death or serious injury, 
observe the following precautions.
■When working on the engine compartment
●Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and 
engine drive belt.
●Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator , exhaust mani-
fold, etc. right a fter driving as 
they may be hot . Oil and other 
fluids may also be hot.
●Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and 
rags, in the engine compart-
ment.
●Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or 
the battery. Fuel and battery 
fumes are flammable.Items Parts and tools ●Be extremely cautious when 
working on the battery. It con-
tains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
■When working near the elec-
tric cooling fan or radiator 
grille
Be sure the engine switch is OFF.With the engine switch in ON, the electric cooling fa n may automati-
cally start to run if the air condi-tioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. ( P.440)
■Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid 
spray, etc. from getting in your 
eyes.
NOTICE
■If you remove the air cleaner 
filter
Driving with the ai r cleaner filter 
removed may cause excessive 
engine wear due to  dirt in the air.

434 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_U1Pull the hood lock release 
lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
2Pull the auxiliary catch lever to the left and lift the hood.3Hold the hood open by insert-ing the support rod into the slot.
Hood
Opening the hood
WARNING
■Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed 
and locked.If the hood is not locked properly, 
it may open while the vehicle is in 
motion and cause an accident, which may result i n death or seri-
■After installing the support rod into the slot
Make sure the rod supports the hood securely preventing it from falling down onto your head or 
body.
NOTICE
■When closing the hood
Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. 
Closing the hood with the support 
rod not clipped could cause the hood to bend.

435 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and care■Front■RearPositioning a floor 
jack
When using a floor jack, fol-
low the instructions in the manual provided with the jack and perform the opera-tion safely.When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
Location of the jack point

436 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_U1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FAE) engine
Washer fluid tank ( P.443)
Engine coolant reservoir ( P.436)
Fuse boxes ( P.461)
Engine oil level dipstick ( P.437)
Engine oil filler cap ( P.438)
Battery ( P.442)
Brake fluid reservoir ( P.441)
Radiator ( P.440)
Condenser ( P.440)
Electric cooling fanEngine compartment
Components

437 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and care2.0 L 4-cylinder (M20A-FKS) engine
Electric cooling fan
With the engine at operating 
temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dip-stick.■Checking the engine oil
1Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bot-tom of the engine.Checking and adding the 
engine oil

438 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_U2Holding a rag under the end, 
pull the dipstick out.
2.0 L 4-cylinder (M20A-FKS) engine
3Wipe the dipstick clean.
4Reinsert the dipstick fully.
5Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.
LowNormal
Excessive
The shape of the dipstick may differ 
depending on the type of vehicle or engine.
6Wipe the dipstick and reinsert 
it fully.
■Checking the oil type and preparing the item needed
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.
Engine oil selection
P.526, 527
Oil quantity (Low  Full)
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)
ItemClean funnel
■Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as that already in the engine.

439 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and care2.0 L 4-cylinder (M20A-FKS) 
engine
1Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
2Add engine oil slowly, check-ing the dipstick.
3Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
■Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will 
be consumed while driving. In the following situatio ns, oil consump-
tion may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.
●When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing 
the vehicle or after replacing the 
engine
●If low quality oil or oil of an inap-propriate viscosity is used
●When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or 
when driving while accelerating or 
decelerating frequently
●When leaving the engine idling for 
a long time, or wh en driving fre-
quently through heavy trafficWARNING
■Used engine oil
●Used engine oil contains poten-
tially harmful contaminants 
which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin 
cancer, so care should be taken 
to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove 
used engine oil from your skin, 
wash thoroughly with soap and water.
●Dispose of used o il and filters 
only in a safe and acceptable 
manner. Do not dispose of used 
oil and filters in h ousehold trash, 
in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Toyota dealer, service 
station or auto parts store for 
information concerning recy-
cling or disposal.
●Do not leave used engine oil 
within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil le vel on a regular 
basis.
■When replacing the engine oil
●Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
●Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
●Check the oil level on the dip-
stick every time  you refill the 
vehicle.
●Be sure the engin e oil filler cap 
is properly tightened.

440 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_UThe coolant level is satisfactory 
if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL” line“LOW” line
If the level is on or below the “LOW” 
line, add coolant up to the “FULL” line. (P.519)
■Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life 
Coolant” or a similar high quality 
ethylene glycol based non-silicate, 
non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life 
hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is 
a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% 
deionized water. (Minimum tem-
perature: -31°F [-35°C])
Canada:
a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% 
perature: -44°F [-42°C])
For more details about coolant, con-
tact your Toyota dealer.■If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir caps, drain 
cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your 
Toyota dealer test the cap and 
check for leaks in the cooling sys-
tem.
Check the radiator and con-
denser and clear away any for-eign objects. If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condi-tion, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.Checking the engine cool-
ant
WARNING
■When the engine is hot
Do not remove the engine coolant 
reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under 
pressure and may spray hot cool-ant if the cap is removed, causing 
serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
■When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct 
mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection 
and cooling. Be sure to read the 
antifreeze or coolant label.
■If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.
Checking the radiator and 
condenser

441 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and care■Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be 
between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the tank.
■Adding fluid
1Slide and lift up the rubber strip to partly remove it as shown.2Disconnect the claws and remove the service cover.
3Remove the reservoir cap.
4Add brake fluid slowly while checking the fluid level.
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.
Fluid type
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE 
J1703 brake fluid
FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE 
J1704 brake fluid
Item
Clean funnel
■Brake fluid can absorb moisture 
from the air
Excess moisture in  the brake fluid 
can cause a dangerous loss of brak-ing efficiency. Use only newly 
opened brake fluid.WARNING
Do not touch the r adiator or con-
denser as they m ay be hot and 
cause serious injuries, such as 
burns.
Checking and adding the 
brake fluid

442 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_UCheck the battery as follows.
■Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery termi-
nals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp■Before recharging
When recharging, the battery pro-
duces hydrogen gas which is flam-
mable and explosive. Therefore, 
observe the followi ng precautions 
before recharging:
●If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to 
disconnect the ground cable.
●Make sure the engine switch on the charger is off when connecting 
and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.
the battery (vehicles with a 
●Unlocking the doors using the smart key system may not be pos-sible immediately after reconnect-
ing the battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock 
the doors.
●Start the engine with the engine switch in ACC. T he engine may 
not start with th e engine switch 
turned off. However, the engine will operate normally from the sec-
ond attempt.
●The engine switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the bat-tery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the engine switch mode 
to the status it was in before the 
battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the engine before 
disconnecting the battery. Take 
extra care when connecting the battery if the engine switch mode 
prior to discharge is unknown.
If the system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Toy-
ota dealer.WARNING
■When filling the reservoir
Take care as brake fluid can harm 
your hands and eyes and damage 
painted surfaces.If fluid gets on your hands or in 
your eyes, flush t he affected area 
with clean water immediately.
If you still experien ce discomfort, 
see a doctor.
NOTICE
■If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level 
to go down slightly as the brake 
pads wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent 
refilling, there ma y be a serious 
problem.
Battery

443 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and care
Add washer fluid in the following 
situations:
A washer does not work.
The warning message 
appears on the multi-informa-tion display.WARNING
■Chemicals in the battery
The battery contains poisonous 
and corrosive sulfuric acid and 
may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To 
reduce the risk of death or serious 
injury, take the  following precau-
tions while working on or near the 
battery:
●Do not cause sparks by touch-ing the battery terminals with 
tools.
●Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
●Avoid contact with eyes, skin 
and clothes.
●Never inhale or swallow electro-
lyte.
●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
●Keep children away from the 
battery.
■Where to safely charge the 
battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the bat-tery in a garage or closed room 
where there is insufficient ventila-
tion.
■Emergency measures regard-ing electrolyte
●If electrolyte gets in your eyesFlush your eyes with clean 
water for at least 15 minutes 
and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue 
to apply water with a sponge or 
cloth while traveling to the near-est medical facility.●If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thor-
oughly. If you feel pain or burn-ing, get medical attention 
●If electrolyte gets on your 
clothesIt can soak through clothing on 
to your skin. Imm ediately take 
off the clothing and follow the 
procedure above if necessary.
●If you accidentally swallow elec-
trolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical 
attention immediately.
■When disconnecting the bat-
tery
Do not disconnect the negative (-) terminal on the body side. The disconnected negative (-) terminal 
may touch the positive (+) termi-
nal, which may cause a short and result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while 
the engine is running. Also, be 
sure all accessories are turned off.
Adding the washer fluid

444 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_UCheck if the treadwear indica-
tors are showing on the tires. Also check the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the tread.
Check the spare tire condition 
and pressure if not rotated.
New tread
Worn treadTreadwear indicator
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a “TWI” or “ ” mark, WARNING
■When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the 
engine is hot or running as 
washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the 
engine, etc.
NOTICE
■Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces, as 
well as damaging the pump lead-
ing to problems of the washer fluid not spraying.
■Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer flui d with water as 
necessary.
Refer to the freezing tempera-
tures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.Tires
Replace or rotate tires in 
accordance with mainte-nance schedules and tread-wear.
Checking tires

445 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and careetc., molded into the sidewall of 
each tire.Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
■When to replace your vehicle’s 
tires
Tires should be replaced if:
●The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire
●You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and bulges 
indicating internal damage
●A tire goes flat r epeatedly or can-
not be properly repaired due to the 
size or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
■Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician 
even if it has seldom or never been 
used or damage i s not obvious.
■Low profile tires  (18-inch tires)
Generally, low prof ile tires will wear 
more rapidly and t ire grip perfor-
mance will be reduced on snowy 
and/or icy roads when compared to 
standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a 
speed appropriate for road and 
weather conditions.
■Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings 
(GAWR) of either the front axle or 
the rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification 
Label.For the maximum load of the tire, 
see the load limit  at maximum cold 
tire inflation press ure mentioned on 
the sidewall of the tire. ( P.537)■Tire types
●Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed perfor-
mance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When install-ing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
●All season tires
All season tires are designed to pro-vide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most win-ter conditions as well as for use 
year-round. All se ason tires, how-
ever, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in accelera-tion and handling performance com-
pared with summer tires in highway driving.
●Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, con-struction and load capacity as the originally installed  tires. Since your 
vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow 

446 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_Utires also have radial construction. 
Do not install stud ded tires without 
first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P.255)
■If the tread on snow tires wears 
down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
■Checking the tire valves
When replacing the tires, check the tire valves for deformation, cracks, and other damage.
Rotate the tires in the order 
shown.WARNING
■When inspecting or replacing 
tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause dam-age to parts of the drive train as 
well as dangerous handling char-
acteristics, which  may lead to an 
●Do not mix tires of different 
makes, models or tread pat-terns.
Also, do not mix tires of remark-
ably different treadwear.
●Do not use tire si zes other than 
those recommended by Toyota.
●Do not mix differently con-
structed tires (radial, bias-belted 
or bias-ply tires).
●Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
●Do not use tires that have been 
used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previ-
ously.NOTICE
■Low profile tires (18-inch 
tires)
Low profile tires may cause greater damage th an usual to the 
tire wheel when sus taining impact 
from the road surf ace. Therefore, 
pay attention to the following:
●Be sure to use proper tire infla-tion pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be 
damaged more severely.
●Avoid potholes, uneven pave-
ment, curbs and other road haz-ards. Failure to do so may lead 
to severe tire a nd wheel dam-
age.
■If tire inflation pressure of 
each tire becomes low while 
driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be 
ruined.
■Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause 
losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cush ioning ability of 
the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as 
the vehicle’s wheels and body.
Tire rotation

447 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and careFront
To equalize tire wear and extend 
tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is c arried out at the 
same interval as tire inspection.
Vehicles with a tire pressure warn-
ing system: Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation.
Your vehicle is equipped with a 
tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise.
If the tire pressure drops below 
a predetermined level, the driver is warned by a warning light. (P.485)
■Routine tire inflation pressure 
checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation 
pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part 
of your routine of daily vehicle 
checks.■Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may 
●In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not 
operate properly.
• If non-genuine Toyota wheels are 
used.
• A tire has been replaced with a 
tire that is not an OE (Original 
Equipment) tire.
tire that is not of the specified size.
• Tire chains, etc. are equipped.
• An auxiliary-support ed run-flat tire 
is equipped.
• If a window tint that affects the 
radio wave signals is installed.
• If there is a lot of snow or ice on 
the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel housings.
• If the tire inflation pressure is 
extremely higher than the speci-fied level.
• If tires not equipped with tire pres-
sure warning valves and transmit-ters are used.
• If the ID code on the tire pressure 
warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.
●Performance may be affected in the following situations.
• Near a TV tower, electric power 
plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airpo rt or other facil-
ity that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise.
• When carrying a portable radio, 
cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device.
●When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go off could be extended.
●When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when 
a tire has burst, the warning may 
not function.Tire pressure warning 

448 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_U■Warning performance of the tire 
pressure warning system
The warning of the tire pressure warning system will change in 
accordance with driving conditions. 
For this reason,  the system may give a warning even if the tire pres-sure does not reach a low enough 
level, or if the p ressure is higher 
than the pressure that was adjusted 
to when the system w as initialized.
■Tire pressure warning system certification

449 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and careFor vehicles sold in Canada
When replacing tires or wheels, 
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning 
valves and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valves and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toy-ota dealer. ( P.451)■Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure 
warning valve and tr ansmitter is not 
registered, the tire pressure warning 
system will not work properly. After 
driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a 
system malfunction.
Installing tire pressure 
warning valves and trans-mitters (vehicles with a 
tire pressure warning sys-
tem)
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing tires, 
wheels, tire pressure warn-
ing valves, transmitters and 
tire valve caps
●When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves  and transmit-
ters, contact your Toyota dealer 
as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled cor-
rectly.

450 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_U■The tire pressure warning 
system must be initialized in the following circum-stances:
When rotating front and rear tires which have different tire inflation pressures.
When changing the tire size.
When the tire inflation pres-sure is changed such as when changing traveling speed or load weight.
When changing between two registered wheel sets.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.
■How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
1Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch off.
Initialization cannot be performed 
while the vehicle is moving.
2Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (P.531)
Make sure to adjust the tire pres-
sure to the specifie d cold tire infla-
tion pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will oper-ate based on this pressure level.
3Turn the engine switch to 
ON.
4Press  or  of the meter 
5Press  or  to select 
“Vehicle Settings” and then 
press and hold .
6Press  or  to select 
“TPWS” and then press .
7Press  or  to select “Set 
Pressure”. Then press and 
hold  until the tire pres-NOTICE
●Make sure to install the tire 
valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water could 
enter the tire pressure warning 
valves and the tire pressure warning valves could be bound.
●When replacing ti re valve caps, 
do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck.
■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and 
transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire  pressure warn-
ing valve and transmitter may not 
operate properly. If a liquid seal-
ant is used, contact your Toyota 
dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make 
sure to replace the tire pressure 
warning valve and transmitter when replaci ng the tire. (
P.449)
Initializing the tire pres-
sure warning system (if 
equipped)

451 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and caresure warning light blinks 3 
times.
■Initialization procedure
●Make sure to carry out initializa-
tion after adjusting the tire inflation 
pressure.Also, make sure the tires are cold 
before carrying out initialization or 
tire inflation pressure adjustment.
●If you have accidentally turned the 
engine switch off during initializa-tion, it is not necessary to press 
the reset switch again as initializa-
tion will restart aut omatically when 
the engine switch to ON for the 
next time.
●If initialization has accidentally been started when it is not neces-
sary, adjust the tire inflation pres-sure to the specif ied level when 
the tires are cold, and then per-form the initialization procedure again.
■When initialization of the tire 
pressure warning system has 
failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the follow-ing cases, the set tings have not 
been recorded an d the system will 
not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pres-sure settings are unsuccessful, 
have the vehicle inspected by your 
●When attempting to start initializa-tion, the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times.●After driving for a certain period of time since the initialization has 
been completed, the warning light 
comes on after bl inking for 1 min-
ute.
The tire pressure warning valve 
and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replac-ing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code registered by your Toy-ota dealer.
Your vehicle is equipped with 
tire pressure warning system with the function to have ID codes registered for a second wheel set, for example a winter set, by Toyota dealer.
After registration of a second 
wheel set, either of these two wheel sets can be selected for usage with the tire pressure warning system.WARNING
■When initializing the tire pres-
sure warning system
Do not initialize the tire pressure warning system without first adjusting the tire inflation pres-sure to the specified level. Other-
wise, the tire pressure warning 
light may not come on even if the 
tire inflation press ure is low, or it 
may come on when the tire infla-tion pressure is actually normal.
Registering ID codes
Selecting wheel set

452 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_U■Operating conditions for 
the function
This function will perform the change of wheel set only if a second wheel set has been registered. If no second wheel set has been registered, no change will be made when selecting this function in the menu.
Only a change between both registered wheel set is possi-ble, mixing between these wheel sets is not supported.
■How to change between wheel sets
1Have the vehicle fitted with the preferred wheel set.
press .
4Press  or  to select 
“Change Wheel”. Then press 
and hold until the tire pressure warning light blinks 
slowly 3 times.
6Initialize the tire pressure warning system. ( P.450)

453 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and careThe recommended cold tire 
inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading information label. (P.531)
Tire valveTire pressure gauge
1Remove the tire valve cap.
2Press the tip of the tire pres-sure gauge onto the tire valve.
3Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.
4If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure.If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.
5After completing the tire infla-tion pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
6Put the tire valve cap back on.
■Tire inflation pressure check 
interval
You should check ti re inflation pres-
sure every two week s, or at least 
once a month. Do not forget to 
check the spare.
■Effects of incorrect tire inflation 
pressure
Driving with incorrec t tire inflation 
pressure may resul t in the following:
●Reduced fuel economy
●Reduced driving comfort and poor 
handling
●Reduced tire life due to wear
●Reduced safety
●Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota 
dealer.Tire inflation pressure
Checking the specified 
tire inflation pressure
Inspection and adjust-
ment procedure

454 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_U■Instructions for checking tire 
inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pres-sure, observe the following:
●Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for 
at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more tha n 1 mile or 1.5 
km, you will get an  accurate cold 
tire inflation pressure reading.
●Always use a tire pressure gauge.It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its 
appearance.
●It is normal for th e tire inflation 
pressure to be higher after driving 
as heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure 
after driving.
●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehi-
cle is balanced.
WARNING
■Proper inflation is critical to 
save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated.
If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions 
may occur which could lead to an 
accident resulting in death or seri-ous injury:
●Excessive wear
●Uneven wear
●Poor handling
●Possibility of blowouts resulting 
from overheated tires
●Air leaking from between tire 
and wheel
●Wheel deformation and/or tire damage●Greater possibi lity of tire dam-
age while driving (due to road hazards, expansion joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.)
NOTICE
■When inspecting and adjust-ing tire infla tion pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.If a valve cap is no t installed, dirt 
or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.

455 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and careWhen replacing wheels, care 
should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diam-
eter, rim width and inset
*.
Replacement wheels are avail-
able at your Toyota dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as off-
set.
Toyota does not recommend using the following:
Wheels of different sizes or 
types
Used wheels
Bent wheels that have been straightened
■When replacing wheels (vehi-
cles with a tire pressure warn-ing system)
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning 
valves and transmit ters that allow 
the tire pressure warning system to 
provide advance warning in the 
event of a loss in tire inflation pres-
sure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning 
valves and transmitters must be 
installed. ( P.449)Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or 
heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.
Wheel selectionWARNING
■When replacing wheels
●Do not use wheels that are a dif-
ferent size from  those recom-
mended in the Owner’s Manual, 
as this may result in a loss of 
handling control.
●Never use an inner tube in a 
leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.Doing so may result in an acci-
dent, causing death or serious 
injury.
■When installing the wheel nuts
●Be sure to install the wheel nuts with the tapered ends facing 
inward. Installing  the nuts with 
the tapered ends facing outward 
can cause the wheel to break 
and eventually cause the wheel 
to come off while driving, which could lead to an accident result-
Tapered portion
●Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively 
tightened, leading to bolt or disc 
wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the 
wheel nuts to loosen and the 
wheel may fall off, causing an accident and resulting in death 
or serious injury. Remove any 
oil or grease fr om the wheel 
bolts or wheel nuts.

456 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_UUse only Toyota wheel nuts 
and wheel nut wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels.
When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.
Use only Toyota genuine bal-ance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber ham-mer when balancing your wheels.
WARNING
■Use of defective wheels pro-
hibited
Do not use cracked or deformed wheels. Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, pos-
NOTICE
■Replacing tire pressure warn-
ing valves and transmitters 
(vehicles with a  tire pressure 
warning system)
●Because tire repair or replace-
ment may affect  the tire pres-
sure warning valves and 
transmitters, make sure to have 
tires serviced by your Toyota dealer or other qualified service 
shop. In addition, make sure to 
purchase your tire pressure warning valves  and transmit-
ters at your Toyota dealer.
●Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehi-cle.Tire pressure warning valves 
and transmitters may not work 
properly with non-genuine wheels.
Aluminum wheel precau-
tions (if equipped)

457 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and care1Turn the engine switch off.
2Open the glove box. Slide off 
the damper (if equipped).
3Push in the glove box on the vehicle’s outer side to discon-nect the claws. Then pull out the glove box and disconnect the lower claws.
4Unlock the filter cover ( ), pull the filter cover out of the claws ( ), and remove the filter cover.
5Remove the filter case.
6Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and replace it with a new one.
The “ UP” marks shown on the 
filter and the filter case should be 
pointing up.
■Checking interval
Replace the air conditioning filter 
according to the maintenance 
schedule. In dusty areas or areas 
with heavy traffic fl ow, early replace-Air condition ing filter
The air conditioning filter 
must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.
Removing the air condi-
tioning filter

458 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_Ument may be required. (For sched-
uled maintenance information, 
please refer to the “Scheduled 
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
■If air flow from the vents 
decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.*: If equipped
■If the key battery is depleted 
The following symptoms may occur:
●The smart key system (if equipped) and wireless remote 
control will no t function properly.
●The operationa l range will be 
reduced.
Flathead screwdriver
Small flathead screwdriver
Lithium battery CR2032
■Use a CR2032 lithium battery
●Batteries can be purchased at 
your Toyota dealer, local electrical 
appliance shops or camera stores.
●Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
●Dispose of used batteries accord-ing to local laws.NOTICE
■When using the air condition-ing system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.Using the air conditioning system 
without a filter may cause damage 
to the system.
■To prevent damage to the fil-ter cover
When moving the filter cover in the direction of arrow to release 
the fitting, pay attention not to 
apply excessive force to the claws. Otherwise, the claws may 
be damaged.Wireless remote con-
trol/electronic key bat-tery
*
Replace the battery with a 
new one if it is depleted.As the key may be damaged if the following procedure is not performed properly, it is recommended that key bat-tery replacement be per-formed by your Toyota dealer.
Items to prepare

459 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and careVehicles without a smart key 
system
1Remove the key cover.
To prevent damage to the key, 
cover the tip of the flathead screw-
driver with a rag.
2Remove the battery cover.
If the battery cover is difficult to 
remove, lift the ed ge to remove it.
3Remove the depleted battery 
using a small flathead screw-driver.
Insert a new battery with the “+” ter-minal facing up.
4Install the battery cover with the tab facing up.
Push the entire edge of the battery 
cover into the key.
5Install the key cover.
Align the key co ver with the key 
and then press it straight into the 
key.
Make sure that the key cover is 
securely installed without any gaps between it and the key.
6Operate the  or  switch 
and check that the doors can 
be locked/unlocked.Replacing the battery

460 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_UVehicles with a smart key sys-
tem
1Release the lock and remove the mechanical key.
2Remove the key cover.
When removing the cover, the elec-
tronic key module may stick to the 
cover and the battery may not be 
visible. In this case, remove the electronic key module in order to 
remove the battery.
4When installing the key cover 
and mechanical key, install by conducting step 2 and 
step 1 with the directions reversed.
5Operate the  or  switch 
be locked/unlocked.
WARNING
■Removed battery and other 
parts
These parts are small and if swal-lowed by a child, they can cause 
choking. Keep away from chil-
dren. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■When replacing the battery
Use a flathead screwdriver of appropriate size. Applying exces-sive force may deform or damage 
the cover.
■For normal operation after 
replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
●Always work with dry hands.Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

461 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
2Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment: type A 
fuse box
Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.
Engine compartment: type B fuse box
Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.NOTICE
●Do not touch or move any other 
component inside the remote control.
●Do not bend either of the battery 
terminals.
■When removing the battery 
cover (vehicles without a smart key system)
Do not forcibly remove the battery cover, otherwise it may be dam-aged.
remove, lift the edge to remove it.Checking a nd replac-
ing fuses
If any of the electrical com-
ponents do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
fuses

462 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_UUnder the driver’s side instru-
ment panel
Remove the lid.
Make sure to push the claw when 
removing/installing the lid.
3Remove the fuse with the 
pullout tool.Only type A fuse can be removed using the pullout tool.
4Check if the fuse is blown.
Replace the blown fuse with a new 
fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be 
found on the fuse box lid.Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Type B
Blown fuse
Type C
Normal fuseBlown fuse

463 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and careType D
Blown fuse
Type E
Blown fuse
■After a fuse is replaced
●When installing the lid, make sure 
that the tab is installed securely.
●If the lights do n ot turn on even 
after the fuse has  been replaced, 
a bulb may need replacement. (P.464)
●If the replaced fuse blows again, 
have the vehicle inspected by 
■If there is an overload in a cir-cuit
The fuses are designed to blow, pro-tecting the wiring harness from 
damage.■When replacing light bulbs
Toyota recommends that you use 
genuine Toyota pr oducts designed 
for this vehicle.
Because certain bulbs are con-
nected to circuits designed to pre-vent overload, non-genuine parts of 
parts not designed for this vehicle 
may be unusable.
WARNING
■To prevent system break-downs and vehicle fire
Failure to do so may cause dam-
age to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.
●Never use a fuse of a higher 
amperage rating than that indi-
cated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.
●Always use a genuine Toyota 
fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
●Do not modify the fuses or fuse 
boxes.
NOTICE
■Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical over-
load determined and repaired by 
your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

464 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_UCheck the wattage of the light 
bulb to be replaced. ( P.533)
■Front
Front side marker lights
Front turn signal/parking 
lights (vehicles without side turn signal lights)■Rear
Rear turn signal lights
Rear side marker lights (bulb 
type)
■Bulbs that need to be replaced by your Toyota dealer
Headlights/daytime running lights
Parking lights (vehicles with side turn signal lights)
Front turn signal lights (vehi-cles with side turn signal lights)
LED accent lights (if equipped)
Side turn signal lights (if equipped)
Tail lights
Stop lights
Rear side marker lights (LED type)
High mounted stoplight
License plate lightsLight bulbs
You may replace the follow-ing bulbs yourself. The diffi-culty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Toyota dealer.
Preparing for light bulb 
replacement
Bulb locations

465 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and care■LED light bulbs
The lights other th an the front turn 
signal lights/parking lights (vehicles 
without side turn sig nal lights), front 
side marker lights, rear turn signal 
lights, rear side marker lights (bulb 
type) and back-up lights consist of a 
number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your 
Toyota dealer to have the light 
replaced.
■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
In certain situatio ns, such as when 
driving in the rain or when washing 
the vehicle, condensation may form 
on the inner side of the headlight lens and other li ghts. As each light 
has a ventilation hole, moist air may enter. If the ambient temperature is low, condensation may form tempo-
rarily, but it will di ssipate as the 
inside of the light i s warmed up. As 
the condensation is due to a phe-nomenon similar to windows fogging 
in the rain, it doe s not indicate a 
Contact your Toyota dealer for more 
information in the  following situa-
tions:
●Large drops of water have built up 
on the inside of the lens.
●Water has built up inside the 
headlight.
■When replacing light bulbs
P.463
■Front turn signal/parking 
lights (vehicles without side turn signal lights)
1Turn the bulb base counter-clockwise.Type A
Type B
2Remove the light bulb.
Type A
Replacing light bulbs

466 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_UType B
3When installing, reverse the 
steps listed.
■Front side marker lights
1Turn the bulb base counter-clockwise.
3When installing, reverse the steps listed.■Rear turn signal lights and rear side marker lights (vehicles with blub type rear side marker lights)
1Open the trunk lid.
2Insert a flathead screwdriver between the cover and the light assembly and pry up the cover to disengage the claws (indicated by a dotted line).
To prevent scratching the vehicle, 
wrap the tip of th e flathead screw-
driver with a cloth, etc.
3Pull the cover toward the rear 
of the vehicle and remove the cover.

467 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and care4Remove the 2 screws and 
then remove the light assem-bly by pulling it straight back.
5Turn the bulb base counter-clockwise.
Rear side marker lights
6Remove the light bulb.
7When installing the light bulb, 
install it by conducting steps 6 and 5 with the directions reversed.
8Install the light assembly and then install the 2 screws.
Align the guide  and pin  on 
the light assembl y with the mount-
ing when installing it.
9Install the cover.
■Rear turn signal lights 
(vehicles with LED type rear side marker lights)

468 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_U3Pull the cover toward the rear 
4Remove the 2 screws and then remove the light assem-bly by pulling it straight back.
5Turn the bulb base counter-clockwise.6Remove the light bulb.
7When installing the light bulb, install it by conducting steps 6 and 5 with the directions reversed.

469 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_U7Maintenance and care■Back-up lights
1Open the trunk lid, remove 
the clips, and pull back the cover.
2Turn the bulb base counter-clockwise and remove it.
3Remove the light bulb.
4When installing, reverse the steps listed.WARNING
■Replacing light bulbs
●Turn off the lights. Do not 
attempt to replace the bulb 
immediately after turning off the lights. The bulbs become very 
hot and may cause burns.
●Do not touch the glass portion 
of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use 
and hold with a clean dry cloth 
to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb. Also, if the bulb 
is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
●Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Fail-
ure to do so may result in heat 
damage, fire, or water entering the light unit. This may damage 
the lights or cause condensa-
tion to build up on the lens.
■To prevent damage or fire 
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

470 7-3. Do-it-yours elf maintenance
COROLLA_U

471
COROLLA_U8
8When trouble arisesWhen trouble arises
.8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers .... 472
If your vehicle has to be 
stopped in an emergency
.................................. 472
If the vehicle is trapped in 
rising water................ 474
8-2. Steps to take in an emer-
gency
If your vehicle needs to be 
towed......................... 475
If you think something is 
wrong ........................ 479
.................................. 480
If a warning light turns on or 
a warning buzzer sounds
.................................. 481
played........................ 490
If you have a flat tire (vehi-
cles without spare tire)
.................................. 493
cles with a spare tire)
.................................. 503
If the engine will not start
.................................. 511
If you lose your keys ... 513
If the electronic key does 
not operate properly.. 513
charged ..................... 515If your vehicle overheats
.................................. 519
If the vehicle becomes stuck
.................................. 521

472 8-1. Essential information
COROLLA_U8-1.Essential information
All the turn signal lights will flash.
To turn them off, press the switch 
once again.
■Emergency flashers
●If the emergency flashers are 
used for a long time while the engine is not op erating, the bat-
tery may discharge.
●If any of the SRS airbags deploy 
rear impact, the emergency flash-ers will turn on automatically. 
The emergency flashers will turn off automatically after operating for approximately 20 minutes. To manually turn t he emergency 
flashers off, press the switch twice. (The emergency flashers may not 
turn on automatically depending 
on the force of the impact and conditions of the collision.)1Steadily step on the brake 
pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal 
repeatedly as this will increase the 
effort required to slow the vehicle.
2Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
3After slowing down, stop the 
vehicle in a safe place by the road.
4Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
3Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.
4Vehicles without a smart key system: Stop the engine by Emergency flashers
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped on the road due to a breakdown, etc.
Operating instructionsIf your vehicle has to 
be stopped in an emer-gency
Only in an emergency, such 
as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following proce-dure:
Stopping the vehicle

473 8-1. Essential information
COROLLA_U8When trouble arisesturning the engine switch to 
ACC.
4Vehicles with a smart key system: To stop the engine, press and hold the engine switch for 2 consecutive sec-onds or more, or press it briefly 3 times or more in suc-cession.
5Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
WARNING
■If the engine has to be turned 
off while driving
●Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, mak-
ing the brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel 
heavier to turn. Decelerate as 
much as possible before turning off the engine.●Vehicles without a smart key 
system: Never attempt to 
remove the key, as doing so will lock the steering wheel.

474 8-1. Essential information
COROLLA_URemove the seat belt first.
If the door can be opened, 
open the door and exit the vehicle.
If the door can not be opened, open the window using the power window switch and exit the vehicle through the win-dow.
If the window can not be opened using the power win-dow switch, remain calm, wait 
until the water level inside the 
vehicle rises to the point that the water pressure inside of the vehicle equals the water pressure outside of the vehi-cle, and then open the door and exit the vehicle.If the vehicle is 
trapped in rising water
In the event the vehicle is 
submerged in water, remain calm and perform the fol-lowing.WARNING
■Using an emergency hammer* 
for emergency escape
The front side windows and rear 
side windows, as well as the rear 
window can be shattered with an 
emergency hammer* used for 
emergency escape. However, an emergency hammer
* can not 
shatter the windshi eld as it is lam-
inated glass.
*: Contact your Toyota dealer or 
aftermarket accessory manu-
facturer for furt her information 
about an emergency hammer.
■Escaping the vehicle from the 
window
There are cases where escaping the vehicle from the window is not 
possible due to seating position, 
passenger body type, etc. When using an emergency ham-
mer, consider your seat location 
and the size of the window open-ing to ensure that the opening is 
accessible and large enough to 
escape.

475 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arises8-2.Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs 
to be towed
If towing is necessary, we 
recommend having your vehicle towed by your Toy-ota dealer or commercial towing service, using a wheel-lift type truck or flat-bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.
WARNING
tions.
■When towing the vehicle
Be sure to transport the vehicle with the front wh eels raised or 
with all four wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is towed with the front wh eels contacting 
the ground, the drivetrain and related parts may be damaged.■While towing
●When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. 
which place excessive stress on 
the towing eyelets, cables or chains. The towing eyelets, 
cables or chains may become 
damaged, broken debris may hit people, and cause serious dam-
age.
●Do not turn the engine switch 
off.There is a possi bility that the 
steering wheel is locked and cannot be operated.
■Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing 
eyelets may come loose during towing.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the vehicle when t owing using a 
wheel-lift type truck
●Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the engine switch is 
off. The steering lock mecha-
nism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.
●When raising the vehicle, 
ensure adequate ground clear-
ance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. With-
out adequate cl earance, the 
vehicle could be damaged while 
being towed.
vehicle when towing with a 
sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

476 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_UThe following may indicate a 
problem with your transmission. Contact your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service before towing.
The engine is running but the 
The vehicle makes an abnor-mal sound.
Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage.From the front
Release the parking brake.
From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.
If your vehicle is transported by 
a flatbed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration.NOTICE
vehicle during emergency towing
Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components.
Situations when it is nec-
essary to contact dealers 
before towing
Towing with a sling-type 
truckTowing with a wheel-lift 
type truck
Using a flatbed truck

477 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arisesIf you use chains or cables to tie 
down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45°.
Do not overly tighten the tie 
downs or the vehicle may be damaged.
If a tow truck is not available in 
an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency towing eyelets. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for at most 
50 miles (80 km) at under 18 
mph (30 km/h).A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
For vehicles with a continuously 
variable transmission, only the front towing eyelets may be used.
1Take out the towing eyelet. 
(P.494, 504)
2Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver.
To protect the b odywork, place a 
rag between the screwdriver and 
the vehicle body  as shown in the 
illustration.
engine
Emergency towing (vehi-
cles with a towing eyelet)Emergency towing proce-
dure (vehicles with a tow-ing eyelet)

478 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U2.0 L 4-cylinder (M20A-FKS) 
engine
3Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.
4Tighten down the towing eye-let securely using a wheel nut wrench or hard metal bar.
5Securely attach cables or chains to the towing eyelet.Take care not to damage the vehi-
cle body.
6Enter the vehicle being towed 
and start the engine.
If the engine does not start, turn the 
engine switch to ON.
7Shift the shift lever to N and 
release the parking brake.Continuously variable trans-mission: When the shift lever cannot be shifted:  P.154
■While towing (veh icles with a 
towing eyelet)
If the engine is not running, the 
power assist for the brakes and 
steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
■Wheel nut wrench (vehicles 
with a towing eyelet)
Wheel nut wrench is installed in 
trunk. (P.504)

479 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arisesFluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is nor-mal.)
Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal.
Changes in exhaust sound
Excessive tire squeal when cornering
Strange noises related to the suspension system
Pinging or other noises related to the engine
Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
Appreciable loss of power
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor
If you think something 
is wrong
If you notice any of the fol-
lowing symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Con-tact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
Visible symptoms
Audible symptoms
Operational symptoms

480 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_UFollow the procedure below to 
restart the engine after the sys-tem is activated.
1Turn the engine switch to 
ACC or OFF.
2Restart the engine.Fuel pump shut off 
system
To minimize the risk of fuel 
leakage when the engine stalls or when an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops the supply of fuel to the engine.
Restarting the engine
NOTICE
■Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the 
vehicle.If you find that fuel has leaked 
onto the ground, the fuel system 
has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the 
engine.

481 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arises■Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)
■Brake system warning light
■High coolant temperature warning light* (warning buzzer)
*: This light illuminat es on the multi-information display.If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer 
sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning 
lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but  
then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction  
in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Actions to the warning lights or warning buzzers
Warning light Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)
or
(Red)
(Canada)Indicates that:
The brake fluid level is low; or
The brake system is malfunctioning
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-tact your Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive the vehi-cle may be dangerous.
(Yellow)Indicates a malfunction i n the parking brake system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Indicates that the engine c oolant temperature is exces-
sively high
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Handling method ( P.519)

482 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U■Charging system warning light
■Low engine oil pressure warning light* (warning buzzer)
*: This light illuminat es on the multi-information display.
■Malfunction indicator lamp (warning buzzer)
■SRS warning light (warning buzzer)Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is excessively low
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-tact your Toyota dealer.
(U.S.A.)
or
(Canada)Indicates a malfunction in:The electronic engine control system;
The electronic throttle  control system; or
The electronic continuousl y variable transmission (if 
equipped) control system
Indicates a malfunction in:The SRS airb ag system;
The front passenger occupan t classification system; or
The seat belt pretensioner system

483 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arises■ABS warning light
■Brake Override System warning light/Drive-Start Control 
warning light* (warning buzzer)
*: This light illuminat es on the multi-information display.Warning light Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)
or
(Canada)Indicates a malfunction in:
The ABS; or
The brake assist system
When a buzzer sounds:
Indicates a malfunction in:
The Brake Override System; or
The Drive-Start Control (if equipped)
Indicates that the shift position was changed and 
Drive-Start Control (if equ ipped) was operated while 
depressing the accelerator pedal.
Momentarily release the accelerator pedal.
When a buzzer does not sound:
Indicates that the accelerator and brake pedals are being 
depressed simultaneously, and  the Brake Override System 
is operating.
Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake 
pedal.

484 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U■Electric power steering system warning light (warning 
buzzer)
■Low fuel level warning light
■Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warn-ing buzzer)
*
*: Driver’s seat bel t warning buzzer:
The driver’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to a lert the drive r that his or 
her seat belt is not fastened. O nce the engine switch is turned  to ON, the 
buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 
km/h), the buzzer soun ds once. If th e seat belt is still unfast ened after 24 
seconds, the buzzer will sound inte rmittently for 6 seconds. Th en, if the 
seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a diffe rent tone for 90 
more seconds.
Front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer:The front passenger’s seat belt w arning buzzer sounds to alert the front 
passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer  sounds once 
if the vehicle reaches a speed o f 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still 
unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittent ly for 6 sec-Warning light Details/Actions
(Red)
or
(Yellow)Indicates a malfunction in th e EPS (Electric Power Steer-
ing) system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer 
Indicates that remaining fuel is  approximately 2 gal. (7.5 L, 
1.6 Imp. gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat 
belts
Fasten the seat belt. 
If the front passenger’s se at is occupied, the front 
passenger’s seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (w arning buzzer) turn off.

485 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arisesonds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer wi ll sound in a dif-
ferent tone for 90 more seconds.
■Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights (warning buzzer)*
*: Rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer:
The rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert t he rear pas-
sengers that his or her seat bel t is not fastened. If any rear seat belt is fas-
tened and then unfasten ed, the rear passengers' seat belt remin der light 
will illuminate for that seat. While illuminated, if the vehicl e reaches a speed 
of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer will sound once. If the seat be lt is still 
unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittent ly for 6 sec-
onds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer wi ll sound in a dif-
ferent tone for 30 more seconds.
■Tire pressure warning light
■LTA indicator/LDA indicator (warning buzzer)Warning light Details/Actions
Warns the rear passengers  to fasten their seat belts
Fasten the seat belt.
(if equipped)When the light comes on after blinking for approximately 1 
minute:
Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system
Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation  pressure such as
Natural causes
Flat tire
Handling method ( P.488)
(Orange)Indicates a malfunction in the LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) or LDA (Lane Departure Aler t with steering control)
Follow the instructions di splayed on the multi-infor-
mation display. ( P.204, 212)

486 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U■PCS warning light
■Slip indicator
■Parking brake indicatorWarning light Details/Actions
(Flashes or illu-
minates)When a buzzer sounds simultaneously:
Indicates a malfunction has occurred in the PCS (Pre-Colli-
sion System).
If a buzzer does not sound:
The PCS (Pre-Collision System) has become temporarily 
unavailable, corrective action may be necessary.
mation display. ( P.185)
If the PCS (Pre-Collision Syst em) or VSC (Vehicle Stability 
Control) system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illu-
minate.P.194
The VSC system;
The TRAC system; or
The hill-start assist control system
(Flashes)
(U.S.A.) 
or
(Flashes)
(Canada)It is possible that the parking  brake is not fully engaged or 
released
Operate the parking brake once again.
This light comes on when the parking brake is not released. 
If the light turns of f after the parking brake is fully release d, 
the system is operating normally.

487 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arises■Brake hold operated indicator
■iMT indicator
■Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not 
be heard due to being in a noisy 
location or audio sound.
■Front passenger detection sen-sor, seat belt reminder and 
warning buzzer
●If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passen-
ger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the 
warning buzzer to sound even if a 
passenger is not sitting in the seat.
●If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may n ot detect a pas-
senger, and the warning light may not operate properly.
■Operation of rear passengers’ seat belt re minder lights
●The rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights will illuminate for 
approximately 60 seconds after 
either rear door has been opened and closed.
●If any rear seat be lt is fastened 
and then unfastened, the corre-sponding light for that seat will illu-
minate continuously. If either rear 
door is opened and closed while a rear passengers’ seat belt light is illuminated, it will tu rn off approxi-
mately 60 seconds after the door is closed.
■SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors, side impact sensors 
(front door), side  impact sensors 
(front), side impact sensors (rear), 
driver’s seat position sensor, 
driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front 
passenger occupan t classification 
system (ECU and sensors), “AIR 
BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG 
OFF” indicator light, seat belt pre-tensioners, airbags, interconnecting 
wiring and power sources. ( P.29)
■If the malfunction indicator 
lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
●Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
●Is the fuel ta nk cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after 
several trips, con tact your Toyota 
dealer as soon as possible.Warning light Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(if equipped)Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system
(Orange)
(if equipped)Indicates a malfunction in the iMT

488 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U■Electric power steering system 
warning light (warning buzzer)
When the battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporar-
ily drops, the electric power steering 
system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound.
■When the tire pressure warning 
light comes on (vehicles with a 
tire pressure warning system)
Inspect the tires to check if a tire is punctured.
If a tire is punctured: P.493, 503
If none of the tires are punctured:
Turn the engine switch off then turn 
it to ON. Check if the tire pressure 
warning light comes on or blinks.
If the tire pressure warning light blinks for approxi mately 1 minute 
then stays on
There may be a malfunction in the 
tire pressure warning system. Have 
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
If the tire pressure warning light comes on
1After the temperature of the tires 
has lowered sufficiently, check 
the inflation pressure of each tire and adjust them to the specified 
level.
2If the warning light does not turn 
off even after several minutes have elapsed, check that the 
inflation pressure  of each tire is 
at the specified level and perform 
initialization. ( P.450)
■The tire pressure warning light 
may come on due to natural 
causes (vehicles  with a tire 
pressure warning system)
The tire pressure warning light may 
come on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks and tire inflation 
pressure changes caused by tem-
perature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the 
warning light (afte r a few minutes).■When a tire is replaced with a 
spare tire (vehicles with a tire 
Vehicles with a co mpact spare tire: 
The compact spare tire is not 
equipped with a tire pressure warn-ing valve and tran smitter. If a tire 
goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the 
spare tire. Replac e the spare tire 
with the repaired tire and adjust the 
tire inflation pressure. The tire pres-
sure warning light will go off after a 
few minutes.
■Conditions that the tire pres-sure warning system may not 
function properly (vehicles with 
a tire pressure warning system)
P.447
WARNING
■If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Toy-
ota dealer.
The vehicle will become extremely unstable during brak-
ing, and the ABS system may fail, 
which could cause an accident resulting in death o r serious injury.
■When the electric power 
steering system warning light 
comes on
When the light comes on yellow, the assist to the power steering is restricted. When the light comes 
on red, the assis t to the power 
steering is lost and handling oper-
ations of the steering wheel 
become extremely heavy.
When steering wheel operations are heavier than usual, grip the 
steering wheel firmly and operate 
it using more fo rce than usual.

489 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arisesWARNING
■If the tire pressure warning 
light comes on (vehicles with a tire pressure warning sys-
tem)
Be sure to observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result 
●Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the 
tire inflation pressure immedi-ately.
●Vehicles with a compact spare 
tire: If the tire pr essure warning 
light comes on ev en after tire 
inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat 
tire. Check the ti res. If a tire is 
flat, change it with the spare tire 
and have the flat tire repaired by 
the nearest Toy ota dealer.
●Vehicles with emergency tire puncture repair kit: If the tire 
pressure warning light comes 
on even after tire inflation pres-sure adjustment, it is probable 
that you have a flat tire. Check 
the tires. If a tire is flat, repair the flat tire by using emergency 
tire puncture repair kit.
●Avoid abrupt maneuvering and 
braking.If the vehicle tires deteriorate, 
you could lose control of the 
steering wheel or the brakes.
■If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur (vehi-
cles with a tire pressure warn-
ing system)
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.■Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, includi ng the spare (if 
provided), should be checked 
monthly when cold and inflated to 
the inflation pressure recom-mended by the vehicle manufac-
turer on the vehicle placard or tire 
inflation pressure  label (tire and 
load information label). (If your 
vehicle has tires of a different size 
than the size in dicated on the 
vehicle placard or tire inflation 
pressure label [tire and load infor-
mation label], you should deter-mine the proper tire inflation 
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your 
vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system 
(TPMS-tire pressure warning sys-
tem) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure 
warning light) w hen one or more 
of your tires is significantly 
under-inflated. Accordingly, when 
the low tire pressure telltale (tire 
pressure warning light) illumi-nates, you should stop and check 
your tires as soon as possible, 
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflat ed tire causes 
the tire to overhea t and can lead 
to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire 
tread life, and may affect the vehi-
cle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire 
pressure warning system) is not a 
substitute for proper tire mainte-nance, and it is the driver’s 
responsibility to m aintain correct 
tire pressure, even  if under-infla-
tion has not reached the level to 
trigger illuminati on of the TPMS 
low tire pressure te lltale (tire pres-
sure warning light).

490 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U■Warning messages
The warning messages explained 
below may differ from the actual 
messages according to operation conditions and vehicle specifica-
tions.
A buzzer may sound when a mes-sage is displayed. 
The buzzer may not be audible if the vehicle is in a noisy location or if the 
audio system volume is high.
■If “Engine Oil Level Low Add or 
Replace” is displayed
The engine oil level is low. Check WARNING
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pres-sure warning system) malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the 
system is not opera ting properly. 
The TPMS (tire pressure warning 
system) malfunction indicator is 
combined with th e low tire pres-
sure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a 
malfunction, the telltale will flash 
for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi-
nated. This sequence will con-
tinue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu minated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or 
signal low tire pressure as 
intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning sys-
tem) malfunctions may occur for a 
variety of reasons, including the 
installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the 
vehicle that prevent the TPMS 
(tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always 
check the TPMS (tire pressure 
warning system) malfunction tell-
tale after replacing one or more 
tires or wheels on your vehicle to 
ensure that the r eplacement or 
alternate tires and wheels allow 
the TPMS (tire pressure warning 
system) to continue to function properly.
NOTICE
■To ensure the tire pressure 
warning system operates properly (vehicles with a tire 
Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the 
tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.If a warning message 
is displayed
The multi-information dis-
play shows warnings for system malfunctions and incorrectly performed oper-ations, and messages that indicate a need for mainte-nance. When a message is displayed, perform the appropriate corrective action for the message.
If a warning message is dis-played again after the appropriate actions have been performed, contact your Toyota dealer.
Additionally, if a warning light comes on or flashes at 
the same time that a warn-
ing message is displayed, take the appropriate correc-tive action for the warning light. (P.481)

491 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arisesthe level of the engine oil, and add if 
This message may appear if the 
vehicle is stopped on a slope. Move 
the vehicle to a level surface and 
check to see if the message disap-pears.
■If “Engine Stopped Steering 
Power Low” is displayed
This message is displayed if the engine is stopped while driving.
When steering wheel operations are 
heavier than usual, grip the steering 
wheel firmly and operate it using more force th an usual.
■If “Auto Power OFF to Conserve 
Battery” is displayed
Power was cut off due to the auto-matic power off function. Next time 
when starting the engine, increase the engine speed slightly and main-
tain that level for  approximately 5 
minutes to recha rge the battery.
■If “Headlight System Malfunc-
tion Visit Your Dealer” is dis-
played
The following systems may be mal-functioning. Have the vehicle 
●The LED headlight system
●AFS (Adaptive Fr ont-lighting Sys-
tem) (if equipped)
●The automatic headlight leveling system (if equipped)
●Automatic High Beam
■If “Front Camera Unavailable” or “Front Camera Unavailable See Owner’s Manual” is dis-
played
The following sys tems may be sus-
pended until the pr oblem shown in 
the message is resolved. ( P.185, 
481)
●PCS (Pre-Collision system)
●LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if equipped)●LDA (Lane Departure Alert with 
●RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped)
●Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range (if equipped)
●Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped)
■If “Radar Cruise Control Unavailable See Owner's Man-
ual” is displayed
The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range system or 
dynamic radar cruise control system is suspended temporarily or until the 
problem shown in  the message is 
resolved. (causes and coping meth-
ods: P.185)
■If “Radar Cruise Control 
Unavailable” is displayed
dynamic radar cruise control system cannot be used temporarily. Use the 
system when it becomes available 
again.
■If “Maintenance Required Soon” is displayed
Indicates that all maintenance according to the driven distance on 
the maintenance schedule
* should 
be performed soon.
Comes on approximately 4500 
miles (7200 km) after the message 
has been reset. If necessary, per-
form maintenance. Please reset the 
message after the maintenance is 
performed. ( P.428)
*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled 
Maintenance” or “Owner’s Man-
ual Supplement”  for the mainte-
nance interval applicable to your 
vehicle.
■If “Maintenance Required Visit 
Your Dealer” is displayed
Indicates that all maintenance is 

492 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_Urequired to correspond to the driven 
distance on the maintenance sched-
ule*.
Comes on approximately 5000 
miles (8000 km) after the message 
has been reset. (The indicator will 
not work properly unless the mes-sage has been reset.) Perform the 
necessary maintenance. Please 
reset the message after the mainte-
nance is performed. ( P.428)
ual Supplement” for the mainte-nance interval applicable to your vehicle.
■If a message that indicates the 
need for visiting your Toyota dealer is displayed
The system or part shown on the multi-information di splay is malfunc-
tioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
■If a message that indicates the need for referring to Owner’s Manual is displayed
●If “Engine Coolant Temp High” is displayed, follow the instructions 
accordingly. ( P.519)
●If any of the following messages 
are displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display, it  may indicate a 
malfunction. Have the vehicle 
inspected by you r Toyota dealer 
• “Smart Key System Malfunction”
malfunction. Immediately stop the 
vehicle and contact your Toyota 
dealer.
•“ B r a k i n g  Power Low”
• “Charging System Malfunction”• “Oil Pressure Low”NOTICE
■If “High Power Consumption 
Partial Limit on AC/Heater Operation” is displayed fre-
quently
There is a possible malfunction relating to the charging system or 
the battery may be deteriorating. Have the vehicle inspected by 

493 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arises
Stop the vehicle in a safe 
place on a hard, flat surface.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P (con-tinuously variable transmis-sion) or N (manual transmission).
Stop the engine.
Turn on the emergency flash-ers.
Check the degree of the tire damage.
A tire should only be repaired with the emergency tire punc-ture repair kit if the damage is caused by a nail or screw pass-ing through the tire tread.• Do not remove the nail or 
screw from the tire. Removing the object may widen the opening and make emer-gency repair with the repair kit impossible.
• To avoid sealant leakage, 
move the vehicle until the area of the puncture, if known, is positioned at the top of the tire.
■A flat tire that cannot be 
repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit
In the following cases, the tire can-not be repaired with the emergency 
tire puncture repair kit. Contact your 
Toyota dealer.If you have a flat tire 
(vehicles without spare tire)
Your vehicle is not equipped 
with a spare tire, but instead is equipped with an emer-gency tire puncture repair kit.
A puncture caused by a nail or screw passing through the tire tread can be repaired temporarily using the emergency tire puncture repair kit. (The kit contains a bottle of sealant. The seal-ant can be used only once to temporarily repair one tire without removing the nail or screw from the tire.) After temporarily repairing the tire with the kit, have the tire repaired or replaced by your Toyota dealer.
WARNING
■If you have a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat 
tire.Driving even a short distance with 
a flat tire can damage the tire and 
the wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.
Before repairing the tire

494 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U●When the tire is damaged due to 
driving without sufficient air pres-
sure
●When there are any cracks or damage at any location on the 
tire, such as on  the side wall, 
except the tread
●When the tire is visibly separated from the wheel
●When the cut or damage to the tread is 0.16 in. (4 mm) long or more
●When the wheel is damaged
●When 2 or more tires have been 
punctured
●When 2 or more sharp objects such as nails or screws have 
passed through the tread on a sin-gle tire
●When the sealant has expired
Emergency tire puncture repair kit
Towing eyelet
Bottle
HoseAir release capLocation of the emergency ti re puncture repair kit and 
towing eyelet
Emergency tire puncture 
repair kit components

495 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arisesSticker
Compressor
Power plug
Rubber stopperAir pressure gaugeCompressor switch
■Note for checking the emer-
gency tire puncture repair kit
Check the sealant expiry date occa-sionally.The expiry date is shown on the bot-
tle. Do not use sealant whose expiry 
date has already passed. Other-wise, repairs conducted using the 
emergency tire puncture repair kit 
may not be performed properly.
■Emergency tire puncture repair kit
●The emergency tire puncture repair kit is for f illing the car tire 
with air.
●The sealant has a limited life 
span. The expiry date is marked on the bottle. The sealant should be replaced before the expiry 
date. Contact your Toyota dealer 
for replacement.
●The sealant stored in the emer-gency tire puncture repair kit can be used only once to temporarily 
repair a single tire. If the sealant in 
the bottle and other parts of the kit have been used and need to be 
replaced, contact your Toyota 
dealer.●The compressor can be used repeatedly.
●The sealant can be used when the outside temperature is from -40°F 
(-40°C) to 140°F (60°C).
●The kit is exclusi vely designed for 
size and type of ti res originally 
installed on your vehicle. Do not 
use it for tires tha t a different size 
than the original ones, or for any 
other purposes.
●If the sealant gets on your clothes, it may stain.
●If the sealant adhe res to a wheel 
or the surface of the vehicle body, the stain may not be removable if 
it is not cleaned at once. Immedi-
ately wipe away the sealant with a wet cloth.
●During operation of the repair kit, a loud operation noise is pro-
duced. This does not indicate a 
●Do not use to check or to adjust the tire pressure.
WARNING
●Store the repair kit in the trunk.Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden brak-
ing.
●The repair kit is exclusively only 
for your vehicle.Do not use repair kit on other 
vehicles, which could lead to an 
accident causing death or seri-ous injury.
●Do not use repair  kit for tires 
that are differen t size than the 
original ones, or for any other purpose. If the tires have not 
been completely repaired, it 
could lead to an accident caus-ing death or serious injury.

496 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U1Lift the deck mat. ( P.403)
2Take out the emergency tire 
puncture repair kit. ( P.494)
1Take out the repair kit from the plastic bag.
2Remove the valve cap from the valve of the punctured tire.
3Extend the hose. Remove the air release cap from the hose.Attach the sticker enclosed with the 
bottle on the spec ified locations. 
(See step 10.)
You will use the air release cap 
again. Therefore keep it in a safe 
place.
4Connect the hose to the 
valve.
Screw the end of the hose clock-
wise as far as possible.
5Make sure that the compres-
sor switch is off.WARNING
■Precautions for use of the 
sealant
●Ingesting the sealant is hazard-ous to your health. If you ingest sealant, consume as much 
water as possible, and then 
immediately consult a doctor.
●If sealant gets in eyes or adheres to skin, immediately wash it off with water. If discom-
fort persists, consult a doctor.
Taking out the emer-
Emergency repair method

497 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arises6Lift the rubber stopper on the 
compressor.
7Remove the power plug from the compressor.
8Connect the power plug to the power outlet socket. (P.405)
9Connect the bottle to the compressor.
As shown in the illu stration, insert 
the bottle securely into the com-
pressor until the upper side of the 
mark on the bottle is aligned with the upper end of the notch.
10Attach the sticker provided 
with the tire puncture repair 
kit to a position easily seen from the driver’s seat.
U.S.A.
Canada
11Check the specified tire infla-
tion pressure.
Tire inflation pressure is specified 
on the label on the driver’s side pil-

498 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_Ular as shown. ( P.531)
12Start the engine.
13To inject the sealant and 
inflate the tire, turn the com-
pressor switch on.14Inflate the tire until the speci-
fied air pressure is reached.
The sealant will be injected 
and the pressure will spike to between 44 psi (300 kPa, 3.0 
kgf/cm
2 or bar) and 58 psi 
(400 kPa, 4.0 kgf/cm2 or bar), 
then gradually decrease.
The air pressure gauge will 
display the actual tire inflation pressure about 1 to 5 min-utes after the switch is turned on.
Turn the compressor switch off and 
then check the tire inflation pres-sure. Being care ful not to over 
inflate, check and repeat the infla-
tion procedure until the specified tire inflation pressure is reached.
The tire can be inflated for about 5 
to 20 minutes (depending on the 
outside temperature). If the tire 
inflation pressure is still lower than the specified point after inflation for 
25 minutes, the tire is too damaged 

499 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arisesto be repaired. Turn the compres-
sor switch off and contact your Toy-
If the tire inflation pressure exceeds 
the specified air pressure, let out 
some air to adjust t he tire inflation 
pressure. ( P.500, 531)
15With the compressor switch 
off, disconnect the hose from 
the valve on the tire and then pull out the power plug from the power outlet socket.
Some sealant may leak when the 
hose is removed.
16Install the valve cap onto the 
valve of the emergency 
repaired tire.
17Attach the air release cap to 
the end of the hose.
If the air release cap is not 
attached, the sealant may leak and 
the vehicle ma y get dirty.
18Temporarily store the bottle 
in the trunk while it is con-
nected to the compressor.
19To spread the liquid sealant 
evenly within the tire, imme-diately drive safely for about 3 miles (5 km) below 50 mph (80 km/h).
20After driving, stop your vehi-
cle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface and reconnect the repair kit.
Remove the air release cap from 
the hose before reconnecting the 
hose.
21Turn the compressor switch 
on and wait for several sec-
onds, then turn it off. Check the tire inflation pressure.
If the tire inflation pressure is 
under 19 psi (130 kPa, 1.3 
kgf/cm
2 or bar): The puncture 
cannot be repaired. Contact 
19 psi (130 kPa, 1.3 kgf/cm2 
or bar) or higher, but less 
than the specified air pres-sure: Proceed to step 22.
If the tire inflation pressure is the specified air pressure (P.531): Proceed to step 

500 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U23.
22Turn the compressor switch 
on to inflate the tire until the 
specified air pressure is reached. Drive for about 3 miles (5 km) and then per-form step 20.
23Attach the air release cap to 
24Store the bottle in the trunk 
while it is connected to the 
25Taking precautions to avoid 
sudden braking, sudden acceleration and sharp turns, drive carefully at under 50 mph (80 km/h) to the nearest Toyota dealer that is less than 62 miles (100 km) away for tire repair or replacement.
When having the tire repaired or 
replaced, make sure to tell the Toy-
ota dealer that the sealant is injected.
■If the tire is i nflated to more 
than the specified air pressure
1Disconnect the hose from the valve.2Install the air release cap to the end of the hose  and push the 
protrusion on the air release cap into the tire valve to let some air out.
3Disconnect the hose from the valve, remove the air release cap 
from the hose an d then recon-
nect the hose.
4Turn the compressor switch on 
and wait for seve ral seconds, 
and then turn it off. Check that the air pressure indicator shows the specified air pressure. 
(P.531)
If the air pressure  is under the des-
ignated pressure, turn the compres-sor switch on again and repeat the inflation procedure until the speci-
■The valve of a tire that has been 
repaired (vehicles without a tire pressure warning system)
After a tire is repaired with the emer-gency tire puncture repair kit, the 
valve should be replaced.
■After a tire is re paired with the 
emergency tire puncture repair 
kit (vehicles with a tire pressure 
●The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter should be 
replaced.
●Even if the tire inflation pressure is at the recommended level, the tire pressure warning light may come on/flash.

501 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
■Do not drive the vehicle with 
a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.Driving even a short distance with 
the wheel beyond repair.
Driving with a flat tire may cause a 
circumferential groove on the side wall. In such a case, the tire may explode when using a repair kit.
■When fixing the flat tire
●Stop your vehicle in a safe and flat area.
●Do not touch the wheels or the 
area around the brakes immedi-
ately after the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been 
driven, the wheels and the area around the brakes may be 
extremely hot. Touching these 
areas with hands , feet or other 
body parts may result in burns.
●Connect the valve and hose 
securely with th e tire installed 
on the vehicle. If the hose is not 
properly connected to the valve, 
air leakage may occur as seal-
ant may be sprayed out.
●If the hose comes off the valve while inflating the tire, there is a 
risk that the hose will move 
abruptly due to air pressure.
●After inflation of the tire has completed, the sealant may 
splatter when the hose is dis-
connected or some  air is let out 
of the tire.
●Follow the operation procedure 
to repair the tire. If the proce-
dures not followed, the sealant may spray out.●Keep back from the tire while it 
is being repaired, as there is a 
chance of it bursting while the repair operation is being per-
formed. If you notice any cracks 
or deformation of the tire, turn off the compressor switch and 
stop the repair operation imme-
diately.
●The repair kit may overheat if operated for a long period of 
time. Do not operate the repair 
kit continuously for more than 40 minutes.
●Parts of the re pair kit become 
hot during operation. Be careful handling the repair kit during and after operation. Do not 
touch the metal part connecting 
the bottle and the compressor. It will be extremely hot.
●Do not attach the vehicle speed 
warning sticker to an area other 
than the one indicated. If the sticker is attached to an area 
where an SRS airbag is located, 
such as the pad of the steering wheel, it may prevent the SRS 
airbag from operating properly.
■Driving to spread the liquid 
sealant evenly
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.Failing to do so m ay result in a 
loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.
●Drive the vehicle carefully at a 
low speed. Be especially careful 
when turning and cornering.
●If the vehicle does not drive 
straight or you feel a pull through the steering wheel, stop the vehicle and check the fol-
lowing.
• Tire condition. The tire may 
have separated from the wheel.

502 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
• Tire inflation pressure. If the tire 
inflation pressure is 19 psi (130 
kPa, 1.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) or less, 
the tire may be severely dam-
aged.
NOTICE
■When performing an emer-gency repair
●A tire should only be repaired with the emergency tire punc-ture repair kit if the damage is 
caused by a shar p object such 
as nail or screw passing through 
the tire tread.
Do not remove the sharp object 
from the tire. Removing the object may widen the opening 
and disenable emergency repair 
with the repair kit.
●The repair kit is not waterproof. Make sure that the repair kit is 
not exposed to water, such as 
when it is being used in the rain.
●Do not put the repair kit directly onto dusty ground such as sand 
at the side of the road. If the 
repair kit vacuums  up dust etc., 
a malfunction may occur.
■Precautions for the emer-
●The repair kit power source should be 12 V DC suitable for 
vehicle use. Do not connect the repair kit to any other source.
●If fuel splatters on the repair kit, 
the repair kit may deteriorate. 
Take care not to allow fuel to contact it.
●Place the repair kit in a storage 
to prevent it from being exposed to dirt or water.
●Store the repair kit in the trunk out of reach of children.●Do not disassemble or modify 
the repair kit. Do not subject 
parts such as the air pressure indicator to impacts. This may 
cause a malfunction.
■To avoid damage to the tire 
pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles with a 
When a tire is repa ired with liquid 
sealants, the tire  pressure warn-
dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. After 
use of liquid sealant, make sure to 
replace the tire p ressure warning 
valve and transmitter when repair-
ing or replaci ng the tire. ( P.449)

503 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arisesStop the vehicle in a safe 
Shift the shift lever to P (con-tinuously variable transmis-sion) or R (manual transmission).
Turn on the emergency flash-ers.If you have a flat tire 
(vehicles with a spare tire)
Your vehicle is equipped 
with a spare tire. The flat tire can be replaced with the spare tire.
For details about tires: P.444
WARNING
tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire 
and the wheel beyond repair, 
which could result in an accident.
Before jacking up the 
vehicle

504 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_UJack handle
Wheel nut wrenchJackSpare tireTowing eyelet (if equipped)Location of the spare t ire, jack and tools
WARNING
■Using the tire jack
tions. Improper use of the tire jack 
may cause the vehicle to sud-denly fall off the jack, leading to 
●Do not use the tir e jack for any 
purpose other than replacing 
tires or installing and removing 
tire chains.●Only use the tire jack that 
comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire. Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not 
use other tire jacks for replacing 
tires on this vehicle.
●Put the jack properly in its jack point.

505 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arises1Remove the deck mat.2Take out the jack.
For tightening
For loosening
1Remove the deck mat. 
(P.505)
2Remove the tool tray.
3Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.WARNING
●Do not put any part of your body 
under the vehicle while it is sup-ported by the jack.
●Do not start the engine or drive 
the vehicle while  the vehicle is 
supported by the jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
●When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the 
jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle to a 
height greater than that required to replace the tire.
●Use a jack stand if it is neces-
sary to get under the vehicle.
●When lowering the vehicle, 
make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there are 
people nearby, warn them 
vocally before lowering.
Taking out the jackTaking out the spare tire

506 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U1Chock the tires.
2Vehicles with a steel wheel: 
Remove the wheel ornament (if equipped) using the wrench.
Insert the wrench into the notch  
on the wheel cap.
To protect the wheel ornament, place a rag between the wrench 
and the wheel ornament.
3Slightly loosen the wheel 
nuts (one turn).
4Turn the tire jack portion  
by hand until the center of the 
recessed portion of the jack is in contact with the center of the jack point.WARNING
■When storing the spare tire
Be careful not to catch fingers or 
other body parts between the 
spare tire and the body of the vehicle.
Replacing a flat tire
Flat tireWheel chock 
positions
Front left-hand 
sideBehind the rear right-hand side tire
Front right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Rear left-hand sideIn front of the front right-hand side tire
Rear right-hand sideIn front of the front left-hand side tire

507 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arises5Assemble the jack handle 
extension.
Type A
Type B
6Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.
7Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.
When resting the tire on the 
ground, place the  tire so that the 
wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.
WARNING
■Replacing a flat tire
●Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes 
immediately after the vehicle 
has been driven. After the vehi-cle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the 
brakes will be extremely hot. 
Touching these areas with hands, feet or oth er body parts 
while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
●Failure to follow these precau-tions could cause the wheel 
nuts to loosen and the tire to fall 
off, resulting in death or serious 
injury.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened 
with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf 
(103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon 
as possible after changing wheels.
• Do not attach a  heavily dam-
aged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the vehi-cle is moving.
• When installing a tire, only use 
wheel nuts that  have been spe-
cifically designed for that wheel.

508 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U1Remove any dirt or foreign 
matter from the wheel con-tact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel 
contact surface,  the wheel nuts 
may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to come off.
2Install the tire and loosely 
tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.
When replacing a steel wheel with 
a steel wheel (including a compact 
spare tire), tighte n the wheel nuts 
until the tapered portion  comes 
into loose contact with the disc wheel seat .
When replacing an aluminum wheel 
with a steel wheel (including a com-
pact spare tire), tighten the wheel 
nuts until the tapered portion  
comes into loose c ontact with the 
disc wheel seat .
3Lower the vehicle.
4Firmly tighten each wheel nut 
two or three times in the order shown in the illustra-tion.
Tightening torque:WARNING
• If there are any  cracks or defor-
mations in the bolt screws, nut 
threads or bolt holes of the 
wheel, have the vehicle 
• When installing  the wheel nuts, 
be sure to install them with the tapered ends facing inward. (
P.455)
Installing the spare tire

509 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arises76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
5Stow the flat tire, tire jack and 
all tools.
■The compact spare tire
●The compact spare tire is identi-
fied by the label “TEMPORARY 
USE ONLY” on the tire sidewall. Use the compact spare tire tempo-
rarily, and only in an emergency.
●Make sure to check the tire infla-
tion pressure of the compact 
spare tire. ( P.531)
■When the compact  spare tire is 
equipped
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire 
compared to when driving with stan-
dard tires.
■After completing the tire change (vehicles with a tire 
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. ( P.450)
■When using the compact spare 
tire (vehicles with a tire pres-sure warning system)
As the compact sp are tire is not 
equipped with a tire pressure warn-ing valve and transmitter, low infla-
tion pressur e of the spar e tire will 
not be indicated by the tire pressure 
warning system. Also, if you replace 
the compact spare tire after the tire 
pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.■If you have a flat  front tire on a 
road covered with snow or ice
Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels  of the vehicle. 
Perform the following steps and fit 
tire chains to the front tires:
1Replace a rear tire with the com-
pact spare tire.
2Replace the flat front tire with the 
tire removed from  the rear of the 
vehicle.
3Fit tire chains to  the front tires.
■When reinstalling the wheel 
ornament (steel wheels except 
compact spare tire)
Align the cutout of the wheel orna-ment with the valve stem as shown 
in the illustration.
WARNING
■When using the compact spare tire
●Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifi-
cally designed for use with your 
vehicle. Do not use your com-pact spare tire on another vehi-
cle.
●Do not use more than one com-
pact spare tires simultaneously.
●Replace the comp act spare tire 
with a standard tire as soon as possible.
abrupt steering, sudden brak-ing and shifting operations that 
cause sudden engine braking.

510 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
■When the compact spare tire 
is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detecte d, and the follow-
ing systems may not operate cor-
rectly:
• ABS & Brake assist
•V S C
•T R A C• Automatic High Beam• AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting 
System) (if equipped)
• Dynamic radar cruise control 
with full-speed range (if 
equipped)
equipped)
•E P S
• PCS (Pre-Collision System)• LDA (Lane Departure Alert with 
equipped)
• Tire pressure warning system (if 
equipped)
• BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (if 
equipped)
• Rear view monitor system• Navigation system (if equipped)
■Speed limit when using the 
compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a com-
pact spare tire is installed on the 
vehicle.The compact spare tire is not 
designed for driving at high 
speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an acci-
dent causing death or serious 
injury.
■After using the tools and jack
Before driving, ma ke sure all the 
tools and jack are securely in place in their storage location to 
reduce the possibility of personal 
injury during a collision or sudden braking.
NOTICE
■Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the 
vehicle.
compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when 
driving over uneven road sur-
faces.
■Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the com-pact spare tire. Tire chains may 
damage the vehicle body and 
adversely affect d riving perfor-
mance.
■When replacing the tires 
(vehicles with a tire pressure 
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or th e tire pressure 
warning valve and transmitter, 
contact your Toyota dealer as the 
tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not 
handled correctly.

511 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arisesOne of the following may be the 
cause of the problem:
There may not be sufficient 
fuel in the vehicle’s tank. Refuel the vehicle.
The engine may be flooded. 
Try to restart the engine again 
following correct starting pro-cedures. ( P.147, 148)
There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer sys-tem. (P.67)
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
The battery may be dis-
charged. ( P.515)NOTICE
dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure 
warning valve and transmitter 
when replacing the tire.If the engine will not 
start
If the engine will not start 
even though correct starting procedures are being fol-lowed (P.147, 148), con-
sider each of the following points:
The engine will not start 
even though the starter 
motor operates normally.
The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior 
lights and headlights are 
dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low 
volume.

512 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_UThe battery terminal connec-
tions may be loose or cor-roded. ( P.442)
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as elec-tronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However, an interim measure is available to start the engine. ( P.512)
charged. ( P.515)
One or both of the battery ter-minals may be disconnected. (P.442)
There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
Contact your Toyot a dealer if the 
problem cannot be repaired, or if 
repair procedures are unknown.When the engine does not start, 
the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the engine if the engine switch is functioning normally.Do not use this starting proce-dure except in case of emer-gency.
1Set the parking brake. 
3Turn the engine switch to ACC.
4Press and hold the engine switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal (continuously variable transmission) or clutch pedal (manual transmission) firmly.
Even if the engi ne can be started 
using the above steps, the system 
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.The starter motor does not turn over (vehicles 
with a smart key system)
The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do 
not turn on, or the horn 
does not sound.Emergency start function 
system)

513 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arises■When the electronic key does 
not work properly
●Make sure that the smart key sys-tem has not been deactivated in the customization setting. If it is 
off, turn the functi on on. (Custom-
izable features: P.548)
●Check if battery-saving mode is 
set. If it is set, cancel the function. (P.113)
Use the mechanical key 
(P.100) in order to perform the If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using the other key (vehi-cles without a smart key system) or mechanical key (vehicles with a smart key system) and the key number stamped on your key num-ber plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
NOTICE
■When an electronic key is lost 
(vehicles with  a smart key 
system)
If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases 
significantly. Visit your Toyota 
dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that 
were provided wit h your vehicle.If the electronic key 
does not operate prop-erly (vehicles with a 
If communication between 
the electronic key and vehi-cle is interrupted ( P.113) 
or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened and the engine can be started by following the procedure below.
NOTICE
■In case of a smart key system 
malfunction or other 
key-related problems
Take your vehicle with all the elec-tronic keys provided with your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
Locking and unlocking 
the doors

514 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_Ufollowing operations:
■Key linked functions
1Closes the windows and moon 
roof*1 (turn and hold)*2
2Opens the windows and moon roof
*1 (turn and hold)*2
*2:This setting mu st be customized 
at your Toyota dealer.1Vehicles with a continuously 
variable transmission: Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.Vehicles with a manual trans-mission: Shift the shift lever 
to N and depress the clutch pedal.
2Touch the Toyota emblem side of the electronic key to the engine switch.
When the electronic key is 
detected, a buzzer sounds and the 
engine switch will turn to ON.
When the smart key system is 
deactivated in customization set-
ting, the engine s witch will turn to WARNING
■When using the mechanical key and operating the power windows or moon roof (if 
equipped)
Operate the power window or moon roof after checking to make 
sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their 
body parts caught in the window 
or moon roof.Also, do not allo w children to 
operate the mechanical key. It is 
passengers to get caught in the power window or moon roof.

515 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arisesACC.
pedal (continuously variable transmission) or clutch pedal (manual transmission) and 
check that  is shown on 
In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Toyota dealer.
■Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P (continu-
(manual transmission) and press the engine switch as you normally 
do when stopping the engine.
As the above proc edure is a tempo-
rary measure, it is recommended 
that the electronic key battery be replaced immediate ly when the bat-
tery is depleted. ( P.458)
■Changing engine switch modes
Release the brake pedal (continu-ously variable transmission) or 
clutch pedal (manual transmission) 
and press the engine switch in step 3 above.
The engine does not start and modes will be cha nged each time 
the switch is pressed. ( P.151)
If the vehicle battery 
is discharged
The following procedures 
may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s bat-tery is discharged.You can also call your Toy-ota dealer or a qualified repair shop.

516 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_UIf you have a set of jumper (or 
booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below.
1Vehicles with an alarm 
(P.69): Confirm that the 
electronic key (vehicles with a smart key system) or key (vehicles without a smart key system) is being carried.When connecting the jumper (or 
booster) cables, depending on the 
situation, the alarm may activate 
and doors locked. ( P.70)
2Open the hood. ( P.434)
3Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to  on your vehicle and 
connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to  on  
the second vehicle. Then, connect a negative cable clamp to  
on the second vehicle and connect the clamp at the other end of 
the negative cable to .
Positive (+) battery terminal (your vehicle)
Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle)Negative (-) battery term inal (second vehicle)
Solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the batte ry 
and any moving parts as shown in the illustrationRestarting the engine

517 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arises2.0 L 4-cylinder (M20A-FKS) engine
and any moving parts as shown in the illustration
4Start the engine of the sec-
ond vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
5Vehicles with a smart key system: Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the engine switch OFF.
6Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the engine of your vehicle by turning the engine switch to ON.
7Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
■Starting the engine when the 
battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by 
push-starting.
■To prevent bat tery discharge
●Turn off the headlights and the audio system while  the engine is 
off.
●Turn off any unnecessary electri-
cal components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an 
extended period, such as in heavy 
traffic.
■When the battery is removed or discharged
●Information stored in the ECU is 

518 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_Ucleared. When the battery is 
depleted, have the vehicle 
inspected at you r Toyota dealer.
●Some systems may require initial-
ization. ( P.556)
■When removing the battery ter-
minals
When the battery terminals are removed, the information stored in the ECU is cleared . Before remov-
ing the battery terminals, contact your Toyota dealer.
■Charging the battery
The electricity stor ed in the battery 
will discharge gradu ally even when 
the vehicle is not i n use, due to nat-
ural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appli-ances. If the vehicle is left for a long 
time, the battery may discharge, 
and the engine ma y be unable to 
start. (The battery recharges auto-
matically during driving.)
■When recharging or replacing 
the battery (vehicles with a smart key system)
●In some cases, i t may not be pos-
sible to unlock the doors using the 
smart key system when the bat-
tery is discharged. Use the wire-less remote control or the 
mechanical key to lock or unlock 
the doors.
●The engine may not start on the first attempt after the battery has recharged but will start normally 
after the se cond attempt. This is 
not a malfunction.
●The engine switch mode is memo-rized by the vehicle. When the battery is reconnected, the system will return to  the mode it was in 
before the battery was dis-charged. Before disconnecting the battery, turn the engine switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the 
engine switch was in before the battery discharged, be especially 
careful when reconnecting the 
battery.■When replacing the battery
●Use a battery that conforms to European regulations.
●Use a battery wit h the same case 
size as the previous battery and an equivalent 20 h our rate capac-
ity (20HR) or greater.
• If the sizes differ, the battery can-
not be properly secured.
• If the 20 hour rate  capacity is low, 
even if the time p eriod where the 
vehicle is not used is a short time, 
the battery may discharge and the 
engine may not be able to start.
●For details, cons ult your Toyota 
dealer.
WARNING
■When removing the battery terminals
Always remove the negative (-) terminal first. If the positive (+) ter-
minal contacts any metal in the 
surrounding area when the posi-tive (+) terminal is removed, a 
spark may occur, leading to a fire 
in addition to ele ctrical shocks 
and death or serious injury.
■Avoiding battery fires or 
explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the 
flammable gas that may be emit-ted from the battery:
●Make sure each jumper cable is 
connected to the correct termi-
nal and that it is not unintention-ally in contact with any other 
than the intended terminal.
●Do not allow the other end of 
the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to come into 
contact with any other parts or 
metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or unpainted metal.

519 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arises1Stop the vehicle in a safe 
place and turn off the air con-ditioning system, and then stop the engine.
2If you see steam: Carefully lift the hood after the steam sub-sides.If you do not see steam: Carefully lift the hood.
3After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the WARNING
●Do not allow the + and - clamps 
of the jumper cables to come into contact with each other.
●Do not smoke, use matches, 
cigarette lighters or allow open 
flame near the battery.
■Battery precautions
and corrosive acid ic electrolyte, 
while related parts contain lead 
and lead compounds. Observe 
the following precautions when 
handling the battery:
●When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and 
take care not to allow any bat-
tery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the 
vehicle body.
●Do not lean over the battery.
●In the event that battery fluid 
comes into contact  with the skin 
or eyes, immediately wash the 
affected area with water and 
seek medical attention. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the 
affected area until medical 
attention can be received.
●Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, 
terminals, and other bat-
tery-related parts.
●Do not allow child ren near the 
battery.
NOTICE
■When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper 
cables, ensure that they do not 
become entangled in the cooling fan or engine drive belt.If your vehicle over-
heats
The following may indicate 
that your vehicle is over-heating.
The engine coolant tem-perature gauge ( P.77, 81) 
is in the red zone or a loss of engine power is experi-enced. (For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)
“Engine Coolant Temp High Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s Manual” is shown on the multi-information dis-play.
Steam comes out from under the hood.
Correction procedures

520 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_Uhoses and radiator core (radi-
ator) for any leaks.
Radiator
Cooling fan
If a large amount of coolant leaks, 
immediately cont act your Toyota 
dealer.
4The coolant level is satisfac-
tory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir.
Reservoir
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
5Add engine coolant if neces-
sary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if engine coolant is unavail-able.
6Start the engine and turn the 
air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cool-ing fan operates and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.
The fan operates when the air con-
ditioning system is turned on imme-
diately after a cold start. Confirm 
that the fan is operating by check-ing the fan sound and air flow. If it is 
difficult to check these, turn the air 
conditioning system on and off repeatedly. (The fan may not oper-
ate in freezing temperatures.)
7If the fan is not operating: 
Stop the engine immediately and contact your Toyota dealer.If the fan is operating: Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer.
WARNING
■When inspecting under the 
hood of your vehicle
Observe the following precau-tions. Failure to do so may result 
in serious injury such as burns.

521 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
COROLLA_U8When trouble arises1Stop the engine. Set the 
parking brake and shift the shift lever to P (continuously variable transmission) or N (manual transmission).
2Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the front wheels.
3Place wood, stones or some other material under the front wheels to help provide trac-tion.
4Restart the engine.
5Shift the shift lever to D or R (continuously variable trans-mission) or 1 or R (manual transmission) and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.
■When it is difficult to free the 
vehicle
Press the  switch to turn off 
TRAC.WARNING
●If steam is seen  coming from 
under the hood, do not open the 
hood until the steam has sub-
sided. The engine compart-
ment may be very hot.
●Keep hands and clothing (espe-cially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) 
away from the fan and belts. 
Failure to do so m ay cause the 
hands or clothing to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
●Do not loosen the coolant reser-
voir cap while the engine and 
radiator are hot.High temperature steam or 
coolant could spray out.
NOTICE
■When adding engine coolant
Add coolant slowly after the 
engine has cooled down suffi-
ciently. Adding cool coolant to a 
hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.
■To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precau-tions:
●Avoid contaminating the coolant 
with foreign matter (such as 
sand or dust etc.).
●Do not use any coolant additive.If the vehicle becomes 
stuck
Carry out the following pro-
cedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
Recovering procedure

522 8-2. Steps to take  in an emergency
■When attempting to free a 
stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle 
back and forth to  free it, make 
sure the surrounding area is clear 
to avoid striking other vehicles, 
objects or people. The vehicle 
may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. 
Use extreme caution.
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the ac celerator pedal 
This may lead  to unexpected 
rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the trans-mission and other compo-
nents
●Avoid spinning the front wheels and depressing the accelerator 
pedal more than necessary.
●If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are 
performed, the vehicle may 
require towing to be freed.

523
COROLLA_U9
9Vehicle specificationsVehicle specifications
.9-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil 
level, etc.).................. 524
Fuel information .......... 535
Tire information ........... 537
Customizable features
.................................. 548
Items to initialize ......... 556

524 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_U9-1.Specifications
*1:Unladen vehicles
*2:1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FAE) engine
*3:2.0 L 4-cylinder (M20A-FKS) engine
■Vehicle identification num-
ber
The vehicle identification num-ber (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the pri-mary identification number for your Toyota. It is used in regis-tering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped under 
the right-hand front seat.This number is also stamped on the top left of the instrument panel.Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight
Overall length182.3 in. (4630 mm)*2
182.5 in. (4635 mm)*3
Overall width 70.1 in. (1780 mm)
Overall height*1 56.5 in. (1435 mm)
Wheelbase 106.3 in. (2700 mm)
TreadFront 60.3 in. (1531 mm)
Rear 60.8 in. (1544 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)825 lb. (375 kg)*2
860 lb. (390 kg)*3
Vehicle identification

525 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_U9Vehicle specificationsThis number is also on the Certi-
fication Label.
■Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FAE) engine
Engine
Model 1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FAE)2.0 L 4-cylinder 
(M20A-FKS)
Type4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline 4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke3.17  3.48 in. (80.5  88.3 
mm)3.17  3.84 in. (80.5  97.6 
mm)
Displacement 109.7 cu. in. (1798 cm3) 121.3 cu. in. (1987 cm3)
Valve clearance Automatic adjustment
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment

526 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_U■Oil capacity (Drain and refill 
[Reference*])
*: The engine oil capacity is a refer-
ence quantity to be used when 
changing the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is 
used in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genu-ine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multi-
grade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 
0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice 
for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available, 
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used. However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil change.
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained 
here as an example):• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates 
the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the 
viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high tem-perature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher Fuel
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane Rating87 (Research Octane Number 91) or 
higher
Fuel tank capacity(Reference)13.2 gal. (50.0 L, 11.0 Imp. gal.)
Lubrication system (1.8 L 4-cylinder [2ZR-FAE] 
engine)
With filter4.4 qt. (4.2 L, 3.7 Imp. 
qt.)
Without filter 4.1 qt. (3.9 L, 3.4 Imp. qt.)

527 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_U9Vehicle specificationsvalue) may be better suited if 
the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The International Lubricant 
Specification Advisory Commit-tee (ILSAC) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.
■Oil capacity (Drain and refill 
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use 
Toyota approved “Toyota Genu-ine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: API SN/RC multi-
0W-16
SAE 0W-16 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-16 is not available, 
SAE 0W-20 oil may be used. However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-16 at the next oil change.
Oil viscosity (0W-16 is explained 
here as an example):• The 0W in 0W-16 indicates 
• The 16 in 0W-16 indicates the 
viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high tem-perature. An oil with a higher Lubrication system (2.0 L 
4-cylinder [M20A-FKS] engine)
With filter4.9 qt. (4.6 L, 4.0 Imp. 
qt.)
Without 
filter4.5 qt. (4.3 L, 3.8 Imp. qt.)

528 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_Uviscosity (one with a higher 
value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
API registered marks is added 
to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.
Cooling system
Capacity (Reference)1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FAE) engine
Continuously variable transmission:
6.1 qt. (5.8 L, 5.1 Imp. qt.)
Manual transmission:
5.9 qt. (5.6 L, 4.9 Imp. qt.)
Continuously variable transmission:6.6 qt. (6.2 L, 5.5 Imp. qt.)
6.2 qt. (5.9 L, 5.2 Imp. qt.)
Coolant typeUse either o f the following:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
Similar high-quality et hylene glycol-based 
non-silicate, non -amine, non-nitrite, and 
non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use pla in water alone.
Ignition system (spark plug)
Make1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FAE) engine
DENSO FC16HR-Q8
DENSO FC20HR-Q8
Gap 0.032 in. (0.8 mm)

529 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_U9Vehicle specifications*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.NOTICE
■Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark pl ug gap.
Electrical system (battery)
Open voltage at 68°F (20°C):12.3 V or higher
(Turn the engine switch off and turn on the 
high beam headlights for 30 seconds.)
Charging rates
Quick charge
Slow charge15 A max.5 A max.
Continuously variable transmission
Fluid capacity*1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FAE) engine
7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp. qt.)
9.0 qt. (8.5 L, 7.5 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine CVT Fluid FE
NOTICE
■Continuously variable transmission fluid type
Using continuously variable transmission fluid other than “Toyo ta Genuine 
CVT Fluid FE” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking  up of trans-
mission accompanied by vibration and, ultimately, damage to the  vehicle’s 
transmission.
Manual transmission
Gear oil capacity (Reference)1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FAE) engine
2.5 qt. (2.4 L, 2.1 Imp. qt.)
Gear oil type“TOYOTA Genuine Manual Transmission 
Gear Oil LV GL-4 75W” or equivalent

530 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_UNOTICE
■Manual transmissi on gear oil type
●Please be aware that depending on  the particular characteristic s of the 
gear oil used or the operating conditions, idle sound, shift fe eling and/or 
fuel efficiency may be different  or affected and , in the worst case, dam-
age to the vehicle’s transmission.
Toyota recommends to use “TOYO TA Genuine Manual Transmission 
Gear Oil LV GL-4 75W” to achieve optimal performance.
●Your Toyota vehicle is filled with  “TOYOTA Genuine Manual Trans mis-
sion Gear Oil LV GL-4 75W” at the factory.
Use Toyota approved “TOYOTA Ge nuine Manual Transmission Gear Oi l 
LV GL-4 75W” or an equivalent oil of matching qua lity that sati sfies the 
above specifications.Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
Clutch
Pedal free play 0.1  0.6 in. (3  15 mm)
Fluid typeFMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704
Brakes
Pedal clearance*1 4.1 in. (105 mm) Min.
Pedal free play 0.04  0.24 in. (1  6 mm)
Parking brake lever travel*2, 3 5  8 clicks
Brake pad wear limitFront
0.06 in. (1.5 mm)
Rear
Vehicles without a electric parking brake:
Vehicles with a electric parking brake:
0.08 in. (2.0 mm)

531 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_U9Vehicle specifications*1:Minimum pedal clearance when de pressed with a force of 67.4 lb f (300 
N, 30.6 kgf) while the  engine is running.
*3:Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 45.0  lbf (200 N, 
20.4 kgf)
*4:Make sure to confirm that the brake system warning light (yell ow) does 
not illuminate. (If th e brake system  warning light illuminates,  refer to 
P.481.)
Type AParking brake indicator*4When pulling th e parking brake switch for 
1 to 2 seconds: comes on
When pushing the parking brake switch for 
1 to 2 seconds: turns off
Fluid typeFMVSS No.116 DOT  3 or SAE J1703
FMVSS No.116 DOT  4 or SAE J1704
Steering
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Tires and wheels
Tire size 195/65R15 91S, T125/70D17 98M
Tire inflation pressure(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)Front
38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 15  6 1/2J, 17  4T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

532 9-1. Specifications
Type C
Type DTire size 205/55R16 91H, T125/70D17 98M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)Front
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare
Wheel size 16  7J, 17  4T (compact spare)
Tire size 205/55R16 91V, T125/70D17 98M
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear
Spare
Tire size 225/40R18 88V, T125/70D17 98M
Rear
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare
Wheel size 18  8J, 17  4T (compact spare)

533 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_U9Vehicle specificationsType E
Type FTire size 195/65R15 91S
Rear
Spare
None
Wheel size 15  6 1/2J
Tire size 205/55R16 91H
Rear
Spare
None
Wheel size 16  7J
Light bulbs
Light bulbs Bulb No. W Type
ExteriorFront side marker lights — 5 A
Front turn signal /parking lights (vehicles without side turn signal lights)
7444NA 28/8 B
Rear side marker lights (bulb type)— 5 A
Rear turn signal lights — 21 B
Back-up lights — 16 A

534 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_UA: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
B: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
C: Double end bulbsInteriorFront interior lights/personal 
lights— 5 A
Vanity lights (if equipped) — 8 A
Rear interior light — 8 C
Trunk light — 5 ALight bulbs Bulb No. W Type

535 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_U9Vehicle specifications■Gasoline quality
In very few cases,  driveability prob-
lems may be caused by the brand of 
gasoline you are using. If driveability 
problems persist, try changing the 
brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your 
■Recommendation of the use of 
gasoline containing detergent additives
●Toyota recomme nds the use of 
gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the build-up of 
engine deposits.
●All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. con-tains minimum detergent additives 
to clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPA’s lowest addi-
tives concentration program.
●Toyota strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gaso-
line. For more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list 
of marketers, please go to the offi-
cial website www.toptiergas.com.■Recommendation of the use of low emissions gasoline
Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol, as well 
as reformulated gasolines, are avail-
able in some cities. These fuels are typically acceptable for use, provid-
ing they meet other fuel require-
ments.
Toyota recommends these fuels, 
since the formulations allow for reduced vehicle emissions.
■Non-recommendation of the 
use of blended gasoline
●Use only gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gas-oline that could contain more than 
15% ethanol, including from any 
pump labeled E30 (30% ethanol 
[ ]), E50 (50% ethanol [ ]), E85 
(85% ethanol [ ]) (which are only 
some examples of f uel containing 
more than 15% ethanol).
●If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rat-
ing no lower than 87.
●Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing metha-
nol.
■Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT 
(Methylcyclopentadienyl Manga-
nese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not re commend the use 
of gasoline that contains MMT. If 
fuel containing MMT is used, your 
emission control system may be Fuel information
You must only use unleaded 
gasoline.Select octane rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knock-ing. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifica-tions of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A.

536 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_Uadversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on 
the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota 
dealer for service.
■If your engine knocks
●Consult your Toyota dealer.
●You may occasionally notice light 
knocking for a short time while 
accelerating or dr iving uphill. This 
is normal and there is no need for 
concern.
NOTICE
■Notice on fuel quality
●Do not use impro per fuels. If 
improper fuels are used, the 
engine will be damaged.
●Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s 
three-way catalytic converters 
causing the emission control system to malfunction.
●Do not use gasohol other than 
the type previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle per-
formance problems.
●Using unleaded gasoline with 
an octane number or rating lower than the l evel previously 
stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.At worst, this will lead to engine 
damage.
■Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability (poor hot start-ing, vaporization, engine knock-
ing, etc.) is encountered after using a different type of fuel, dis-
continue the use of that type of 
fuel.■When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to s pill gasohol. It 
can damage your vehicle’s paint.

537 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_U9Vehicle specificationsFull-size tire
Tire size ( P.539)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) ( P.539)
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
Location of treadwear indicators ( P.444)
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coat ed parallel cords. Cords are the  strands 
which form the pl ies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on th e sidewall. A tire not marked “ RADIAL” is a 
bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put in to the tire. A 
tube type tire has a tube inside t he tire and the tube maintains the air pres-
sure.
Load limit at maximum cold  tire inflation pressure ( P.445)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure ( P.531)
This means the pressure to w hich a tire may be inflated.
Summer tires or all season tires ( P.445)Tire information
Typical tire symbols

538 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_UAn all season tire has  “M+S” on the sidewal l. A tire not marked  “M+S” is a 
summer tire.
Compact spare tire
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
A compact spare tire is identifi ed by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE  ONLY” 
molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary eme rgency use 
only.
sure.

539 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_U9Vehicle specificationsType A
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number 
(TIN)
Tire manufacturer’s identifi-
cation mark
Tire size codeManufacturer’s optional tire 
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that the 
tire conforms to applicable Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dards.
Type BDOT symbol*
(TIN)
Manufacturer’s codeManufacturing weekManufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol ce rtifies that the 
tire conforms to  applicable Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards.
■Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical 
tire size.
Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio (tire height to 
section width)
Tire construction code (R = 
Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)Load index (2 digits or 3 dig-
its)Typical DOT and Tire 
Identification Number 
(TIN)
Tire size

540 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_USpeed symbol (alphabet with 
one letter)
■Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire heightWheel diameter
Bead
SidewallShoulderTreadBelt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubberCarcassRim linesBead wiresChafer
This information has been pre-
pared in accordance with regu-lations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration of the U.S. Department of 
Transportation.
It provides the purchasers 
and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with informa-tion on uniform tire quality grad-ing.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer 
any questions you may have as you read this information.
■DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must 
conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Trac-
tion AA Temperature A
■Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a com-
parative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 Tire section namesUniform Tire Quality 
Grading

541 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_U9Vehicle specificationswould wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) 
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.The relative perfo rmance of tires 
depends upon the actual conditions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
■Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from high-
est to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified govern-ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor 
traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade 
assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include corner-ing (turning) traction.
■Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, repre-
senting the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled condi-tions on a specified indoor labo-ratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can 
cause the material  of the tire to 
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of 
performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher 
levels of performance on the labo-ratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades 
of a tire assume tha t it is properly 
inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or 
excessive loading, either sepa-rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire fail-ure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire infl ation pressureTire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours  or more, or  has not 
been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km 
under that condition
Maximum inflation pressureThe maximum cold inf lated pressure to 
which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

542 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_URecommended inflation pres-
sureCold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
Accessory weightThe combined weight  (in excess of those 
standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as fac-tory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)
Curb weightThe weight of a motor vehicle with stan-dard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine
Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occu-
pants specified in the second column of 
Table 1* that follows
Occupant distributionDistribution of occupan ts in a vehicle as 
specified in the thi rd column of Table 1* 
below
Production options weightThe combined weight o f installed regular 
production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 
kg) in excess of the s tandard items which 
they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim
RimA metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seatedTire related term Meaning

543 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_U9Vehicle specificationsRim diameter (Wheel diame-
ter)Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designationThe industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance be tween rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity
Vehicle maximum load on the tireThe load on an individual tire that is deter-mined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on the tireThe load on an individual tire that is deter-mined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and nor-mal occupant weight (distributed in accor-
dance with Table 1
* below), and dividing by 
two
Weather sideThe surface area of the rim not covered by 
the inflated tire
BeadThe part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or rein forced by ply cords 
and that is shaped to fit the rim
Bead separationA breakdown of the bond between compo-nents in the bead
Bias ply tireA pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially l ess than 90 degrees 
to the centerlin e of the tread
CarcassThe tire structure, ex cept tread and side-
wall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
ChunkingThe breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tireTire related term Meaning

544 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_UCord separationThe parting of cords f rom adjacent rubber 
compounds
CrackingAny parting within the tread, sidewall, or 
innerliner of the ti re extending to cord 
material
CTA pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system i n which the rim is 
designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cav-ity of the tire
Extra load tireA tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
InnerlinerThe layer(s) forming th e inside surface of a 
tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separationThe parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass
Intended outboard sidewall(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufac-turer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an 
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always fa ce outward when 
mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tireA tire designated by i ts manufacturer as 
primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load ratingThe maximum load that a tire is rated to 
carry for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load ratingThe load rating for a  tire at the maximum 
permissible inflation pressure for that tireTire related term Meaning

545 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_U9Vehicle specificationsMaximum permissible inflation 
pressureThe maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated
Measuring rimThe rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements
Open spliceAny parting at any junct ion of tread, side-
wall, or innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall widthThe linear distance bet ween the exteriors 
of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labe ling, decorations, or 
protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tireA tire intended for us e on passenger cars, 
multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separationA parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies
Pneumatic tireA mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materi-als, that, when mount ed on an automotive 
wheel, provides the tr action and contains 
the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tireA pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substan-tially 90 degrees to the centerline of the 
tread
Reinforced tireA tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
Section widthThe linear distance bet ween the exteriors 
of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, exclud-
ing elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands
SidewallThat portion of a ti re between the tread 
and beadTire related term Meaning

546 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_U*: Table 1 -Occupant loading and di stribution for vehicle normal load for var-
ious designated seating capacitiesSidewall separationThe parting of the rubber compound from 
the cord materia l in the sidewall
Snow tireA tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Trac-tion in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is 
marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at 
least one sidewall
Test rimThe rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, 
and may be any rim lis ted as appropriate 
for use with that tire
TreadThat portion of a tire  that comes into con-
tact with the road
Tread ribA tread section running circumferentially 
around a tire
Tread separationPulling away of the tread  from the tire car-
cass
Treadwear indicators (TWI)The projections wit hin the principal 
grooves designed to g ive a visual indica-
tion of the degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixtureThe fixture used to hol d the wheel and tire 
assembly securely during testingTire related term Meaning
Designated seating 
capacity, Number of 
occupantsVehicle normal load, 
Number of occupantsOccupant distribution in 
a normally loaded vehi-
cle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 32 in front, 1 in second 
seat

547 9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_U9Vehicle specifications11 through 15 52 in front, 1 in second 
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in 
fourth seat
16 through 20 72 in front, 2 in second 
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in 
fourth seatDesignated seating 
cle

548 9-2. Customization
COROLLA_U9-2.Customization
■Changing by using the 
audio system screen
3Select “General” or “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
Various setting can be changed. 
Refer to the list o f settings that can 
be changed for details.
meter control switches
control switch to select .2Press  or  of the meter 
control switch to select the 
desired item to be custom-ized.
3Press or press and hold .
The available settings will differ 
depending on if  is pressed or 
pressed and held. Follow the 
instructions on the display.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other func-
tions being customized. Contact y our Toyota dealer for further 
details.
Settings that can be changed using the audio system screen
Settings that can be changed using the meter control switchesCustomizable features
Your vehicle includes a vari-
ety of electronic features that can be personalized to suit your preferences. The settings of these features can be changed using the multi-information display, the audio system screen, or at your Toyota dealer.
Customizing vehicle fea-
tures
WARNING
■During customization
As the engine needs to be run-
ning during customization, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a 
place with adequate ventilation. In 
a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases in cluding harmful 
carbon monoxide (CO) may col-lect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious 
NOTICE
ensure that the engine is running while customizing features.

549 9-2. Customization
COROLLA_U9Vehicle specificationsSettings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Av ailable, — = Not available
■Gauges, meters and multi-information display ( P.72, 77, 81, 
86)
*1:For details about each function: P.90
*2:The default setting varies according to country.Function*1 Default setting Customized setting
Language EnglishFrench
OO—
Spanish
Units*2 miles (MPG)km (km/L)
—O—km (L/100 km)
miles (MPG Impe-
rial)
Speedometer display*3 Analog Digital —O—
Light*4On Off —O—
Fuel economy displayTotal average 
(Average fuel 
consumption 
[after reset])Trip average (Aver-
age fuel consump-
tion [after start])
—O—Tank average 
(Average fuel con-
sumption [after 
refuel])
Audio system linked dis-
playOn Off —O—
Drive information type After start After reset —O—
Drive information items (First item)DistanceAverage vehicle 
speed—O—
Elapsed time
Drive information items (Second item)Elapsed timeAverage vehicle 
speed—O—
Distance
Pop-up display On Off —O—

550 9-2. Customization
COROLLA_U*3:7-inch display
■Door lock ( P.103, 108, 513)
*: Vehicles with a continuous ly variable transmission
■Smart key system* and wireless remote control* (P.103, 111)Function Default setting Customized setting
Unlocking using a keyDriver’s door 
unlocked in 
one step, all 
doors 
two stepAll doors unlocked 
in one step—— O
function*Shift position 
linked door 
locking opera-
tionOff
O— OSpeed linked door 
locking operation
Automatic door unlock-ing function
*Shift position 
unlocking 
operationOff
O— ODriver’s door linked 
door unlocking 
operation
Locking/unlocking of the 
trunk when all doors are locked/unlocked On Off —— O
Function Default setting Customized setting
Operating signal (Buzz-ers)5Off
O— O
1 to 7
Operation signal (Emer-gency flashers)On Off O— O
Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked
60 secondsOff
O— O30 seconds
120 seconds
Open door warning buzzerOn Off —— O

551 9-2. Customization
COROLLA_U9Vehicle specifications*: If equipped
■Smart key system* (P.103, 111)
■Wireless remote control* (P.98, 103, 108)
*: If equippedFunction Default setting Customized setting
Smart key system On Off —— O
Smart door unlocking Driver’s door All the doors O— O
Time elapsed before 
unlocking all the door when gripping and hold-ing the driver’s door handle
2.0 secondsOff
—— O1.5 seconds
2.5 seconds
Number of consecutive door lock operations2 timesAs many as 
desired—— O
Wireless remote control On Off —— O
Unlocking operationDriver’s door 
doors 
in one stepO— O
Trunk unlocking opera-tion Press and hold 
(short)One short press
—— OPush twice
Press and hold 
(long)
Off
Theft deterrent panic modeOn Off —— O
Locking operation when door openedOn Off O— O

552 9-2. Customization
COROLLA_U■Power windows and moon roof* (P.127, 130)
■Moon roof* (P.130)
■Automatic light control system ( P.170)Function Default setting Customized setting
Mechanical key linked 
operationOff On —— O
Wireless remote control linked operationOff On (open only) —— O
Wireless remote control linked operation signal (buzzer)
On Off —— O
Linked operation of com-ponents when key is used (open only)
Slide only Tilt only —— O
Linked operation of com-ponents when wireless remote control is used
Light sensor sensitivity Standard -2 to 2 O— O
Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed
30 secondsOff
O— O 60 seconds
90 seconds
Windshield wiper linked headlight illuminationOn Off —— O

553 9-2. Customization
COROLLA_U9Vehicle specifications■Lights (P.170)
*1:Except for Canada
■PCS (Pre-Collision System) ( P.187)
■LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)*/LDA (Lane Departure Alert with 
steering control)* (P.195, 205)
■RSA (Road Sign Assist)* (P.233)Function Default setting Customized setting
Daytime running light 
systemOn Off*1 O— O
AFS (Adaptive Front-
lighting System)*2On Off —— O
PCS (Pre-Collision Sys-
tem)On Off — O—
Adjust alert timing MiddleFar
— O—
Near
Lane centering function* On Off — O—
Steering assist function On Off — O—
Alert sensitivity High Standard — O—
Vehicle sway warning functionOn Off — O—
Vehicle sway warning sensitivityStandardHigh
— O—
Low
RSA (Road Sign Assist) On Off — O—

554 9-2. Customization
■BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)* (P.236)
■Automatic air conditioning system* (P.391)
*: If equippedExcess speed notifica-
tion methodDisplay onlyNo notification
— O—
Display and buzzer
Excess speed notifica-tion level1 mph (2 km/h)5 mph (10 km/h)
— O—
3 mph (5 km/h)
Other notifications method (Do not enter notification)
Display onlyNo notification
— O—
BSM (Blind Spot Moni-tor)On Off — O—
Outside rear view mirror indicator brightnessBright Dim — O—
Alert timing for pres-ence of approaching vehicle (sensitivity)
IntermediateEarly
— O—Late
Only when vehicle 
detected in blind 
spot
A/C auto switch opera-tionOn Off O— OFunction Default setting Customized setting

555 9-2. Customization
COROLLA_U9Vehicle specifications■Illumination ( P.398)
■Vehicle customization
●When the smart key system is off, 
Smart door unlocking cannot be customized.
●When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the 
automatic door lock function is 
activated, the sig nals will be gen-
erated in accordance with the 
operation signal (buzzer) and the 
operation signal (emergency flashers) settings.
■In the following situations, cus-
tomize mode in which the set-
tings can be changed through the multi-information display 
will automatically be turned off
●The engine switch is turned off.
●The vehicle begins to move while 
the customize mode screen is dis-
played.Function Default setting Customized setting
Time elapsed before the 
interior lights turn off15 secondsOff
O— O 7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation after the engine switch is turned off
On Off —— O
Operation when the doors are unlockedOn Off —— O
Operation when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key 
on your person
*On Off —— O
Cup holder lights* and 
center tray light*On Off —— O
Door trim lights* On Off —— O

556 9-3. Initialization
COROLLA_U9-3.Initialization
*: If equippedItems to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system 
operation after such cases as the battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle:
List of items to initialize
Item When to initialize Reference
LDA (Lane Depar-
ture Alert with 
steering control)*• After reconnecting or changing 
the batteryP.213
LTA (Lane Tracing 
Assist)*• After reconnecting or changing 
the batteryP.205
Message indicat-
ing maintenance is required • After maintenance is performed P.428
Tire pressure warn-
ing system*• When rotating front and rear 
tires which have different tire 
inflation pressures
• When changing the tire size• When the tire inflation pressure 
is changed such as when changing traveling speed or load weight
• When changing between two 
registered wheel setsP.450

557
COROLLA_U10
10For ownersFor owners
.10-1.For owners
Reporting safety defects for 
U.S. owners............... 558
Seat belt instructions for 
Canadian owners (in 
French)...................... 558
French)...................... 560

558 10-1. For owners
COROLLA_U10-1.For owners
Déroulez la sangle diagonale 
de telle sorte qu'elle passe 
bien sur l'épaule, sans pour 
autant être en contact avec le cou ou glisser de l'épaule.
Placez la sangle abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches.
Réglez la position du dossier de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos droit et calez-vous bien dans le siège.
Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de Reporting safety 
defects for U.S. own-ers
If you believe that your vehicle 
has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notify-ing Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy cam-paign. However, NHTSA can-not become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov  ; or 
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov .Seat belt instructions 
for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French 
explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.
Utilisation correcte des 
ceintures de sécurité

559 10-1. For owners
COROLLA_U10For ownerssécurité.
■Traitement des ceintures de 
sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humidifiés avec de l'eau savonneuse tiède. Vérifiez régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas usées, effilochées ou entaillées excessivement.Entretien et soin
WARNING
■Détérioration et usure des 
Inspectez le système de ceintures de sécurité régulièrement. Con-
trôlez l'absence de coupures, 
d'effilochages et de pièces desserrées. N'utilisez pas une 
ceinture de sécurité endommagée 
avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité endom-
magée ne permet pas de protéger 
un occupant de blessures graves ou mortelles.

560 10-1. For owners
COROLLA_U■Emplacement des coussins gonflables SRS
Coussins gonflables frontaux SRS
Coussin gonflable conducteur/c oussin gonflable du passager 
avant SRS
Participe à la prote ction de la tête et du thorax du conducteur  et du pas-
sager avant contre les chocs cont re les éléments de l'habitacle
Coussin gonflable de genoux SRS
Participe à la prote ction du conducteur
Coussin gonflable de coussin de siège SRS
Contribue à retenir le passager avantSRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in 
French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instruc-
tions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instruc -
tions in English.
Système de coussins gonflables SRS

561 10-1. For owners
COROLLA_U10For ownersCoussins gonflables l atéraux et rideaux SRS
Coussins gonflables latéraux avant SRS
Participent à la protection du torse des occupants de siège ava nt
Coussins gonflables rideaux SRS
• Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des occu pants des 
sièges latéraux
• Peut contribuer à empêc her les occupants d’ être éjectés du véh icule en 
cas de tonneau
■Composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS
Coussin gonflable de coussin de siège
Système de classification de l'occupant du siège passager avant 
(ECU et capteurs)
Témoins indicateurs “AIR BAG ON” et “AIR BAG OFF”Coussin gonflable passager avantCoussins gonflables rideauxCapteurs d'impact latéral (portes avant)Coussins gonflables latérauxPrétensionneurs de ceintures de sécurité et limiteurs de forceCapteurs d'impact latéral (arrière)Capteurs d'impact latéral (avant)
Coussin gonflable conducteur
Contact de boucle de ceinture de sécurité conducteurCapteur de position du siège conducteur

562 10-1. For owners
COROLLA_UCoussin gonflable de genoux du conducteur
Témoin d'avertissement SRS
Capteurs d'impact avantEnsemble de capteurs de coussins gonflables
Votre véhicule est équipé de COUSSINS GONFLABLES INTELLI-
GENTS conçus selon les normes de sécurité américaines applica-
bles aux véhicules à moteur (FM VSS208). L'ensemble de capteurs 
de coussins gonflables (ECU) régule le déploiement des coussins  
gonflables sur la base des informa tions qu'il reçoit des capteu rs, 
etc., indiqués ci-dessus dans le schéma illustrant les composan ts du 
système. Parmi ces informations figurent la gravité du choc et l'occu-
pation du véhicule par les pass agers. Le déploiement rapide des  
coussins gonflables est obtenu au moyen d'une réaction chimique  
dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffen sif per-
mettant d'amortir le mouvement des occupants.
WARNING
■Précautions relatives aux 
coussins gonflables SRS
Respectez les précautions suiva-ntes concernant les coussins gon-
flables SRS.
Le non-respect de ces précau-tions peut occasionner des bless-
ures graves, voire mortelles.
●Le conducteur et tous les pas-
sagers du véhicule doivent por-ter correctement leur ceinture 
de sécurité.
Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des disposit ifs supplémen-
taires à utiliser avec les cein-tures de sécurité.●Le coussin gonflable conduc-teur SRS se déploie avec une 
force considérable, pouvant 
occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le 
conducteur se trouve très près 
du coussin gonflable. L'autorité fédérale chargée de la sécurité 
routière aux États-Unis 
(NHTSA) conseille:
La zone à risque du coussin gon-
flable conducteur se situant dans 
les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm) de déploiement, vous placer 
à 10 in. (250 mm) de votre cous-
sin gonflable conducteur vous garantit une marge de sécurité. 
Cette distance est à mesurer 
entre le centre du volant et le ster-num. Si vous êtes assis à moins 
de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez 
changer votre position de con-duite de plusieurs façons:
• Reculez votre siège le plus pos-
sible, de manière à pouvoir 
encore atteindr e confortable-
ment les pédales.

563 10-1. For owners
COROLLA_U10For ownersWARNING
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier 
du siège.
Bien que les véhicules aient une 
conception différente, un grand 
nombre de conducteurs peu-vent s'asseoir à une distance de 
10 in. (250 mm), même avec le 
siège conducteur  complètement 
avancé, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier de siège. Si 
vous avez des difficultés à voir 
la route après avoir incliné le dossier de votre siège, utilisez 
un coussin ferme et antidéra-pant pour vous rehausser ou remontez le siège si votre 
véhicule est équipé de cette 
fonction.
• Si votre volant est réglable, 
inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a 
pour effet d'orienter le coussin 
gonflable en direction de votre poitrine plutôt que de votre tête 
et de votre cou.
Réglez votre siège selon les 
recommandations de la NHTSA ci-dessus, tout en conservant le 
contrôle des pédales, du volant et 
la vue des commandes du tab-leau de bord.●Si vous attachez une rallonge 
de ceinture de sécurité aux bou-
cles de ceinture de sécurité avant, sans l'attacher au pêne 
de la ceinture de sécurité, les 
coussins gonflables frontaux SRS déterminent que le con-
ducteur et le passager avant ont 
attaché leur ceinture de sécu-rité, bien que la ceinture de 
sécurité ne soit pas attachée. 
Dans ce cas, les coussins gon-flables frontaux SRS peuvent 
ne pas se déployer correcte-
ment en cas de collision, pou-vant occasionner des blessures 
graves, voire mortelles. Veillez 
à porter la ceinture de sécurité avec la rallonge de ceinture de 
sécurité.
●Le coussin gonflable passager 
avant SRS se déploie égale-
ment avec une force con-sidérable, pouvant occasionner 
des blessures graves, voire 
mortelles, si le passager avant se trouve très près du coussin 
gonflable. Le siège du passager 
avant doit être éloigné le plus possible du coussin gonflable 
en réglant le dossier de siège 
de façon à ce que le passager avant soit assis bien droit dans 
le siège.

564 10-1. For owners
●Les nourrissons et les enfants 
qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou attachés peuvent 
être grièvement blessés ou tués 
par le déploiement d'un coussin gonflable. Un nourrisson ou un 
enfant trop petit  pour utiliser une 
ceinture de sécu rité doit être 
correctement attaché au moyen 
d'un siège de sécurité enfant. 
Toyota recommande vivement 
d'installer tous les nourrissons et enfants sur les sièges arrière 
du véhicule et de prévoir pour 
eux des systèmes de retenue adaptés. Les sièges arrière sont 
plus sûrs pour les nourrissons 
et les enfants que le siège du passager avant.
●Ne vous asseyez pas sur le 
bord du siège et ne vous 
appuyez pas contre la planche de bord.
●Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout devant le coussin gon-
flable passager avant SRS ou 
s'asseoir sur les genoux du pas-sager avant.
●Ne laissez pas les occupants des sièges avant voyager avec 
un objet sur les genoux.●Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte, le rail latéral de toit ou les 
montants avant, latéraux et arrière.
●Ne laissez personne s'age-nouiller sur le s iège passager 
en appui contre la porte ou sor-tir la tête ou les mains à l'extérieur du véhicule.
●Ne fixez rien et ne posez rien sur des emplacements tels que 
la planche de bord, la garniture 
du volant et la partie inférieure du tableau de bord.
Ces éléments peuvent se trans-
former en projectiles lorsque les coussins gonflables conducteur, 
passager avant et genoux SRS 
se déploient.

565 10-1. For owners
●Ne fixez rien aux portes, à la 
vitre du pare-brise, aux vitres latérales, aux montants avant et 
arrière, au rail latéral de toit et à 
la poignée de maintien. (Sauf pour l'étiquette d e limitation de 
vitesse)
●Véhicules sans système d'accès et de démarrage mains 
libres: Ne fixez pas d'objets 
lourds, pointus ou très durs, tels que des clés et des accessoires 
aux clés. Ces objets risquent 
d'entraver le déploiement du coussin gonflable de genoux 
SRS ou d'être projetés vers le 
siège conducteur par la force de déploiement du coussin gon-
flable, constituant ainsi un dan-
ger potentiel.
●Ne suspendez aucun cintre ou objet dur aux crochets à vête-ments. Tous ces objets pour-
raient se transformer en 
projectiles et c auser des bless-
ures graves, voire mortelles en 
cas de déploiement des couss-
ins gonflables rideaux SRS.●Si un cache en vinyle est placé 
sur la zone où le coussin gon-
flable de genoux du conducteur SRS se déploie, assurez-vous 
de le retirer.
●N'utilisez aucun a ccessoire de 
siège recouvrant les zones de 
déploiement des coussins gon-
flables latéraux SRS et du cous-
sin gonflable de coussin de siège SRS, car il risque de 
gêner le déploiement des cous-
sins gonflables SRS. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher 
les coussins gonfl ables latéraux 
et le coussin gonflable de cous-
sin de siège de s 'activer cor-
rectement, désactiver le système ou entraîner le déploie-ment accidentel des coussins 
gonflables latéraux et du cous-
sin gonflable de coussin de siège, occasionnant des bless-
●Évitez de faire subir des chocs 
ou des pressions excessives aux parties renfermant les com-
posants de coussins gonflables 
SRS ou aux portes avant.En effet, cela pourrait entraîner 
un dysfonctionnement des 
coussins gonflables SRS.
●Ne touchez aucun composant immédiatement après le 
déploiement (gonflage) des 
coussins gonflables SRS, car ils peuvent être chauds.
●Si vous avez des difficultés à 
respirer après le déploiement 
des coussins gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte  ou une vitre 
pour faire entrer de l'air frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger. Essuyez tout résidu dès que 
possible afin d'éviter d'éventu-
elles irritations de la peau.

566 10-1. For owners
●Si les parties r enfermant les 
coussins gonflables SRS, 
comme les garnitures du volant 
et des montants avant et 
arrière, sont endommagées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer 
par votre concessionnaire Toy-
ota.
●Ne placez rien sur le siège du passager avant, comme un coussin par exemple. Cela a 
pour conséquence de répartir le 
poids du passager sur toute la surface du siège, ce qui 
empêche le capteur de détecter 
correctement le poids du pas-sager. En conséquence, les 
coussins gonflables frontaux 
SRS du passage r avant ris-
quent de ne pas se déployer en 
cas de collision.
■Modification et mise au rebut 
des composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS
Ne mettez pas votre véhicule au rebut et ne procédez à aucune 
des modifications suivantes sans 
consulter votre concessionnaire Toyota. Les coussins gonflables 
SRS peuvent ne pas fonctionner 
correctement ou se déployer (se gonfler) acciden tellement, provo-
quant la mort ou de graves bless-ures.
●Installation, dépose, démon-tage et réparation des coussins 
gonflables SRS
●Réparations, modifications, 
démontage ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de bord, 
de la planche de bord, des 
sièges ou de leur garnissage, des montants avant, latéraux et 
arrière, des rails latéraux de toit, 
des panneaux de porte avant, des garnitures de porte avant 
ou des haut-par leurs de porte 
avant●Modifications du panneau de porte avant (par exemple, 
perçage d'un trou dans le pan-neau)
●Réparations ou modifications 
des ailes avant, du pare-chocs 
avant ou des flancs de l'habita-cle
●Installation d'un protège-calan-
dre (pare-buffle, pare-kangou-
rou, etc.), de chasse-neige, de treuils ou d'un porte-bagages de 
toit
●Modifications du système de 
suspension du véhicule
●Installation d'ap pareils électro-
niques tels que les émet-
teurs/récepteurs radios mobiles 
et les lecteurs CD
●Modifications de votre véhicule pour une personne atteinte d'un 
handicap physique

567
COROLLA_UIndex
.What to do if... (Trouble-
shooting) ................... 568
Alphabetical Index....... 571

568 What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
COROLLA_U1-1.What to do if... (Troubleshooting)What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
If you lose your keys or 
mechanical keys, new genu-ine keys or mechanical keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. ( P.513)
If you lose your keys or elec-tronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. ( P.513)
Is the key battery weak or depleted? ( P.458)
Vehicles with a smart key sys-tem: Is the engine switch in ON?
When locking the doors, turn the 
engine switch off. ( P.150 )
Vehicles with a smart key sys-
tem: Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?When locking the doors, make sure 
that you have the electronic key on 
your person.
The function may not operate 
properly due to the condition of the radio wave. ( P.99, 
113)
Is the child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be opened 
from inside the vehicle when the lock is set. Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector lock. ( 
P.107 )
mission: Is the shift lever in P? (P.147)
Manual transmission: Do you turn the key with the clutch pedal depressed firmly? (P.147)
Is the steering wheel unlocked? ( P.147)
Is the battery discharged? (P.515)If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your Toyota dealer.
The doors cannot be 
locked, unlocked, opened 
or closed
You lose your keys
locked or unlockedThe rear door cannot be opened
wrong
The engine does not start 
(vehicles without a smart key system)

569 1-1. What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
COROLLA_U569 What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
mission: Did you press the engine switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal? (P.148)
Manual transmission: Did you press the engine switch while firmly depressing the clutch pedal? ( P.148)
Continuously variable trans-mission: Is the shift lever in P? (P.148)
Is the electronic key any-where detectable inside the vehicle? ( P.112)
Is the steering wheel unlocked? ( P.149)
Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?
In this case, the engine can be 
started in a temporary way. (
P.514 )
Is the battery discharged? 
(P.515)
Is the engine switch in ON?If you cannot release the shift lever 
by depressing the brake pedal with 
the engine switch in ON. ( P.154 )
Vehicles without a smart key 
system: It is locked to prevent theft of the vehicle if the key is pulled from the engine switch. (P.147)
Vehicles with a smart key sys-tem: It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. (P.149)
Is the window lock switch pressed?
The power window except for the 
one at the driver’s seat cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. ( 
P.129 )
The auto power off function 
will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACC or ON (the engine is not running) for a period of time. ( P.151)The engine does not start 
system)
The shift lever cannot be 
shifted from P even if you depress the brake pedal (continuously variable transmission)The steering wheel can-not be turned after the engine is stopped
The windows do not open 
or close by operating the power window switches
The engine switch is 
turned off aut omatically 
(vehicles with a smart key system)
A warning buzzer sounds 
during driving

570 What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
COROLLA_UThe seat belt reminder light is 
flashing
Are the driver and the passenger 
wearing the seat belts? ( P.484 )
The parking brake indicator is 
on
Is the parking brake released? 
(P.163, 164 )
Depending on the situation, 
other types of warning buzzer may also sound. ( P.481, 490)
Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm?
The sensor detects it and the alarm 
sounds. ( P.69 )
ACC or ON, or start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a 
few seconds.)
Is the electronic key left inside 
the vehicle?
Check the message on the 
multi-information display. ( P.490 )When a warning light turns on 
or a warning message is dis-played, refer to P.481, 490.
Vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit: Stop the vehicle in a safe place and repair the flat tire temporarily with the emergency tire punc-ture repair kit. ( P.493)
Vehicles with a spare tire: Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire. ( P.503)
Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. ( P.521)An alarm is activated and 
the horn sounds (vehicles with an alarm)
when leaving the vehicle (vehicles with a smart key system)A warning light turns on or a warning message is 
displayed
When a problem has 
occurred
If you have a flat tire
The vehicle becomes 
stuck

571 1-1. What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
COROLLA_U571 Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index
A
A/C
Air conditioning filter.............457
tem .....................................391
Manual air conditioning system
...........................................386
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
...............................................250
Warning light ........................483
ACA (Active Cornering Assist)
...............................................251
Active Cornering Assist (ACA)
Adaptive Front-lighting System 
(AFS)......................................172
System) .................................172
Air conditioning filter.............457Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter.............457Automatic air conditioning sys-
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions....31Airbag precautions for your child
.............................................34
Correct driving posture...........23Curtain shield airbag operating 
conditions.............................32
Curtain shield airbag precautions
sification system...................39
General airbag precautions....34Locations of airbags ...............29Modification and disposal of air-
bags .....................................37Side airbag operating conditions
.............................................32
Side airbag precautions..........34Side and curtain shield airbags 
operating conditions .............32
Side and curtain shield airbags 
precautions...........................34
SRS airbags ...........................29SRS warning light.................482
Alarm
Alarm ......................................69Warning buzzer ....................481
AM............................................307Anchor brackets ... ..............48, 58
Antennas (smart key system) 111Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Warning light.........................483
Apple CarPlay .................292, 293Approach warning..........219, 229Apps button (Menu screen)...263Armrest......... ............ ............. ..413
Assist grips.............................413Audio .......................................302
Audio source ........................303Operating information...........324Reordering the audio source 303Screen adjustment ...............305Some basics.........................303Sound settings......................304Turning the sys tem on and off
...........................................303
USB/AUX port ......................304Voice command system .......306
AUDIO button..........................261Audio button (Menu screen)..263Audio settings.........................323
Common settings .................323Radio settings.......................323
Audio source...........................303Audio system-linked display...90

572 Alphabetical Index
COROLLA_UAutomatic air conditioning sys-
tem.........................................391
Automatic headlight leveling 
system...................................171
Automatic High Beam............173
Automatic light control system
...............................................171
AUX..........................................319Average fuel economy .............88Average vehicle speed.............90
B
Replacing light bulbs ............469Wattage................................533
Battery
Battery checking...................442If the battery is discharged ...515Preparing and c hecking before 
winter..................................255
Warning light ........................482
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)......236Bluetooth
® audio....................316
Registering/Conn ecting a Blue-
tooth® device......................318
Bluetooth® button (Setup 
screen) ..................................266
Bluetooth® details settings ...280
Bluetooth® setup screen ......280
Connecting a Bluetooth® device
...........................................281
Deleting a Bluetooth® device283
Detailed settings screen.......285Displaying the Bluetooth
® setup 
screen ................................280
Editing the Bluetooth® device 
information .........................283
Registering a Bluetooth® device
...........................................282
Bluetooth® device information
...............................................283Bluetooth® hands-free system
...............................................345
Bluetooth® phone message func-
tion.........................................356
Calling the message sender.359Checking received messages
...........................................357
Displaying the message screen
...........................................356
Receiving a mess age ...........356
Replying to a message (dicta-
tion reply)............................358
Replying to a message (quick 
reply) ..................................358
Bottle holders .........................401Brake
Brake hold ............................167Fluid..............................441, 530Parking brake ...............163, 164Warning light.........................481
Brake assist ............................250Break-in tips............................136Brightness control
Instrument panel light control79, 
84
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)......236
C
Care
Aluminum wheels .................422Exterior .................................422Interior ..................................424Seat belts .............................424
Cargo capacity........................145Chains......................................256Child restraint system
Fixed with a LATCH system ...56Fixed with a seat belt..............51Front passenger occupant clas-
sification system ...................39
Points to remember ................46Riding with children ................45

573 1-1. What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
COROLLA_U573 Alphabetical Index
Types of child restraint system 
installation met hod ...............48
Using an anchor bracket ........58
Child safety
Airbag precautions .................34
Battery precautions ......443, 519Child restraint system.............48Heated steering wheel and seat 
heater precautions .............396
How your child should wear the 
seat belt................................26
Moon roof precau tions .........131
Power window lock switch....129Power window precautions ..128Rear door child-protectors....107Removed electronic key battery 
precautions.........................460
Seat belt extender precautions
.............................................26
Seat belt precautions .............45Trunk precautions.................108
Child-protectors .....................107Cleaning
Aluminum wheels .................422Exterior.................................422Interior ..................................424Radar sensor........................181Seat belts .............................424
Clock ...............77, 79, 81, 84, 297Coat hooks..............................413Command list .........................339Condenser ..............................440Console box............................402Consumption screen................92Continuously variable transmis-
sion................................153, 155
from P.........................154, 157
M mode ................................158Paddle shift switches....157, 158
Cooling system ......................440
Engine overheating ..............519Cruise control
Dynamic radar cruise control223Dynamic radar cruise control 
with full-speed range ..........213
Cup holders.............................401Current fuel consumption........88Curtain shield airbags..............29Customizable featu res ...........548
D
Daytime running light system170DCM .................................377, 378Defogger
Outside rear view mirrors ...388, 
392
Rear window.................388, 392Windshield....................387, 392
Dimensions .............................524Dinghy towing.........................146Display
steering control)..................210
LTA (Lane-Tracing Assist).....201Multi-information display.........86Warning message.................490
Display change button.......78, 83Do-it-yourself maintenance ...428Door lock
Doors....................................103Key .......................................104Smart key system................. 111Wireless remote control..........98
Doors
Automatic door locking and 
unlocking system................107
Door glasses ........................127Door lock ..............................103Open door warning buzzer .105, 
107

574 Alphabetical Index
COROLLA_UOutside rear view mirrors .....125
Rear door child-protectors....107Side doors ............................103
Drive distance...........................90Drive information .....................90Drive-start control ..................136Driving
Break-in tips .........................136Correct driving posture...........23Driving mode select switch...249Procedures...........................134Winter drive tips ...................255
Driving information display.....87Driving range ............................88Driving support system informa-
tion display .............................89
Dynamic radar cruise control223
Warning message ................231
with full-speed range ...........213
Warning message ................222
E
Eco Driving Indicator ...............88Eco Driving Indicator Light .....88EDR (Event data recorder).........8Elapsed time .............................90Electric Power Steering (EPS)
Warning light ........................484
Electronic key...........................96
Battery-saving fun ction......... 112
operate properly.................513
Replacing the battery ...........458
Emergency flashers ...............472Emergency tire puncture repair 
kit ...........................................493
Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer sounds ..481If a warning light turns on .....481If a warning message is dis-
played.................................490
If the battery is d ischarged ...515
operate properly .................513
If the engine will not start......511If the vehicle is trapped in rising 
water...................................474
If you have a flat tire .....493, 503If you lose your keys.............513If you think something is wrong
...........................................479
If your vehicle becomes stuck
...........................................521
in an emergency.................472
...........................................475
If your vehicle ove rheats ......519
Enform App Suite button (Setup 
screen)...................................266
Engine
ACCESSORY mode . ............151
Compartment........................436Engine switch ...............147, 148Fuel pump shut off system ...480Hood.....................................434How to start the engine 147, 148Identification number ............525If the engine will not start......511If your vehicle has to be stopped 
Ignition switch (engine switch)
...................................147, 148
Overheating..........................519Tachometer.......................77, 81
Engine coolant
Capacity ...............................528Checking ..............................440Preparing and checking before 

575 1-1. What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
COROLLA_U575 Alphabetical Index
Engine coolant temperature 
gauge.................................77, 81
Engine immobilizer system.....67
Engine oil
Capacity .......................526, 527Checking ..............................437Preparing and c hecking before 
Engine switch .................147, 148
Auto power off function ........151Changing the engine switch 
modes ................................151
Enhanced VSC........................251Entering letters and num-
bers/list screen operation ...271
Entering letters  and numbers271
List screen............................272
Entune Audio buttons overview
...............................................261
EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Establishing an Apple CarPlay 
connection ............................292
Event data recorder (EDR).........8
F
Flat tire
Tire pressure warning system
...........................................447
Vehicles with a spare tire .....503Vehicles without a spare tire 493
Floor mats.................................22Fluid
Brake....................................530Clutch ...................................530Continuously variable transmis-
sion.....................................529
Washer.................................443FM ............................................307Front passenger occupant clas-
sification system ....................39
Front seats
Adjustment ...........................118Cleaning ...............................424Correct driving posture ...........23Head restraints .....................121Seat heaters ....... ..................396
Light switch...........................170Replacing light bulbs ............466Wattage ................................533
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ............465Turn signal lever...................162Wattage ................................533
Front turn signal/parking lights
Replacing light bulbs ............465
Fuel
Capacity ...............................526Fuel gauge .......................77, 81Fuel pump shut off system ...480Information ......... ..................535
Refueling ..............................178Type......................................526Warning light.........................484
Fuel consumption
Average fuel economy............88Current fuel consumption .......88
Fuel economy ...........................88Fuel filler door
Refueling ..............................178
Fuel gauge...........................77, 81Fuel pump shut off system....480Fuses .......................................461
G
Garage door opene r .......... .....414
Gauges ................................77, 81General button (Setup screen)
.......................................266, 296

576 Alphabetical Index
COROLLA_UGeneral settings .....................296
Displaying the general settings 
screen ................................296
General settings screen .......296
Glove box................................401
Glove box light .......................401
H
Hands-free system .................345Head restraints .......................121Headlights
(AFS)..................................172
Automatic High Beam system
...........................................173
Light switch ..........................170
Headlights/daytime running 
lights
Heated steering wheel ...........396Heaters
Heated steering wheel .........396Manual air conditioning system
392
Seat heaters.........................396
High mounted stoplight
Hill-start assist control ..........251HOME button ..........................270Home screen...........................270Hood
Open ....................................434
Hooks
Coat hooks...........................413Retaining hooks (floor mat) ....22
Horn.........................................123I
I/M test .....................................431Identification
Engine ..................................525Vehicle..................................524
.......................................147, 148
Auto power off fun ction.........151
Changing the engine switch 
modes.................................151
Illuminated entry system .......399Indicators ..................................74Info button (Menu screen) .....263Initial screen............................267
Caution screen .....................267Restarting the system...........267
Initialization
Items to initialize...................556Maintenance.........................428Power windows ....................127Tire pressure w arning system
...........................................450
Inside rear view m irror...........124
84
Interior lights...........................398
Front interior light .................398Rear interior light ..................398Wattage ................................533
Internet radio...........................309iPod/iPhone.............................313
J
Jack
Positioning a floor jack .........435Vehicle-equipped jack ..494, 504
Jack handle.....................494, 504Jam protection function
Moon roof .............................130

577 1-1. What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
COROLLA_U577 Alphabetical Index
Power windows ....................127
K
Keyless entry
Smart key system................. 111
Wireless remote control .........98
Keys
Electronic key.........................96Engine switch ...............147, 148If the electronic key does not 
If you lose your keys ............513Key number plate ...................96Keyless entry................ 103, 111Mechanical key ......................96Replacing the battery ...........458Warning buzzer .................... 112Wireless remote control .........98
Knee airbags.............................29
L
Lane Departure A lert with steer-
ing control (LDA)
Operation .............................205Warning messages...............212
Lane Tracing Assist (LTA)
Operation .............................195Warning messages...............204
Language (multi-information dis-
play).........................................90
LATCH anchors ........................56LDA (Lane Departure Alert with 
steering control)
steering control) switch.......209
LED accent lights
Light switch ..........................170Replacing light bulbs ............465Lever
Auxiliary catch lever .............434Hood lock release lever........434Internal trunk rele ase lever... 111
Shift lever .............153, 155, 160Turn signal lever...................162Wiper lever ...........................176
License plate lights
Light switch...........................170Replacing light bulbs ............465Wattage ................................533
Replacing .............................464
Lights
Front interior lights................398Headlight switch ...................170Interior lights.........................398Interior lights list ...................398Personal lights......................399Rear interior lights ................398Replacing light bulbs ............465Trunk light.............................110Turn signal lever...................162Vanity lights ..........................412Wattage ................................533
and the system .....................275
Lock steering column ....147, 149LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
Operation..............................195Warning messages...............204
M
Do-it-yourself maintenance ..432General maintenance ...........428Maintenance data.................524Maintenance requirements...427
Malfunction indicator lamp....482

578 Alphabetical Index
COROLLA_UManual air conditioning system
...............................................386
Manual transmission .............160
iMT .......................................161
Media button (Menu screen)..263
Menu icons ...............................86Menu screen ...........................263
Menu screen operation ........263
Meter
Clock ................................77, 81Indicators................................74Instrument panel light control79, 
84
Meter control switches ...........87Meters ..............................77, 81Multi-information display ........86
Settings ..................................90Warning lights.......................481Warning message ................490
Microphone.............................348Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror..........124Outside rear view mirror defog-
gers ............................388, 392
Outside rear view mirrors .....125Vanity mirrors .......................412
Mobile Assistant.....................343
Connectable devices and avail-
able functions.....................343
Mobile Assistant operation ...343
Moon roof
Door lock linked moon roof oper-
ation ...................................130
Jam protection function ........130Operation .............................130
Audio system-linked display...90Clock ................................79, 84Driving informatio n display .....87
Driving support system informa-
tion display ...........................89
Eco Driving Indicator ..............88Fuel economy.........................88LDA (Lane Departure Alert with 
LTA (Lane-Tracing Assist).....201Menu icons .............................86Meter control switches............87Navigation system-linked display
.............................................89
Settings ..................................90Tire pressure ...... ..................447
Vehicle information display.....90Warning message.................490
N
Navigation system-linked display
.................................................89
Noise from under ve hicle...........6
O
Odometer.............................78, 83Odometer and trip meter display
Display change button......78, 83Display items ....................78, 83
Oil
Engine oil......................526, 527Manual transmission ............529
Open trays...............................402Opener
Fuel filler door.......................178Hood.....................................434Trunk ....................................109
Adjustment ...........................125BSM (Blind Sport Monitor)....236Folding..................................126Outside rear view mirror defog-
Outside temperatur e ..........77, 81

579 1-1. What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
COROLLA_U579 Alphabetical Index
Overheating ............................519
P
Paddle shift switches.....157, 158
Panic mode ...............................99Parking brake
Operation .....................163, 164Parking brake engaged warning 
buzzer ........................163, 166
Warning light ........................486Warning message ........163, 166
Parking lights
Light switch ..........................170Replacing light bulbs ............465Wattage................................533
Function ...............................187Warning light ........................486
Personal lights .......................398
Wattage................................533
Phone ......................................345
About the contacts in the contact 
list.......................................349
Phone screen operation .......345Registering/Conn ecting a Blue-
tooth
® phone ......................347
Some basics.........................346Troubleshooting....................369Voice command system .......349When selling or disposing of the 
vehicle................................349
Phone button ..........................345Phone button (Menu screen).263Phone button (Setup screen) 266Phone settings .......................360
Contacts/Call history settings362Message settings .................368Notifications settings ............361Sounds settings....................360
Placing a call u sing the Blue-
tooth
® hands-free system ...350
By call history .......................350By contacts list .....................351By favorites list .....................350By home screen ...................352By keypad.............................352
Power outlet............................405Power steering (Electric power 
steering system)...................251
Warning light.........................484
POWER VOLUME knob..........303Power windows
Door lock linked window opera-
tion......................................128
Jam protection function ........127Operation..............................127Window lock switch ..............129
Pre-Collision System (PCS)
Function................................187Warning light.........................486
R
Radar cruise control...............223Radar cruise control (dynamic 
radar cruise control with full-speed range)...................213
Radiator...................................440Radio........................................307
Presetting a station...............307Radio broadcast data system308
Rear seats ...............................119
Head restraints .....................121
Light switch...........................170Replacing light bulbs ....465, 466Wattage ................................533
Replacing light bulbs ....466, 467Turn signal lever...................162Wattage ................................533
Rear view mirror
Inside rear view mirror..........124Outside rear view mirrors .....125

580 Alphabetical Index
COROLLA_URear view monitor system.....241
If you notice any symptoms..246
Rear window defogger...388, 392
tooth® hands-free system ...353
Refueling
Capacity ...............................526Fuel types.............................526Opening the fuel tank cap ....178
tooth
® device........................276
Profiles .................................279Registering a Bluetooth
® audio 
player for the first time........278
Registering a Bluetooth® phone 
for the first time ..................276
Replacing
Electronic key battery...........458Fuses ...................................461Light bulbs............................464Tires .....................................503Wireless remote control battery
...........................................458
owners...................................558
Resetting the message indicat-
ing maintenance is required428
Road Sign Assist....................233RSA (Road Sign Assist).........233
S
Safety Connect .........................61Screen adjustment .................274Seat belt reminder light .484, 485Seat belts ..................................25
Adjusting the seat  belt............27
Automatic Locking Retractor ..27Child restraint system installation
.............................................48
Cleaning and maintaining the 
seat belt..............................424
Emergency Locking Retractor 27How to wear your seat belt.....26How your child should wear the 
Pregnant women, proper seat 
belt use.................................25
Reminder light and buzzer .484, 
485
Seat belt extender ..................26Seat belt pretensioners ..........28SRS warning light.................482
Seat heaters ............................396Seating capacity .....................145Seats
Adjustment ...........................118Adjustment precautions........118Child seats/child restraint system 
installation ............................46
Cleaning ...............................424Head restraints .....................121Properly sitting in the seat ......23Seat heaters ....... ..................396
Secondary Collision Brake....251Sensor
Automatic headlight system .171Automatic High Beam system
BSM (Blind Sport Monitor)....236Inside rear view mirror..........125LDA (Lane Departure Alert with 
steering control)..................205
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) .....195Radar sensor................180, 238
Service reminder message....428Setup button (Menu screen) 263, 
266
Setup screen...........................266Shift lever
sion.............................153, 155
Manual transmission ............160

581 1-1. What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
COROLLA_U581 Alphabetical Index
Shift lock system............154, 157
Side airbags..............................29Side marker lights
Light switch ..........................170Replacing light bulbs ............466Wattage................................533
Side mirrors
Adjustment ...........................125BSM (Blind Sport Monitor) ...236Folding .................................126
Side turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ............465Turn signal lever...................162
Side windows ...... ............. ......127
Smart key system
Antenna location .................. 111Entry functions .....................103Starting the engine ...............148
Snow tires ...............................255Spare tire.................................503
Inflation pressure..................531Storage location ...................504
Spark plug...............................528Specifications.........................524Speedometer ......................77, 81Status icon..............................264
Status icon explanation ........264
Steering lock
Column lock release.....147, 149Steering lock system warning 
message.............................149
Steering switch...............321, 336
Audio switch .........................321Talk switch............................336
Steering wheel
Adjustment ...........................123Heated steering wheel .........396Meter control switches ...........87
Stop lights
Storage features.....................400Stuck
If the vehicle becomes stuck 521
Sun visors ...............................412Sunshade
Roof......................................130
Switches
Brake Hold switch.................167Display change button......78, 83Door lock switches ...............106Driving mode select switch...249Dynamic radar cruise control 
switch .................................224
with full-speed range switch214
Emergency flashers switch...472Engine switch ...............147, 148Garage door opener switches
...........................................414
Heated steering wheel switch
...........................................396
Ignition switch...............147, 148Instrument panel light control 
switches..........................79, 84
Light switches.......................170LTA (Lane-Tracing Assist) switch
...........................................200
Meter control switches............87Moon roof switches ..............130Outside rear v iew mirror 
switches..............................125
Paddle shift switches....157, 158Parking brake switch ............164Power door lock switch.........106Power window switches .......127Rear window and outside rear 
view mirror defoggers switch
...........................................391
Seat heater switches ............396“SOS” button ..........................61

582 Alphabetical Index
COROLLA_UVehicle-to-vehicle distance 
switch .........................214, 224
VSC OFF switch...................251
Window lock switch ..............129Windshield wiper and washer 
switch .................................176
T
Tachometer .........................77, 81Tail lights
Light switch ..........................170Replacing light bulbs ............465
Talking on the Bluetooth
® 
hands-free system ...............354
Call screen operation ...........354Incoming call waiting ............355Sending tones ......................354Transmit volume setting .......355
Theft deterrent system
Alarm......................................69Engine immobilizer system ....67
Tire inflation pre ssure............453
Maintenance data.................531Warning light ........................485
Tire information......................537
Glossary ...............................541Size ......................................539Tire identification number.....539Uniform Tire Quality Grading540
Function ...............................447Initializing .............................450Installing tire pressure warning 
valves and transmitters ......449
Registering ID codes............451Warning light ........................485
Tires
Chains..................................256Checking ..............................444Emergency tire puncture repair 
kit........................................493
If you have a fla t tire.....493, 503Inflation pressure ..................453
Information ......... ..................537
Replacing .............................503Rotating tires ........................446Size ......................................531Snow tires.............................255Spare tire..............................503Tire pressure w arning system
Warning light.........................485
Tools ................................494, 504Top tether strap ........................58Total load capacit y .................524
Touch screen ..........................268
Touch screen gestures .........268Touch screen operation ........268
Towing
Dinghy towing.......................146Emergency towing................475Towing eyelet........................477Trailer towing ...... ..................145
Toyota Entune.........................373Toyota Entune App Suite 
Entering keyword..................381
nect ........................................379
nect settings .........................383
Automatic High Be am...........173
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) .....195PCS (Pre-Collisio n System) .187
RSA (Road Sign Assist)........233
TRAC (Traction Control) ........251Traction Control (TRAC) ........251Trailer towing ..........................145

583 1-1. What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
COROLLA_U583 Alphabetical Index
Transmission
Driving mode select switch...249
iMT .......................................161M mode ................................158Manual transmission ............160Paddle shift switches....157, 158
Trip meters..........................78, 83Trunk .......................................108
Internal trunk release lever... 111Smart key system.................109Trunk light............................. 110Trunk opener........................109Wireless remote control ....... 110
Trunk features ........................403Trunk light............................... 110
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ............465Turn signal lever...................162Wattage................................533
U
USB charging port..................404USB memory........................... 311USB/AUX port .........................304
V
Vanity lights ............................412
Vanity mirrors .........................412Vehicle button (Setup screen)
.......................................266, 300
Vehicle data recording...............7Vehicle identifi cation number524
Vehicle information display.....90Vehicle settings ......................300
Displaying the vehicle settings 
screen.................................300
Valet mode setting................301Vehicle settings screen.........300
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
Voice button (Setup screen) 266, 
299
Voice command system.........336
Using the voice command sys-
tem .....................................336
Voice command system opera-
tion......................................337
Voice settings .........................299
Displaying the voice settings 
screen.................................299
Voice settings screen ...........299
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
W
Warning buzzers
ABS ......................................483Airbags .................................482Approach warning ........219, 229Brake hold ............................487Brake Override System ........483Brake system........................481Charging system ..................482Downshifting.........................159Drive-Start Control ................483
Electric power steering .........484Engine ..................................482High coolant temperature .....481Key reminder ........................148LDA (Lane Departure Alert with 
steering control)..........205, 485
Low engine oil pressure .......482LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ...195, 
485
Open door ....................105, 107

584 Alphabetical Index
COROLLA_USeat belt.......................484, 485
Warning lights ........................481
ABS ......................................483
Brake hold operated indicator
...........................................487
Brake Override System ........483Brake system .......................481Charging system ..................482Drive-Start Control ...............483Electric power steering.........484High coolant temperature.....481iMT indicator.........................487LDA indicator........................485Low engine oil pressure .......482Low fuel level .......................484LTA indicator.........................485Malfunction indicator lamp ...482Parking brake indicator ........486Pre-collision system .............486Seat belt reminder light 484, 485Slip indicator.........................486SRS......................................482Tire pressure ........................485
Warning messages.................490Washer
Checking ..............................443Preparing and c hecking before 
Switch...................................176
Washing and waxing..............422Weight
Cargo capacity .....................145Load limits ............................145
Wheels.....................................455
Replacing .............................455Size ......................................531
Wi-Fi
®......................................287
Connecting a device to the 
in-vehicle access point.......287
Operating hints.....................290
Wi-Fi® button (Setup screen) 266
Wi-Fi® Hotspot........................287Window lock switch ...............129Windows
Power windows ....................127Rear window defogger .388, 392Washer .................................176
Windshield wiper de-icer .......395Windshield wipers..................176Winter driving tips ..................255Wireless charger.....................405Wireless remote control
Battery-Saving Function .......112Locking/Unlocking ..................98Replacing the battery ...........458
For vehicles with Entune 
Audio Plus or Entune Pre-mium Audio, refer to “NAVIGATION AND MUL-TIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL” for information regarding the equipment listed below.
· Navigation system
· Audio/visual system
· Rear view monitor system

585 1-1. What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
COROLLA_U585 Alphabetical Index

587 1-1. What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
COROLLA_U587 Alphabetical Index

588
COROLLA_UGAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever ( P.434)
Hood lock release lever ( P.434)
Fuel filler door ( P.179)
Trunk opener ( P.109)
Fuel filler door opener ( P.179)
Tire inflation pressure ( P.531)
Fuel tank capacity 
(Reference)13.2 gal. (50.0 L , 11.0 Imp. gal.)
Fuel typeP.526
P.535
Cold tire inflation 
pressureP.531
Engine oil capacity (Drain and refill  
reference)P.526
P.527
Engine oil type “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentP.526P.527

The image depicts a bright green car that appears to be damaged, particularly in the front area. The front bumper and hood show signs of significant impact, and it looks like the car may be in a garage or repair shop. There are other vehicles and tools visible in the background.

./data\How to change engine oil and filter on TOYOTA Corolla.txt

How to change engine oil
and filter on TOYOTA
Corolla Verso (AR10) â€“
replacement guide
SIMILAR VIDEO TUTORIAL
This video shows the replacement procedure of a similar car part on another vehicle
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 1â€“10
This replacement procedure can be used for:
TOYOTA Corolla Verso (AR10) 1.6 (ZNR10_), TOYOTA Corolla Verso (AR10) 1.8
(ZNR11_), TOYOTA Corolla Verso (AR10) 1.5, TOYOTA Corolla Verso (AR10) 1.8
The steps may slightly vary depending on the car design.
Important!
This tutorial was created based on the replacement procedure for a similar car part
on: TOYOTA Aygo (AB10) 1
Buy tools
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 2â€“10
REPLACEMENT: ENGINE OIL AND FILTER â€“ TOYOTA
COROLLA VERSO (AR10). LIST OF THE TOOLS YOU'LL
NEED:
All-purpose cleaning spray
Oil filter cup socket 76/14-F
Impact socket â„–15
Ratchet wrench
Torque wrench
Oil drain pan
Funnel
Fender cover
CARRY OUT REPLACEMENT IN THE FOLLOWING ORDER:
1
Open the hood.
2

2
Use a fender protection cover to prevent damaging paintwork and plastic parts of the car.
3
Unscrew the oil filler plug.
4
Lift the car using a jack or place it over an inspection pit.
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 3â€“10
Replace the oil filter every time when changing motor oil.
Please note: all work on the car â€“ TOYOTA Corolla Verso (AR10) â€“ should be
done with the engine switched off.
Wear gloves to prevent contact with hot liquid.
The vehicle must be on even keel, and if it is at an angle, the drain plug must be
at the lowest point.
All work should be done with the engine stopped.
AUTODOC recommends:
Replacement: engine oil and filter â€“ TOYOTA Corolla Verso (AR10). Tip from
AUTODOC experts:
5
Put a waste oil container with at least 4 l capacity under the drainage hole.
6
Unscrew the drain plug. Use a drive socket #15. Use a ratchet wrench.
7
Drain the used oil.
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 4â€“10
Caution! The oil may be hot.
Wait until the oil has completely drained from the drainage hole.

AUTODOC:
8 Move the container under the oil filter.
9
Unscrew the oil filter. Use the 76/14-F socket.
10
Prepare a container for the old oil filter. Put the old oil filter in the container.
11
Clean the oil filter seat.
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 5â€“10
Move up the container. The oil starts to drain out of the drainage hole
immediately after you have removed the oil filter.
Replacement: engine oil and filter â€“ TOYOTA Corolla Verso (AR10). Tip:
12
Lubricate the rubber seal of the new filter with a little amount of fresh oil.
13
Screw the new filter into its place. Use the 76/14-F socket. Use a torque wrench. Tighten it to 23 nm torque.
14
Clean the area of the oil pan drainage hole.
15
Screw in the new drainage plug and tighten it. Use a drive socket #15. Use a torque wrench. Tighten it to 27 nm
torque.
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 6â€“10
16
Clean the area of the oil pan drainage hole. Use all-purpose cleaning spray.
17

17
Lower the car.
18
Remove the oil filler cap. Insert the funnel.
19
Pour oil into the engine through the filler. Required amount of oil: 3.6 L.
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 7â€“10
Use the oil recommended by the manufacturer.
Replacement: engine oil and filter â€“ TOYOTA Corolla Verso (AR10). Professionals recommend:
20
Check the oil level using the dipstick. Top up oil if necessary.
21
Tighten the oil filler cap.
22
Run the engine for a few minutes. After the oil pressure warning light goes out, stop the engine.
23
Check the oil level 5 minutes after the stop of the engine operation using a dipstick and add oil if necessary.
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 8â€“10
The oil level should be between the Min and Max marks.
Please note!
24
Remove the fender protection cover.
25
Close the hood.
VIEW MORE TUTORIALS
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 9â€“10
Make sure that the oil filler cap is properly tightened.

Check the threaded plug of the drainage hole and the oil filter seal for tightness.
If necessary, carefully tighten them up.
Note that oil pressure warning light, which indicates insufficient pressure in the
lubrication system, may be on for a longer time than usual. After a few seconds,
the oil will fill all the channels, and the light will go out.
To protect the environment from pollution, be sure to dispose of the used filters
at special collection points.
WELL DONE!
Replacement: engine oil and filter â€“ TOYOTA Corolla Verso (AR10). AUTODOC
recommends:
experts recommend:
AUTODOC â€” TOP QUALITY AND AFFORDABLE CAR
PARTS ONLINE
A GREAT SELECTION OF SPARE PARTS FOR YOUR CAR
OIL FILTER: A WIDE SELECTION
The document contains only general recommendations that may be useful for you when you perform repair or replacement work. AUTODOC shall not be liable

for any loss, injury, damage of property occurring in the repair or replacement process due to incorrect use or misinterpretation of the provided information.
AUTODOC shall not be liable for any possible mistakes and uncertainties in this guide. The information provided is for information purposes only and cannot
replace advice from specialists.
AUTODOC shall not be liable for incorrect or hazardous usage of equipment, tools and car parts. AUTODOC strongly recommends to be careful and observe
the safety rules when performing repair or replacement works. Remember: usage of low quality auto parts does not guarantee you the appropriate level of
road safety.
Â© Copyright 2022 â€“ All the contents of this website, in particular texts, photographs and graphics, are protected by copyright. All rights, including
reproduction, publication, editing and translation rights, are reserved by AUTODOC GmbH.
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 10â€“10
DISCLAIMER:
AUTODOC MOBILE APP: GREAT DEALS AND CONVENIENT
SHOPPING

How to change front
brake pads on TOYOTA
Corolla IX Hatchback
(E120) â€“ replacement
guide
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 1â€“11
TOYOTA Corolla IX Hatchback (E120) 1.6 VVT-i (ZZE121_), TOYOTA Corolla IX
Hatchback (E120) 1.8 VVTi (ZZE122), TOYOTA Corolla IX Hatchback (E120) 1.8 4WD, TOYOTA Corolla IX Hatchback (E120) 1.8 (ZZE122_), TOYOTA Corolla IX Hatchback
(E120) 1.5 VVT-i (NZE121_)
on: TOYOTA Prius II Liftback (XW20) 1.5 Hybrid (NHW2_)
Buy tools
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 2â€“11
REPLACEMENT: BRAKE PADS â€“ TOYOTA COROLLA IX
HATCHBACK (E120). TOOLS YOU NEED:
Wire brush
WD-40 spray
Brake cleaner
Anti-squeal paste
Copper grease
Combination spanner #13
Combination spanner #17
Drive socket # 13

Wheel impact socket #21
Brake caliper wind back tool
Crow bar
Wheel chock
REPLACEMENT: BRAKE PADS â€“ TOYOTA COROLLA IX HATCHBACK
(E120). USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE:
1
Open the bonnet. Unscrew the brake fluid reservoir cap.
2
Secure the wheels with chocks.
3
Loosen the wheel mounting bolts. Use wheel impact socket #21.
4
Raise the front of the car and secure on supports.
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 3â€“11
Perform the replacement of brake pads in complete set for each axis. This
provides effective braking.
The replacement procedure is identical for all brake pads on the same axle.
Replacement: brake pads â€“ TOYOTA Corolla IX Hatchback (E120). AUTODOC
5
Unscrew the wheel bolts.
6
Remove the wheel.
7
Spread the brake pads. Use a crowbar.
8
Clean the brake caliper fasteners. Use a wire brush. Use WD-40 spray.
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 4â€“11
To avoid injury, hold up the wheel when unscrewing the bolts.

Replacement: brake pads â€“ TOYOTA Corolla IX Hatchback (E120). Tip from
AUTODOC:
9
Unscrew the brake caliper fastening. Use a combination spanner #13. Use a combination spanner #17.
10
Remove the brake caliper.
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 5â€“11
Tie the caliper to the suspension or to the body with a wire without disconnecting
from the brake hose to prevent depressurization of the brake system.
Make sure that the brake caliper is not hanging on the brake hose.
Don't press the brake pedal after the brake caliper has been removed. As a result,
the piston can fall out from the brake cylinder, and brake fluid leakage and
depressurization of the system may occur.
Check the brake caliper bracket, brake caliper guide pins and boots. Clean them. Replace, if necessary.
Replacement: brake pads â€“ TOYOTA Corolla IX Hatchback (E120). Tip:
11
Remove the brake pads. Use a crowbar.
12
Clean the brake caliper bracket from dirt and dust. Use a wire brush. Use WD-40 spray.
13

13
Treat the brake caliper piston. Use a brake cleaner.
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 6â€“11
Measure the brake disc thickness. Upon reaching the wear limit the part must be
replaced.
Replacement: brake pads â€“ TOYOTA Corolla IX Hatchback (E120). After applying
the spray, wait a few minutes.
14
Press in the brake caliper piston. Use brake caliper wind back tool.
15
Treat the brake pads in the area where their surface comes into contact with the brake caliper bracket. Use antisqueal paste.
16
Install new brake pads.
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 7â€“11
Make sure the disc surface is clean before installing the pads.
Make sure the pads are installed with linings facing the disc.
17
Install the brake caliper and fix it. Use a drive socket #13. Use a torque wrench. Tighten it to 35 Nm torque.

18
Treat the surface where the brake disc contacts the wheel rim. Use copper grease.
19
Clean the brake disk surface. Use a brake cleaner.
20
Install the wheel.
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 8â€“11
After applying the spray, wait a few minutes.
21
Screw in the wheel bolts. Use wheel impact socket #21.
22
Lower the car and working in a cross order, tighten the wheel bolts. Use a torque wrench. Tighten it to 103 Nm
torque.
23
Remove the jacks and chocks.
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 9â€“11
Important! Hold the wheel while screwing in the fastening bolts. TOYOTA Corolla
IX Hatchback (E120)
Important! Replacement: brake pads â€“ TOYOTA Corolla IX Hatchback (E120). Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir and top up if necessary.
24
Tighten the brake fluid reservoir cap.
25
CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 10â€“11

TOYOTA Corolla IX Hatchback (E120) â€“ Press the brake pedal several times with
the engine shut down until you feel the resistance built up.
Slow down smoothly for first 150-200 km after the brake pads replacement. Avoid unneccessary and sharp braking to a stop.
WELL DONE!
BRAKE PADS: A WIDE SELECTION

CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK 11â€“11
SHOPPING

How to change front wheel bearing on TOYOTA RAV4 II [TUTORIAL AUTODOC]

 Hi everybody! Here is the latest installment of AutoDoc's video tutorials on replacing car parts.

 I'm going to use a plastic to prevent the air from coming out. I'm going to use a plastic to prevent the air from coming out. I'm going to use a plastic to prevent the air from coming out. I'm going to use a plastic to prevent the air from coming out. I'm going to use a plastic to prevent the air from coming out. I'm going to use a plastic to prevent the air from coming out. I'm going to use a plastic to prevent the air from coming out. I'm going to use a plastic to prevent the air from coming out. I'm going to use a plastic to prevent the air from coming out. I'm going to use a plastic to prevent the air from coming out.

 I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. you

 You can buy spare parts from us on our website or in the Autodoc app.

 I'm going to make a fire with a fire extinguisher. I'll make a fire with a fire extinguisher. I'll make a fire with a fire extinguisher. I'll make a fire with a fire extinguisher. I'll make a fire with a fire extinguisher.

 Are you interested in this product? All links can be found in the description.

 I'm going to make a fire with a fire-breathing gun. I'm going to make a fire with a fire-breathing gun. I'm going to make a fire with a fire-breathing gun. I'm going to make a fire with a fire-breathing gun. I'm going to make a fire with a fire-breathing gun. I'm going to make a fire with a fire-breathing gun. I'm going to make a fire with a fire-breathing gun. I'm going to make a fire with a fire-breathing gun. I'm going to make a fire with a fire-breathing gun. I'm going to make a fire with a fire-breathing gun. I'm going to make a fire with a fire-breathing gun. I'm going to make a fire with a fire-breathing gun. I'm going to make a fire with a fire-breathing gun. Thanks for watching!

 I'm going to make a fire with a fire extinguisher. I'm going to make a fire with a fire extinguisher. I'm going to make a fire with a fire extinguisher. I'm going to make a fire with a fire extinguisher. I'm going to make a fire with a fire extinguisher.

 I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one. I'm going to make a new one.

 Thank you for watching our video tutorials. If you enjoyed watching, click thumbs up and share it with your friends. Have a nice day! Follow us on social media. Find us on Instagram and TikTok.

How to change rear wheel bearing on TOYOTA RAV4 II [TUTORIAL AUTODOC]

 Hi everybody! Here is the latest installment of Auto-Doc's video tutorials on replacing car parts.

 I'll cut it into small pieces. I'll cut it into small pieces. I'll cut it into small pieces. I'll cut it into small pieces. I'll cut it into small pieces. I'll cut it into small pieces. I'll cut it into small pieces. I'll cut it into small pieces. I'll cut it into small pieces. I'll cut it into small pieces. I'll cut it into small pieces. I'll cut it into small pieces. I'll cut it into small pieces. I'll cut it into small pieces. Thank you for watching!

 You can buy spare parts from us on our website or in the Otter.com app.

 I'm going to make a table. I'm going to make a table. I'm going to make a table. I'm going to make a table. I'm going to make a table. I'm going to make a table. I'm going to make a table. I'm going to make a table. I'm going to make a table. I'm going to make a table. I'm going to make a table. I'm going to make a table. I'm going to make a table. I'm going to make a table.

 The I'm going to make a sandwich with the leftover bread. I'm going to make a sandwich with the leftover bread. I'm going to make a sandwich with the leftover bread.

 I will use the same method for the other side. I will use the same method for the other side. I will use the same method for the other side. I will use the same method for the other side. I will use the same method for the other side.

 Thanks for watching! Please leave a comment if you found this video helpful. Follow us on social media. us on Instagram and TikTok.

./data\How to change rear windshield wipers on TOYOTA Corolla.docx

How to change rear

windshield wipers on

TOYOTA Corolla VI

Liftback (E90)

 –

 –

TOYOTA Corolla VI Liftback (E90) 1.6, TOYOTA Corolla VI Liftback (E90) 1.8 D,

TOYOTA Corolla VI Liftback (E90) 1.3 i, TOYOTA Corolla VI Liftback (E90) 1.6 GTI

(

AE92_), TOYOTA Corolla VI Liftback (E90) 1.6 4WD, TOYOTA Corolla VI Liftback

(

E90) 1.3, TOYOTA Corolla VI Liftback (E90) 1.4, TOYOTA Corolla VI Liftback 

(E90) 1.6

i, TOYOTA Corolla VI Liftback (E90) 1.6 EFi

(

(

(E90) 1.6

This tutorial was created based on the replacement procedure for a similar car part on: TOYOTA Land Cruiser Prado 120 (J120) 3.0 D-4D

Buy tool

s

REPLACEMENT: WINDSHIELD WIPERS – TOYOTA

COROLLA VI LIFTBACK (E90). TOOLS YOU MIGHT NEED:

Flat Screwdriver

Buy tool

s

Please note: all work on the car – TOYOTA Corolla VI Liftback (E90) – should be

1

Prepare the new windscreen wipers.

2

Pull the wiper arm away from the glass surface until it stops.

3

Press the clip. Use a flat screwdriver.

1

2

3

4

Remove the blade from the wiper arm.

5

Install the new wiper blade and carefully press the wiper arm down to the glass.

When replacing the wiper blade, take caution to prevent the spring-loaded wiper

arm from hitting the glass.

Don't touch the wiper blade at the working rubber edge to prevent damage to the

graphite coating. 

Ensure that the blade rubber strip fits tightly to the glass along the entire length.

Replacement: windshield wipers – TOYOTA Corolla VI Liftback (E90). Tip from

Replacement: windshield wipers – TOYOTA Corolla VI Liftback (E90).

4

5

6

7

6

7Switch on the ignition.

After installation check the wipers performance.

VIEW MORE TUTORIAL

S

WELL DONE!

S

WELL DONE!

AUTODOC — TOP QUALITY AND AFFORDABLE CAR

AUTODOC MOBILE APP: GREAT DEALS AND CONVENIEN

T

SHOPPIN

G

G

T

SHOPPIN

G

A GREAT SELECTION OF SPARE PARTS FOR YOUR CA

R

WINDSHIELD WIPERS: A WIDE SELECTIO

N

R

N

 DISCLAIMER:

The document contains only general recommendations that may be useful for you when you perform repair or replacement work. AUTODOC shall not be liable for any loss, injury, damage of property occurring in the repair or replacement process due to incorrect use or misinterpretation of the provided information.

AUTODOC shall not be liable for any possible mistakes and uncertainties in this guide. The information provided is for information purposes only and cannot replace advice from specialists.

AUTODOC shall not be liable for incorrect or hazardous usage of equipment, tools and car parts. AUTODOC strongly recommends to be careful and observe the safety rules when performing repair or replacement works. Remember: usage of low quality auto parts does not guarantee you the appropriate level of road safety.

© Copyright 2021 – All the contents of this website, in particular texts, photographs and graphics, are protected by copyright. All rights, including reproduction, publication, editing and translation rights, are reserved by AUTODOC GmbH.

			CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK	2–6

How to change spark

plugs on 

TOYOTA

COROLLA (ZZE12_,

NDE12_, ZDE12_)

 –

plugs on 

TOYOTA

 –

TOYOTA COROLLA (ZZE12_, NDE12_, ZDE12_) 1.8 VVTL-i TS (ZZE123_), TOYOTA

COROLLA (ZZE12_, NDE12_, ZDE12_) 1.8 VVTL-i TS (ZZE123)

This tutorial was created based on the replacement procedure for a similar car part on: TOYOTA RAV 4 III (ACA3_, ACE_, ALA3_, GSA3_, ZSA3_) 2.4 (ACA33)

Buy tool

s

REPLACEMENT: SPARK PLUGS – TOYOTA COROLLA

(

ZZE12_, NDE12_, ZDE12_). TOOLS YOU MIGHT NEED

:

Electronic spray

High-temperature anti-seize lubricant

Drive socket # 10

Spark plug socket # 16

Buy tool

s

(

:

The replacement procedure is the same for all spark plugs.

Replacement: spark plugs – TOYOTA COROLLA (ZZE12_, NDE12_, ZDE12_).

Tip from AUTODOC:

Tip from AUTODOC:REPLACEMENT: SPARK PLUGS – TOYOTA COROLLA (ZZE12_, NDE12_, ZDE12_). TAKE THE FOLLOWING STEPS:

1

2

3

Unscrew the engine cover fastener. Use a drive socket #10. Use a ratchet wrench.

4

Remove the engine cover.

1

2

3

4

5

Unplug the connectors from the ignition coils.

6

Unscrew the ignition coil bracket. Use a drive socket #10.

7

Remove the fastening bolts.

8

Take out the ignition coil from the spark plug well.

Remember the sequence of steps for ignition coil demounting.

Tip:

5

Tip:

5

6

7

8

Tip:

	9	Clean dirt, dust and debris from inside the spark plug wells.

10

11

Take out the spark plugs.

12

10

11

12Unscrew the spark plugs. Use the spark plug socket #16. Use a ratchet wrench.

Apply a thin layer of a special high temperature anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the new spark plugs. Treat the surface of the terminals of the new spark plugs. Use high-temperature grease.

	13	Install the new spark plugs into their mounting seats.

14

Screw new spark plugs and tighten them. Use the spark plug socket #16. Use a torque wrench. Tighten it to 25

nm torque.

15

15

Install the ignition coils to the spark plug wells. Make sure you hear a click indicating that it is locked in place.

Don't tighten the plugs with excessive force. Exceeding tightening torque can

damage the thread connection. 

Be careful when working with a spark plug wrench. Its skewing can cause

damage to the threaded connection.

Tip from AUTODOC experts:

14

nm torque.

15

16

Install the fastening bolts.

17

Tighten the fasteners of the ignition coils. Use a drive socket #10. Use a torque wrench. Tighten it to 8 nm torque.

18

Treat the ignition coil connector with electronic spray. The spray will protect the electrical contacts from

corrosion, oxidation, and will reduce the contact resistance.

Follow the installation steps.

16

17

18

19

Plug in the connectors of the ignition coils.

Make sure you hear a click indicating that it is locked in place.

20

Install the engine cover and secure it.

21

Screw in the engine cover fasteners. Use a drive socket #10. Use a ratchet wrench.

Make sure the engine cover is properly seated. It should not be displaced with

respect to the guiding fasteners.

Replacement: spark plugs – TOYOTA COROLLA (ZZE12_, NDE12_, ZDE12_). Do

not use excessive force during installation. This may damage the fasteners.

19

Plug in the connectors of the ignition coils. 

20

21

22

23

24

25

22

23

24

25Run the engine for a few minutes. This is necessary in order to make sure that the component operates properly.

Shut off the engine.

S

WELL DONE!

S

WELL DONE!

T

SHOPPIN

G

T

SHOPPIN

G

R

SPARK PLUGS: A WIDE SELECTIO

N

R

N

© Copyright 2022 – All the contents of this website, in particular texts, photographs and graphics, are protected by copyright. All rights, including reproduction, publication, editing and translation rights, are reserved by AUTODOC GmbH.

			CLUB.AUTODOC.CO.UK	2–10

The image shows a black sedan, specifically a Hyundai Sonata, parked on a concrete surface. The car is oriented at an angle, showcasing its side and front. The background includes other vehicles and greenery.

The image shows a dark-colored car with visible damage on its side. The damage appears to be a dent or scrape on the driver's side door and rear quarter panel area. The car is parked indoors, and there are other vehicles partially visible in the background. The setting suggests it's a garage or workshop.

The image shows a black Toyota vehicle parked in an area with a chain-link fence in the background. The text at the bottom indicates that it is an "Accidented car: after repair." To the right, there's another vehicle, which appears to be a gray Jeep.

The image shows the front of a gray Pontiac car, featuring its distinctive grille and headlights. There appears to be another vehicle in the background. Is there anything specific you would like to know about this car?

The image shows a damaged front end of a car. The grille and front bumper appear to be broken, and there are visible scratches and dents. The headlight on the right side is intact, but the area surrounding the grille and bumper shows signs of impact or collision.

 hello everyone so i'm timothy i'm doing this recording to talk about something i need about cars okay let's say very correct okay so what is a car the guy is a mechanical object designed to transport people from one location to the other so that's like how i would define a car for you right okay so what do i need about a car how do i fix something I kind of know little and that little is a much on its own right I have very good understanding of like service is very cool, a car, you know changing the oil, removing the oil filter, changing the oil filter like that like that right so I think um yeah yeah yeah yeah so what else you don't see what else should I say? alright this is good it's good enough yeah thanks bye stop

The image appears to show a black Toyota Tacoma truck parked next to a gray Jeep vehicle. The focus is on the front of the Tacoma, highlighting its distinctive grille and headlights. The setting seems to be a parking lot, possibly of a dealership or a similar location, with a chain-link fence visible in the background.

The image shows a black Toyota pickup truck that has sustained significant front-end damage. The left side of the vehicle appears to have its fender, door, and bumper affected, with the hood also showing signs of impact. Additionally, the side mirror is missing or damaged. There are markings on the vehicle, possibly for inspection or repair purposes. The background includes a fence and other vehicles.